WEB EDITION OWNER'S MANUAL WELCOME TO THE WORLD-WIDE FAMILY OF VOLVO OWNERS. We trust that you will enjoy many years of safe driving in your Volvo, an automobile designed with your safety and comfort in mind. We encourage you to familiarize yourself with the equipment descriptions and operating instructions in this manual. We also urge you and your passengers to wear seat belts at all times in this (or any other) vehicle. And, of course, please do not operate a vehi- cle if you may be affected by alcohol, medication or any impairment that could hinder your ability to drive. Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable federal safety and emission standards. If you have any questions regarding your vehicle, please contact your Volvo retailer or see the article "Contacting Volvo" for information on getting in touch with Volvo in the United States and Canada. CONTENTS INTRODUCTION 2 SAFETY Contacting Volvo 14 Using the owner's manual 50 General safety information 56 Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance 14 On-board digital owner's manual 52 Occupant safety 56 Additional information about your vehicle 14 Navigating in the digital owner's manual 53 Reporting safety defects 57 Volvo and the environment 15 Glass 54 Recall information 58 Owner's manual and the environment 16 Technician certification 54 Seat belts 58 IntelliSafe—driver support 16 Seat belt pretensioners 59 Sensus 17 Buckling and unbuckling seat belts 59 Owner's manual in mobile devices 21 Door and seat belt reminders 61 Options and accessories 22 Safety during pregnancy 62 Owner's information 23 Child safety 63 Driver distraction 24 Child restraints 65 Volvo Structural Parts Statement 25 Infant seats 67 Crash event data 26 Convertible seats 69 Volvo ID 27 Booster cushions 71 Center display overview 29 ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors 72 Changing center display settings 31 Lower child seat attachment points 73 Using the center display keyboard 32 Top tether anchors 74 Function view buttons 37 Integrated booster cushion* 75 Navigating in the center display's views 39 Raising the integrated booster cushion* 76 Symbols in the center display status bar 44 Stowing the integrated booster cushion* 77 Changing settings in different types of apps 45 Occupant weight sensor 78 Using the center display 46 Safety mode 81 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Starting or moving a vehicle in safety mode 82 Safety systems 83 Airbag system 83 Driver/passenger side airbags 84 Inflatable curtains 87 Side impact airbags 88 Trip computer 92 Displaying trip computer information 92 Displaying trip statistics 94 HomeLink® Wireless Control System* 94 Programming the HomeLink® Wireless Control System* 95 Instruments and controls 98 Importing/exporting a driver profile from/to a USB flash drive 115 Ambient temperature sensor 116 Clock 116 Head-up display (HUD)* 117 Voice control 120 Using voice commands 121 121 Rollover protection system 89 Adjusting the power door mirrors 100 Voice control for cell phones Whiplash protection system 89 Laminated panoramic roof* 101 Voice control for radio and media 122 102 Climate system voice commands 122 104 Navigation system voice commands 124 Operating the power windows 104 Voice control settings 125 Rearview mirror 105 Indicator symbols in the instrument panel 126 106 Instrument panel 128 106 Instrument panel App menu 129 107 Instrument panel licenses 130 Changing system settings in Settings view 109 Warning symbols in the instrument panel 134 Compass 136 Linking a remote key to a driver profile 110 Calibrating the compass 137 Changing settings in apps 111 Lighting panel and controls 138 Resetting the settings view 111 Low beam headlights 139 Resetting user data when the vehicle changes owners 112 Daytime Running Lights (DRL) 140 Driver profiles 112 Editing a driver profile 114 Operating the laminated panoramic roof* Power windows Using sun shades Settings view Categories in Settings view High and low beam headlights 140 Active Bending Lights* 142 3 CLIMATE 4 Front fog lights* 143 Adjusting power front seats* 161 Climate control system 176 Brake lights 143 Adjusting the passenger's seat from the driver's seat* 162 Perceived temperature 176 Climate system sensors Using the power seat memory function* 177 162 Air quality 177 Multifunctional front seats* 163 Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)* 178 Operating multifunctional front seats* 164 Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* 178 Adjusting function settings in the multifunctional front seats* 165 Passenger compartment air filter 179 Automatic climate control 179 Climate system controls 180 Climate system controls in the center display 180 Rear fog lights 144 Hazard warning flashers 144 Parking lights 145 Approach lighting 145 Home safe lighting 146 Passenger compartment lighting 146 Using turn signals 148 Messages in the instrument panel and center display 149 Handling messages in the instrument panel and center display 151 Handling messages stored from the instrument panel and center display 152 Using the instrument panel App menu 153 Using the windshield wipers 154 Activating/deactivating the rain sensor 155 Windshield and headlight washers Rear seats Easy access to and from the driver seat 166 167 Adjusting the second row head restraints 167 Adjusting the second row backrest tilt 169 170 Rear climate system controls on the tunnel console 182 Folding the second row backrests Moving the second row seats forward/rearward 171 Setting the blower speed 183 Setting the temperature 184 Getting into and out of the third row of seats 172 Turning recirculation on and off 186 Defrosting windows and mirrors 187 156 Turning steering wheel heating* on and off 189 Tailgate window wiper and washer 157 Air conditioning 190 Steering wheel 157 Turning seat heating* on and off 191 Adjusting the steering wheel 159 Turning front seat ventilation* on and off 193 Seats 159 Air distribution 194 Manually operated front seats 160 Opening/closing/directing air vents 194 Power front seats* 161 Adjusting air distribution 195 Folding the third row* backrests 172 LOADING AND STORAGE Air distribution table 196 LOCKS AND ALARM Cargo space 200 Locks and remote keys 216 Passenger compartment storage spaces 200 Alarm 216 Using the glove compartment 201 218 Tunnel console 202 Automatically arming/disarming the alarm Sun visors 203 Deactivating the alarm without a functioning remote key 218 Electrical sockets 204 Child safety locks 218 Loading 207 220 Grocery bag holder 209 Antenna locations for the start and lock system Cargo net 209 Start and lock system type designations 220 Steel cargo grid* 211 Immobilizer 221 212 Changing the remote key's battery 222 213 Remote key's range 224 Remote key 224 Restricted key* 226 Load anchoring eyelets Cargo compartment cover* Detachable key blade 227 Foot movement tailgate operation* 228 Locking and unlocking confirmation 229 Locking/unlocking from inside the vehicle 231 Locking/unlocking from outside the vehicle 232 Locking/unlocking the tailgate 233 Power tailgate* 235 Locking/unlocking with the detachable key blade 237 5 DRIVER SUPPORT Driver support systems 240 Driver support system camera 240 Camera limitations 241 Driver support system radar unit 244 Radar sensor limitations 245 Cruise Control (CC) 248 Starting and activating Cruise Control 248 Changing Cruise Control speed 249 Deactivating/resuming Cruise Control (CC) 250 268 Changing tolerance for the Automatic Speed Limiter 287 Radar sensor 269 270 Deactivating/reactivating the Speed Limiter* 288 Radar sensor - type approval Adaptive cruise control passing assistance 270 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) - fault tracing 271 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) symbols and messages 272 City Safety™ Turning the Speed Limiter* off 290 Road Sign Information (RSI)* 290 Road Sign Assistance (RSI)* operation 291 Road Sign Assistance (RSI)* limitations 291 Park Assist* 292 273 Activating/deactivating Park Assist 293 294 Turning Cruise Control off 251 City Safety warning level settings 275 Park Assist limitations Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* 252 Detecting cyclists and pedestrians with City Safety 275 Park assist symbols and messages 295 Park Assist Camera (PAC)* 296 City Safety in crossing traffic 277 Rear Collision Warning (RCW) Park Assist Camera (PAC)* guiding lines and fields 298 277 City Safety limitations 278 Starting the Park Assist Camera (PAC)* 300 City Safety™ troubleshooting 280 Park Assist Camera (PAC)* limitations 300 City Safety symbols and messages 282 Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* 301 Speed limiter (SL)* 283 Using Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* 302 Starting and activating the Speed Limiter (SL)* 284 Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* limitations 305 Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* symbols and messages 307 Adjustable steering force* 308 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) 308 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) sport mode 309 Starting and activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) 254 Deactivating/resuming Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) 255 Changing Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) speed 257 Setting an Adaptive Cruise Control time interval 258 Pilot Assist* 259 Starting and activating Pilot Assist 262 Deactivating/resuming Pilot Assist 263 Changing a Speed Limiter (SL)* maximum speed 285 Setting a Pilot Assist time interval 265 Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)* Pilot Assistauto-hold brake function 285 266 Activating/deactivating the Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)* 286 Pilot Assist limitations 6 Other Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) functions 266 STARTING AND DRIVING Electronic Stability Control (ESC) symbols and messages 310 Starting and driving 330 Driving with a trailer 351 Brakes 330 Detachable trailer hitch Driver Alert Control (DAC) 312 353 Brake functions 332 Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) Driver Alert Control limitations 313 354 Auto-hold brake function 332 Ignition modes Using Driver Alert Control (DAC) 313 355 Brake assist system 333 Battery drain Distance Alert* 314 356 Braking effect after a collision 333 Starting the engine Using Distance Alert* 314 356 Emergency brake lights 334 Turning the engine off Distance Alert* limitations 359 315 Hill Descent Control (HDC) 334 Drive modes* 359 Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* 315 Hill Start Assist 335 ECO drive mode 362 Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* On/Off 317 Parking brake 335 Start/Stop 364 Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* limitations 317 Using the parking brake 336 Using the Start/Stop function 364 Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* 318 Parking brake malfunctions 338 Conditions for Start/Stop 365 Activating/deactivating Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* 319 Before a long distance trip 339 Automatic transmission 367 Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* limitations 320 Driving economically 339 Gear selector positions 367 Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* with Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* symbols and messages 322 Driving through standing water 340 Shiftlock 369 Overheating the engine and transmission 341 Gear shift indicator 370 Winter driving 342 Steering wheel paddles* 370 Driving lane assistance 323 Towing eyelet 343 Low Speed Control (LSC) Activating/deactivating Lane Departure Warning (LDW) 371 325 Towing recommendations 344 All Wheel Drive (AWD) 372 Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* 325 Fuel 346 Suspension and leveling control* 372 Octane rating 347 Driving lane assistance symbols and messages 327 Opening/closing the fuel filler door 348 Emission controls 349 Jump starting 350 7 INFOTAINMENT 376 CD (media) player* 394 Sound settings 376 Playing media 395 Volvo On Call (VOC)* 414 377 Media searches 397 Using Volvo On Call 414 Playing media through the AUX/USB sockets 397 Volvo On Call (VOC) functions 415 Volvo On Call convenience services 416 Streaming media through a Bluetooth connection 398 Volvo On Call mobile app 416 Media sound settings 398 Volvo On Call PIN code 418 Gracenote 399 Service center phone number 419 Video 399 Personal information 420 Media player technical data 400 Volvo On Call availability 422 Internet connected vehicle 401 Changing ownership of a vehicle with Volvo On Call 424 Connecting to the Internet 402 Volvo On Call manual safety service 424 Apps (applications) 403 Volvo On Call safety services 424 Bluetooth settings 404 Volvo On Call roadside assistance 425 387 Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps 404 Volvo On Call security services 425 Connecting/disconnecting a cell phone 389 Internet connection troubleshooting 405 Unlocking the vehicle from the customer service center 426 Handling phone calls 390 Tethering (Wi-Fi sharing) 406 Handling text messages 391 Deleting Wi-Fi networks 406 Phone settings 392 Wi-Fi technology and security 407 Text message settings 392 Vehicle modem settings 407 393 Infotainment system license information 408 Connecting a device via the AUX/USB socket 393 Terms, conditions and confidentiality 412 Media player 393 Radio Radio settings 377 RBDS radio 378 Changing and searching for radio stations 378 HD Radio™reception 380 Switching HD Radio on and off 381 HD Radio sub-channels 382 HD Radio limitations 382 SiriusXM® Satellite radio* 383 Using SiriusXM® Satellite radio radio* 384 SiriusXM® Satellite radio* settings Phone Connecting a 385 387 Pairing a cell phone 8 VOLVO ON CALL WITH SENSUS CONNECT * The infotainment system Bluetooth® device WHEELS AND TIRES NAVIGATION* Sensus Navigation 428 Map settings 450 Tires 466 Buttons and information on the map 428 Route settings 452 Tire sidewall designations 467 Common navigation system features 429 Traffic information settings 454 Wheel (rim) designations 469 Getting started with Sensus Navigation 432 Guidance settings 455 Tire terminology 469 Quick guidance to a destination 432 System settings 456 Tire direction of rotation 470 Navigation displays and controls 433 Map updates with MapCare 456 Tread wear indicator 471 Entering a destination 435 Remote map updates 457 Loading specifications 471 Setting a destination by tapping the map 435 458 Uniform Tire Quality Grading 472 Setting a destination by entering the text of your choice 436 Map updates from a computer with a USB flash drive Navigation license agreements Snow tires and chains 460 473 Setting a destination using Recent/ Favorites/Library 438 Copyright Checking tire inflation pressure 462 473 Sensus Navigation troubleshooting Changing tires 462 475 Tools in the cargo compartment 475 Jack 476 Spare tire 476 Wheel bolts 477 Removing a wheel 478 Installing a wheel 479 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 480 Checking inflation pressure 482 Reinflating tires equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 483 Calibrating the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) 484 Tire Pressure Monitoring System type approval 484 Using a point of interest (POI) as a destination 440 Setting a destination by entering an address 441 Saving a destination with Send to Car 441 Viewing the itinerary and alternate routes 442 Guidance points in the itinerary 444 POIs along the route 445 Traffic problems along the route 445 Information cards on the map 446 Choosing a detour 447 Traffic information 448 Navigation in the instrument panel 448 Sensus Navigation settings 449 9 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING 10 SPECIFICATIONS Volvo's service program 488 Engine compartment overview 519 Label information 534 System updates 490 Engine oil 520 Dimensions 537 Remote updates 491 Checking and refilling engine oil 521 Weights 539 Vehicle status 491 Windshield wipers in the service position 522 Air conditioning refrigerant 541 Booking service and repairs 491 Replacing wiper blades 523 Brake fluid specification and volume 541 Wi-Fi connection to a workshop 494 Refilling the windshield washer fluid reservoir 524 Coolant specifications and volumes 542 Cleaning the exterior Engine specifications 525 543 Cleaning the interior Engine oil specifications and volume 527 544 Cleaning the center display Fuel tank volume 529 544 Corrosion protection Tire inflation pressure table 529 545 Paint damage 530 Transmission fluid specification and volume 546 Touching up paint damage 531 Polishing and waxing 531 Climate system service 495 Start battery 495 Support battery 498 Battery symbols 499 Fuses 500 Replacing fuses 500 Fuses in the engine compartment 501 Fuses in the passenger compartment 505 Fuses in the cargo compartment 508 Replacing bulbs 510 Removing the rectangular headlight cover 512 Replacing low beam headlight bulbs 512 Replacing High Beam headlight bulbs 513 Replacing parking light bulbs 514 Replacing front turn signal bulbs 514 Bulb specifications 515 Hoisting the vehicle 516 Opening and closing the hood 518 HOTSPOTS INDEX Centerdisplay – App view 548 Centerdisplay – Car functions view 548 Instrument panel 548 Driver's door panel 549 Engine compartment 549 Exterior 549 Center display and tunnel consol 551 Interior rearview mirror 552 Interior 552 Remote key 554 Trunk 554 Index 555 11 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION Contacting Volvo Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance Use the following contact information if you would like to get in touch with Volvo in the United States or Canada. Your new Volvo comes with a four year ON CALL roadside assistance. In the USA: Volvo Cars of North America, LLC Customer Care Center 1 Volvo Drive, P.O. Box 914 Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 1-800-458-1552 www.volvocars.com/us In Canada: Volvo Cars of Canada National Customer Service 9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101 Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9 1-800-663-8255 www.volvocars.com/ca Additional information, features, and benefits of this program are described in a separate information package in your glove compartment. If you require assistance, dial: In the U.S. 1-800-638-6586 (1-800-63VOLVO) Additional information about your vehicle Volvo Cars' website and support site provide additional information about your vehicle. Support on the Internet Go to support.volvocars.com or use the QR code below to visit the site, which is available in most markets. In Canada 1-800-263-0475 NOTE Some vehicles may be equipped with Volvo On Call with Sensus Connect, which will allow access to the call center and additional features directly from the vehicle. This is in addition to the Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance program mentioned above. Volvo On Call with Sensus Connect will be a customer pay subscription offer after an initial complimentary trial period. QR code to the support site The information on the support site is searchable and is grouped into different categories. It includes support for e.g., Internet-based services and functions, Volvo On Call (VOC), the navigation system and apps. Video and step-by-step instructions explain various procedures such as how to connect the vehicle to the Internet via a cell phone. Downloadable information Maps Sensus Navigation system maps can be downloaded from the support site. 14 INTRODUCTION Mobile apps Volvo and the environment For certain model year 2014 and 2015 Volvos, the owner's manual is available in the form of an app. The VOC app can also be found here. Volvo is committed to the well-being of its customers. As a natural part of this commitment, we care about the environment in which we all live. Concern for the environment means an everyday involvement in reducing our environmental impact. Owner's manuals for earlier model Volvos Owner's manuals for earlier model Volvos are available in PDF format. Quick Guides and supplements can also be found on the support site. Select a model and a model year and download the desired information. Contact Contact information for customer support and the nearest Volvo retailer are available on the site. Related information • • • Using the owner's manual (p. 50) On-board digital owner's manual (p. 52) Volvo ID (p. 27) Volvo's environmental activities are based on a holistic view, which means we consider the overall environmental impact of a product throughout its complete life cycle. In this context, design, production, product use, and recycling are all important considerations. In production, Volvo has partly or completely phased out several chemicals including CFCs, lead chromates, asbestos, and cadmium; and reduced the number of chemicals used in our plants 50% since 1991. Volvo was the first in the world to introduce into production a three-way catalytic converter with a Lambda sond, now called the heated oxygen sensor, in 1976. The current version of this highly efficient system reduces emissions of harmful substances (CO, HC, NOx) from the exhaust pipe by approximately 95 – 99% and the search to eliminate the remaining emissions continues. Volvo is the only automobile manufacturer to offer CFC-free retrofit kits for the air conditioning system of all models as far back as the 1975 model 240. Advanced electronic engine controls and cleaner fuels are bringing us closer to our goal. In addition to continuous environmental refinement of conventional gasoline-powered internal combustion engines, Volvo is actively looking at advanced technology alternative-fuel vehicles. When you drive a Volvo, you become our partner in the work to lessen the car's impact on the environment. To reduce your vehicle's environmental impact, you can: • Maintain proper air pressure in your tires. Tests have shown decreased fuel economy with improperly inflated tires. • Follow the recommended maintenance schedule in your Warranty and Service Records Information booklet. • • Drive at a constant speed whenever possible. See a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible for inspection if the check engine (malfunction indicator) light illuminates, or stays on after the vehicle has started. • Properly dispose of any vehicle-related waste such as used motor oil, used batteries, brake pads, etc. • When cleaning your vehicle, please use genuine Volvo car care products. All Volvo car care products are formulated to be environmentally friendly. Related information • Driving economically (p. 339) 15 INTRODUCTION Owner's manual and the environment The wood pulp in Volvo's printed owner's information comes from FSC® (Forest Stewardship Council®) certified forests and other responsible sources. FSC® IntelliSafe—driver support IntelliSafe is Volvo's philosophy regarding vehicle safety. It encompasses a number of systems, both standard and optional, that are designed to help make driving and traveling in a Volvo safer. Support Systems that help make driving safer are an integral part of IntelliSafe. These include optional features such as Adaptive Cruise Control* that helps maintain a set distance to a vehicle ahead, Park Assist Pilot*, which assists in parking the vehicle, Cross Traffic Alert*, Blind Spot Information*, etc. • • • • • • • • • Airbag system (p. 83) High and low beam headlights (p. 140) Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* (p. 318) Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* (p. 315) City Safety™ (p. 273) Driving lane assistance (p. 323) Rollover protection system (p. 89) Seat belts (p. 58) General safety information (p. 56) Accident prevention The symbol above indicates that the wood pulp is FSC® certified. Related information • Volvo and the environment (p. 15) Systems such as City Safety are designed to automatically apply the brakes in situations in which the driver does not have time to react. Lane Keeping Aid* alerts the drive if the vehicle inadvertently crosses a lane's/road's side marker line. Protection The vehicle is equipped with e.g., seat belt pretensioners that pull the seat belts taut in critical situations when there is a collision risk and numerous airbags designed to help provide cushioning if certain types of collisions should occur. Related information • • 16 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 252) Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 301) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INTRODUCTION Sensus This is Sensus Sensus is the core of your personal Volvo experience and provides information, entertainment and features that make owning your vehicle easier. makes communication between you, the vehicle and the digital world around you possible. Sensus provides an intelligent interface and Internet-connected service with an intuitive navigation structure that offers access to relevant information when it is needed, with minimal distractions. Sensus also includes all of your vehicle's solutions relating to entertainment, connecting to the Internet, navigation and the user interface between the driver and the vehicle. Sensus 17 INTRODUCTION Information when it's needed, where it's needed Information is presented in different displays depending on how it should be prioritized 18 INTRODUCTION Head-up-display* Instrument panel Center display The head up-display presents information in the windshield to help the driver keep his/her eyes on the road. The type of information shown here requires the driver's immediate attention, such as traffic warnings, speed information and navigation. Road sign information and incoming phone calls are also displayed here. The head-up display is controlled from the right-side steering wheel keypad and the center display. The instrument panel displays information such as speed, an incoming phone call or the track that is currently playing. It is controlled using both steering wheel keypads. Many of the vehicle's main functions are controlled from the center display, a touchscreen that reacts to taps or other gestures. The number of physical buttons is thereby minimized. The screen can be operated with or without gloves. The center display is used to control e.g., the climate and infotainment systems and to adjust the power seats*. The information shown here can be dealt with by the driver or the front seat passenger when there is an opportunity. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 19 INTRODUCTION Voice control system The voice control system enables the driver to operate certain vehicle functions without removing his/her hands from the steering wheel and it understands natural speech. Use voice commands to e.g., play a track on the infotainment system, make a phone call, raise the passenger compartment temperature or to read a text message. For additional information about all of the functions/system, see the respective articles in the on-board owner's manual or the printed supplement. Related information 20 • • • Center display overview (p. 29) • • • Instrument panel (p. 128) Using the center display (p. 46) Navigating in the center display's views (p. 39) Head-up display (HUD)* (p. 117) Voice control (p. 120) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INTRODUCTION Owner's manual in mobile devices Owner's information mobile app1 can be downloaded from the App Store and Google Play and is adapted for both cell phones and tablets. These apps also contain videos and interior/ exterior hotspot views of the vehicle that you can click on for additional information. The app contains videos and exterior/interior views of the vehicle with certain components/ functions highlighted in hotspots, which lead directly to related information. It is easy to navigate between the various categories and articles and the contents are searchable. Related information • • Using the owner's manual (p. 50) Additional information about your vehicle (p. 14) This QR code will take you directly to the app or you can search for "Volvo manual" in the App Store or Google Play. The mobile app is available at the App Store and Google Play 1 Certain models and mobile devices 21 INTRODUCTION Options and accessories We strongly recommend that Volvo owners install only genuine, Volvo-approved accessories, and that accessory installations be performed only by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. NOTE • Optional or accessory equipment described in this manual is indicated by an asterisk. Optional or accessory equipment may not be available in all countries or markets. Please note that some vehicles may be equipped differently, depending on special legal requirements. • All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this manual are based on the latest product information available at the time of publication. Please note that some vehicles may be equipped differently, depending on special legal requirements. Optional equipment described in this manual may not be available in all markets. • Some of the illustrations shown are generic and may not depict the exact model for which this manual is intended. • Volvo reserves the right to make model changes at any time, or to change specifications or design without notice and without incurring obligation. Contact your Volvo retailer for additional information. WARNING If your vehicle is involved in an accident, unseen damage may affect its drivability and safety. Do not export your Volvo to another country before investigating that country's applicable safety and exhaust emission requirements. In some cases it may be difficult or impossible to comply with these requirements. Modifications to the emission control system(s) may render your Volvo not certifiable for legal operation in the U.S., Canada and other countries. WARNING CALIFORNIA proposition 65 Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer, and birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, and birth defects or other reproductive harm. WARNING Certain components of this vehicle such as air bag modules, seat belt pretensioners, adaptive steering columns, and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate material. Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ perchlorate. • 22 Genuine Volvo accessories are tested to ensure compatibility with the performance, safety, and emission systems in your vehicle. Additionally, a trained and qualified Volvo INTRODUCTION service technician knows where accessories may and may not be safely installed in your Volvo. In all cases, please consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician before installing any accessory in or on your vehicle. • Accessories that have not been approved by Volvo may or may not be specifically tested for compatibility with your vehicle. Additionally, an inexperienced installer may not be familiar with some of your car's systems. • Any of your car's performance and safety systems could be adversely affected if you install accessories that Volvo has not tested, or if you allow accessories to be installed by someone unfamiliar with your vehicle. • Damage caused by unapproved or improperly installed accessories may not be covered by your new vehicle warranty. See your Warranty and Service Records Information booklet for more warranty information. Volvo assumes no responsibility for death, injury, or expenses that may result from the installation of nongenuine accessories. Owner's information Complete on-board digital owner's information is available on the center display, as a mobile app and on Volvo's support website. The printed owner's manual in the glove compartment is an excerpt from the digital information and contains important texts, the latest updates and instructions that can be useful in situations where it is not practical to read the information on the screen. Related information • • • Owner's manual in mobile devices (p. 21) Navigating in the digital owner's manual (p. 53) On-board digital owner's manual (p. 52) Changing the language used for the on-board information could mean that some of the information displayed may not comply with national or local statutes and regulations. If the content of the on-board digital information and the printed manual differ, the printed information always has precedence. WARNING The driver is always responsible for operating the vehicle in a safe manner and adhering to current laws and traffic regulations. It is also important that the vehicle be operated, maintained and serviced according to Volvo's recommendations/instructions in the owner's manual. 23 INTRODUCTION Driver distraction • A driver has a responsibility to do everything possible to ensure his or her own safety and the safety of passengers in the vehicle and others sharing the roadway. Avoiding distractions is part of that responsibility. Never use a hand-held cellular telephone while driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit cellular telephone use by a driver while the vehicle is moving. • Driver distraction results from driver activities that are not directly related to controlling the vehicle in the driving environment. Your new Volvo is, or can be, equipped with many feature-rich entertainment and communication systems. These include hands-free cellular telephones, navigation systems, and multipurpose audio systems. You may also own other portable electronic devices for your own convenience. When used properly and safely, they enrich the driving experience. Improperly used, any of these could cause a distraction. For all of these systems, we want to provide the following warning that reflects the strong Volvo concern for your safety. Never use these devices or any feature of your vehicle in a way that distracts you from the task of driving safely. Distraction can lead to a serious accident. In addition to this general warning, we offer the following guidance regarding specific newer features that may be found in your vehicle: 24 and qualified Volvo service technician before installing any accessory in or on your vehicle. WARNING Please keep the following warnings in mind when operating/servicing your vehicle. • • • If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system, set and make changes to your travel itinerary only with the vehicle parked. Accessories that have not been approved by Volvo may or may not be specifically tested for compatibility with your vehicle. Additionally, an inexperienced installer may not be familiar with some of your car's systems. • Never program your audio system while the vehicle is moving. Program radio presets with the vehicle parked, and use your programmed presets to make radio use quicker and simpler. Any of your car's performance and safety systems could be adversely affected if you install accessories that Volvo has not tested, or if you allow accessories to be installed by someone unfamiliar with your vehicle. • Damage caused by unapproved or improperly installed accessories may not be covered by your new vehicle warranty. See your Warranty and Service Records Information booklet for more warranty information. Volvo assumes no responsibility for death, injury, or expenses that may result from the installation of nongenuine accessories. Never use portable computers or personal digital assistants while the vehicle is moving. Accessory installation • • We strongly recommend that Volvo owners install only genuine, Volvo-approved accessories, and that accessory installations be performed only by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Genuine Volvo accessories are tested to ensure compatibility with the performance, safety, and emission systems in your vehicle. Additionally, a trained and qualified Volvo service technician knows where accessories may and may not be safely installed in your Volvo. In all cases, please consult a trained WARNING The driver is always responsible for operating the vehicle in a safe manner and for complying with current statutes and regulations. It is also essential to maintain and service the vehicle according to Volvo's recommendations as stated in the owner's information and the service and warranty booklet. If the on-board information differs from the printed owner's manual, the printed information always takes precedence. INTRODUCTION Related information • Volvo Structural Parts Statement (p. 25) Volvo Structural Parts Statement Volvo has always been and continues to be a leader in automotive safety. Volvo engineers and manufactures vehicles designed to help protect vehicle occupants in the event of a collision. quality of these used parts may also have been affected due to environmental exposure. Related information • • Crash event data (p. 26) Contacting Volvo (p. 14) Volvos are designed to absorb the impact of a collision. This energy absorption system including, but not limited to, structural components such as bumper reinforcement bars, bumper energy absorbers, frames, rails, fender aprons, A-pillars, B-pillars and body panels must work together to maintain cabin integrity and protect the vehicle occupants. The supplemental restraint system including but not limited to air bags, side curtain air bags, and deployment sensors work together with the above components to provide proper timing for air bag deployment. Due to the above, Volvo Cars of North America does not support the use of aftermarket, alternative or anything other than original Volvo parts for collision repair. In addition Volvo does not support the use or reuse of structural components from an existing vehicle that has been previously damaged. Although these parts may appear equivalent, it is difficult to tell if the parts have been previously replaced with non-OE parts or if the part has been damaged as a result of a prior collision. The 25 INTRODUCTION Crash event data This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: • How various systems in your vehicle were operating; • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened; • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, • How fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. 26 NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender and age) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. Furthermore, your vehicle is equipped with a number of computers whose task is to continuously control and monitor the vehicle’s operation. They can also register information during normal driving conditions if they detect a fault relating to the vehicle’s operation and functionality. Some of the stored information is required by technicians when carrying out service and maintenance to enable them to diagnose and rectify any faults that have occurred in the vehicle and to enable Volvo to fulfill legal and other regulatory requirements. This information may be stored in the vehicle’s computers for a certain period of time. Volvo will not contribute to spreading the abovementioned information to third parties without the consent of the vehicle’s owner. However, due to national legal requirements and regulations, Volvo may be compelled to provide information of this type to authorities such as law enforcement agencies or others who may assert a legal right to obtain such information. Volvo and service and repair facilities with agreements with Volvo have access to the special technical equipment required in order to read and interpret the information stored by the vehicle’s computers. Volvo is responsible for ensuring that the information transmitted to Volvo during service and maintenance is stored and handled in a secure manner and that this handling is done in accordance with applicable legal requirements. For additional information, contact: For additional information, contact: In the United States Volvo Cars of North America, LLC Customer Care Center 1 Volvo Drive, P.O. box 914 Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 1-800-458-1552 www.volvocars.com/us In Canada INTRODUCTION Volvo Cars of Canada Volvo ID National Customer Service A Volvo ID can be used to access a number of on-line services2 9130 Leslie Street 3. Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9 1-800-663-8255 Follow the instructions that will be sent automatically to this email address. > A Volvo ID has now been created and has been automatically registered to the vehicle. The Volvo ID services available can now be used. Using the Volvo On Call (VOC) app www.volvocars.com/ca 1. Download the latest version of the VOC app to your cell phone from e.g., the App Store, Windows Phone or Google Play. 2. Start the app and create a Volvo ID on the start page. 3. Register a personal email address and then follow the instructions that will be sent automatically to this address. Registering your Volvo ID to the vehicle Creating a Volvo ID A Volvo ID can be created in two ways: Using the Volvo ID app 2 1. If you have not already done so, download the Volvo ID app from the Remote update service. 2. Start the app and register a personal email address. If your Volvo ID was created using the Volvo On Call mobile app, the ID has to be registered to the vehicle: 1. With the vehicle connected to the Internet, download the Volvo ID app from the Remote update service in the center display's App view. See also the article "Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps." 2. Start the app and enter your Volvo ID. These services vary and may be subject to change. Consult your Volvo retailer. 27 INTRODUCTION 3. Follow the instructions that will be sent automatically to the email address linked to your Volvo ID. > Your Volvo ID is now registered to the vehicle and the Volvo ID services available can be used. Advantages of having a Volvo ID • Only one user name and password are required to access online services. • If you change a user name or password for one of the online service (e.g., VOC), it/they will also be automatically changed for the other services. Related information 28 • Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps (p. 404) • Connecting to the Internet (p. 402) INTRODUCTION Center display overview Many of the vehicle's functions are controlled from the center display. Three of the center display's basic views. Swipe to the right/left to access the Function/App view 29 INTRODUCTION Function view: vehicle functions can be activated/deactivated by tapping. Certain functions are called "trigger functions", which open settings windows, e.g., Camera and parking functions. Settings for the head-up display* are also started from Function view but the actual interaction is controlled from the steering wheel keypad buttons and the instrument panel. Home view: the initial view shown when the center display is started. App (Application) view: shows apps that have been downloaded (third-party apps) as well as ones for integrated functions such as FM radio. Tap an icon to open the app. Status bar: vehicle activities are shown at the top of the screen. Network/connection information is shown on the left side of the bar. Media-related information, the clock and information about background activities are shown to the right. Top view: pull down the tab to open Top view. From here, you can access Settings, Owner's manual, Driver Profile and stored messages. The extra sub-view: the most recently used apps/vehicle functions that do not belong in any of the other sub-views are listed here. Tap the sub-view to expand it. Climate bar: information and direct access to settings such as temperature, seat heating* and blower speed. Tap the symbol at the center of the Climate bar to open Climate view for additional settings. Related information • • • Using the center display (p. 46) Function view buttons (p. 37) Symbols in the center display status bar (p. 44) • • • • Settings view (p. 106) • Cleaning the center display (p. 529) Media player (p. 393) Phone (p. 387) Climate system controls in the center display (p. 180) Navigation: leads to map navigation. Tap the sub-view to expand it. Media: the most recently used media-related apps. Tap the sub-view to expand it. Phone: used to access phone-related functions. Tap the sub-view to expand it. 30 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INTRODUCTION Changing center display settings 1. The center display activates automatically when the driver's door is opened. Settings can be made for e.g., sounds, background and themes. Turning off and reactivating the center display 2. Press and hold the Home button below the screen. > The screen will go dark. However, the climate bar remains visible and apps or other functions connected to the display remain active. The screen can also be cleaned while it is turned off. Reactivate by pressing the Home button briefly. > The view that was displayed when the screen was turned off will be displayed again. NOTE Home button for the center display When the center display is turned off, the screen goes dark to avoid disturbing the driver. However, the climate bar remains visible and apps or other functions connected to the display remain active. • The display cannot be turned off while a message requiring action is on the screen. • The display turns off automatically when the ignition is switched off and the driver's door is opened. Turning off or changing the volume of center display sounds System sounds in the center display can be turned off or their volume can be changed: 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. 2. Tap Sound System Volumes. 3. Pull the control under Screen Touch to the desired level to change volume or turn off the sound for tapping the screen or Keypad Touch. Changing the screen's appearance (theme) 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. 2. Tap My Car 3. Select a theme, e.g., Minimalistic or Chrome Rings. Displays Themes. In addition, the settings: Normal and Bright can also be selected. For Normal, the screen's background is dark and the text is light. This is the default setting. If Bright is selected, the background will be light and the text will be dark, which can increase readability in strong ambient lighting. These alternatives are always available and do not shift automatically according to changes in ambient lighting. Related information • • • • Using the center display (p. 46) Sensus (p. 17) Settings view (p. 106) Cleaning the center display (p. 529) 31 INTRODUCTION Using the center display keyboard A keyboard can be used on the center display to enter characters and search for e.g., destinations using the navigation system, adding contacts in phone book, etc. It is also possible to use handwriting on the screen. Entering text using the keyboard The keyboard will only appear at the bottom of the center display in situations when it is possible to write on the screen. 32 INTRODUCTION Keyboard function buttons (the appearance may vary depending on language settings, context, etc.) Field for possible search hits. The word changes as new letters are added. Scroll in the list using the left/right arrows. Tap a word to select it. The keyboard may not support all language selections, in which case this line on the screen will not be displayed. The characters that can be entered are language-dependent (see point 7). Tap a character to enter it. 33 INTRODUCTION Several buttons (depending on the context for which the keyboard is being used) will be displayed here. In certain cases, it can be used to enter @, .com or to start a new line. Press to hide the keyboard. In cases where this is not possible, the button will not be displayed. Tap once to enter one uppercase letter. Double-tap for Caps lock (tap again to return to lowercase letters). Letters entered after the !, . and ? characters will automatically be uppercase. The first letter in the text field or in text fields intended for names, addresses or company names will also automatically be uppercase. The first letter in text fields intended for passwords, web addresses or email addresses will automatically be lowercase unless upper case is chosen. Press to display the numbers that can be entered. When numbers are displayed, tap to resume entering text or to enter special characters. Tap to change the keyboard language (in this example, UK English is the selected language). The characters available will change according to the selected language (2). This button will only be displayed if several keyboard languages have been selected (see the section "Changing keyboard languages" 3 34 In the example illustration, the button shows "UK". below). Tap to display a list of possible languages and tap a language to use it. 3. Tap to enter blank spaces. Tap to erase one character at a time. When more than one language has been selected, this button (7)3 will appear on the keyboard. Tap to enable handwriting. See the section "Handwritten text" below. Entering text and performing searches using the keyboard are done somewhat differently in the navigation system. See the section "Filtering destination search results" below. Tap the button above the keyboard to confirm the text that has been entered (not shown in the illustration). This button's appearance differs depending on the context. Changing keyboard languages In order to change keyboard languages, they must first be selected under Settings. The keyboard language can be changed without changing the language used for the other systems/menus in the vehicle. 1. Pull down the center display's Top view and tap Settings. 2. Tap System Keyboard Layouts. Select and one or more of the languages in the list. > The makes it possible to change the keyboard layout and characters available depending on the language(s) selected. To shift between keyboard languages: 1. Press and hold the button (7). > A list will be displayed. 2. Tap the desired language. If more than four languages have been selected in Settings, scroll in the list. > The keyboard layout and characters available will change to the selected language. INTRODUCTION Special characters Entering characters 1. Enter a handwritten character (1) using a fingertip or by holding e.g., a pen near the screen. > Several character suggestions will appear (3). The most likely character will be at the top of the list. CAUTION Do not touch the screen with sharp objects because this could cause scratches. Area for entering characters. To enter language-specific characters such as é or è (if available): Text box where the characters entered in area (1) appear. 1. Press and hold a character key. > A box with available characters will open. Suggested characters. Scroll in the list if necessary. 2. Tap the desired character. If none of the special characters is selected, the key's initial character will be entered. Blank spaces. 2. Continue entering characters. > If no other choice is made, the character at the top of the list will be used. Tap one of the other characters in the list to use it instead. Tap to erase one character at a time. Handwritten text Tap to return to the standard keyboard. Tap button (10), see the overview illustration above, to enter the handwriting mode. Press to hide the keyboard. In cases where this is not possible, the button will not be displayed. Tap to change the keyboard language. 35 INTRODUCTION 36 Erasing/changing handwritten characters New lines Erase a character by swiping over the handwriting area (1) Create a new line by drawing above the characters as shown in the illustration Characters can be erased/changed in several ways: Related information • • Tap the desired character in the list (3). • Sweep horizontally from right to left over the handwriting area (1). Erase several characters by swiping over the area several times. • Tap the "x" in the text box (2) to delete all characters. Tap button (5) to erase the character and start again. • • • Using the center display (p. 46) Center display overview (p. 29) Navigating in the center display's views (p. 39) INTRODUCTION Function view buttons The Function view, which is one of the center display's basic views, contains all of the vehicle's on-screen function buttons. From the Home view, swipe from left to right on the screen to come to the Function view. Different types of buttons There are three different types of vehicle function buttons as listed in the following table. Type of button Functions Vehicle function affected Function buttons Have On/Off modes. Most of the buttons in the function view are function buttons. An LED indicator light to the left of the button's icon will illuminate when a function is active. Press the button to turn the function on or off. Start buttons Do not have On/Off modes. Pressing a start button opens a function's window, e.g., a window for adjusting the driver's seat. Parking buttons Have On/Off and scanning modes. Similar to function buttons but have an additional parking scanning mode. • Camera. • Headrest fold. • Functions for folding down a seat. • Head-up display adjustments. • Park In. • Park Out. function is initially activated, an additional text will be displayed (certain functions only) in the button for approx. 5 seconds, after which the button will be displayed with the LED indicator illuminated. Button modes Press the button briefly to deactivate the function. A function is activated (on) when the LED indicator is green A function is deactivated (off) when the LED indicator is off When a function or parking button's LED indicator is green, the function is activated. When a 37 INTRODUCTION The yellow triangle indicates that the function is not working correctly Related information 38 • • Center display overview (p. 29) • Categories in Settings view (p. 107) Navigating in the center display's views (p. 39) INTRODUCTION Navigating in the center display's views There are 5 different basic views in the center display: Home view, Top view, Climate view, App view and Function view. The display is activated automatically when the driver's door is opened. Home view Home view is displayed when the screen is activated. It consists of four sub-views: Navigation, Media, Phone and an extra sub-view. The extra sub-view contains the most recently used app/ vehicle function that is not related to the other three sub-views. For example, if the most recently used app/vehicle function is a music app, the Media sub-view will be displayed. NOTE • In Home view's standard mode (reached by pressing the Home button briefly), an animation explaining how to access the different views will be shown on the screen. • Some functions may be disabled when the vehicle is moving. The sub-views display brief information about the respective apps. The first time the vehicle is started, some of the Home view's sub-views will not contain any information. 39 INTRODUCTION Expanding/minimizing a sub-view The Media sub-view shown minimized (left) and expanded (right) • 40 To expand a sub-view, tap the screen anywhere in the sub-view to access the respec- INTRODUCTION tive app's basic functions. When a sub-view is expanded, the Home view's fourth subview will temporarily not be displayed. • To minimize a sub-view, tap anywhere on the screen. Opening/closing a sub-view in full-screen mode The extra sub-view and the Navigation sub-view can be opened in full-screen mode to show additional information and possible settings. In expanded mode, open the app in full-screen mode by tapping on the symbol. Tap on the symbol or the Home button below the screen to return to the expanded view. Home button for the center display Status bar Current vehicle activities are shown in the status bar at the top of the screen. Network and connection information is shown to the left. Brief information about currently running apps and the clock are shown to the right. Top view It is always possible to return to Home view by pressing the Home button. Press the Home button twice to return to Home view's standard view from full-screen. The top view has a tab at the center of the status bar. Pull down (expand) the Top view by swiping the tab downward. Top view when expanded Top view provides access to: • Settings • Owner's manual • Driver Profile • The car's stored messages To leave (minimize) Top view, tap the screen outside of this view or tap at the bottom of Top view and swipe upward. The views behind will become visible again. Top view is not available when the 41 INTRODUCTION ignition is being started/switched off or when a message is displayed on the screen. App view Going to Top view from an app To move an app, press and hold it. It will become slightly bigger and transparent and can then be dragged to the desired position and released. To pull down Top view when an app is running (e.g., FM radio): • Tap FM Radio Settings to display these settings. • Tap Owner's manual to open an article related to the specific app. When applicable, swipe downward to scroll in the list of apps (depending on the number of apps currently running). Return to Home view by swiping the screen from left to right or by pressing the Home button. Function view This applies only to your vehicle's factoryinstalled apps. This is not possible for thirdparty apps that have been downloaded. Climate view The climate bar, where the most common climate system settings can be made, is located at the bottom of the screen and is always visible. Tap the symbol at the center of the climate bar to open Climate view for access to additional climate system settings. Tap the symbol to close Climate view and return to a previous view. App view Swipe the screen from right to left to access App view from Home view. This displays factory-installed apps such as FM as well as any apps that have been downloaded. Brief information will be displayed for certain apps, for example missed phone calls, etc. Tap an app to open it. Function view with vehicle function buttons 42 INTRODUCTION Swipe the screen from left to right to access Function view from Home view. From Function view, you can activate/deactivate various vehicle functions such as Drive Modes, Speed limit adaptation and Park Assist. When applicable, swipe upward to scroll in the list of functions (depending on the number of functions). Activate/deactivate a function by tapping its button. Certain functions will open in their own windows. To move a function button, press and hold it. It will become slightly smaller and transparent and can then be dragged to the desired position and released. Related information • • • • Using the center display (p. 46) Center display overview (p. 29) Function view buttons (p. 37) Symbols in the center display status bar (p. 44) • Changing settings in different types of apps (p. 45) • Climate system controls (p. 180) 43 INTRODUCTION Symbols in the center display status bar Symbol The following table provides an overview of the symbols used in the center display's status bar. • Warning symbols in the instrument panel (p. 134) Remote diagnostics active. • Messages in the instrument panel and center display (p. 149) Action in progress. The status bar shows current vehicle activities and in certain cases, also their status. Due to limited space in the status bar, not all symbols will be displayed at all times. Symbol Meaning PreconditioningA in progress. Audio source being played. Meaning Audio source paused. Roaming activated. Phone call in progress. Cell phone network signal strength. Audio source muted. Bluetooth device connected. News broadcasts from current radio stationB. Bluetooth activated but no device connected. Traffic information being receivedB. Connected to a Wi-Fi network. Clock. Tethering activated. (Wi-Fi hotspot). Vehicle modem activated. A B Hybrid models only. Not available in all markets. Related information 44 Connected to the Internet via USB. • Navigating in the center display's views (p. 39) Type of cell phone connection (2G, 3G, etc.). • Indicator symbols in the instrument panel (p. 126) INTRODUCTION Changing settings in different types of apps App view, which is one of the center display's basic views, contains all of the vehicle's apps (applications/programs). Access this view by swiping the screen from right to left. Basic apps A number of apps are standard and are part of Volvo Sensus, such as FM Radio, USB and CD. To change settings in a basic app: 1. Open the app, for example Phone, either on the home screen or full-screen from App view. 2. Pull down Top view. 3. Tap Phone settings. 4. Change the desired settings and confirm. 5. Press the Home button, tap the screen outside of Top view or pull Top view up. Third-party apps Third party apps have to be selected and downloaded. In these apps, setting are made from within the app, not from Top view. 45 INTRODUCTION Using the center display Many of the vehicle's functions can be controlled and settings can be made from the screen in the center console, referred to in this owner's information as the center display, which is a touchscreen. Using the center display's touchscreen functionality Two people can interact with the screen at the same time, e.g., to adjust the temperature for the driver and passenger sides. CAUTION Do not touch the screen with sharp objects because this could cause scratches. The screen reacts differently depending on whether the user taps, drags or swipes on the screen. This makes it possible to move between views, mark objects, scroll in lists and move apps by touching the screen in various ways. The following table lists the gestures that can be used on the screen: An infrared film on the screen enables it to react if a finger is directly in front of the screen (but not actually touching it). This makes it possible to use the screen while wearing gloves. Procedure 46 Gesture Result Tap once. Marks an object, confirms a selection or activates a function. Double-tap. Zooms in on an object such as a map. Press and hold. "Grabs" an object so that it can be dragged. Press and hold on the screen and drag the object to the desired position. INTRODUCTION Procedure Gesture Result Tap with two fingers. Zooms out from an object such as a map. Drag Moves between screen views, scrolls in a list, text or a view. Press and hold to drag apps or objects in a list. Swipe Moves between screen views, scrolls in a list, text or a view 47 INTRODUCTION Procedure Gesture Result Stretch Zooms in. Pinch Zooms out. Returning to Home view Moving apps and vehicle function buttons 1. Apps and function buttons can be moved and organized in their respective views. 2. Press the Home button briefly. > The most recent Home view mode will be displayed. Press and hold an app/button. > The app/button will change size and become transparent. It can then be moved. 2. Drag the app/button to an available position in the view. Press again briefly. > All of the Home view's sub-views will return to standard mode. NOTE From Home view's standard mode, press the Home button to start animated on-screen instructions describing how to display the various views. 48 1. A maximum of 48 lines can be utilized for placing apps/buttons. To move an app/button outside of the visible view, drag it to the bottom of the view. A new line will then be added where the app/ button can be placed (this line may not be visible). Swipe the screen to scroll up or down in the view to display information that may be outside of the view. Scrolling in lists, articles or views A scroll indicator on the screen shows that it is possible to scroll up or down in the view. Press the indicator and move it up or down or swipe up or down anywhere in the view. INTRODUCTION Digital controls are available for many of the vehicle's functions. For example, to set the temperature: • • Drag the control to the desired temperature • Tap the desired temperature on the control Tap +/− to raise or lower the temperature incrementally, or Related information The scroll indicator on the right side of the center display Using center display controls • Navigating in the center display's views (p. 39) • • • Settings view (p. 106) • Using the center display keyboard (p. 32) Sensus (p. 17) Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps (p. 404) Temperature control4 4 Generic illustration. The temperature in your vehicle may be set to degrees Fahrenheit. 49 INTRODUCTION Using the owner's manual Reading your owner's manual is a good way of familiarizing yourself with the features and systems in your vehicle. On-board owner's manual Reading the owner's manual is a good way to become familiar with your vehicle and to learn to utilize the features and functions that it offers. Pay particular attention to the warnings provided. Volvo reserves the right to make model changes at any time, or to change specifications or design without notice and without incurring obligation. © Volvo Car Corporation Illustrations Some of the illustrations used in your owner's information may be generic and will give a general view of a certain feature or function. For example, some illustrations describing climate system functions may display a temperature in degrees Celsius but the same information applies to Fahrenheit. Options and accessories Optional or accessory equipment described in this manual is indicated by an asterisk. Optional or accessory equipment may not be available in all countries or markets. Please note 5 50 Example of supplementary information that some vehicles may be equipped differently, depending on special legal requirements. Risk of injury Contact your Volvo retailer for additional information. Footnotes This owner's information contains supplementary information indicated by an information symbol: 5. Tap the symbol to open a window showing the information. Messages There are several displays in the vehicle that show messages generated by various systems and functions in the vehicle. The appearance of these texts differs slightly from normal texts (for example: Phone, Accept). Decals There are various types of decals in the vehicle whose purpose is to provide important information in a clear and concise way. The importance of these decals is explained as follows, in descending order of importance. Black ISO symbols on a yellow warning background, white text/image on a black background. Decals of this type are used to indicate potential danger. Ignoring a warning of this type could result in serious injury or death. INTRODUCTION Risk of damage to the vehicle White ISO symbols and white text/image on a black background. These decals provide general information. NOTE The decals shown in the Owner’s Manual are examples only and are not intended to be reproductions of the decals actually used in the vehicle. The purpose is to give an indication of how they look and their approximate location in the vehicle. The applicable information for your particular vehicle can be found on the respective decals in the vehicle. White ISO symbols and white text/image on a black or blue warning background and space for a message. If the information on decals of this type is ignored, damage to the vehicle could result. Information Arrows containing letters are used to indicate movement. If there are no illustrations associated with a step-by-step list, the steps in the procedure are indicated by ordinary numbers. Position lists Red circles containing a number are used in general overview illustrations in which certain components are pointed out. The corresponding number is also used in the position list's description of the various components. Bullet lists Types of lists Bullets are used to differentiate a number of components/functions/points of information that can be listed in random order. Procedures For example: Procedures (step-by-step instructions), or actions that must be carried out in a certain order, are arranged in numbered lists in this manual. • • If there is a series of illustrations associated with step-by-step instructions, each step in the procedure is numbered in the same way as the corresponding illustration. Lists in which letters are used can be found with series of illustrations in cases where the order in which the instructions are carried out is not important. Arrows with or without numbers are used to indicate the direction of a movement. Coolant Engine oil Illustrations Some of the illustrations and images shown in the owner's manual are generic and may differ slightly from the equipment in your vehicle depending the level of instrumentation or market. Related information Related information offers references to articles containing information associated with the information that you are currently reading. 51 INTRODUCTION Related information • • Owner's manual in mobile devices (p. 21) Additional information about your vehicle (p. 14) On-board digital owner's manual • Start: the on-board information's start page, When printed owner's information refers to digital owner's information, this is the on-board information available in the vehicle's center display. • Categories: all articles sorted by category. showing an introductory text. An article may be listed in several categories. • Quick Guide: A selection of useful articles. • Exterior: Exterior views of the vehicle in which certain areas/components are highlighted as hotspots. Tap a hotspot to come to a relevant article. • Interior: Interior views of the vehicle in which certain areas/components are highlighted as hotspots. Tap a hotspot to come to a relevant article. • Favorites: Quick access to articles that have been tagged as favorites. NOTE The on-board owner's information cannot be accessed while the vehicle is moving. Related information • The digital on-board owner's manual is accessed from the center display's Top view There are a number of ways to find information in the digital owner's manual, which can be accessed from the manual's top menu by tapping . 52 Navigating in the digital owner's manual (p. 53) INTRODUCTION Navigating in the digital owner's manual The digital on-board owner's manual is accessed from the center display. The contents are searchable and it is easy to navigate among the varios sections. To open the digital owner's information, pull down the center display's Top view and tap Owner's manual. 1. Tap followed by Exterior/Interior. > Exterior/interior views will be displayed with hotspots, which lead to relevant articles. Swipe the screen horizontally to scroll among the views. 2. Tap a hotspot. > The title of a relevant article will be displayed. 3. Tap the title to open the article. Tap the left arrow to go back or to begin a new search. There are several ways of finding information. To access the owner's manual's menu, tap in the upper bar. Searching using categories The articles in the owner's manual are structured in main and sub-categories. The same article may appear in several pertinent categories in order to make them easier to find. 1. Tap followed by Categories. > The main categories will be listed. 2. Tap a main category ( ). > A list of sub-categories and ( cles ( 3. ) and arti- ) will be displayed. Tap an article to open it. Tap the left arrow to to begin a new search. go back or Interior and exterior hotspots Exterior and interior views of the vehicle where certain components are pointed out are called hotspots. Quick Guide. The heading Quick Guide in the owner's manual's menu leads to a selection of articles that may be helpful in familiarizing you with your vehicle's most common features and functions. These articles can also be found through categories but have been gathered here for quick access. Tap an article to read it in its entirety. Favorites This is a list of articles that have been saved as favorites. The most recently saved one will be at the top of the list. Tap an article to read it in its entirety. The digital on-board owner's manual is accessed from the center display's Top view 53 INTRODUCTION Saving/deleting favorites Save an article as a favorite by tapping the star ( ) at the upper right when an article is open. The star symbol will be filled in ( ) when its article has been saved as a favorite. To delete a favorite, tap its star again. Using the search function 1. Tap the magnifying glass icon ( ) in the owner's manual's upper menu. A keyboard will appear at the bottom of the screen. 2. Enter a word, e.g., "seat belt." > Suggested articles will be displayed as more characters are entered. 3. Confirm by tapping the article. To leave search mode tap the up-arrow next to the search box. Related information • • On-board digital owner's manual (p. 52) Using the center display keyboard (p. 32) Glass Technician certification Laminated glass In addition to Volvo factory training, Volvo supports certification by the National Institute for Automotive Service Excellence (A.S.E.). The windshield and panoramic roof* are made of laminated glass, which is reinforced to help prevent break-ins and to provide additional soundproofing. Laminated glass is optional for the other side windows. Laminated glass symbol6 Related information • • • • • • • • • • 6 54 Certified technicians have demonstrated a high degree of competence in specific areas. Besides passing exams, each technician must also have worked in the field for two or more years before a certificate is issued. These professional technicians are best able to analyze vehicle problems and perform the necessary maintenance procedures to keep your Volvo at peak operating condition. Laminated panoramic roof* (p. 101) Power windows (p. 104) Defrosting windows and mirrors (p. 187) Using sun shades (p. 106) Rearview mirror (p. 105) Power windows (p. 104) Head-up display (HUD)* (p. 117) Activating/deactivating the rain sensor (p. 155) Windshield and headlight washers (p. 156) Tailgate window wiper and washer (p. 157) This symbol is not shown on the windshield or panoramic roof. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. SAFETY SAFETY Never drink and drive. Our concern for safety dates back to 1927 when the first Volvo rolled off the production line. Three-point seat belts (a Volvo invention), safety cages, and energy-absorbing impact zones were designed into Volvo vehicles long before it was fashionable or required by government regulation. • • • • Take a driver-retraining course. We will not compromise our commitment to safety. We continue to seek out new safety features and to refine those already in our vehicles. You can help. We would appreciate hearing your suggestions about improving automobile safety. We also want to know if you ever have a safety concern with your vehicle. Call us in the U.S. at: 1-800-458-1552 or in Canada at: 1-800-663-8255. • Take into account the traffic, road, and weather conditions, particularly with regard to stopping distance. Occupant safety The vehicle is equipped with a number of safety systems for the driver and passengers. Safety is Volvo's cornerstone. Warning symbol in the instrument panel The warning symbol in the instrument panel illuminates when the ignition is in mode II or higher. It will go out after approx. 6 seconds if no faults are detected in the airbag system. WARNING • • If the SRS warning light stays on after the engine has started or if it illuminates while you are driving, have the vehicle inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible. Never try to repair any component or part of the SRS yourself. Any interference in the system could cause malfunction and serious injury. All work on these systems should be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Related information • • • • 56 • • General safety information Safety during pregnancy (p. 62) Seat belts (p. 58) Safety systems (p. 83) Airbag system (p. 83) Volvo's concern for safety Occupant safety reminders How safely you drive doesn't depend on how old you are but rather on: • • • How well you see. Your ability to concentrate. How quickly you make decisions under stress to avoid an accident. The following suggestions are intended to help you cope with the ever changing traffic environment. • • If you are taking any medication, consult your physician about its potential effects on your driving abilities. Have your eyes checked regularly. Keep your windshield and headlights clean. Replace wiper blades when they start to leave streaks. Never send text messages while driving. Refrain from using or minimize the use of a cell phone while driving. Related information • • Recall information (p. 58) Reporting safety defects (p. 57) SAFETY Reporting safety defects The following information will help you report any perceived safety-related defects in your vehicle. Reporting safety defects in the U.S. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Volvo Cars of North America, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your retailer, or Volvo Cars of North America, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http:// www.safercar.gov, where you can also enter your vehicle's VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) to see if it has any open recalls. Volvo strongly recommends that if your vehicle is covered under a service campaign, safety or emission recall or similar action, it should be completed as soon as possible. Please check with your local retailer or Volvo Cars of North America, LLC if your vehicle is covered under these conditions. Transport Canada can be contacted at: 1-800-333-0510 Teletypewriter (TTY): 613 990-4500 Fax: 1-819-994-3372 Mailing Address: Transport Canada - Road Safety, 80 rue Noël, Gatineau, (Quebec) J8Z 0A1 Related information • • Recall information (p. 58) Occupant safety (p. 56) NHTSA can be reached at: Internet: http://www.nhtsa.gov Telephone: 1-888-DASH-2-DOT (1-888-327-4236). Reporting safety defects in Canada If you believe your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada in addition to notifying Volvo Cars of Canada Corp. 57 SAFETY Recall information On our website, select the tab YOUR VOLVO and the heading RECALL INFORMATION will be displayed at the lower left side of the screen. Enter your Vehicle Identification Number for your vehicle (found at the base of the windshield). If your vehicle has any open Recalls, they will be displayed on this page. Volvo customers in Canada For any questions regarding open recalls for your vehicle, please contact your authorized Volvo retailer. If your retailer is unable to answer your questions, please contact Volvo Customer Relations at 905 695-9626, Monday through Friday, 8:30 A.M. to 5:00 P.M. EST or by e-mail at vclcust@volvocars.com. You may also write us at: Volvo Cars of Canada National Customer Service 9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101 Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9 Related information • • 58 Occupant safety (p. 56) Reporting safety defects (p. 57) Seat belts WARNING Seat belts should always be worn by all occupants of your vehicle. Children should be properly restrained, using an infant, car, or booster seat determined by age, weight and height. Most states and provinces make it mandatory for occupants of a vehicle to use seat belts. • Never repair the belt yourself; have this work done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician only. • Any device used to induce slack into the shoulder belt portion of the three-point belt system will have a detrimental effect on the amount of protection available to you in the event of a collision. • The seat back should not be tilted too far back. The shoulder belt must be taut in order to function properly. • Do not use child safety seats or child booster cushions/backrests in the front passenger's seat. We also recommend that children who have outgrown these devices sit in the rear seat with the seat belt properly fastened. Occupant Safe Positioning Occupant Safe Positioning (OSP) is a system in the front seats that pulls the seat belts slightly taut prior to a collision. OSP helps position the front seat occupants to help improve the effects of other safety systems, e.g., the airbag system. Seat belt maintenance Check periodically that the seat belts are in good condition. Use water and a mild detergent for cleaning. Check seat belt mechanism function as follows: attach the seat belt and pull rapidly on the strap. Related information • • • Buckling and unbuckling seat belts (p. 59) Door and seat belt reminders (p. 61) Seat belt pretensioners (p. 59) SAFETY Seat belt pretensioners If the seat belt should remain taut: Buckling and unbuckling seat belts The vehicle's seat belts are equipped with standard and electric pretensioners that can help pull the seat belts taut in a critical situation or a collision. 1. Stop the vehicle safely. 2. Unbuckle the seat belt and rebuckle it. > The seat belt and the electric pretensioner will be reset. Seat belts should be used by all occupants in the vehicle when it is in motion. Seat belt pretensioners in collisions The seat belts are equipped with standard pretensioners that are triggered according to the severity of a collision. Seat belt pretensioners in critical situations The seat belts in the front seats are also equipped with electric pretensioners. The pretensioners interact and can be triggered along with the active safety systems City Safety and Rear Collision Warning. In critical situations such as sudden braking, evasive maneuvers, etc., the seat belt can be pulled taut by the pretensioner's electric motor. The electric pretensioner positions the occupant in the seat to help reduce the risk of striking the interior of the passenger compartment and improves the effect of other safety systems such as the airbags. Resetting the electric pretensioners When a critical situation has passed, the seat belt and the electric pretensioner are reset automatically. Buckling a seat belt 1. Related information • • • Seat belts (p. 58) Door and seat belt reminders (p. 61) Buckling and unbuckling seat belts (p. 59) Pull the belt out slowly. It should not be twisted or turned. NOTE Each seat belt is equipped with a seat belt retractor that will lock up in the following situations: • • • • • if the belt is pulled out rapidly during braking and acceleration if the vehicle is leaning excessively when driving in turns if the Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) is activated (each seat belt (except for the driver's belt) is equipped with the ALR/ELR function, which is designed to help keep the seat belt taut. ALR/ELR activates if the seat belt is pulled out as far as possible. If this is done, a sound from the seat belt retractor will be audible, which is normal, and the seat belt will be pulled taut and locked in place. This function is automatically disabled when the seat belt is unbuckled and fully retracted). 59 SAFETY 2. Insert the latch plate into the receptacle. The seat belt retractor is normally "unlocked" and you can move freely, provided that the shoulder belt is not pulled out too far. > A distinct click will be audible. 3. The height of the seat belts in the front seats and outboard rear seating positions can be adjusted. The height of the shoulder section of the seat belt must be correctly adjusted. WARNING The seat belt latch plate should only be inserted into its intended receptacle. Inserting it into one of the other receptacles may prevent it from functioning properly. The seat belt should be positioned over the shoulder (not over the arm) Press the button and move the upper seat belt anchor up or down. Position it as high as possible so that the shoulder section of the belt is across the seat occupant's collarbone and not across the throat. 60 SAFETY 4. Tighten the lap section of the seat belt by pulling the diagonal section upward toward the shoulder. Unbuckling the seat belt Door and seat belt reminders To remove the seat belt, press the red section on the seat belt receptacle. Before exiting the vehicle, check that the seat belt retracts fully after being unbuckled. If necessary, guide the belt back into the retractor slot. The door and seat belt reminders are intended to alert all occupants of the vehicle that their seat belts should be buckled before the vehicle begins to move or if a door, the hood, tailgate or fuel filler door have not been closed properly. Related information Graphics in the instrument panel • • Door and seat belt reminders (p. 61) Seat belts (p. 58) The lap section of the belt must be positioned low on the hips (not pressing against the abdomen) Make sure that the shoulder belt is rolled up into its retractor and that the shoulder and lap belts are taut. WARNING Never use a seat belt for more than one occupant. Never wear the shoulder portion of the belt under the arm, behind the back or otherwise out of position. Such use could cause injury in the event of an accident. As seat belts lose much of their strength when exposed to violent stretching, they should be replaced after any collision, even if they appear to be undamaged. Warning colors for doors/tailgate vary depending on the vehicle's speed The instrument panel graphic shows the seats where seat belts are not buckled. The same graphic also indicates if a door, the hood, tailgate or fuel filler door is/are open. This graphic disappears automatically after approx. 30 seconds or if the if the O button on the steering wheel keypad is pressed. 61 SAFETY Seat belt reminder Seat belt reminder light in ceiling console The seat belt reminder consists of an audible signal, an indicator light near the rearview mirror and a symbol in the instrument panel that alert all occupants of the vehicle to buckle their seat belts. Rear seats Safety during pregnancy The rear seat belt reminder has two functions. The seat belt should always be worn during pregnancy. However, it is crucial that it be worn correctly. • It indicates which seat belts are buckled in the rear seats. This will also be displayed in an instrument panel graphic. • It also provides audio and visual reminders if a rear seat belt is unbuckled while the vehicle is in motion. The reminders will disappear when the seat belt has been buckled again or can be erased by pressing the O button on the steering wheel keypad. Door/hood/tailgate/fuel filler door reminder If a door, the hood, tailgate or fuel filler door is/are not properly closed, this will be indicated in a graphic in the instrument panel. Stop the vehicle safely and close the source of the reminder. If the vehicle is moving at a speed under approx.6 mph (10 km/h), the information symbol will illuminate in the instrument panel. The audible signal is speed-dependent and will sound for several seconds. If the driver's or a passenger's seat belt is not buckled, this will be indicated in the instrument panel. Child seats are not included in the seat belt reminder system. Front seats An audible signal and an indicator light will remind the driver and front seat passenger to buckle their seat belts. 62 At speeds above approx. 6 mph (10 km/h), the warning symbol will illuminate in the instrument panel. Related information • • Seat belts (p. 58) Buckling and unbuckling seat belts (p. 59) The diagonal section should wrap over the shoulder then be routed between the breasts and to the side of the belly. The lap section should lay flat over the thighs and as low as possible under the belly. It must never be allowed to ride upward. Remove all slack from the belt and ensure that it fits close to the body without any twists. As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers should adjust their seats and steering wheel such that they can easily maintain control of the vehicle as they drive (which means they must be able to easily operate the foot pedals and steering wheel). Within this context, they should strive to position the seat with as large a distance as possible between their belly and the steering wheel. SAFETY Related information • • • • Buckling and unbuckling seat belts (p. 59) Adjusting power front seats* (p. 161) Child safety Children should always be seated safely when traveling in the vehicle. Manually operated front seats (p. 160) General information Operating multifunctional front seats* (p. 164) Volvo recommends the proper use of restraint systems for all occupants including children. Remember that, regardless of age and size, a child should always be properly restrained in a vehicle. Your vehicle is also equipped with ISOFIX/ LATCH attachments, which make it more convenient to install child seats. Some restraint systems for children are designed to be secured in the vehicle by lap belts or the lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt. Such child restraint systems can help protect children in vehicles in the event of an accident only if they are used properly. However, children could be endangered in a crash if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle. Failure to follow the installation instructions for your child restraint can result in your child striking the vehicle's interior in a sudden stop. Holding a child in your arms is NOT a suitable substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, a child held in a person's arms can be crushed between the vehicle's interior and an unrestrained person. The child could also be injured by striking the interior, or by being ejected from the vehicle during a sudden maneuver or impact. The same can also happen if the infant or child rides unrestrained on the seat. Other occupants should also be properly restrained to help reduce the chance of injuring or increasing the injury of a child. All states and provinces have legislation governing how and where children should be carried in a vehicle. Find out the regulations existing in your state or province. Recent accident statistics have shown that children are safer in rear seating positions than front seating positions when properly restrained. A child restraint system can help protect a child in a vehicle. Here's what to look for when selecting a child restraint system: It should have a label certifying that it meets applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS 213) – or in Canada, CMVSS 213. Make sure the child restraint system is approved for the child's height, weight and development – the label required by the standard or regulation, or instructions for infant restraints, typically provide this information. In using any child restraint system, we urge you to carefully look over the instructions that are provided with the restraint. Be sure you understand them and can use the device properly and safely in this vehicle. A misused child restraint system can result in increased injuries for both the infant or child and other occupants in the vehicle. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 63 SAFETY When a child has outgrown the child safety seat, you should use the rear seat with the standard seat belt fastened. The best way to help protect the child here is to place the child on a cushion so that the seat belt is properly located on the hips. Legislation in your state or province may mandate the use of a child seat or cushion in combination with the seat belt, depending on the child's age and/or size. Please check local regulations. Volvo's recommendations Why does Volvo believe that no child should sit in the front seat of a car? It's quite simple really. A front airbag is a very powerful device designed, by law, to help protect an adult. Because of the size of the airbag and its speed of inflation, a child should never be placed in the front seat, even if he or she is properly belted or strapped into a child safety seat. Volvo has been an innovator in safety for over seventy-five years, and we'll continue to do our part. But we need your help. Please remember to put your children in the back seat, and buckle them up. A specially designed and tested booster cushion and backrest can be obtained from your Volvo retailer. USA: for children weighing 33 – 80 lbs. (15 – 36 kg) and 38 – 54 inches (97 – 137 cm) in height WARNING • Canada: for children weighing 40 – 80 lbs. (18 – 36 kg) and 40 – 54 inches (102 – 137 cm) in height • Do not use child safety seats or child booster cushions/backrests in the front passenger's seat. We also recommend that children under 4 feet 7 inches (140 cm) in height who have outgrown these devices sit in the rear seat with the seat belt fastened. On hot days, the temperature in the vehicle interior can rise very quickly. Exposure to these high temperatures for even a short period of time can cause heat-related injury or death. Small children are particularly at risk. Volvo has some very specific recommendations • • Always wear your seat belt. • Volvo strongly recommends that everyone in the vehicle be properly restrained. • Volvo recommends that ALL occupants (adults and children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the back seat of any vehicle with a front passenger side airbag. • Drive safely! Child seats should always be registered. 64 Airbags are a SUPPLEMENTAL safety device which, when used with a three-point seat belt can help reduce serious injuries during certain types of accidents. Volvo recommends that you do not disconnect the airbag system in your vehicle. SAFETY Related information • • • • • • Integrated booster cushion* (p. 75) Child restraints Booster cushions (p. 71) Suitable child restraints should always be used when children travel in the vehicle. Convertible seats (p. 69) Child restraint systems Infant seats (p. 67) ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 72) Top tether anchors (p. 74) Convertible seat WARNING Infant seat There are three main types of child restraint systems: infant seats, convertible seats and booster cushions. They are classified according to the child's age and size. The child restraint should be secured using a three-point seat belt, ISOFIX/LATCH anchors or top tether anchors. A child seat should never be used in the front passenger seat of any vehicle with a front passenger airbag – not even if the "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If the severity of an accident were to cause the airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious injury or death to a child seated in this position. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 65 SAFETY WARNING • When not in use, keep the child restraint system secured or remove it from the passenger compartment to help prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop or collision. • A small child's head represents a considerable part of its total weight and its neck is still very weak. Volvo recommends that children up to age 4 travel, properly restrained, facing rearward. In addition, Volvo recommends that children should ride rearward facing, properly restrained, as long as possible. Booster cushion WARNING Always refer to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for detailed information on securing the restraint. Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) To make child seat installation easier, each seat belt (except for the driver's belt) is equipped with a locking mechanism to help keep the seat belt taut. When attaching the seat belt to a child seat: 66 1. Attach the seat belt to the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer's instructions. 2. Pull the seat belt out as far as possible. 3. Insert the seat belt latch plate into the buckle (lock) in the usual way. 4. Release the seat belt and pull it taut around the child seat. A sound from the seat belt retractor will be audible at this time and is normal. The belt will now be locked in place. This function is automatically disabled when the seat belt is unlocked and the belt is fully retracted. WARNING Do not use child safety seats or child booster cushions/backrests in the front passenger's seat. We also recommend that children who have outgrown these devices sit in the rear seat with the seat belt properly fastened. Child restraint registration and recalls Child restraints could be recalled for safety reasons. You must register your child restraint to be reached in a recall. To stay informed about child safety seat recalls, be sure to fill out and return the registration card that comes with new child restraints. Child restraint recall information is readily available in both the U.S. and Canada. For recall information in the U.S., call the U.S. Government's Auto Safety Hotline at 1-800-424-9393 or go to http://www-odi.nhtsa.dot.gov/cars/problems/ recalls/register/childseat/index.cfm. In Canada, visit Transport Canada's Child Safety website at http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/childsafety/ menu.htm. SAFETY Infant seats WARNING Suitable child restraints should always be used when children (depending on their age/size) are seated in the vehicle. A child seat should never be used in the front passenger seat of any vehicle with a front passenger airbag – not even if the "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If the severity of an accident were to cause the airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious injury or death to a child seated in this position. Securing an infant seat with a seat belt 3. Positioning the seat belt through the infant seat Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct click is audible. WARNING Do not place the infant seat in the front passenger's seat 1. Place the infant seat in the rear seat of the vehicle. 2. Attach the seat belt to the infant seat according to the manufacturer's instructions. • An infant seat must be in the rear-facing position only. • The infant seat should not be positioned behind the driver's seat unless there is adequate space for safe installation. Fasten the seat belt 67 SAFETY NOTE WARNING It should not be possible to move the child restraint (child seat) more than 1 in. (2.5 cm) in any direction along the seat belt path. The locking retractor will automatically release when the seat belt is unbuckled and allowed to retract fully. 5. Press the infant seat firmly in place, let the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A sound from the seat belt retractor's automatic locking function will be audible at this time and is normal. The seat belt should now be locked in place. Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt 4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt out as far as possible to activate the belt's automatic locking function. Ensure that the seat is securely in place 6. 68 Push and pull the infant seat along the seat belt path to ensure that it is held securely in place by the seat belt. The infant seat can be removed by unbuckling the seat belt and letting it retract completely. Related information • • • • • ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 72) Top tether anchors (p. 74) Convertible seats (p. 69) Buckling and unbuckling seat belts (p. 59) Child safety (p. 63) SAFETY Convertible seats WARNING Suitable child restraints should always be used when children (depending on their age/size) are seated in the vehicle. • A small child's head represents a considerable part of its total weight and its neck is still very weak. Volvo recommends that children up to age 4 travel, properly restrained, facing rearward. In addition, Volvo recommends that children should ride rearward facing, properly restrained, as long as possible. • Convertible child seats should be installed in the rear seat only. • A rear-facing convertible seat should not be positioned behind the driver's seat unless there is adequate space for safe installation. Securing a convertible seat with a seat belt Route the seat belt through the convertible seat WARNING Always use a convertible seat that is suitable for the child's age and size. See the convertible seat manufacturer's recommendations. Do not place the convertible seat in the front passenger's seat Convertible seats can be used in either a forward or rearward-facing position, depending on the age and size of the child. 1. 2. Attach the seat belt to the convertible seat according to the manufacturer's instructions. Place the convertible seat in the rear seat of the vehicle. 69 SAFETY NOTE The locking retractor will automatically release when the seat belt is unbuckled and allowed to retract fully. 5. Press the convertible seat firmly in place, let the seat belt retract and pull it taut. A sound from the seat belt retractor's automatic locking function will be audible at this time and is normal. The seat belt should now be locked in place. WARNING It should not be possible to move the child restraint (child seat) more than 1 in. (2.5 cm) in any direction along the seat belt path. The convertible seat can be removed by unbuckling the seat belt and letting it retract completely. Fasten the seat belt 3. Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct click is audible. 4. Pull the shoulder section of the seat belt out as far as possible to activate the belt's automatic locking function. Ensure that the seat is securely in place WARNING Pull out the shoulder section of the seat belt 6. 70 Push and pull the convertible seat along the seat belt path to ensure that it is held securely in place by the seat belt. A child seat should never be used in the front passenger seat of any vehicle with a front passenger airbag – not even if the "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the rear-view mirror is illuminated. If the severity of an accident were to cause the airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious injury or death to a child seated in this position. SAFETY Related information • • • • • Booster cushions 3. ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 72) Top tether anchors (p. 74) Securing a booster cushion Fasten the seat belt by inserting the latch plate into the buckle (lock) until a distinct click is audible. Booster cushions (p. 71) Buckling and unbuckling seat belts (p. 59) Child safety (p. 63) Position the child correctly on the booster cushion Booster cushions are recommended for children who have outgrown convertible seats. 1. Place the booster cushion in the rear seat of the vehicle. 2. With the child properly seated on the booster cushion, attach the seat belt to or around the cushion according to the manufacturer's instructions. Positioning the seat belt 4. Ensure that the seat belt is pulled taut and fits snugly around the child. WARNING • The hip section of the three-point seat belt must fit snugly across the child's hips, not across the stomach. • The shoulder section of the three-point seat belt should be positioned across the chest and shoulder. • The shoulder belt must never be placed behind the child's back or under the arm. 71 SAFETY Related information • • • • • ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 72) Top tether anchors (p. 74) Child safety (p. 63) Buckling and unbuckling seat belts (p. 59) Integrated booster cushion* (p. 75) ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors 2. Lower anchors for ISOFIX/LATCH-equipped child seats are located in the rear, outboard seats, hidden below the backrest cushions. Kneel on the child restraint to press down the seat cushion and locate the anchors by feel. 3. Fasten the attachment on the child restraint's lower straps to the ISOFIX/ LATCH/LATCH lower anchors. 4. Firmly tension the lower child seat straps according to the manufacturer's instructions. Using the ISOFIX/LATCH lower child seat anchors WARNING Volvo's ISOFIX/LATCH anchors conform to FMVSS/CMVSS standards. Always refer to the child restraint system's manual for weight and size ratings. NOTE Location of the ISOFIX/LATCH anchors Symbols on the seat back upholstery mark the ISOFIX/LATCH anchor positions as shown. To access the anchors, kneel on the seat cushion and locate the anchors by feel. Always follow your child seat manufacturer's installation instructions, and use both ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and top tethers whenever possible. To access the anchors 1. 72 Put the child restraint in position. • The rear seat's center position is not equipped with ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors. When installing a child restraint in this position, attach the restraint's top tether strap (if it is so equipped) to the top tether anchorage point and secure the restraint with the vehicle's center seat belt. • Always follow your child seat manufacturer's installation instructions, and use both ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors and top tethers whenever possible. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. SAFETY Related information • Top tether anchors (p. 74) Lower child seat attachment points1 The vehicle is equipped with lower attachment points for child seats in the second row of seats. The lower attachment points are intended for use with rear-facing child restraints. G018631 Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's installation instructions when attaching a child restraint to these attachment points. Location Fasten the attachment correctly to the ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors WARNING 1 • Be sure to fasten the attachment correctly to the anchor (see the illustration). If the attachment is not correctly fastened, the child restraint may not be properly secured in the event of a collision. • The ISOFIX/LATCH lower child restraint anchors are only intended for use with child seats positioned in the outboard seating positions. These anchors are not certified for use with any child restraint that is positioned in the center seating position. When securing a child restraint in the center seating position, use only the vehicle's center seat belt. Attachment points in the second row of seats The attachment points in the second row of seats are in the rear section of the front seat's floor rails. Not available in all markets 73 SAFETY WARNING A child seat should never be used in the front passenger seat of any vehicle with a front passenger airbag – not even if the "Passenger airbag off" symbol near the rear-view mirror is illuminated (on vehicles equipped with Occupant Weight Sensor). If the severity of an accident were to cause the airbag to inflate, this could lead to serious injury or death to a child seated in this position. Top tether anchors Your Volvo is equipped with child restraint top tether anchorages in the rear seat. They are located on the rear side of the backrests. Refer also to the child seat manufacturer's instructions for information on securing the child seat. NOTE On models equipped with the optional cargo area cover, this cover should be removed before a child seat is attached to the child restraint anchors. Child restraints (p. 65) WARNING ISOFIX/LATCH lower anchors (p. 72) Occupant weight sensor (p. 78) Top tether anchors and symbols on the rear side of the second row backrests Securing a child seat 74 Firmly tension all straps. Child restraint anchorages Related information • • • – 1. Place the child restraint on the rear seat. 2. Route the top tether strap under the head restraint and attach it to the anchor. 3. Attach lower tether straps to the lower ISOFIX/LATCH anchors. If the child restraint is not equipped with lower tether straps, or the restraint is used in the center seating position, follow instructions for securing a child restraint using the Automatic Locking Retractor seat belt. • Always refer to the recommendations made by the child restraint manufacturer. • Volvo recommends that the top tether anchors be used when installing a forward-facing child restraint. • Never route a top tether strap over the top of the head restraint. The strap should be routed beneath the head restraint. • Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses. The anchorages are not able to withstand excessive forces on them in the event of collision if full harness seat belts or adult seat belts are installed to them. An adult who uses a SAFETY belt anchored in a child restraint anchorage runs a great risk of suffering severe injuries should a collision occur. • Do not install rear speakers that require the removal of the top tether anchors or interfere with the proper use of the top tether strap. Integrated booster cushion* Volvo's optional integrated booster cushion is located in the rear seat's center position and is designed to raise the child higher so that the shoulder strap crosses over the child's collarbone, not over the neck. Integrated booster cushion2 Related information • Child safety (p. 63) This booster cushion has been specially designed to help safeguard children in the rear seat. It should be stowed (folded down into the seat cushion) when not in use. When using an integrated booster cushion, the child must be secured with the vehicle's three-point seat belt. Correct seating position: child's head is below the head restraint and the shoulder belt is across the collarbone Use this booster cushion only with a child whose weight is between 33– 80 lbs (15–36 kg) and whose height is at least 37 in. (95 cm). In Canada, Transport Canada's weight recommendation is 40 – 80 lbs (18 – 36 kg). If using a booster cushion does not result in proper positioning of the shoulder strap, then the child should be placed in a properly secured child restraint. The shoulder belt must never be placed behind the child's back or under the arm. 2 Canada only: This cushion may be referred to as a built-in booster cushion. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 75 SAFETY WARNING DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can occur Follow all instructions on the booster cushion and in the vehicle's owner's manual. MAKE SURE THE BOOSTER CUSHION IS SECURELY LOCKED BEFORE THE CHILD IS SEATED. • Use this booster cushion only with chil- • The lap section of the seat belt is across the child's hips and not the abdomen. Related information • • • • Seat belts (p. 58) Raising the integrated booster cushion* The integrated booster cushion must be correctly raised before use. Child safety (p. 63) Raising the integrated booster cushion* (p. 76) Stowing the integrated booster cushion* (p. 77) dren whose height and weight are within the permitted limits. • In the event of a collision while the integrated booster cushion was occupied, the entire booster cushion and seat belt must be replaced. The booster cushion should also be replaced if it is badly worn or damaged in any way. This work should be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician only. Pull the handle forward and upward to release the booster cushion. Before driving, check that: 76 • The integrated booster cushion has been correctly raised and locked position. • That the seat belt is properly positioned and is taut. • The shoulder section of the seat belt is across the child's collarbone, not over the neck. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. SAFETY WARNING DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can occur Follow all instructions on the booster cushion and in the vehicle's owner's manual. MAKE SURE THE BOOSTER CUSHION IS SECURELY LOCKED BEFORE THE CHILD IS SEATED. • Use this booster cushion only with chil- Press the booster cushion rearward to lock it in position. Stowing the integrated booster cushion* The integrated booster cushion should be stowed (folded down) when not in use. dren whose height and weight are within the permitted limits. • In the event of a collision while the integrated booster cushion was occupied, the entire booster cushion and seat belt must be replaced. The booster cushion should also be replaced if it is badly worn or damaged in any way. This work should be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician only. Pull the handle forward to release the booster cushion. Related information • • Integrated booster cushion* (p. 75) Stowing the integrated booster cushion* (p. 77) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 77 SAFETY WARNING DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY can occur Follow all instructions on the booster cushion and in the vehicle's owner's manual. MAKE SURE THE BOOSTER CUSHION IS SECURELY LOCKED BEFORE THE CHILD IS SEATED. • Use this booster cushion only with chil- Press down on the center of the booster cushion to return it to the stowed position. dren whose height and weight are within the permitted limits. • NOTE The booster cushion must be in the stowed position before the rear seat backrests are folded down. CAUTION Be sure there are no loose objects under the booster cushion before it is stowed. Occupant weight sensor The Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) is designed to meet the regulatory requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208 and is designed to disable (will not inflate) the passenger's side front airbag under certain conditions. In the event of a collision while the integrated booster cushion was occupied, the entire booster cushion and seat belt must be replaced. The booster cushion should also be replaced if it is badly worn or damaged in any way. This work should be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician only. Related information • • Integrated booster cushion* (p. 75) Raising the integrated booster cushion* (p. 76) Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) indicator light Disabling the passenger's side front airbag Volvo recommends that ALL occupants (adults and children) shorter than 4 feet 7 inches (140 cm) be seated in the back seat of any vehicle with a front passenger side airbag and be properly restrained for their size and weight. The OWS works with sensors that are part of the front passenger's seat and seat belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly 78 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. SAFETY seated occupant and determine if the passenger's side front airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or disabled (will not inflate). NOTE The OWS will disable (will not inflate) the passenger's side front airbag when: • the front passenger's seat is unoccupied, or has small/medium objects in the front seat, • the system determines that an infant is present in a rear-facing infant seat that is installed according to the manufacturer's instructions, • • the system determines that a small child is present in a forward-facing child restraint that is installed according to the manufacturer's instructions, the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat, • a front passenger takes his/her weight off of the seat for a period of time, • a child or a small person occupies the front passenger's seat. The OWS uses a PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp which will illuminate and stay on to remind you that the passenger's side front airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is located in the overhead console, near the base of the rearview mirror. WARNING When the ignition is switched on, the OWS indicator light will go on for up to 10 seconds while the system performs a self-diagnostic test. However, if a fault is detected in the system: • • The OWS indicator light will stay on • The message Pass. Airbag OFF Service urgent will be displayed in the information display. The SRS warning light will come on and stay on WARNING If a fault in the system is detected and indicated as described, be aware that the passenger's side front airbag will not deploy in the event of a collision. In this case, the SRS system and Occupant Weight Sensor should be inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible. A • Never try to open, remove, or repair any components in the OWS system. This could result in system malfunction. Maintenance or repairs should only be carried out by an a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. • The front passenger's seat should not be modified in any way. This could reduce pressure on the seat cushion, which might interfere with the OWS system's function. Passenger's seat occupancy status OWS indicator light status Passenger's side front airbag status Seat unoccupied OWS indicator light lights up. Passenger's side front airbag disabled Seat occupied by low weight occupant/ objectA OWS indicator light lights up Passenger's side front airbag disabled Seat occupied by heavy occupant/ object OWS indicator light is not lit Passenger's side front airbag enabled Volvo recommends that children always be properly restrained in appropriate child restraints in the rear seats. Do not assume 79 SAFETY that the passenger's side front airbag is disabled unless the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit. Make sure the child restraint is properly installed. If there is any doubt as to the status of the passenger's side front airbag, move the child restraint to the rear seat. The OWS is designed to enable (may inflate) the passenger's side front airbag in the event of a collision anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger's seat. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp will be off and remain off. If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger's seat, but the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is on, it is possible that the person isn't sitting properly in the seat. If this happens: If you are considering modifying your vehicle in any way to accommodate a disability, for example by altering or adapting the driver's or front passenger's seat(s) and/or airbag systems, please contact Volvo at: 1 Volvo Drive • The seat belt should never be wrapped around an object on the front passenger's seat. This could interfere with the OWS system's function. • The front passenger's seat belt should never be used in a way that exerts more pressure on the passenger than normal. This could increase the pressure exerted on the weight sensor by a child, and could result in the airbag being enabled, which might cause it to deploy in the event of a collision, thereby injuring the child. P.O. Box 914 Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 1-800-458-1552 Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the person's legs comfortably extended. Volvo Cars of Canada Corp. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for about two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that person and enable the passenger's frontal airbag. 9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101 This condition reflects limitations of the OWS classification capability. It does not indicate OWS malfunction. No objects that add to the total weight on the seat should be placed on the front passenger's seat. If a child is seated in the front passenger's seat with any additional weight, this extra weight could cause the OWS system to enable the airbag, which might cause it to deploy in the event of a collision, thereby injuring the child. Customer Care Center • If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp remains on even after this, the person should be advised to ride in the rear seat. • Volvo Cars of North America, LLC Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in an upright position. • WARNING In the USA • • 80 Modifications In Canada National Customer Service Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9 1-800-663-8255 SAFETY WARNING • • Keep the following points in mind with respect to the OWS system. Failure to follow these instructions could adversely affect the system's function and result in serious injury to the occupant of the front passenger's seat: The full weight of the front seat passenger should always be on the seat cushion. The passenger should never lift him/ herself off the seat cushion using the armrest in the door or the center console, by pressing the feet on the floor, by sitting on the edge of the seat cushion, or by pressing against the backrest in a way that reduces pressure on the seat cushion. This could cause OWS to disable the front, passenger's side airbag. WARNING • Do not place any type of object on the front passenger's seat in such a way that jamming, pressing, or squeezing occurs between the object and the front seat, other than as a direct result of the correct use of the Automatic Locking Retractor/ Emergency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) seat belt. • No objects should be placed under the front passenger's seat. This could interfere with the OWS system's function. Related information • Airbag system (p. 83) Safety mode As a safety precaution after a collision, the functionality of some of the vehicle's systems may be reduced. If the vehicle has been involved in a collision, the text Safety mode may appear in the information display. NOTE This text can only be shown if the display is undamaged and the vehicle's electrical system is intact. Safety mode is a feature that is triggered if one or more of the safety systems such as the front/ side airbags inflatable curtain, etc., or one or more of the seat belt pretensioners has deployed. The collision may have damaged an important function in the vehicle, such as the fuel lines, sensors for one of the safety systems, the brake system, etc. 81 SAFETY WARNING Starting or moving a vehicle in safety mode • Never attempt to repair the vehicle yourself or to reset the electrical system after the vehicle has displayed Safety mode. This could result in injury or improper system function. If Safety mode has been set and damage to the vehicle is minor and there is no fuel leakage, you may attempt to start the engine and move the vehicle. • Restoring the vehicle to normal operating status should only be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. 1. Turn the start knob to STOP and release it. 2. The vehicle's electrical system will attempt to reset to normal mode. • After Safety mode has been displayed, if you detect the odor of fuel vapor, or see any signs of fuel leakage, do not attempt to start the vehicle. Leave the vehicle immediately. Related information • Starting or moving a vehicle in safety mode (p. 82) • General safety information (p. 56) Starting the engine The vehicle should be transported on a flatbed tow truck to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for inspection/repairs. Related information WARNING If the message Safety mode is still displayed, the vehicle should not be driven and must be towed. Concealed faults may make the vehicle difficult to control. 3. Try to start the vehicle. Moving the vehicle If the message Normal mode is displayed, the vehicle may be moved carefully from its present position if, for example, it is blocking traffic. It should, however, not be moved farther than is absolutely necessary. 82 WARNING Even if the vehicle appears to be drivable after Safety mode has been set, it should not be driven or towed (pulled on the ground by another vehicle ). There may be concealed damage that could make it difficult or impossible to control. • Safety mode (p. 81) SAFETY Safety systems Airbag system In addition to seat belts and airbags, your vehicle is also equipped with a number of other safety systems. As an enhancement to the three-point seat belts, your vehicle is equipped with an airbag system. In the event of an accident, there are a number of sensors in the vehicle that react and trigger safety systems such as Roll Stability Control, airbags, seat belt pretensioners, etc., depending on the severity of the collision. There are also mechanical systems such as the Whiplash Protection System. Related information • • • • • • General safety information (p. 56) Whiplash protection system (p. 89) Rollover protection system (p. 89) WARNING • • If the airbag warning light stays on after the engine has started or if it illuminates while you are driving, have the vehicle inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible. Never try to repair any component or part of the airbag systems yourself. Any interference in the system could cause malfunction and serious injury. All work on these systems should be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. WARNING If your vehicle has become flood-damaged in any way (e.g., soaked carpeting/standing water on the floor of the vehicle), do not attempt to start the vehicle. This may cause airbag deployment which could result in serious injury. Have the vehicle towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for repairs. Before attempting to tow the vehicle: 1. Switch off the ignition for at least 10 minutes and disconnect the battery. 2. Follow the instructions for manually overriding the shiftlock system. Deployed airbags Airbag system (p. 83) WARNING Seat belts (p. 58) Seat belt pretensioners (p. 59) If any of the airbags have deployed: • Do not attempt to drive the vehicle. Have it towed to a qualified repair facility. • If necessary seek medical attentIon. 83 SAFETY Driver/passenger side airbags The front airbags supplement the three-point seat belts. For these airbags to provide the protection intended, seat belts must be worn at all times. The location of the front airbags is indicated by SRS AIRBAG embossed on the steering wheel pad and above the glove compartment, and by decals on both sun visors and on the front and far right side of the dash. WARNING • The airbags in the vehicle are designed to be a SUPPLEMENT to–not a replacement for–the three-point seat belts. For maximum protection, wear seat belts at all times. Be aware that no system can prevent all possible injuries that may occur in an accident. • Never drive with your hands on the steering wheel pad/airbag housing. • The front airbags are designed to help prevent serious injury. Deployment occurs very quickly and with considerable force. During normal deployment and depending on variables such as seating position, one may experience abrasions, bruises, swellings, or other injuries as a result from deployment of one or both of the airbags. • When installing any accessory equipment, make sure that the front airbag system is not damaged. Any interference in the system could cause malfunction. The driver's side front airbag is folded and located in the steering wheel hub. The passenger's side front airbag is folded behind a panel located above the glove compartment. Driver's and passenger's side airbags The front airbag system The front airbag system includes gas generators surrounded by the airbags, and deceleration sensors that activate the gas generators, causing the airbags to be inflated with nitrogen gas. As the movement of the seats' occupants compresses the airbags, some of the gas is expelled at a controlled rate to provide better cushioning. Both seat belt pretensioners also deploy, minimizing seat belt slack. The entire process, including inflation and deflation of the airbags, takes approximately one fifth of a second. 84 Front airbag deployment • The front airbags are designed to deploy during certain frontal or front-angular collisions, impacts, or decelerations, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and object impacted. The airbags may also deploy in SAFETY certain non-frontal collisions where rapid deceleration occurs. • The airbag system sensors, which trigger the front airbags, are designed to react to both the impact of the collision and the inertial forces generated by it, and to determine if the intensity of the collision is sufficient for the seat belt pretensioners and/or airbags to be deployed. However, not all frontal collisions activate the front airbags. • If the collision involves a nonrigid object (e.g., a snow drift or bush), or a rigid, fixed object at a low speed, the front airbags will not necessarily deploy. • Front airbags do not normally deploy in a side impact collision, in a collision from the rear or in a rollover situation. • The amount of damage to the bodywork does not reliably indicate if the airbags should have deployed or not. NOTE • Deployment of front airbags occurs only one time during an accident. In a collision where deployment occurs, the airbags and seat belt pretensioners activate. Some noise occurs and a small amount of powder is released. The release of the powder may appear as smoke-like matter. This is a normal characteristic and does not indicate fire. • Volvo's front airbags use special sensors that are integrated with the front seat buckles. The point at which the airbag deploys is determined by whether or not the seat belt is being used, as well as the severity of the collision. • Collisions can occur where only one of the airbags deploys. If the impact is less severe, but severe enough to present a clear injury risk, the airbags are triggered at partial capacity. If the impact is more severe, the airbags are triggered at full capacity. WARNING • Do not use child safety seats or child booster cushions/backrests in the front passenger's seat. We also recommend that occupants under 4 feet 7 inches (140 cm) in height who have outgrown these devices sit in the rear seat with the seat belt fastened. See also the Occupant Weight Sensor information,. • Never drive with the airbags deployed. The fact that they hang out can impair the steering of your vehicle. Other safety systems can also be damaged. • The smoke and dust formed when the airbags are deployed can cause skin and eye irritation in the event of prolonged exposure. Should you have questions about any component in the SRS system, please contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician or Volvo customer support: In the USA Volvo Cars of North America, LLC Customer Care Center 1 Volvo Drive P.O. Box 914 Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 1-800-458-1552 85 SAFETY www.volvocars.com/us WARNING In Canada • No objects or accessory equipment, e.g. dashboard covers, may be placed on, attached to, or installed near the air bag hatch (the area above the glove compartment) or the area affected by airbag deployment. • There should be no loose articles, such as coffee cups on the floor, seat, or dashboard area. • Never try to open the airbag cover on the steering wheel or the passenger's side dashboard. This should only be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. • Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury to the vehicle occupants. Volvo Cars of Canada Corp. National Customer Service 9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101 Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9 1-800-663-8255 www.volvocars.com/ca Airbag decals Passenger's side airbag decal WARNING Airbag decal on the outside of both sun visors 86 • Children must never be allowed in the front passenger's seat. • Occupants in the front passenger's seat must never sit on the edge of the seat, sit leaning toward the instrument panel or otherwise sit out of position. • The occupant's back must be as upright as comfort allows and be against the seat back with the seat belt properly fastened. • Feet must be on the floor, e.g., not on the dash, seat or out of the window. Related information • • Seat belts (p. 58) Occupant weight sensor (p. 78) SAFETY Inflatable curtains WARNING The inflatable curtain is designed to help protect the heads of the occupants of the front seats and the occupant of the outboard rear seating positions in certain side impact collisions. This system consists of inflatable curtains located along the sides of the roof liners, stretching from the center of both front side windows to the rear edge of the rear side door windows. In certain side impacts, both the Inflatable Curtain (IC) and the side Impact Airbag System (SIPS airbag) will deploy. The IC and the SIPS airbag deploy simultaneously. • The IC system is a supplement to the Side Impact Protection System. It is not designed to deploy during collisions from the rear of the vehicle. • Never try to open or repair any components of the IC system. This should be done only by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. • Never hang heavy items from the ceiling handles. This could impede deployment of the Inflatable Curtain. • The cargo area and rear seat should not be loaded to a level higher than 2 in. (5 cm) below the upper edge of the rear side windows. Objects placed higher than this level could impede the function of the Inflatable Curtain. • In order for the IC to provide its best protection, both front seat occupants and both outboard rear seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened; adults using the seat belt and children using the proper child restraint system. Only adults should sit in the front seats. Children must never be allowed in the front passenger seat. • • Child safety (p. 63) Seat belts (p. 58) Related information • • Airbag system (p. 83) Side impact airbags (p. 88) 87 SAFETY Side impact airbags Components in the SIPS airbag system As an enhancement to the structural side impact protection built into your vehicle, it is also equipped with Side Impact Protection System (SIPS) airbags. This SIPS airbag system consists of a gas generator, the side airbag modules built into the outboard sides of both front seat backrests, and electronic sensors/wiring. WARNING The SIPS airbag system is designed to help increase occupant protection in the event of certain side impact collisions. The SIPS airbags are designed to deploy only during certain sideimpact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and point of impact. NOTE SIPS airbag deployment (one airbag) occurs only on the side of the vehicle affected by the impact. The airbags are not designed to deploy in all side impact situations. 88 • The SIPS airbag system is a supplement to the structural Side Impact Protection System and the three-point seat belt system. It is not designed to deploy during collisions from the front or rear of the vehicle or in rollover situations. • The use of seat covers on the front seats may impede SIPS airbag deployment. • No objects, accessory equipment or stickers may be placed on, attached to or installed near the SIPS airbag system or in the area affected by SIPS airbag deployment. • Never try to open or repair any components of the SIPS airbag system. This should be done only by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. • In order for the SIPS airbag to provide its best protection, both front seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened. • Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury to the occupants of the vehicle in the event of an accident. Related information • • Airbag system (p. 83) Seat belts (p. 58) SAFETY Rollover protection system Whiplash protection system Volvo'sRoll Stability Control (RSC) is a stability system designed to help minimize the risk of a rollover in emergency maneuvers or if a skid should occur. The Whiplash protection system (WHIPS) consists of specially designed hinges and brackets on the front seat backrests designed to help absorb some of the energy generated in a collision from the rear (when the vehicle is rearended). RSC uses a gyroscopic sensor that registers the amount of change in the lateral angle at which the vehicle is leaning. Using this information, RSC calculates the likelihood of a rollover. If there is an imminent risk of a rollover, the stability system is activated, power to the engine is cut and the brakes are applied to one or more of the wheels until the vehicle regains stability. WARNING The vehicle’s stability systems, including RSC, do not replace the driver’s responsibility for operating the vehicle in a safe manner. Speed and driving style should always be adapted to the current road, traffic and weather conditions. Posted speed limits should always be respected. WARNING • Occupants in the front seats must never sit out of position. The occupant's back must be as upright as comfort allows and be against the seat back with the seat belt properly fastened. • If your vehicle has been involved in a rearend collision, the front seat backrests must be inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician, even if the seats appear to be undamaged. Certain components in the WHIPS system may need to be replaced. • Do not attempt to service any component in the WHIPS system yourself. Function In the event of certain rear-end collisions, the hinges and brackets of the front seat backrests are designed to change position slightly to allow the backrest/head restraint to help support the occupant's head before moving slightly rearward. This movement helps absorb some of the forces that could result in whiplash. WARNING • • The WHIPS system is designed to supplement the other safety systems in your vehicle. For this system to function properly, the three-point seat belt must be worn. Please be aware that no system can prevent all possible injuries that may occur in an accident. The WHIPS system is designed to function in certain collisions from the rear, depending on the crash severity, angle and speed. WARNING • Boxes, suitcases, etc. wedged behind the front seats could impede the function of the WHIPS system. • If the rear seat backrests are folded down, cargo must be secured to prevent it from sliding forward against the front seat backrests in the event of a collision from the rear. This could interfere with the action of the WHIPS system. 89 SAFETY Do not place any objects behind the front seats that could impede the WHIPS function WARNING Any contact between the front seat backrests and the folded rear seat or a rear-facing child seat could impede the function of the WHIPS system. If the rear seat is folded down, the occupied front seats must be adjusted forward so that they do not touch the folded rear seat. Related information • 90 Safety systems (p. 83) INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Trip computer Current fuel consumption The trip computer registers and calculates information such as distance driven, fuel consumption and average speed. This information is displayed in the instrument panel. This gauge shows the current fuel consumption. This reading is updated once a second. To help promote fuel efficient driving, the trip computer provides readings for current and average fuel consumption. The trip computer includes the following gauges: • • • • • Trip odometers Odometer Current fuel consumption Distance to empty Tourist (alternative speedometer) Trip odometer There are two trip odometers: TM and TA. During a drive, the trip odometer registers: • • • • Mileage Driving time Average speed Average fuel consumption The values displayed are those since the last time the trip odometer was reset. Odometer The odometer registers the vehicle's total mileage and cannot be reset. 92 Distance to empty This function shows the approximate distance that can be driven on the fuel remaining in the tank. Displaying trip computer information The trip computer registers and calculates information such as distance driven, fuel consumption and average speed. This information is displayed in the instrument panel. The calculation is based on average fuel consumption during the last 20 miles (30 km) of driving and the amount of fuel remaining in the tank. When the gauge displays "----", there is very little useable fuel remaining in the tank; refuel as soon as possible. The accuracy of this figure may vary if your driving style changes. An economical driving style will generally increase this distance. Tourist (alternative speedometer) Use the right-side steering wheel keypad to navigate in the trip computer This is an alternative digital speedometer can be used when driving in areas in which the speed limit is listed in a different unit of measure. If the speedometer is in mph, this gauge will show the vehicle's speed in km/h and vice versa. Open/close the app menu Related information Confirm • • Displaying trip computer information (p. 92) Displaying trip statistics (p. 94) Left/right arrow keys Up/down arrow keys INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 1. 2. Press (1) to open the app menu in the instrument panel. > The top four lines show readings from trip odometer TM. The following four lines show readings from trip odometer TA. Scroll up/down in the list using (3). Resetting a trip odometer Related information • • Displaying trip statistics (p. 94) Trip computer (p. 92) Scroll to the selection buttons in the lines under TA and select the trip odometer to be displayed. • • • • • Current fuel consumption Distance to empty Odometer Trip odometers TM, TA or none Tourist (alternative speedometer). Select or deselect an alternative using the center button (4). The change will be made immediately. Reset trip odometer TM by pressing and holding the RESET button the left-side steering wheel lever. Trip odometer TA resets automatically if the ignition is switched off for more than 4 hours. Changing the unit of measure Change the units of measure for driven distance and fuel consumption in the center display's Top view by selecting Settings System Units and marking the desired unit. NOTE Changing these units of measure will also change the ones used in the Volvo navigation system*. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 93 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS HomeLink® Wireless Control System* Displaying trip statistics Trip computer statistics can be displayed graphically in the center display. HomeLink® can be used to open garage doors, gates, etc. Open the Driver performance app in the app menu to display trip statistics. Each bar in the graph represents a driving distance of 1 mile, 10 miles or 100 miles1 depending on the current scale; bars are added from the right and the bar at the far right shows the value for the current trip. Average fuel consumption is calculated from the most recent time at which the current trip odometer was reset. Trip statistic settings Select Preferences to: • • • 1 2 94 change the graph's scale Reset data after each trip (this occurs if the vehicle remains parked for more than 4 hours) Reset data for the current trip The illustration is generic; the layout may vary depending on the model or due to software updates Changing the unit of measure Change the units of measure for driven distance and fuel consumption in the center display's Top view. Button 1 1. Tap Settings in Top view. Button 2 2. Tap System Button 3 3. Under Units, select: Metric, Imperial or US. Units. Related information • • Trip computer (p. 92) Displaying trip computer information (p. 92) Indicator light The HomeLink®2 Wireless Control System provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters used to activate devices such as gate operators, garage door openers, entry door locks, security This can also be displayed in kilometers. HomeLink and the HomeLink house are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS systems, even home lighting. Additional information can be found on the Internet at, www.homelink.com/www.youtube.com/ HomeLinkGentex or by phoning the hotline at 1– 800–355–3515. WARNING • If you use HomeLink® to open a garage door or gate, be sure no one is near the gate or door while it is in motion. • When programming a garage door opener, it is advised to park outside of the garage. • Do not use HomeLink® with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door that cannot detect an object - signaling the door to stop and reverse - does not meet current U.S. federal safety standards. For more information, contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com. Retain the original transmitter of the RF device you are programming for use in other vehicles as well as for future HomeLink programming. It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons be erased for security purposes. See the article "Programming HomeLink." Related information • Programming the HomeLink® Wireless Control System* (p. 95) Programming the HomeLink® Wireless Control System* HomeLink® can be used to open garage doors, gates, etc. NOTE Some vehicles may require the ignition to be switched on or be in the “accessories” position for programming and/or operation of HomeLink. It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal. The HomeLink buttons must be reset first. When this has been completed, Homelink is in learning mode so that you can perform programming. To program HomeLink® 1. Press the HomeLink® button to be programmed. The HomeLink® indicator will begin flashing yellow once a second. You do not need to continue holding the button. 2. Point the hand-held transmitter toward the HomeLink® button to be programmed and hold it approx. 6–12 inches (15–30 cm) away from the HomeLink® button. Do not obstruct the HomeLink® indicator light. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 95 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 3. Press and hold the button on the original remote control that is to be programmed on HomeLink® and observe the HomeLink® indicator light. Hold the button until the indicator light has changed from flashing yellow once a second to either flashing green 10 times a second or by glowing steadily green. When the HomeLink® indicator light flashes or glows steadily green, the button on the original remote control can be released. Note: for certain remote controls, the instructions listed under "Gate operators/ Canadian programming" at the end of this article should be used instead of step 3. 4. Press the programmed HomeLink® button and check the indicator light. Indicator light glows steadily green: programming has been completed. The garage door, gate, etc., should now be activated when the programmed button is pressed. Indicator light flashes 10 times a second: press the HomeLink® button that is being programmed. Hold it for 2 seconds and release it. Repeat the “press/hold/release” sequence a second time, and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener, repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming process. Programming should now be completed and the garage door, gate, etc., should now be activated when the programmed button is pressed. If the garage door, etc. still does not react: continue with steps 6-8 to complete programming. 96 5. Locate the "training" button on the garage door opener, etc. The designation and color of the button may vary, depending on the manufacturer. It is usually located near the antenna attachment on the device. 6. Press the device's "training" button. When this has been done, step 8 must be completed within 30 seconds. 7. Press and hold the HomeLink® button being programmed for 2 seconds and release it. Repeat the “press/hold/release” sequence a second time, and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener, repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming process. Programming should now be completed and the garage door, gate, etc., should now be activated when the programmed button is pressed. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Gate Operator/Canadian Programming Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to “timeout” in the same manner. If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator or garage door opener by using the “Programming” procedures, replace “Programming HomeLink” step 3 with the following: • Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release - every two seconds (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light. Now you may release both the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter buttons. Proceed with “Programming” step 4 to complete. Using HomeLink® When programming has been completed, HomeLink® can be used instead of the original remote controls. To operate, press and hold the programmed HomeLink® button until the trained device begins to operate3 (this may take several seconds). The 3 indicator light will glow steadily or flash when the button has been pressed. Activation will now occur for the trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). NOTE If the ignition is switched off, HomeLink will function for 30 minutes after the driver's door has been opened. For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time. In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions, contact HomeLink at: www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/ HomeLinkGentex or by phoning the hotline at 1– 800–355–3515. Resetting HomeLink® buttons Use the following procedure to reset (erase programming) from the three HomeLink® buttons (individual buttons cannot be reset but can be “reprogrammed” as outlined in the following section): 1. Press and hold HomeLink® buttons 1 and 3 for approx. 10 seconds until the indicator light begins to flash green. 2. Release both buttons. > HomeLink® is now in the training (or learning) mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with “To program HomeLink®" above. Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button To reprogram an individual HomeLink® button: 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button. DO NOT release the button. 2. The yellow indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the HomeLink button, proceed with “To program HomeLink®" step 1 above. For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at: www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/ HomeLinkGentex or by phoning the hotline at 1– 800–355–3515. FCC (USA) and IC (Canada) This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and Industry Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation. WARNING: The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and IC Do not hold the button for more than 20 seconds as this will clear the programming of the button. 97 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party are prohibited. Instruments and controls Display/function/control This overview shows the location of the primary displays, and controls/buttons/switches. Right-side steering wheel keypad NOTE Steering wheel adjustment The transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the device.4 Horn Left-side steering wheel keypad Hood open Display lighting, tailgate unlock, tailgate open* Related information • HomeLink® Wireless Control System* (p. 94) Display/function/control Parking lights, daytime running lights, low beams, high beams, turn signals, front fog lights/cornering lights*, rear fog lights, trip computer reset Transmission manual shifting paddle* Head-up-display* Instrument panel Wipers/washers, rain sensor* 4 98 The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Display/function/control Display/function/control Display/function/control Front reading lights and courtesy lighting Start knob Power windows, power door mirrors Laminated panoramic roof* Drive modes Controls for power front seat* Ceiling console display Parking brake Manual rearview mirror auto-dim (certain markets only) Auto-hold brakes Display/function/control Center display Hazard warning flashers, max. defroster/ heated windshield*, media player, glove compartment open Gear selector Display/function/control Memory control for: • • • power seats* door mirrors head-up display* Door open, door/tailgate lock/unlock * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 99 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Adjusting the power door mirrors Storing the position* The control on the driver's door is used to adjust the position of the door mirrors. The mirror positions are stored in the key memory* when the vehicle has been locked with the remote key. When the vehicle is unlocked with the same remote key, the mirrors and the driver's seat adopt the stored positions when the driver's door is opened. The mirrors' position can also be stored in the power seat's* memory. Automatically tilting the door mirrors when parking5 This function can be activated/deactivated in the center display. 1. Tap Settings in Top view. 2. Tap My Car 3. Under Tilt Mirror in Reverse, select Off, Driver, Passenger or Both to activate/ deactivate and select which mirror to tilt. Tilting the door mirrors when parking5 The door mirrors can be tilted down to help give the driver a better view along the sides of the vehicle, for example when parallel parking. – Door mirror controls Adjusting 1. Press the L button for the left door mirror or the R button for the right door mirror. The light in the button comes on. 2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the center. 3. Press the L or R button again. The light should no longer be on. WARNING Objects seen in the mirrors may appear further away than they actually are. 5 100 To activate this function, select reverse gear and press the L or R mirror control button to tilt the mirror down. The door mirror will reset to its normal position: • after 10 seconds when reverse is disengaged • immediately if you press the corresponding L or R button again. NOTE Only one mirror can be tilted down at a time. Mirrors. Folding mirrors* When parking in a limited space, the mirrors can be folded in: 1. Press the L and R buttons at the same time (the ignition must be in at least mode I). 2. Release the buttons after approx. 1 second. The mirrors will stop automatically when they are completely folded in. Fold out the mirrors by pressing the L and R at the same time. The mirrors will stop automatically when they return to their original positions. Automatic folding when the vehicle is locked5 The mirrors can be folded in/out automatically when the vehicle is locked/unlocked. This function can be activated/deactivated in the center display. Only on models equipped with a power driver's seat. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 1. Tap Settings in Top view. Laminated panoramic roof* 2. Tap My Car 3. Select Fold Mirrors When Locking to activate/deactivate. The laminated panoramic roof is divided into two sections and only the front section can be opened; it can be slid horizontally to the open or closed positions or its rear edge can be raised and lowered to allow ventilation. Mirrors. Resetting the mirrors' position A mirror that has been moved manually (e.g., bumped into in a parking lot, etc.) has to be returned to its normal position electrically before automatic folding will function correctly. 1. Fold in the mirrors with the L and R buttons. 2. Fold out the mirrors with the L and R buttons. The laminated panoramic roof also has a sun shade made of perforated fabric that is located below the sections of glass. This shade can be opened or closed, for example when driving in bright sunlight. CAUTION • Remove ice and snow before opening the laminated panoramic roof. • Do not operate the laminated panoramic roof if it is frozen closed. • Never place heavy objects on the laminated panoramic roof. Wind blocker The mirrors have now been reset to their original positions. Auto-dim* Settings can be made for the auto-dim function in the rearview mirror. 1. Tap Settings in Top view. 2. Tap My Car 3. Under Auto Dim Mirrors, select Normal, Dark or Light. Mirrors. Related information • Using the power seat memory function* (p. 162) The laminated panoramic roof and the sun shade are operated using the controls in the ceiling console, near the rear-view mirror. The controls are activated when the vehicle's ignition is in mode I or II. The laminated panoramic roof is equipped with a wind blocker that folds up when the roof is open. Related information • Operating the laminated panoramic roof* (p. 102) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 101 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Operating the laminated panoramic roof* Perform this procedure in reverse order to close the laminated panoramic roof and/or sun shade. When opened automatically, the sun shade and roof open completely. Quick open/close The laminated panoramic roof and the sun shade can be opened/closed at the same time: In the ventilation position, the rear edge of the front section of the roof is raised. • Open: pull the control back (to the auto open position) twice in quick succession and release it. • Close: push the control forward (to the auto close position) twice in quick succession and release it. Operation WARNING • 102 During manual closing, if the laminated panoramic roof is obstructed, immediately open it again. Manual open (arrow points toward the rear of the vehicle) • Never open or close the laminated panoramic roof if it is obstructed in any way. • Never allow a child to operate the laminated panoramic roof. • • Never leave a child alone in a vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, ensure that the ignition is in mode 0. Never leave a remote key in the vehicle. The laminated panoramic roof and sun shade can be operated when the ignition is in mode I or II. • Never extend any object or body part though the open laminated panoramic roof, even if the vehicle's ignition is completely switched off. 1. To open the sun shade completely, pull the control as far back as possible (to the auto open position) and release it. 2. To fully open the laminated panoramic roof, pull the control as far back as possible a second time (to the auto open position) and release it. Manual operation 1. Opening the sun shade: Pull the control back to the first stop (the manual open position) and hold it until the sun shade has opened to the position of your choice. 2. Opening the rear edge of the laminated panoramic roof: Pull the control back to the first stop (the manual open position) a second time to open the rear edge of the laminated panoramic roof. 3. Opening the front glass section: Pull the control back to the first stop (the manual open position) a third time and hold it until the laminated panoramic roof has opened to the position of your choice. Auto open Manual close Auto close Automatic operation Perform this procedure in reverse order to close the laminated panoramic roof and/or sun shade. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS NOTE For manual opening, the sun shade must first be fully open before it will be possible to open the laminated panoramic roof. When closing, the laminated panoramic roof must be fully closed before the sun shade can be closed. Tilt (ventilation) position If the sun shade is completely closed, it will open approximately 2 inches (5 cm) when the laminated panoramic roof is opened to the tilt position. The auto-stop feature also functions when the laminated panoramic roof or sun shade is being opened. Automatically closing the sun shade6 The auto-stop feature can be overridden if the closing procedure has been interrupted (e.g., due to ice around the laminated panoramic roof) by pressing and holding the control forward/down until the roof is closed. When the vehicle is parked in sunny/warm weather, the sun shade can be closed automatically 15 minutes after the vehicle has been locked to help keep the temperature in the passenger compartment down and to protect the upholstery from the sun. This function is deactivated by default and can be activated/deactivated: 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. 2. Tap My Car Locking. Select Auto Close Sun Curtain to activate/deactivate. Auto-stop Tilt position, raised at the rear edge Open (raise the rear edge of the front glass section) by pressing the rear edge of the control upward. Close by pulling the rear edge of the control downward/forward and holding it until the laminated panoramic roof has closed completely. 6 The laminated panoramic roof has an auto-stop feature that is triggered if the glass section of the roof or the sun shade is blocked in any way when being closed. In this case, the laminated panoramic roof or sun shade will stop and reverse automatically approximately 2 in. (5 cm) from the point at which it was blocked (or will open fully to the tilt position). Not available in all markets 103 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Power windows Operating the power windows All power windows can be operated using the control panel in the driver's door. The control panels in the other doors only operate the window in the respective doors. All power windows can be operated using the control panel in the driver's door. The control panels in the other doors only operate the window in the respective doors. Operating WARNING • Always put the ignition in mode 0 and remove the ignition key from the vehicle when the vehicle is unattended • Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. • Make sure that the windows are completely unobstructed before they are operated. Operating the power windows Manual up/down Auto up/down. Driver's door control panel Switch for power child safety locks* and disengaging rear power window buttons Rear window controls Front window controls For the power windows to function, the ignition must be in at least mode I. When the vehicle has been running, the power windows can be operated for several minutes after the ignition has been switched off, or until a door has been opened. Related information • • 104 Operating the power windows (p. 104) Child safety locks (p. 218) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS NOTE • • Movement of the windows will stop if they are obstructed in any way. If this happens twice in succession, the automatic function will not work for several minutes and the window can be closed by holding the button up. To reduce buffeting wind noise if the rear windows are opened, also open the front windows slightly. Manual up/down – Move one of the controls up/down slightly. > The power windows move up/down as long as the control is held in position. Related information • Child safety locks (p. 218) Rearview mirror The interior rearview mirror has an auto-dim function that helps reduce glare from following vehicle's headlights. Auto-dim function The interior rearview mirror’s auto-dim function is controlled by two sensors: one pointing forward (located on the forward-facing side of the mirror, which monitors the amount of ambient light) and one pointing rearward (located on the side of the mirror facing the driver at the upper edge, which senses the strength of following vehicles' headlights), and work together to help eliminate glare. NOTE Auto up/down – Obstructing the forward sensor with e.g., parking stickers, transponders, etc., or the rear sensor by loading the cargo area or the rear seat in such a way that light is prevented from reaching the sensor will reduce the auto-dim function in the interior rearview mirror and optional auto-dim function in the door mirrors. Move one of the controls up/down as far as possible and release it. > The window will open or close completely. Resetting If the battery has been disconnected, the auto open function must be reset so that it will work properly 1. Gently raise the front section of the button to close the window and hold it for one second. 2. Release the button briefly. 3. Raise the front section of the button again for one second. Related information • Adjusting the power door mirrors (p. 100) 105 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Using sun shades Settings view Sub-categories Settings Both rear doors have integrated sun shades. Many of the vehicle's function settings can be made from the center display's Settings view. Suspension Global Opening Settings view Exterior Sound Personal Rear doors 1. Pull down the tab on the upper edge of the center display to show the Top view. 2. Tap Settings. > All of the main categories in which settings can be made will be listed. My Car Hook and locking mechanism 1. 2. Pull up the sun shade and hook it to the upper section of the door frame. Lock the sun shade by moving the locking mechanism upward. The window can be opened/closed when the sun shade is being used. 106 Sub-categories Settings Displays Personal IntelliSafe Mixed Park Assist Global Drive Mode/Individual Drive Mode* Mixed Lights Audio Sub-categories Settings Sound Experience* Personal Tone Personal Balance Personal System Volumes Mixed Navigation Sub-categories Settings Map Personal Route Personal Mixed Traffic Personal Mirrors Personal Guidance Personal Locking Mixed System Personal Electric Parking Brake Mixed Seats Mixed Sub-categories Settings Wipers Mixed AM/FM radio Personal DAB Personal Media * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Sub-categories Settings Sub-categories Settings Gracenote® Personal Keyboard Layouts Global Video Personal Voice Control Personal Units Personal Communication Sub-categories Settings Storage – Phone – Software Updates – Text Messages – Global Reset – Bluetooth – Services – Wi-Fi Global Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot Global Vehicle Modem Internet Global Volvo On Call – Volvo Service Networks Global Climate The main category Climate has no sub-categories. All settings in this category are personal. System Sub-categories Settings Driver Profile Personal Date & Time – Language Personal Related information • • Center display overview (p. 29) • Using the center display (p. 46) Navigating in the center display's views (p. 39) Categories in Settings view Settings view consists of a number of main categories and sub-categories that contain settings and information for many of the vehicle's features and functions. The main categories in Settings view are: My Car, Sound, Navigation, Media, Communication, Climate and System. Each main category, in turn, contains several subcategories with possible settings. The table shows the first level of sub-categories. The possible settings for a function or area are described in greater detail in their respective articles in the owner's manual. For system settings not described in the respective articles, see "Changing system settings in Settings view." Certain settings are personal, which means that they can be saved in a driver profile. Other settings are global and are not linked to a driver profile. The table indicates if a category's settings are personal, global or a combination of the two. My Car Sub-categories Settings Displays Personal IntelliSafe Combination Park Assist Global 107 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Sub-categories Settings Sub-categories Settings Map Personal Drive Mode/Individual Drive Mode* Combination Lights Combination Route Personal Mirrors Personal Traffic Personal Locking Combination Guidance Personal Electric Parking Brake Combination System Personal Seats Combination Wipers Combination Sub-categories Settings Suspension Global AM/FM radio Personal Exterior Sound Personal SiriusXM Personal Gracenote® Personal Video Personal Sound 108 Navigation Sub-categories Settings Vehicle Modem Internet Global Volvo On Call – Volvo Service Networks Global Climate The main category Climate has no sub-categories. The settings in this category are personal. System Media Sub-categories Settings Sound Experience* Personal Tone Personal Sub-categories Settings Balance Personal Phone – System Volumes Combination Text Messages – Bluetooth – Wi-Fi Global Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot Global Communication Sub-categories Settings Driver Profile Personal Date & Time – Language Personal Keyboard Layouts Global Voice Control Personal Units Personal Storage – Software Updates – Global Reset – Services – * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Related information • • • Driver profiles (p. 112) Settings view (p. 106) Changing system settings in Settings view (p. 109) Changing system settings in Settings view 3. • Metric: kilometers, liters and degrees Cel- Settings view's main category System contains general settings and information, such as language, units of measure, etc. sius. • The system settings under Driver Profile, Date & Time, Keyboard Layouts, Voice Control, Software Updates, Global Reset and Services are described in their respective articles in the owner's manual. Changing system languages 1. Pull down the center display's Top view and tap Settings. 2. Tap System 3. Select a new system language. Languages that can be used for voice commands are indicated by a voice control symbol. > This change affects the language used in the instrument panel, center display and the head-up display*. Language. Changing units of measure Changing length and volume units 1. Pull down the center display's Top view and tap Settings. 2. Tap System Units Units. Select one of the following measurement standards: Imperial: miles, gallons and degrees Celsius. • US: miles, gallons and degrees Fahren- heit. > This change affects the units of measure used in the instrument panel, center display and the head-up display* Changing tire inflation pressure units 1. Pull down the center display's Top view and tap Settings. 2. Tap System 3. Select a unit of measure for tire pressure. > This changes the tire inflation pressure units used in the Car status app in the center display. Units Tire Pressure. Viewing storage information 1. Pull down the center display's Top view and tap Settings. 2. Tap System Storage. > Storage information for the vehicle's hard drive will be displayed, including total capacity, available capacity and the amount of storage space used by the apps that have been installed. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 109 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Viewing the VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) Linking a remote key to a driver profile 1. Pull down the center display's Top view and tap Settings. 2. Tap System Vehicle Identification Number. > The vehicle's VIN will be displayed. A remote key can be linked to a driver profile, which means that all of the settings stored in the driver profile will apply each time that particular remote key is used with the vehicle. 5. A remote key is not initially linked to a specific driver profile. When the key is used to unlock the vehicle/start the engine for the first time, the Guest profile will be used. Select Connect key to link the selected profile to the key currently being used. A profile can only be linked to the remote key that is currently being used. If there are several keys in the vehicle at the same time, More than one key is found, put the key you want to connect on backup reader will be displayed. A driver profile can be selected manually each time the vehicle is unlocked/started without a remote key being linked to that profile. If the key has previously been linked to a driver profile, it is not necessary to manually select a profile when that particular key is used. Linking a remote key to a driver profile for the first time 110 1. Pull down the center display's Top view and tap Settings. 2. Tap System 3. Tap the profile to be linked to the remote key. The Guest profile cannot be linked to a remote key. 4. Tap Edit Profile. Driver Profile. Location of the backup reader in the tunnel console > When Profile connected to key is displayed, the remote key and the selected driver profile have been linked. 6. Tap OK to confirm. > The key currently in use will remain linked to the selected driver profile as long as the Connect key box is not deselected. Related information • • • Driver profiles (p. 112) Editing a driver profile (p. 114) Remote key (p. 224) INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Changing settings in apps App view, which is one of the center display's basic views, contains all of the apps installed in the vehicle. From Home view, navigate to App view by swiping the screen from right to left. Apps for integrated (basic) functions Certain apps in your vehicle are factory-installed, such as FM, USB and CD and are part of Sensus. Settings in these apps can be changed in the center display's Top view. Changing settings for a basic app 1. Tap one of the basic apps, for example FM radio. 2. Pull down Top view. 3. Tap FM Radio Settings. 4. Change the desired settings and confirm. 5. Press the Home button below the center display or tap the screen outside of Top view or pull up Top view to return to your original view. See also the article "Categories in Settings view." Third party apps Third party apps have to be downloaded e.g., Volvo ID. Settings for these apps are made in the apps themselves, not in Top view. Related information • • • Settings view (p. 106) Resetting the settings view Navigating in the center display's views (p. 39) All of the changes made under Settings view can be reset to their default values at the same time. Categories in Settings view (p. 107) Different ways of resetting There are three ways of resetting the Settings view. • Factory Reset: clears all data and media and resets all settings to their default values. • Reset Vehicle Settings: resets global settings to their default values. • Reset Personal Settings: clears personal data and resets to default values. Resetting Tap Settings in the center display's Top 1. view. 2. Tap System 3. Select the desired alternative. > A popup window will appear. 4. Global Reset. Tap OK to confirm your choice. To confirm Reset Personal Settings, tap Reset for the active profile or Reset for all profiles. > The selected settings will be reset. 111 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Related information • • • Settings view (p. 106) Driver profiles (p. 112) Resetting user data when the vehicle changes owners (p. 112) Resetting user data when the vehicle changes owners When the vehicle changes owners, all user settings should be reset to the factory defaults. Driver profiles Many of the vehicle's settings can be adapted to the driver's personal preference and saved in one or more driver profiles. When the vehicle changes owners, it is essential to reset all user data and system settings to their factory defaults, including Volvo On Call. Related information • • • Resetting the settings view (p. 111) Volvo ID (p. 27) Changing ownership of a vehicle with Volvo On Call (p. 424) Different settings can be saved and also linked to different remote keys. When a key with a certain profile is used, the vehicle's settings are changed according to the specific driver profile linked to that key. Two types of profiles When the center display is activated, the name of the driver profile linked to the remote key used to unlock the vehicle will be shown at the top of the display. No profiles are initially linked to the remote keys and the Guest profile is selected automatically. No settings can be saved in this profile; the Guest profile is intended for use if the remote key is lent to another driver. A driver profile can be created for each of the vehicle's remote keys. If a new key is purchased, a new profile is also added to the vehicle's system. 112 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Changing a driver profile The driver profile to be used can be changed as soon as the center display is activated or at a later time using the display's Top view. A profile can also be changed even if the current remote key is linked to a different profile. Changing driver profiles from the center display's Top view Changing driver profiles when the center display is activated • • • • • • • Power door mirrors The HUD (head-up display) position Climate system Locks Seats Voice commands and language Lights A number of other settings can also be personalized. Global settings can be changed but not stored in a driver profile. Related information • • • 1. Tap the driver profile shown at the top of the center display when it is activated. 2. Select the desired profile from the list. • 1. From the center display's Home view, pull down the Top view and select Driver Profile. 2. Select the desired profile from the list. Linking a remote key to a driver profile (p. 110) Editing a driver profile (p. 114) Importing/exporting a driver profile from/to a USB flash drive (p. 115) Categories in Settings view (p. 107) Settings that can be saved in a driver profile Many of the settings made in the vehicle will automatically be saved in the selected driver profile until it is modified. These settings include: 113 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Editing a driver profile 3. The driver profiles can be edited to e.g., change their names or lock a profile. 4. Tap the Profile Name box. > A keyboard will be displayed and can be used to change the name. Resetting driver profile changes Save the changes by tapping Save changes. > The name has now been changed. The changes will be saved automatically in the profile if it is not locked (see "Locking/ unlocking a driver profile" below). 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. 2. Select System Global Reset Personal Settings. 3. Select one of the following: Reset for the active profile, Reset for all profiles or Cancel. Settings changes that have been saved in one or more driver profiles can be reset. Locking/unlocking a driver profile In some cases, it may be desirable to not save certain settings in a driver profile. For this reason, the profile can be locked. To lock/unlock a profile: All types of changes in driver profiles are made from the center display's Top view: Settings System Driver Profile. 1. Changing a profile's name 114 Mark the profile to be locked in the Driver Profile window (the Guest profile cannot be locked). > A list under the selected profile will open in which the profile can be edited. Changing a driver profile's name is done from the Driver Profile window: 2. Tap Edit Profile. > The Edit Profile window will open. 1. Mark the profile whose name is to be changed (the Guest profile cannot change names). 3. Tap the Protect My Profile box to lock/ unlock the profile. 2. Tap Edit Profile. > A list under the selected profile will open in which the profile can be edited. 4. Save the changes by tapping Save changes in Edit Profile. > Changes to a locked profile will not be saved automatically. The changes will have to saved manually Reset Related information • Linking a remote key to a driver profile (p. 110) • • • • Driver profiles (p. 112) Resetting the settings view (p. 111) Using the center display keyboard (p. 32) Using the center display (p. 46) INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Importing/exporting a driver profile from/to a USB flash drive 4. A driver profile can be imported or exported to another vehicle using a USB flash drive. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. 2. Tap System 3. Insert a flash drive in the USB socket in the tunnel console. Related information • Driver profiles (p. 112) NOTE The following steps describe the procedure for importing or exporting settings saved in a driver profile to a USB flash drive: 1. Select Import Profile From USB/Export Profile To USB. • The Guest profile cannot be imported or exported • Several profiles can be exported to USB but only one profile can be imported. When a profile is imported, it overwrites the one currently being used in the vehicle. Driver Profile. 5. Select the profile(s) to be imported/exported. 6. Select OK. If an export does not succeed, this may be due to: • • USB flash drive is full. USB flash drive was not inserted correctly or was removed before the export was completed. If an import does not succeed, this may be due to: USB socket in the tunnel console • USB flash drive was not inserted correctly or was removed before the import was completed. • No driver profile had been stored on the USB flash drive. • The driver profile file on the USB flash drive is damaged. 115 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Ambient temperature sensor Settings Clock The ambient temperature sensor displays the temperature outside the vehicle in the instrument panel. Changing measurement standard in the center display: The clock is displayed in the instrument panel and in the center display. 1. Pull down the center display's Top view and tap Settings. 2. Tap System 3. Select measurement standard, Metric, Imperial or US. Units. Related information • • Instrument panel (p. 128) Climate system sensors (p. 177) Location of the clock in the instrument panel Location of the ambient temperature sensor (temperature shown here in degrees Celsius) NOTE When the ambient temperature is between 23° and 36 °F (–5° and +2 °C), a snowflake symbol will be displayed next to the temperature. This symbol serves as a warning for possible slippery road surfaces. Please note that this symbol does not indicate a fault with your vehicle. At low speeds or when the vehicle is not moving, the temperature readings may be slightly higher than the actual ambient temperature. 116 Certain messages and other information in the instrument panel may temporarily obscure the clock. In the center display, the clock is located at the upper right of the status bar. Settings for date and time Select Settings System Date & Time in the center display's Top view to change the format for displaying date or time. Set the date and time by tapping the up or down arrows on the center display. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Automatic time The function Automatic Time is also available, which adjusts the time zone automatically, depending on the vehicle's location. If Automatic Time has not been selected, set the date and time manually by tapping the up or down arrows on the center display. Head-up display (HUD)* The head-up display provides information such as speed, cruise control functions, navigation, traffic sign information, incoming phone calls, etc. at the base of the windshield in the driver's field of vision. Daylight savings time In certain countries, an automatic change to daylight savings time can be selected by activating Auto. If the automatic change is not available, change to daylight savings time by selecting On or Off. Example of information in the head-up display. The information shown is generic and may vary slightly from market to market or in terms of units of measure Related information • • • Instrument panel (p. 128) Speed Center display overview (p. 29) Cruise control Using the center display (p. 46) Incoming phone call Text and symbols are projected on the windshield, enabling the driver to see this information without taking his/her eyes off the road. This information is only visible from the driver's seat. CAUTION The HUD's projection unit is located in the dashboard. Avoid scratching or placing objects on the unit's glass surface. Navigation Road signs Symbols such as the following ones may appear temporarily in the HUD. If the warning symbol appears, read the warning text in the instrument panel. If the information symbol appears, read the warning text in the instrument panel. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 117 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS NOTE If the Forward Collision Warning* is activated, the information in the HUD will be replaced by a graphic for Forward Collision Warning. This graphic will illuminate even if the HUD is turned off. NOTE The driver's ability to see information in the HUD may be impeded by: • • • • • • A graphic for the Forward Collision Warning flashes to attract the driver's attention Via settings 1. Tap Settings in Top view. 2. Tap My Car the use of polarizing sunglasses 3. Select/deselect Head-Up Display. not sitting in the center of the driver's seat This selection can be saved as a personal setting in a driver profile. objects on the HUD projector glass on the dashboard certain ambient lighting conditions certain types of vision problems, which may also result in headaches or eye strain. Activating/deactivating and settings for HUD are only possible when an image is projected on the windshield. The engine must be running. Activating/deactivating HUD HUD can be activated in two ways in the center display: Via Function view Tap the Head-up display button. Displays. Selecting display alternatives Tap Settings in Top view. 1. 2. Tap My Car Displays Display Options. Head-Up Tap Go to the center display's Settings view and select Driver Display & Head-up Display. 3. Select : Show Navigation In Head-Up Display, Road Sign Information In HeadUp Display, Show Driver Support In Head-Up Display or Show Phone In Head-Up Display. This selection can be saved as a personal setting in a driver profile. Adjusting HUD brightness and height position The engine must be running before the HUD's brightness and height position can be adjusted. 118 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Lower position Confirm This selection can be saved as a personal setting in a driver profile. 1. Tap Head-up display adjustments in the center display's Function view. 2. Use the right-side steering wheel keypad to adjust the HUD's brightness and height position on the windshield in the driver's field of vision. Adapting brightness The brightness of the graphics displayed in the HUD are also automatically adjusted according to ambient lighting conditions. HUD brightness is also affected by adjustments to the brightness of the other displays in the vehicle. 1. Pull down the center display's Top view and tap Settings. 2. Select My Car Displays Display Calibration. 3. Use the buttons on the right-side steering wheel keypad to calibrate the horizontal position. Head-Up Power front seat* memory function The position of the HUD can be stored in the power seat's memory function. Replacing the windshield Vehicles with a head-up display have a special type of windshield meeting the requirements for displaying projected information. If the windshield has to be replaced, contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician or authorized workshop. The correct type of replacement windshield must be used for a head-up display. Reduce brightness Calibrating the horizontal position Increase brightness If the windshield has been replaced, it may be necessary to calibrate the HUD's horizontal position. This means that the projected image will have to be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise. To do so: Higher position Rotate counterclockwise Rotate clockwise Confirm Cleaning Wipe the glass covering the HUD projection unit carefully with a clean and dry (or very slightly damp if necessary) microfiber cloth. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 119 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Never use strong stain removers. For difficult cleaning conditions, a special cleaning agent can be purchased at a Volvo retailer. Related information • • • Driver profiles (p. 112) Center display overview (p. 29) Navigating in the center display's views (p. 39) Voice control Voice commands make it possible for the driver to voice-control certain functions in the media player, a Bluetooth-connected cell phone, climate system and the Volvo navigation system*. Voice control offers convenience and enables the driver to keep his/her hands on the steering wheel and concentrate on driving and the traffic situation around the vehicle. WARNING As the driver, you have full responsibility for operating the vehicle safely and adhering to all applicable traffic regulations. The voice control system uses the same microphone as the Bluetooth hands-free system and system responses come via the infotainment system's speakers. In certain cases, text messages are also provided in the instrument panel. The functions are controlled using the right-side steering wheel keypad and settings are made from the center console. System updates The voice control system is being constantly improved and updates should be downloaded for optimal functionality. See the article "System updates" and the Volvo Cars support site support.volvocars.com. Related information • • • • • • • Using voice commands (p. 121) Voice control settings (p. 125) Voice control for radio and media (p. 122) Voice control for cell phones (p. 121) System updates (p. 490) Navigation system voice commands (p. 124) Climate system voice commands (p. 122) Input to the system is in dialog form and comprises commands from the driver and a verbal response from the system. 120 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Using voice commands Voice command examples Voice control for cell phones The following is an introduction for using voice commands. Press , say "Call"-"[First-name]"-"[Lastname]"-"[number category]" to call a contact in your phonebook if the person has more than one phone number listed (i.e., home, mobile, work, etc.). Voice commands can be used to control many of the most common functions in a Bluetooth®connected cell phone. Press the button on the rightside steering wheel keypad to activate the system and initiate a voice command dialog. For example, press and say "Call"-"Robin"-"Smith"-"mobile". Commands/phrases Keep the following points in mind when using voice commands: • When giving a command, speak at your usual speed and in a normal tone of voice after the tone. • Avoid speaking while the system is responding. Commands cannot be processed during a response. • Avoid background noises in the cabin when using the system by closing the vehicle's doors, windows and panoramic roof* when giving voice commands.. • • Cancel: cancel the dialog. • Help: Initiates a help dialog. The system will provide several alternative commands that can be used in a given situation. The commands for specific situations are described in the respective articles such as "Cell phone commands", etc. "Phone": initiates a phone dialog and displays possible commands. • "Call"-"[First-name]"-"[Last-name]": calls the selected contact from the phonebook. • "Call"-"[First-name]"-"[Lastname]"-"[number category]": calls a contact in your phonebook if the person has more than one phone number listed (i.e., home, mobile, work, etc.). • "Call"-"[phone number]": calls the phone number. • "Call list": displays a list of calls. Command for having a text message read aloud: • Numbers Numbers can be spoken individually, in groups or the entire phone number can be given at one time. button on By pressing and holding the the right-side steering wheel keypad. Related information To speed up a command dialog or to skip system responses, press the button on the rightside steering wheel keypad when the system is responding. • Repeat: the system will repeat the most recent voice instruction. Saying "Cancel". Voice command dialogs can be cancelled by: • • The following commands can always be used: Cell phone voice commands: • "Read message": the message will be read aloud. Related information • Using voice commands (p. 121) Voice control (p. 120) 121 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Voice control for radio and media The following voice commands can be used for the radio or an external multimedia device. 122 • "Media and radio": initiates a dialog for media and radio, and displays possible commands. • "Play"-"[artist]": plays music by the selected artist. • "Play"-"[song title]": plays the selected song. • "Play"-"[song title]"-"from"-"[album]": plays the selected song from the selected album. • "Play"-"[radio station]": starts the selected radio station. • "Tune"-"[frequency]": tunes to the selected frequency on the current waveband. If no waveband has been selected, FM is the default. • "Tune"-"[frequency]"-"[waveband]": tunes to the selected station on the selected waveband. • • • • • • "Radio": starts FM radio. • • • "iPod": starts playback from an iPod. Climate system voice commands "Bluetooth": starts playback from a Bluetooth-connected device. Voice commands can be used to control the climate system to e.g., change the temperature, activate seat heating* or change blower (fan) speed. Similar music": starts playback from a USB flash drive with music similar to the type currently playing. Related information • • • Voice control (p. 120) Using voice commands (p. 121) Voice control settings (p. 125) "Radio FM": starts FM radio. "Radio AM" : starts AM radio. "SiriusXM"*: starts satellite radio "CD": starts playback from a CD. "USB": starts playback from a USB flash drive. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS – Tap and say one of the following commands: • "Climate": starts a command dialog and provides examples of commands that can be used. • "Set temperature to X degrees": sets the desired temperature. • "Raise temperature"/"Lower • "Turn on defroster"/"Turn off • "Turn on max defroster"/"Turn off max defroster": activates/deactivates max defroster. • "Turn on rear defroster"/"Turn off rear • • "Turn steering wheel heat on"/"Turn • "Air on feet"/"Air on body": opens the desired air vent. • "Set fan to max"/"Turn off fan": changes the blower speed to Max/Off. • "Raise fan speed"/"Lower fan speed": raises/lowers the blower speed. • "Turn on auto": activates automatic climate control. • "Air condition on"/"Air condition off": activates/deactivates the air conditioning. • "Recirculation on"/"Recirculation off": activates/deactivates recirculation. Related information • Climate system controls (p. 180) electric defroster": activates/deactivates the electrically heated windshield*. "Sync temperature": synchronizes the temperature in all of the vehicle's climate zones with the one set for the driver's side. closes the desired air vent. ventilation": raises/lowers the level for seat ventilation*. • "Turn on electric defroster"/"Turn off temperature": raises/lowers the temperature. • "Air on feet off"/"Air on body off": • "Raise seat ventilation"/"Lower seat defroster": activates/deactivates window and door mirror defrosting. defroster": activates/deactivates the electrically heated rear window and door mirrors. steering wheel heat off": activates/ deactivates the electrically heated steering wheel*. • "Raise steering wheel heat"/"Lower steering wheel heat": raises/lowers the heating level for the electrically heated steering wheel*. • "Turn on seat heat"/"Turn off seat heat": activates/deactivates the electrically heated seats*. • "Raise seat heat"/"Lower seat heat": raises/lowers the heating level for the electrically heated seats*. • "Turn on seat ventilation"/"Turn off seat ventilation": activates/deactivates seat ventilation*. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 123 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Navigation system voice commands Many of the navigation system's functions can be activated using voice commands. The procedure for using voice control is described in greater detail in the articles "Voice control," "Using voice control" and "Voice control settings." Voice commands The following list contains examples of commands that are unique to navigation system. – To use the voice control system, press the on the right-side steering wheel keypad and say one of the following commands after the tone: • "Navigation: Starts a navigation voice command dialog and displays available commands. • "Take me home: Guidance will be given to the location set as Home. The location for Home is set using the Set home address function in Favorites in the Top view in the center display. • "Go to [City]: Enter a city as a destination, e.g., "Go to New York." • "Go to [Address]: Enter an address as a destination, e.g., Go to 125 43 St, New York." • "Go to [Zip code]: Enter a zip code as a destination, e.g., "Go to 07405." • "Go to [Name]: Enter a name from a list of contacts e.g., "Go to Robyn Smith." • "Search [POI]: Search for a POI7, which is always sorted according to POIs "around the vehicle." To search along the route, say "Along the route" when the list of results is displayed. • "Search [POI] in [a city]: Search for a POI7 in city/location. • "Search [POI category]: Search for a POI7 category, which is always sorted "Around the vehicle." 7 124 You can opt to call the POI or set it as a destination. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS • "Search [POI category] in [a city]: Search for a POI7 category in a city/location. • "Enter contact: Enter a contact from a list of phone contacts as a destination. • "Enter POI: Enter a POI as a destination. • "Change country/Change state: Changes the country/state in which a search is conducted. • "Enter address: Enter an address as a destination. • "Enter zip code: Enter a zip code as a destination. • "Add intersection: Enter an intersection as a destination. • "Show favorites: Shows a list of Favorites in the center display's Top view. Related information • • • • Navigation displays and controls (p. 433) Voice control (p. 120) Using voice commands (p. 121) Voice control settings (p. 125) Voice control settings There are a number of settings that can be made for the voice control system. Open the center display's Top view and tap Settings System Voice Control and select settings. • Repeat Mode • Gender • Speech Rate Sound settings Open Top view and tap Settings Sound System Volumes Voice Control. Changing languages The voice control system only understands that languages that can be selected. • "Clear itinerary: Deletes all intermediate Changing the language for this system also affects menus, messages and help texts. • "Repeat voice guidance: Repeats the Open Top view and tap Settings Language. • "Pause guidance: Pauses guidance on Related information destinations in an itinerary. most recent guidance instruction. the map. • • System Voice control (p. 120) "Resume guidance: Resumes guidance on the map. • "Turn off voice guidance: Turns voice navigation guidance off. • "Turn on voice guidance: Turns voice 7 navigation guidance on. You can opt to call the POI or set it as a destination. 125 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Indicator symbols in the instrument panel The indicator symbols alert the driver when certain functions are activated, that a system is actively working or that a fault may have occurred in a system or function. Symbol Explanation Symbol Explanation A B Information, see the text message in the instrument panel The information symbol illuminates in combination with a text message if one of the vehicle's systems requires the driver's attention. The information symbol can also illuminate in combination with other symbols. Brake system A B Left/right turn signals This symbol indicates a possible fault in the ABS braking function. The vehicle's normal brakes will still function but without ABS brake modulation. Both turn signal indicators will flash when the hazard warning flashers are being used. Parking brake/Auto-brake Forward lights This function keeps the vehicle at a standstill after it has stopped. The symbol is on when the function is activated and the brakes or parking brake are being used. Active Bending Lights (ABL) Tire pressure system The symbol illuminates to indicate low tire pressure or a fault in the tire pressure system. Malfunction indicator light (check engine light) 126 Explanation ABS brake system A B Symbol This symbol will illuminate if there is a fault in the emissions control system. If this happens, please have your vehicle checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible. This symbol will illuminate if there is a fault in the ABL system. Automatic/active high beams on The symbol will be blue when the automatic high beams are on. Automatic/active high beams offThe symbol will be white when the automatic high beams are off. High beam indicator The symbol will illuminate when the high beams are on or when high beam flash is being used. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Symbol Explanation Automatic/active high beams on The symbol will be blue when the automatic high beams are on. The parking lights will also be on. Automatic/active high beams off The symbol will be white when the automatic high beams are off. The parking lights will be on. High beams on The high beams and parking lights will be on. Front fog lights The symbol illuminates when the front fog lights are on. Rear fog lights The symbol illuminates when the rear fog lights are on. Rain sensor The symbol illuminates when the rain sensor is on. Symbol Explanation Symbol Not in use Explanation Lane keeping aid White symbol: lane keeping aid on and marker lines detected. Stability system Gray symbol: lane keeping aid on and no marker lines detected. This symbol flashes when the stability system is actively working to stabilize the vehicle. If the symbol glows steadily, there is a fault in the system. Yellow symbol: lane keeping aid active Lane keeping aid and rain sensor Stability system, sport mode This symbol illuminates when Sport mode is on. Sport mode offers more active driving characteristics by monitoring movement of the accelerator pedal, steering wheel and cornering by allowing more lateral movement of the rear wheels before the stability system is activated. White symbol: lane keeping aid on and marker lines detected. Rain sensor on. Gray symbol: lane keeping aid on and no marker lines detected. Rain sensor on. A B US models Canadian models Door/hood/tailgate/fuel filler door reminder If a door or the hood/tailgate/fuel filler door are not closed properly, the information or warning symbol will illuminate and a graphic will be displayed in instrument panel. Stop the vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible and close the door, etc. 127 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Related information • • • Instrument panel (p. 128) Warning symbols in the instrument panel (p. 134) Door and seat belt reminders (p. 61) Instrument panel The instrument panel displays vehicle- and driving-related information. Gauges, indicators and symbols in the instrument panel • Messages (and in certain cases also graphics) • • • • • • • Distance to empty tank Door and seat belt status Compass and altimeter Media player Navigation system map Cell phone Voice control Right side Left side • • • • • Speedometer Trip odometer Odometer Cruise control/speed limiter information Road sign information Center • • • 128 Indicator and warning symbols Ambient temperature sensor Clock • • • • • • • • Tachometer Fuel gauge Gear shift indicator Current driving mode ECO gauge Start/Stop function's status Current fuel consumption App menu (activated using the right-side steering wheel keypad) INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Instrument panel settings Instrument panel App menu App Functions Some of the settings for the instrument panel can be made in the App menu (see also the article "Instrument panel app menu"). The App (application) menu in the instrument panel provides quick access to commonly used functions in certain apps. Trip computer The following settings can be made in the center display's Top view under: Settings My Car Displays: Select a trip odometer, make instrument panel display settings, etc. Media player Select the active source for the media player. • Driver Display Center Area: Select what is Phone Call a contact from the call list. Navigation Pause guidance, start guidance to a recently set destination, etc. displayed in the background (center) of the instrument panel. The options are: (Show no information in the background, Show information of current playing media or Show map even if no route is set). Related information • Themes. Select a theme (appearance). The options are: (Default, Minimalistic, Performance or Chrome Rings). The system language can be changed under Settings System Choose system language. This change affects the language used in all displays. Related information • • • Instrument panel App menu (p. 129) Warning symbols in the instrument panel (p. 134) Indicator symbols in the instrument panel (p. 126) In some cases, the App menu can be used instead of the center display • • • Instrument panel (p. 128) Center display overview (p. 29) Using the instrument panel App menu (p. 153) The App menu is displayed in the instrument panel and is controlled using the right-side steering wheel keypad. This menu makes it possible to toggle between apps or functions in apps without removing your hands from the steering wheel. App menu functions The following apps and their functions can be controlled from the App menu: 129 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Instrument panel licenses BSD 4-clause "Original" or "Old" License Copyright ©) 1982, 1986, 1990, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors. Copyright ©) <YEAR>, <OWNER> All rights reserved. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 4. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE 130 IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. BSD 2-clause “Simplified” license Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The views and conclusions contained in the software and documentation are those of the authors and should not be interpreted as representing official policies, either expressed or implied, of the FreeBSD Project. FreeType Project License 1. 1 Copyright 1996-1999 by David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg Introduction The FreeType Project is distributed in several archive packages; some INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS of them may contain, in addition to the FreeType font engine, various tools and contributions which rely on, or relate to, the FreeType Project. This license applies to all files found in such packages, and which do not fall under their own explicit license. The license affects thus the FreeType font engine, the test programs, documentation and makefiles, at the very least. This license was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG (Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which all encourage inclusion and use of free software in commercial and freeware products alike. As a consequence, its main points are that: o We don't promise that this software works. However, we are be interested in any kind of bug reports. (`as is' distribution) o You can use this software for whatever you want, in parts or full form, without having to pay us. (`royalty-free' usage) o You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If you use it, or only parts of it, in a program, you must acknowledge somewhere in your documentation that you've used the FreeType code. (`credits') We specifically permit and encourage the inclusion of this software, with or without modifications, in commercial products, provided that all warranty or liability claims are assumed by the product vendor. Legal Terms 0. Definitions Throughout this license, the terms `package', `FreeType Project', and `FreeType archive' refer to the set of files originally distributed by the authors (David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg) as the `FreeType project', be they named as alpha, beta or final release. `You' refers to the licensee, or person using the project, where `using' is a generic term including compiling the project's source code as well as linking it to form a `program' or `executable'. This program is referred to as `a program using the FreeType engine'. This license applies to all files distributed in the original FreeType archive, including all source code, binaries and documentation, unless otherwise stated in the file in its original, unmodified form as distributed in the original archive. If you are unsure whether or not a particular file is covered by this license, you must contact us to verify this. The FreeType project is copyright (C) 1996-1999 by David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. All rights reserved except as specified below. 1. No Warranty THE FREETYPE ARCHIVE IS PROVIDED `AS IS' WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT. As you have not signed this license, you are not required to accept it. However, as the FreeType project is copyrighted material, only this license, or another one contracted with the authors, grants you the right to use, distribute, and modify it. Therefore, by using, distributing, or modifying the FreeType project, you indicate that you understand and accept all the terms of this license. 2. Redistribution Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: o Redistribution of source code must retain this license file (`licence.txt') unaltered; any additions, deletions or changes to the original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying documentation. The copyright notices of the unaltered, original files must be preserved in all copies of source files. o Redistribution in binary form must provide a disclaimer that states that the software is based in part of the work of the FreeType Team, in the distribution documentation. We also encourage you to put an URL to the FreeType web page in your documentation, though this isn't mandatory. These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on the FreeType code, not just the unmodified files. If you use our work, you must acknowledge us. However, no fee need be paid to us. 3. Advertising The names of FreeType's authors and contributors may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. We suggest, but do not require, that you use one or more of the following 131 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS phrases to refer to this software in your documentation or advertising materials: `FreeType Project', `FreeType Engine', `FreeType library', or `FreeType Distribution'. 4. Contacts There are two mailing lists related to FreeType: o freetype@freetype.org Discusses general use and applications of FreeType, as well as future and wanted additions to the library and distribution. If you are looking for support, start in this list if you haven't found anything to help you in the documentation. o devel@freetype.org Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals, design issues, specific licenses, porting, etc. o http://www.freetype.org Holds the current FreeType web page, which will allow you to download our latest development version and read online documentation. You can also contact us individually at: David Turner <david.turner@freetype.org> Robert Wilhelm <robert.wilhelm@freetype.org> Werner Lemberg <werner.lemberg@freetype.org> Libpng License This copy of the libpng notices is provided for your convenience. In case of any discrepancy between this copy and the notices in the file png.h that is included in the libpng distribution, the latter shall prevail. COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and LICENSE: If you modify libpng you may insert additional notices immediately following this sentence. 132 libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through 1.0.13, April 15, 2002, are Copyright (c) 2000-2002 Glenn Randers-Pehrson and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-1.0.6 with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors Simon-Pierre Cadieux Eric S. Raymond Gilles Vollant and with the following additions to the disclaimer: There is no warranty against interference with your enjoyment of the library or against infringement. There is no warranty that our efforts or the library will fulfill any of your particular purposes or needs. This library is provided with all faults, and the entire risk of satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy, and effort is with the user. libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through 1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are Copyright (c) 1998, 1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.96, with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors: libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96, May 1997, are Copyright (c) 1996, 1997 Andreas Dilger Distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.88, with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors: John Bowler Kevin Bracey Sam Bushell Magnus Holmgren Greg Roelofs Tom Tanner libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88, January 1996, are Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc. For the purposes of this copyright and license, "Contributing Authors" is defined as the following set of individuals: Andreas Dilger Dave Martindale Guy Eric Schalnat Paul Schmidt Tom Lane Tim Wegner Glenn Randers-Pehrson The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS IS". The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. disclaim all warranties, expressed or implied, including, without limitation, the warranties of Willem van Schaik INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS merchantability and of fitness for any purpose. The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages, which may result from the use of the PNG Reference Library, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute this source code, or portions hereof, for any purpose, without fee, subject to the following restrictions: 1. The origin of this source code must not be misrepresented. 2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original source. 3. This Copyright notice may not be removed or altered from any source or altered source distribution. The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. specifically permit, without fee, and encourage the use of this source code as a component to supporting the PNG file format in commercial products. If you use this source code in a product, acknowledgment is not required but would be appreciated. A "png_get_copyright" function is available, for convenient use in "about" boxes and the like: printf("%s",png_get_copyright(NULL)); Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is supplied in the files "pngbar.png" and "pngbar.jpg (88x31) and "pngnow.png" (98x31). Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software. OSI Certified Open Source is a certification mark of the Open Source Initiative. Glenn Randers-Pehrson randeg@alum.rpi.edu April 15, 2002 MIT License Copyright (c) <year> <copyright holders> Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. zlib License The zlib/libpng License Copyright (c) <year> <copyright holders> This software is provided 'as-is', without any express or implied warranty. In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software. Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions: 1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required. 2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being the original software. 3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution. The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL 133 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS SGI Free Software B License Version 2.0. SGI FREE SOFTWARE LICENSE B (Version 2.0, Sept. 18, 2008) Copyright (C) [dates of first publication] Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice including the dates of first publication and either this permission notice or a reference to http:// oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. 134 Except as contained in this notice, the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from Silicon Graphics, Inc. Related information • Instrument panel (p. 128) Warning symbols in the instrument panel The warning symbols alert the driver that an important function is activated or that a serious fault has occurred. Symbol Meaning Warning The red warning symbol alerts the driver that an important function is activated or that a serious fault has occurred that may affect the vehicle's drivability. The warning symbol can also illuminate in combination with other symbols. Seat belt reminder This symbol will flash for approximately 6 seconds if the driver or front seat passenger has not fastened his or her seat belt or if anyone in the rear seat has unbuckled a seat belt. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning Symbol Airbags Parking brake Oil pressure Stop the vehicle in a safe place and do not continue driving. This symbol flashes while the parking brake is being applied and then glows steadily when the parking brake has been set. If the symbol illuminates during driving, stop the vehicle, the engine oil level is too low. Stop the engine immediately and check the engine oil level. Add oil if necessary. If the oil level is normal and the symbol remains illuminated, have the vehicle towed to the nearest authorized Volvo workshop or trained and qualified Volvo service technician. If this light comes on while the vehicle is being driven, or remains on after the vehicle has been started, the airbag system's diagnostic functions have detected a fault. Have the system(s) inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician as soon as possible. A B If the symbol flashes in any other situation, this indicates a fault. See the text message in the instrument panel. Generator not charging Brake system A B Meaning This symbol illuminates during driving if a fault has occurred in the electrical system. Contact an authorized Volvo workshop or trained and qualified Volvo service technician. If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level may be too low. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and check the level in the brake fluid reservoir. See also the warning following this table. A B US models Canadian models 135 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS WARNING • If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the brake fluid reservoir or if a warning message is displayed in the text window: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician and have the brake system inspected. • If the BRAKE and ABS symbols illuminate at the same time, there is a risk of reduced vehicle stability. Compass The rear-view mirror has an integrated compass that shows the direction in which the vehicle is traveling. Related information • • Instrument panel (p. 128) Indicator symbols in the instrument panel (p. 126) Rearview mirror with compass Eight different directions are shown with the abbreviations: N (north) NE (northeast) E (east), SE (southeast) S (south), SW (southwest) W (west) NW (northwest) Switching the compass on/off The compass is displayed automatically when the vehicle is started or in ignition mode II. To switch the compass on/off: – 136 Use a pen, paperclip or similar object and press in the button on the underside of the mirror. Related information • • Calibrating the compass (p. 137) Ignition modes (p. 355) INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Calibrating the compass 8. 1 North America is divided into 15 magnetic zones and the compass will need to be calibrated if the vehicle is driven from one zone to another. 2 15 14 3 To calibrate the compass: 1. 2. For best calibration results, switch off all electrical equipment in the vehicle (climate system, windshield wipers, audio system, etc.) and make sure that all doors are closed. • Calibration may not succeed or be incorrect if the vehicle's electrical equipment is not switched off. Using a pen, paperclip or similar object, press and hold the button on the underside of mirror for approx. 3 seconds until the number of the current magnetic zone is displayed. • • Defrosting windows and mirrors (p. 187) Compass (p. 136) 12 8 5 11 9 Start the vehicle. • 3. 13 Related information 4 Stop the vehicle in a large open area, safely out of traffic and away from steel structures and high-tension electrical wires. NOTE Repeat the calibration procedure if necessary. 6 10 7 Magnetic zones 4. Press the button on the underside of mirror repeatedly until the desired magnetic zone (1–15) is displayed (see the map of magnetic zones). 5. Wait until C is again displayed in the mirror or hold the button on the underside of mirror for approx. 6 seconds until C is displayed in the mirror. 6. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more than 6 mph (10 km/h) until a direction is displayed. This indicates that calibration is complete. Drive around in a circle an additional two times to fine-tune the calibration. 7. Vehicles with an electrically heated windshield:* if C is displayed when the heating function is activated, perform step 6 with the heating function on. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 137 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Lighting panel and controls Ring on the steering wheel lever Position The lighting controls on the left-side steering wheel lever can be used to activate the vehicle's exterior lighting. Instrument lighting brightness can be adjusted on the lighting panel. Result With the ignition in mode II or if the engine is running: • The Daytime Running Lights will be off • The low beam headlights will be on • High Beams/High Beam flash can be used With the ignition in mode II or if the engine is running: Position Result • The Daytime Running Lights will be onB (the low beam headlights will automatically switch on in dark conditions or if the rear fog lights are on With the ignition in mode II or if the engine is running: A 138 • In the US: the Daytime Running Lights (DRL) will be off • • Tunnel detection* will be activated In Canada: the Daytime Running Lights will be on • • Active High Beams (AHB) can be activated High beam flash can be used • High beam flash can be used With the ignition in mode II or if the engine is running: • In the US: the Daytime Running Lights will be off • In Canada: the Daytime Running Lights will be on • High beam flash can be used Active High Beams On/Off A B The parking lights will be on in this position, even if the ignition is switched off. In dark conditions, the rear parking lights illuminate automatically when the tailgate is open, regardless of the control's position or ignition mode. US models only: The use of Daytime Running Lights can be activated/deactivated in the center display's Settings menu. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS NOTE The use of Daytime Running Lights is recommended in the United States and is mandatory in Canada. Volvo recommends using the whenever possible. Lighting panel Low beam headlights Instrument lighting In dark ambient lighting conditions, the low beams will be activated automatically when the engine is started or the ignition is in mode II and the left-side steering wheel lever's ring is turned position. to the position If the ring is turned to , the low beams will be activated automatically when the engine is started or the ignition is in mode II, regardless of the ambient lighting conditions. WARNING • Daytime Running Lights are a driving aid designed to help make the vehicle visible to other roads users. • The driver is always responsible for adapting the use of Daytime Running Lights/headlights according to ambient lighting and weather conditions. Low beams Thumb wheel (to the left) for adjusting display brightness Illumination of the display and instrument lights will vary, depending on ignition mode. The display lighting is automatically subdued in darkness and the sensitivity is set with the thumb wheel. Related information • • Daytime Running Lights (DRL) (p. 140) High and low beam headlights (p. 140) Left-side steering wheel lever ring With the ring in the position, the low beams will also be activated if the windshield wipers or rear fog lights are being used. Related information • • Daytime Running Lights (DRL) (p. 140) Ignition modes (p. 355) 139 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Daytime Running Lights (DRL) The car monitors ambient lighting conditions. With the ring on the left-side steering wheel lever in the position and the ignition in mode II (or the engine running), the lights toggle automatically between DRL and low beam headlights. • • In the US: DRL will be off High and low beam headlights In Canada: DRL will be on When the engine is started, the low beams are activated automatically if the headlight control is . in position 8 position With the headlight ring in the and the ignition in mode II or if the engine is running: • • In the US: DRL will be off In Canada: DRL will be on With the headlight ring in the • position: DRL will be on (the low beam headlights will automatically switch on in dark conditions) US models only: DRL can be deactivated in the center display's Settings view. selected, a tunnel detection function With activates the low beams when the vehicle enters a tunnel. Ring in the AUTO position. NOTE With the headlight ring in the • position: DRL will be off and the low beam headlights will be on The use of Daytime Running Lights is recommended in the United States and is mandatory in Canada. Steering wheel lever and ring High beam flash Toggle between high and low beams High beam flash Pull the lever slightly toward the steering wheel. The high beams illuminate until the lever is released. Continuous high beams With the headlight ring in the 0 position: 8 9 140 The parking lights will be on in this position, even if the ignition is switched off. When the low beams are on. Continuous high beams are available if the ring is 9 or turned to . Toggle to high beams INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS by moving the lever forward. Return to low beams by moving the lever toward the steering wheel. symbol will illuminate in the instrument The panel when the high beams are on. Active high beams The active high beam system uses a camera at the upper edge of the windshield to detect the headlights of oncoming vehicles or the taillights of a vehicle directly ahead. When this happens, the headlights will automatically switch from high beams to low beams. When the camera no longer detects the headlights/taillights of other vehicles, your headlights will switch back to high beams after several seconds. Operation Activate/deactivate this function by turning the ring on the left-side steering wheel lever to . If the ring is not in this position, toggling between high and low beams must be done manually. If the ring is turned to another position while the high beams are on, the headlights will automatically switch to low beams. ) in the instrument panel A white symbol ( indicates that the function has been activated. When the high beams are on, the symbol will change to blue. NOTE • Keep the windshield in front of the camera free of ice, snow, dirt, etc. • Do not mount or in any way attach anything on the windshield that could obstruct the camera. If a message is displayed in the instrument panel saying that active high beams are temporarily unavailable, switching between high and low beams will have to be done manually. However, position. the light switch can remain in the The same applies if a message saying that the windshield sensors are blocked and the symbol are displayed. The symbol will go out if this happens. Automatic high beams may be temporarily unavailable (e.g., in heavy fog or rain). When the system becomes active again or if the sensors in the windshield are no longer obscured, the messymbol will sages will disappear and the illuminate. WARNING • Automatic high beams are a driving aid designed to help provide the best possible headlight illumination in good driving conditions. • The driver is always responsible for manually toggling between high and low beams when this is required by traffic or weather conditions. CAUTION In the following situations, it may be necessary to switch between high and low beams manually: • • • • • • In heavy fog or rain • If there are pedestrians on or near the road • If there are reflective objects, such as signs, near the road • When oncoming vehicles' lights are obscured by e.g., fences, bushes, etc. In blowing snow or slush In bright moonlight In freezing rain In areas with dim street lighting When oncoming vehicles have dim front lighting 141 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS • • • When there are vehicles on connecting roads At the top of hills or in dips in the road In sharp curves Active Bending Lights* NOTE Active Bending Lights (ABL) are designed to help light up a curve according to movements of the steering wheel. Auxiliary lights* This function is only active in twilight or dark conditions, and only when the vehicle is in motion. Deactivating/activating the function If the vehicle is equipped with auxiliary lights, the driver can use the center display to activate/ deactivate them or decide if they will go on/off along with the high beams10. ABL can be deactivated/activated in two ways in the center display: Via Function view Tap the Active Bending Lights button. Related information • • City Safety™ troubleshooting (p. 280) Lighting panel and controls (p. 138) Headlight pattern with the Active Bending Light function deactivated (left) and activated (right) ABL is activated automatically11 when the engine is started and can be deactivated in the center display. If a fault is detected in the system, the symbol in the instrument panel will illuminate. A text message will be displayed and an additional symbol will also illuminate. 10 11 142 Via settings 1. Tap Settings in Top view. 2. Tap My Car 3. Deselect/select Active Bending Lights. Lights Exterior Lights. Related information • Settings view (p. 106) These lights must be connected to the vehicle's electrical system by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. The factory default setting is on. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Front fog lights* This function is activated when the high or low beam headlights are used and the vehicle's speed is under approx. 20 mph (30 km/h). Brake lights Related information In addition to illuminating when the brake pedal is depressed, the brake lights also illuminate when one of the driver support systems (e.g., adaptive cruise control, City Safety or collision warning) slow the vehicle. • Low beam headlights (p. 139) The brake lights illuminate automatically when the brakes are applied. Related information Front fog light button • • • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 252) City Safety™ (p. 273) Emergency brake lights (p. 334) The front fog lights can be used in combination with the high/low beam headlights or the parking lights. Both fog lights also illuminate when the vehicle is backing up. Press the button to turn the fog lights on/off. The indicator symbol in the instrument panel illuminates when the front fog lights are on. Corner illumination The front fog lights include corner illumination, which temporarily provides extra light to the front left or right of the vehicle (depending on which way the vehicle is turned) when making a sharp turn at low speeds (for example, when turning into a parking space) or when the turn signals are used. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 143 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Rear fog lights The rear fog lights are considerably brighter than the normal taillights and should be used only when conditions such as fog, rain, snow, smoke or dust reduce visibility for other vehicles to less than 500 ft. (150 meters). Rear fog light button The rear fog lights can only be used when the ignition is in mode II or if the engine is running or . and the light switch is turned to Press the button to turn the fog lights on/off. The rear fog light indicator symbol in the instrument panel illuminates when the rear fog lights are switched on. The rear fog lights turn off automatically when the engine is turned off or when the light switch is turned to the or positions. 144 Related information • Lighting panel and controls (p. 138) Hazard warning flashers The hazard warning flashers should be used to indicate that the vehicle has become a traffic hazard. When the function is activated, both turn signal indicators in the instrument panel will flash. Hazard warning flasher button Press the button to activate the flashers. Press the button again to turn off the flashers. Regulations regarding the use of the hazard warning flashers may vary, depending on where you live. Related information • Using turn signals (p. 148) INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Parking lights Turn the parking lights on by turning the ring on the left-side steering wheel lever. that the headlight control is in or which mode the ignition is in. Related information • Lighting panel and controls (p. 138) Approach lighting Approach lighting activates the parking lights, outer door handle lights*, license plate lighting, courtesy lighting and footwell lighting when you approach the vehicle. This function is activated by unlocking the car. The time interval for this lighting can be set on the center display. The function can be deactivated/activated in the center display: Lighting ring in the parking light position Turn the ring to the position (the license plate lighting comes on at the same time). Canadian models: If the ignition is in position II or the engine is running, the daytime running lights will also be on. 1. Tap Settings in Top view. 2. Tap My Car 3. Deselect/select Welcome Light. Lights Exterior Lights. Related information • • • Settings view (p. 106) Home safe lighting (p. 146) Remote key (p. 224) With the ring in this position, the parking lights will remain on even when the ignition is switched off, however, the rear parking lights will not be on if the ignition is in model 0. In dark ambient lighting conditions, the rear parking lights also illuminate when the tailgate is opened to alert anyone traveling behind your vehicle. This happens regardless of the position * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 145 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Home safe lighting Passenger compartment lighting The home safe lighting function illuminates the area in front of the vehicle in dark conditions. The passenger compartment lighting is controlled using the buttons in the ceiling above the front and rear seats. Front reading lights All passenger compartment lighting can be turned on and off manually within 30 minutes after: Turn the reading lights on or off by pressing the respective buttons briefly. Adjust the brightness by pressing and holding the button. This function turns on the headlights, parking lights, outer door handle lights*, license plate lights, front ceiling lighting and footwell lighting for a set amount of time. The length of time that these lights remain illuminated can be set in the center display: • the vehicle is unlocked but the engine has not been started the engine is switched off and the ignition is in mode 0. 1. Tap Settings in Top view. • 2. Tap My Car Lights Home Safety Lights. Front interior lighting 3. Exterior Lights Courtesy lighting (AUTO) switch Passenger's side reading light Courtesy lighting Turn the footwell and overhead courtesy lighting on or off by pressing the button briefly. Select Off, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90 sec. To activate home safe lighting: 1. Switch off the ignition (mode 0). 2. Push the turn signal lever as far as possible towards the dashboard and release it. 3. Exit the vehicle and lock the doors. Related information • • Using the center display (p. 46) Settings view (p. 106) Controls in the ceiling console for front reading lights and courtesy lighting Driver's side reading light Courtesy lighting 146 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Courtesy lighting switch Rear interior lighting Activate the automatic function by briefly pressing the AUTO button in the ceiling console. The indicator light in the button will illuminate. With AUTO activated, the courtesy lighting will switch on and off as follows: Rear reading lights Rear courtesy lighting The courtesy lighting will illuminate and remain on for 30 seconds if: • the vehicle is unlocked with the remote key or key blade • the ignition is turned off completely (ignition mode 0) Rear reading lights: third row of seats* The courtesy lighting switches off when: • • the engine is started Rear reading lights: second row of seats the vehicle is locked The rear reading lights are located in the ceiling. The courtesy lighting comes on or off when a side door is opened or closed. The lighting remains on for two minutes if one of the doors is open. If the lighting is switched on manually and the vehicle is locked, the courtesy lighting will switch off automatically after two minutes. Turn them on or off by briefly pressing the button in the side console. Adjust the brightness by pressing and holding the button. The rear courtesy lighting is turned on or off by briefly pressing the button in the ceiling console. Adjust the brightness by pressing and holding the button. Footwell/ground lighting The footwell and courtesy lighting comes on or goes off when a side door is opened or closed. Glove compartment lighting The glove compartment lighting comes on or goes off when the glove compartment is opened or closed. Vanity mirror lighting The vanity mirror lighting comes on or goes off when the cover over the mirror is opened or closed. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 147 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Cargo area lighting Change the color of the light Using turn signals The cargo area lighting comes on or goes off when the tailgate is opened or closed. 1. In the center display's Top view, select Settings My Car Lights Interior Mood Lighting. In the center display's Top view, select Settings My Car Lights Ambient Lighting 2. Choose By Temperature, By Theme or Theme Colors. The turn signals are controlled using the left steering wheel lever. The turn signals flash three times or continuously, depending on how far up or down the lever is moved. Choose among the following settings: Related information Ambience lighting 1. 2. • Ambient Light Intensity: Off, Low or • Lighting panel and controls (p. 138) High. • Ambient Light Level: Reduced or Full. Mood lighting* When the overhead courtesy lighting has gone out and the engine is running, several LEDs located near the roof console illuminate to provide faint lighting to help e.g., see objects in storage compartments. This lighting goes out just after the overhead courtesy lighting when the vehicle is locked. The following settings can be made for the mood lighting in the center display: Brightness 1. 2. 148 In the center display's Top view, select Settings My Car Lights Interior Mood Lighting. Press Interior Mood Light Intensity and choose Off, Low or High. Turn signals Short flashing sequence The driver can automatically flash the turn signals 3 times by moving the left steering wheel lever up or down to the first position and releasing it. This function can be activated/deactivated in the center display. Continuous flashing sequence Move the lever as far up or down as possible to start the turn signals. The turn signals will be cancelled automatically by the movement of the steering wheel, or the * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS lever can be returned to its initial position by hand. NOTE • • This automatic flashing sequence can be interrupted by immediately moving the lever in the opposite direction. Messages in the instrument panel and center display Information and warning messages are displayed in the instrument panel and center display. The message may be displayed along with graphics, symbols or buttons for e.g., confirming the message or accepting a request. Instrument panel If the turn signal indicator flashes faster than normal, check for a burned-out turn signal bulb. Related information • • • Lighting panel and controls (p. 138) Hazard warning flashers (p. 144) Settings view (p. 106) Message in the instrument panel High-priority messages are displayed in the instrument panel. Messages may appear in different parts of the instrument panel depending on their context. The message will time out after a short period of time or disappear when it has been confirmed or if action has been taken. Messages that need to be stored will be saved under My car messages in the center display's Top view. 149 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Service messages The following table lists a selection of important service messages and the action that should be taken. Message Action Stop safelyA Stop and switch off the engine. There is a risk of serious damage to the vehicleB. Turn off engineA Stop and switch off the engine. There is a risk of serious damage to the vehicleB. Service urgentA Contact a workshopB to have the vehicle inspected immediately. Stop safelyA Contact a workshopB to have the vehicle inspected as soon as possible. Book time for maintenance Time for the next scheduled service. Contact a workshopB. Time for maintenance Time for the next scheduled service. Contact a workshopB as soon as possible. A B Message Action Messages with lower priority for the driver are shown in the center display. Maintenance overdue Time for the next scheduled service. Contact a workshopB. If the service schedule is not followed, this may void all or part of the vehicle's warranty and result in damage to vehicle components. Most of the messages are shown in the center display's status bar. The message times out after a short period of time or disappears if it has been confirmed or if action has been taken. Messages that need to be stored are saved under My car messages in Top view. Temporarily offA A function has been temporarily deactivated and will be reactivated automatically while driving or after the engine is restarted. Part of the message is context-dependent. Contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Center display Messages' form can vary and they may be displayed with graphics, symbols or buttons for e.g., confirming a message or accepting a request. Pop-up messages Messages are sometimes displayed in pop-up windows. Messages of this type have higher priority than ones in the status bar and must be confirmed or action must be taken before they disappear. Messages that need to be stored are saved under My car messages in Top view. Related information • • Message in the center display's status bar 150 Some messages in the center display contain one or more buttons for e.g., confirming the message or accepting a request. Instrument panel (p. 128) Center display overview (p. 29) INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Handling messages in the instrument panel and center display Instrument panel 2. Confirm a choice by pressing (2). > The message will disappear from the instrument panel. Handling new messages For messages without buttons: For messages with buttons: – – Close the message by pressing (2) or let the message time-out after a short period. > The message will disappear from the instrument panel. If a message needs to be saved, it will be stored in the Car status app, which can be opened in the center display's App view. Car message stored in Car status application will be displayed at this time in the center display. Messages in the instrument panel and the right-side steering wheel keypad ble to e.g., activate/deactivate a function related to the message. Center display Left/right arrow keys Tap the button to carry out the action or let the message time-out after a short period. > The message will disappear from the center display's status bar. For messages without buttons: – Close the message by tapping it or let the message time-out after a short period. > The message will disappear from the center display's status bar. If a message needs to be saved, it will be stored in the center display's Top view. Related information Confirm Some messages in the instrument panel contain one or more buttons for e.g., confirming a message or accepting a proposal. • Messages in the instrument panel and center display (p. 149) • Using the instrument panel App menu (p. 153) Handling new messages For messages with buttons: 1. Navigate among the buttons available by pressing the left/right arrow keys (1). Message in the center display Some buttons in the center display have a button (or several buttons in a pop-up) to make it possi- 151 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Handling messages stored from the instrument panel and center display Messages saved from the instrument panel Reading saved messages Booking service: Reading a saved message immediately: – – Tap the button to the right of the message Car message stored in Car status application in the center display. > The saved message will be displayed in the Car status app. Reading a saved message at a later time: Saved messages and possible selections in the Car status app Messages that have been displayed in the instrument panel and need to be saved are stored in the Car status app, which can be opened in the center display's App view. Car message stored in Car status application will be displayed at this time in the center display. 12 152 Certain markets only. 1. Open the Car status app in the center display's App view. > The app will open in Home view's lowest sub-view. 2. Select the Messages tab in the app. > A list of saved messages will be displayed. 3. Tap the arrow to the right to expand/minimize the message. > More information about the message will appear in the list and the image to the left in the app will show information about the message in graphic form. Handling a saved message In expanded form, some messages have two buttons for booking service or reading the owner's manual. With the message in expanded form, tap Request appointment/Call to make Appointment12 to book a service/repair appointment. > Request appointment: the Appointments tab will open in the app and create a request for a service/repair appointment. Call to make Appointment: the phone app will start and initiate a call to your preferred retailer to make a service/repair appointment. Reading the owner's manual: – With the message in expanded form, tap Owner's manual to read the section of the owner's manual related to the message. > The owner's manual will open in the center display and provide information related to the message. Messages stored in the app will be erased automatically each time the engine is started. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Messages saved from the center display Related information • Handling messages in the instrument panel and center display (p. 151) Using the instrument panel App menu The App (application) menu in the instrument panel is controlled using the right-side steering wheel keypad. Saved messages and possible selections in Top view Messages that have been shown in the center display and need to be saved are stored in the center display's Top view. Reading a saved message 1. 2. Open the center display's Top view. > A list of saved messages will be displayed. The ones with an arrow to the right can be expanded. Tap the arrow to the right to expand/minimize the message. App menu and right-side steering wheel keypad App menu Left/right Up/down Confirm Handling a saved message Some messages have a button to e.g., activate/ deactivate a function related to the message. – Tap the button to carry out the action. Messages saved in Top view are erased automatically when the engine is switched off. 153 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Opening/closing the App menu Using the windshield wipers – Before using the wipers, ice and snow should be removed from the windshield. Be sure the wiper blades are not frozen in place. Press the App menu (1). The App menu cannot be opened if there are unread/unconfirmed messages in the instrument panel. The message must be confirmed before the App menu can be opened. > The App menu opens/closes. Navigating and making selections in the App menu Navigate between the various apps by pressing left or right (3). > Functions for the preceding/next app will be displayed in the App menu. 2. Scroll through the current app's selections using up or down (4). 3. Confirm or select a function by pressing (2). > The function will be activated and in certain cases, the App menu will close. Related information • Instrument panel App menu (p. 129) Move the lever upward for the wipers to operate at normal speed. Move the lever upward to the next position for maximum wiper speed. Related information The App menu closes automatically after a period of inactivity or after certain selections are made. 1. Continuous wipers • • Tailgate window wiper and washer (p. 157) • Windshield and headlight washers (p. 156) Activating/deactivating the rain sensor (p. 155) Right-side steering wheel lever Thumb wheel to set rain sensor* sensitivity/ interval wiper speed Single sweep Move the lever down and release it for a single sweep. Wipers off Move the lever to position 0 to turn off the windshield wipers. Interval wipers Set the wiper interval speed by moving the thumb wheel upward or downward. 154 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Activating/deactivating the rain sensor Activate the rain sensor by pressing the button. The wipers will make one sweep. Activating/deactivating the memory function The rain sensor monitors the amount of water on the windshield and automatically regulates wiper speed. If the lever is pressed down, the wipers will make additional sweeps across the windshield. The rain sensor's memory function can be set to activate the rain sensor each time the engine is started: Move the thumb wheel upward for increased sensitivity or downward for decreased sensitivity. The wipers will make one extra sweep if the thumb wheel is moved upward. 1. In the center display, select Settings Car Wipers 2. Activate by selecting the Rain Sensor Memory box. Deactivating the rain sensor Right-side steering wheel lever Rain sensor button Thumb wheel for adjusting sensitivity/interval wiper speed When the rain sensor is activated, the symbol will illuminate in the instrument panel. Activating the rain sensor When activating the rain sensor, the engine must be running or the ignition must be in mode I or II. The windshield wiper lever must also be in position 0 or in the single sweep position. Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the button or by moving the lever upward to another wiper position. Deactivate by deselecting the Rain Sensor Memory box. The rain sensor is automatically deactivated in ignition mode 0. • • The rain sensor is also automatically deactivated when the wipers blades are put in the service position and will reactivate when the wipers have been returned to the normal operating position. My Related information • Using the windshield wipers (p. 154) Windshield wipers in the service position (p. 522) Tailgate window wiper and washer (p. 157) CAUTION Deactivate the rain sensor when washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash if the engine is running or if the ignition is left in mode I or II. The symbol in the instrument panel will go out. If the rain sensor is not deactivated, the wipers may start inadvertently in the car wash and could be damaged. 155 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Windshield and headlight washers Use the windshield/headlight washers to help improve visibility. Starting the windshield and headlight washers CAUTION • • Use ample washer fluid when washing the windshield. The windshield should be thoroughly wet when the wipers are in operation. Avoid using the washers if the fluid reservoir is frozen or empty to help avoid damage to the pump. symbol will be disA text message and the played in the instrument panel to remind the driver to fill the washer fluid reservoir. Related information • Refilling the windshield washer fluid reservoir (p. 524) • • Using the windshield wipers (p. 154) Tailgate window wiper and washer (p. 157) When the washing system is used, the length of time that the windshield washers operate depends on the ambient temperature. In cold weather, the amount of washer fluid used will also be increased automatically to help improve cleaning. Heated washer nozzles* Washing function – Move the right-side steering wheel lever toward the wheel to start the windshield and headlight washers. > After the lever is released the wipers make several extra sweeps. The washer nozzles are heated automatically in cold weather to help prevent the washer fluid from freezing. High-pressure headlight washing* High-pressure headlight washing consumes a large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the headlights are washed once for every five times the windshield is washed. Reduced washing When approx. 1 US quart (1 liter) of washer fluid remains in the reservoir, the headlights will no longer be washed to conserve fluid. 156 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Tailgate window wiper and washer Tailgate wiper and reverse gear Start the tailgate window wiper/washer with controls on the right-side steering wheel lever. 1. In the center display, select Settings Car Wipers. 2. Activate/deactivate by selecting/deselecting the Auto Rear Wiper box. NOTE The rear wiper is equipped with a cut-off function, which means that it will not operate if its electric motor overheats. The wiper will function again after a cool-down period (30 seconds or longer, depending on the heat of the motor and ambient temperature conditions). Steering wheel My The steering wheel has controls for the horn, certain optional driver support systems, menus/ messages and paddles for manually shifting gears*. If the windshield wipers are on and the transmission is put into reverse gear, the tailgate wiper will start. This function is deactivated when a different gear is selected. NOTE On vehicles with the optional rain sensor, the tailgate wiper will be activated when reverse is selected, if the rain sensor is activated and it is raining. Using the tailgate wiper/washer Related information • • • • – Press for tailgate interval wiper Press for tailgate continuous wiper Using the windshield wipers (p. 154) Windshield and headlight washers (p. 156) Refilling the windshield washer fluid reservoir (p. 524) Activating/deactivating the rain sensor (p. 155) Move the lever forward to wash/wipe the tailgate window. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 157 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Horn • Using the instrument panel App menu (p. 153) • Phone (p. 387) Steering wheel keypads and paddles* Driver support system controls13 Paddles for manually shifting gears* Keypad for voice controls, adjusting the head-up display*accessing menus and messages, and handling phone calls The horn is located in the steering wheel hub. Related information • • • • • • • • • • 13 158 Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 159) Turning steering wheel heating* on and off (p. 189) Cruise Control (CC) (p. 248) Speed limiter (SL)* (p. 283) Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 252) Distance Alert* (p. 314) Pilot Assist* (p. 259) Steering wheel paddles* (p. 370) Voice control (p. 120) Head-up display (HUD)* (p. 117) Cruise control*, Speed limiter *, Adaptive cruise control*, Distance alert* and Pilot Assist*. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Adjusting the steering wheel WARNING The steering wheel can be adjusted to various positions. Never adjust the steering wheel while driving. If the vehicle is equipped with the optional speed-dependent power steering, the level of steering force can be adjusted. The force level is adjusted according to the vehicle's speed. Related information • • Adjusting the steering wheel Lever for releasing/locking the steering wheel Possible positions The steering wheel's height and reach can be adjusted. To do so: 1. Push the lever down to release the steering wheel. 2. Adjust the steering wheel to a suitable position. 3. Pull back the lever to lock the steering wheel in place. If the lever is difficult to pull into place, press the steering wheel lightly at the same time as you pull the lever. Steering wheel (p. 157) Adjustable steering force* (p. 308) Seats The vehicle can be equipped with 5 or 7 seats*. The front seats can be adjusted electroncially or manually. The second and third row seats are adjusted primarily manually. The adjustment settings for the power front seats*, door mirrors and the head-up display can be stored in memory buttons. Using the multi-function control*, comfort in the front seats can be further enhance by e.g., adjusting the lumbar support or extending the length of the front seat cushion. The rear seats can be folded down and their head restraints can be adjusted. The second row seats can be moved forward/rearward and their backrest tilt can also be changed. Related information • • Adjusting power front seats* (p. 161) Adjusting function settings in the multifunctional front seats* (p. 165) • • Manually operated front seats (p. 160) • • Folding the second row backrests (p. 170) Using the power seat memory function* (p. 162) Getting into and out of the third row of seats (p. 172) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 159 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS • • Moving the second row seats forward/rearward (p. 171) Adjusting the second row backrest tilt (p. 169) Manually operated front seats WARNING The front seats can be adjusted in a number of ways to help provide the most comfortable seating position. • Do not adjust the seat while driving. The seat should be adjusted so that the brake pedal can be depressed fully. In addition, position the seat as far rearward as comfort and control allow. • Check that the seat is securely locked into position after adjusting. Related information • • • • Turning seat heating* on and off (p. 191) Power front seats* (p. 161) Multifunctional front seats* (p. 163) Seat belts (p. 58) Raise/lower the front edge of seat cushion by pumping up/down Move the seat forward/rearward by pulling the bar upward and moving the seat. Change lumbar support by pressing the button* Raise/lower the seat by moving the control up/down Change backrest tilt by turning the wheel 160 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Power front seats* Adjusting power front seats* The power front seats offer a number of adjustment possibilities to help maximize comfort and ergonomics. The power front seat(s) can be adjusted to many positions to help improve comfort and ergonomics. Related information • • • • The power seats have an overload protector that activates if a seat is blocked by any object. If this occurs, put the ignition in mode I or 0 and wait for a short period before operating the seat again. Power front seats* (p. 161) Using the power seat memory function* (p. 162) Multifunctional front seats* (p. 163) Seat belts (p. 58) The power seat(s) can be adjusted for a short period after unlocking the door with the remote key without switching the ignition on. Seat adjustment can always be made when the engine is running. Related information • • • Multifunctional front seats* (p. 163) Adjusting power front seats* (p. 161) Adjust lumbar support by pressing the control up/down/forward/rearward Using the power seat memory function* (p. 162) Raise/lower the front edge of the seat cushion by moving the control up/down • • • Manually operated front seats (p. 160) Turning seat heating* on and off (p. 191) Raise/lower the seat by moving the control up/down Turning front seat ventilation* on and off (p. 193) Move the seat forward/rearward by moving the control forward/rearward • Easy access to and from the driver seat (p. 167) Change backrest tilt by moving the control forward/rearward Only one of the power seat's controls can be used at the same time. The front seat backrests can be folded down completely. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 161 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Adjusting the passenger's seat from the driver's seat* Using the power seat memory function* Using the controls on the side of the driver's seat, the driver can adjust the position of the front passenger's seat. The memory function can be used to store the settings (positions) of the power front seats*, door mirrors and the head-up display. Three different settings can be stored using this function. Memory controls are found on one or both of the front doors*. Activating the function in the center display From the center display, the function can be activated in two ways. After activating the function, adjust the passenger's seat within 10 seconds. If no adjustments are made in that time span, the function deactivates automatically. Power seat controls Move the passenger's seat forward/rearward by moving the control forward/rearward. Activating from Function view Change the passenger seat's backrest tilt by moving the control forward/rearward. Related information 1. Go to the center display's Function view. 2. Activate the function by tapping Adjust passenger seat. • • • Power front seats* (p. 161) Adjusting power front seats* (p. 161) Button for storing a position Seat belts (p. 58) Button for storing a position Button for storing a position M (memory) button Activating from Settings – 162 In the center display, select Settings My Car Seats Adjust Passenger Seat From Driver Position. Storing a position 1. Adjust the seat, door mirrors and head-up display to the desired positions. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 2. 3. Press and release the M button. The indicator light in the button will illuminate. Press button 1, 2 or 3 within 3 seconds to store the current position of the seat/ mirrors/head-up display in the selected button. > When the position has been stored in the selected button, an audible signal will sound and the indicator light in the M button will go out. The seat, door mirrors and head-up display will stop automatically if the button is released before the they have reached the stored positions. WARNING If none of the buttons (1, 2 or 3) is pressed within 3 seconds, the indicator light in the M button will go out and the position will not be stored. • Because the driver's seat can be adjusted with the ignition off, children should never be left unattended in the vehicle. • Movement of the seat can be STOPPED at any time by pressing any button on the power seat control panel. • Do not adjust the seat while driving. The seat should be adjusted so that the brake pedal can be depressed fully. In addition, position the seat as far rearward as comfort and control allow. • The seat rails on the floor must not be obstructed in any way when the seat is in motion. The seat/mirrors/head-up display must be moved before a new position can be stored. Using a stored position A stored position can be used when one of the front doors is opened or closed: Front door open – Press one of the bottons (1–3) briefly. The seat, door mirrors and head-up display will move to the positions stored in that button. Front door closed – Press and hold one of the buttons (1–3) until the seat, door mirrors and head-up display have moved to the positions stored in that button. Related information • • Adjusting power front seats* (p. 161) Power front seats* (p. 161) Multifunctional front seats* In addition to the adjustment settings offered by the power seat controls, the multifunction control provides additional possibilities for convenience and comfort. Multifunction control on the side of the seat The multifunction control can be used to adjust lumbar support, the backrest's side bolsters and the length of the seat cushion. The adjustment settings made with the control are shown in the center display* and certain settings can be made directly from the center display. Center display The adjustment settings for the driver and passenger seats made using the multifunction control are shown in the center display. If only one seat is adjusted, the settings are shown in the center of the display. If both seats are adjusted, * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 163 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS the settings for the driver seat are shown on the upper half of the screen and the ones made for the passenger seat are on the lower half. Press the Home button on the center console to exit the seat adjustment setting view. Related information • • Power front seats* (p. 161) Operating multifunctional front seats* (p. 164) • Adjusting function settings in the multifunctional front seats* (p. 165) • Turning seat heating* on and off (p. 191) Operating multifunctional front seats* Navigating in the seat adjustment settings using the center display Multifunction seat adjustments are made using the controls on the side of the seat. The results are shown at the same time in the center display*. Tap any of the functions in the center display to activate/deactivate the selected function/setting. Navigating in seat adjustment settings using the multifunction controls Related information • • Multifunctional front seats* (p. 163) Adjusting function settings in the multifunctional front seats* (p. 165) When control 1 on the side of the seat is used, the seat's position settings are shown in the center display. Multifunction control on the side of the seat Turn the control up or down to move the cursor in the center display one step upward or downward. 164 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Adjusting function settings in the multifunctional front seats* Adjusting lumbar support* Lumbar support can be adjusted up/down/front/ rear. The multifunction controls on the side of the seat as well as the center display can be used to make seat adjustments. The adjustment settings are shown in the center display*. Multifunction control on the side of the seat Turn the control up or down to activate. Adjusting the side bolsters in the front seats* The side bolsters in the front seat backrests can be inflated/deflated to adjust the amount of support provided. Side bolster view in the center display 1. 2. Activate the multifunction control on the side of the seat by moving it up/down. The seat settings view will appear in the center display. Select Side bolsters in the seat settings view. • Tap the front button to increase bolster support. • Tap the rear button to decrease bolster support. Lumbar support view in the center display 1. Activate the multifunction control on the side of the seat by moving it up/down. The seat settings view will appear in the center display. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 165 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 2. Select Lumbar in the seat settings view. • Tap the button up/down to move lumbar support up/down. • Tap the front button to make lumbar support firmer. • Tap the rear button to make lumbar support softer. 1. 2. Extending the seat cushion* The seat cushion can be extended/retracted. Activate the multifunction control on the side of the seat by moving it up/down. The seat settings view will appear in the center display. Select Cushion extension in the seat settings view. • Tap the front button to extend the cushion. • Tap the rear button to retract the cushion. Related information • • Multifunctional front seats* (p. 163) Operating multifunctional front seats* (p. 164) Rear seats Your vehicle has two or three* rows of seats. The second row of seats has three individual seating positions and the optional third row of seats has two individual seating positions. Related information • Adjusting the second row backrest tilt (p. 169) • Adjusting the second row head restraints (p. 167) • • • Folding the second row backrests (p. 170) • Moving the second row seats forward/rearward (p. 171) • Turning seat heating* on and off (p. 191) Folding the third row* backrests (p. 172) Getting into and out of the third row of seats (p. 172) Seat cushion extension view in the center display 166 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Easy access to and from the driver seat The Easy Ingress & Egress function can be used to make getting into and out of the driver's seat easier. Activating/deactivating the function 1. In the center display, select Settings Car Seats. 2. Activate/deactivate the function by selecting/deselecting the Easy Ingress & Egress box. Easy egress To make getting out of the driver's seat easier, the seat is lowered, the side bolsters deflate and the seat cushion retracts at the same time. The easy egress function must be activated in the center display. 1. Move the gear selector to the P position. 2. Switch off the engine. 3. Unbuckle the seat belt. 4. Open the driver's door. > The seat, side bolsters and seat cushion all move at the same time to a position that makes it easier to leave the seat. Related information • • My Adjusting the second row head restraints The center head restraint in the second row of seats can be adjusted to suit the height of the seat's occupant. The outboard head restraints can be folded down* for a better rear view. Adjusting the center head restraint Power front seats* (p. 161) Ignition modes (p. 355) Center head restraint button Easy ingress The seat remains in the easy egress position when the driver leaves the vehicle. When the driver returns to the vehicle, the seat is in a position to make sitting down easier. When the driver is seated, has buckled the seat belt and has put the ignition in at least mode 1, the seat will return to the driver's preferred position. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 167 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Electrically folding down the rear seat’s outboard head restraints* 2. In the center display, select Settings My Car Seats Fold Headrest On Second Row Seats to fold down the outboard head restraints. WARNING For safety reasons, no one should be allowed to sit in the outboard rear seat positions if the head restraints are folded down. If these positions are occupied, the head restraints should be in the upright (fixed) position. The center head restraint should be adjusted up or down according to the passenger's height. The restraint should be carefully adjusted to support the occupant's head. To lower the head restraint, press and hold the button (see the illustration) and push the head restraint down carefully. The outboard head restraints can be folded down in two ways from the center display. 168 WARNING From Function view WARNING The center rear seat head restraint should only be in its lowest position when this seat is NOT occupied. When the center position is occupied, the head restraint should be correctly adjusted to the passenger’s height. The upper edge of the head restraint should be at least on a level with the upper-most point of the seat occupant's ear. The head restraints must be returned to the upright position manually until they click into position. The head restraint must be locked in the upright position after it has been folded up. Related information • • 1. Go to the center display's Function view. 2. Tap the Headrest fold button. Folding the second row backrests (p. 170) Center display overview (p. 29) Via settings 1. The ignition has to be in at least mode II. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Adjusting the second row backrest tilt Outboard seats • Seat belts (p. 58) Backrest tilt can be adjusted separately for each of the second row seats. Center seat 1. Pull the strap on the center seat's right side. 2. Adjust backrest tilt forward/rearward by decreasing/increasing pressure on it. 3. Release the strap to lock the backrest in the new position and press the backrest until its lock engages. 1. Pull the handle on the side of the seat upward. 2. Adjust backrest tilt forward/rearward by decreasing/increasing pressure on it. 3. Release the handle to lock the backrest in the new position and press the backrest until its lock engages. WARNING Check that all backrests are securely locked in place after changing the tilt angle. Related information • • • Rear seats (p. 166) Moving the second row seats forward/rearward (p. 171) Folding the second row backrests (p. 170) 169 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Folding the second row backrests Center seat Outboard seats To fold down the backrest: To fold down the backrest: 1. Fold down the head restraint manually. 1. 2. Pull the strap on the center seat's right side. Pull up and hold the handle on the side of the seat while the backrest is being folded down. 3. Fold the backrest down until it locks in position. The seat cushion will move downward/ forward as the backrest is folded down to create a flat surface. 2. Be sure that the backrest and head restraint do not come in contact with the front seats while they are being folded down. Fold down until the backrest locks in place. > The seat cushion will move downward/ forward as the backrest is folded down to create a flat surface. The head restraint folds down automatically when the backrest is folded down. The second row of seats has three individual seating positions whose backrests can be folded down separately. CAUTION • To help avoid damage to the seat upholstery, before a rear seat backrest is folded down, remove any objects from the seat and ensure that the seat belts are not buckled. • The integrated booster cushion* in the center position must be stowed (folded down) before the backrest is folded down. • The center seating position armrest must be folded up before the backrest is folded down. NOTE • • It may be necessary to adjust the front seat backrests and/or move these seats forward in order to fold down the rear seat backrests completely. It may also be necessary to move the second row of seats rearward. To return the backrest to the upright position: 1. Pull the strap. 2. Fold the backrest and release the strap. Push it into position until its lock engages. 3. Adjust the head restraint if necessary. WARNING Adjust the seat and be sure it is locked in the new position before driving. 170 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS WARNING After being folded down, be sure the backrests are securely locked in place. To return the backrest to the upright position: 1. Pull up and hold the handle on the side of the seat while the backrest is being folded up. 2. Be sure that the backrest and head restraint do not come in contact with the front seats while they are being folded up. Fold up the backrest and release the handle. 3. Press the backrest until its lock engages. 4. Fold up the head restraint manually. Moving the second row seats forward/rearward WARNING Be careful when moving the seat to avoid injuries to your hands/fingers. In 7-seat models*, the second row seats can be moved forward/rearward individually to help optimize legroom for the passengers. The second row seats cannot be moved in 5seat models. Check that the seat is securely locked in position after being moved. Related information • • Rear seats (p. 166) Getting into and out of the third row of seats (p. 172) WARNING Be sure the backrest and head restraint are securely locked in position after they have been folded up. Lift the handle located under the seat. Move the seat forward/rearward to the desired position. Related information • • • • Rear seats (p. 166) Adjusting the second row backrest tilt (p. 169) 3. Release the handle and move the seat so that it locks in the new position. Folding the third row* backrests (p. 172) Adjusting the second row head restraints (p. 167) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 171 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Getting into and out of the third row of seats WARNING Be sure the backrest and head restraint are securely locked in position after they have been folded up. The second row seats can be moved for easier access to the third row of seats*. Getting into and out of a third row seat Folding the third row* backrests The third row of seats has two individual seating positions that can be folded down manually or electrically*. NOTE Related information • Moving the second row seats forward/rearward (p. 171) • Adjusting the second row backrest tilt (p. 169) • Folding the second row backrests (p. 170) Before folding down the third row seats, it may be necessary to change the position/tilt of the seats in the second row. To fold down the backrest: 1. Pull the handle on the upper side of one of the outboard second row seats upward/ forward. 2. Fold the backrest forward and move the entire seat forward. 1. Pull the handle on the upper side of the backrest upward/forward. To return the backrest to the upright position: – 172 Move the seat back and fold up the backrest until it locks in position. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 2. Be sure that the backrest and head restraint do not come in contact with the seat ahead while they are being folded down. Fold the backrest down. > The seat cushion will move downward/ forward as the backrest is folded down to create a flat surface. The head restraint folds down automatically when the backrest is folded down. To return the backrest to the upright position, fold the backrest up until it locks in position. The head restraint has to be folded up manually. WARNING Be sure the backrest and head restraint are securely locked in position after they have been folded up. Related information • • Rear seats (p. 166) Adjusting the second row head restraints (p. 167) • Adjusting the second row backrest tilt (p. 169) • Moving the second row seats forward/rearward (p. 171) 173 CLIMATE CLIMATE Climate control system 4-zone climate system* The climate system regulates passenger compartment temperature based on the perceived temperature, not on the actual one. 2-zone climate system The selected passenger compartment temperature is based on a physical perception relating to the current ambient temperature, air flow, humidity, sunlight in the passenger compartment, etc. 4-zone system climate zones The 4-zone climate system makes it possible to set the left- and right-side temperatures separately for the front and rears seats. 2-zone system climate zones The 2-zone climate system makes it possible to set the left- and right-side temperatures separately. All climate system settings are made from the center display and the buttons in the center console. 176 Perceived temperature The vehicle is equipped with Electronic Climate Control (ECC) that cools, heats, dehumidifies and filters the air in the passenger compartment. All climate system settings are made from the center display and the buttons in the center console. Settings for the rear seats can also be made from the climate system panel on the rear side of the tunnel console. The system's sunlight sensor monitors the side of the car where sunlight is entering the passenger compartment. This means that the actual temperature may differ between the right and left sides of the compartment, even if the temperature setting is the same for both sides. Related information • • Climate system sensors (p. 177) Climate control system (p. 176) Related information • • • • • • Climate system sensors (p. 177) Perceived temperature (p. 176) Climate system controls (p. 180) Air quality (p. 177) Air distribution (p. 194) Air conditioning refrigerant (p. 541) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. CLIMATE Climate system sensors The climate system's sensors help regulate the passenger compartment temperature, humidity level, etc. Location of the sensors Related information • • Climate control system (p. 176) Perceived temperature (p. 176) Air quality The materials used in the passenger compartment have been selected and designed to be pleasant and comfortable, even for people with asthma or other types of allergies. Materials in the passenger compartment The materials used have been developed to help minimize the amount of dust and make the cabin easier to keep clean. All floor mats can be easily removed for cleaning. Use car cleaning products recommended by Volvo. Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and follow the instructions included with the car care product. Humidity sensor: in the rearview mirror console. Ambient temperature sensor: in the passenger's side door mirror. Passenger compartment temperature sensor: near the center console buttons. Sunlight sensor: on the upper side of the dashboard. NOTE Do not cover or block the sensors with clothing or other objects. Air filtering systems In addition to the passenger compartment filter, the Clean Zone Interior Package* and the Interior Air Quality System* contribute to a cleaner passenger compartment environment. Related information • • • Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* (p. 178) • Cleaning the interior (p. 527) Passenger compartment air filter (p. 179) Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)* (p. 178) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 177 CLIMATE Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)* The Clean Zone Interior Package includes a number of features that help further reduce allergenic substances in the passenger compartment. CZIP includes the following: • • An enhanced blower function that starts the blower when the vehicle is unlocked with the remote key to fill the passenger compartment with fresh air. This function starts automatically when required and shuts off automatically after a short period or if one the doors is opened. The time for which the blower operates decreases gradually due to reduced need until the vehicle is four years old. The Interior Air Quality System (IAQS). NOTE In order to retain the CZIP standard, the IAQS filter must be replaced at the specified intervals. Consult your Volvo retailer. See also the CZIP brochure for additional information. Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* Activating/deactivating IAQS The Interior Air Quality System uses a multifilter and an air quality sensor to remove gases, particles and other contaminants from the air entering the passenger compartment. To change the setting for IAQS activation/deactivation: 1. In the center display's Settings view, go to Climate. The IAQS sensor monitors increased levels of contaminants in the outside air and if contaminants are detected, the air intake closes and the air inside the passenger compartment is recirculated, i.e., no outside air enters the vehicle. The filter also cleans recirculated passenger compartment air. 2. Activate/deactivate IAQS by selecting/deselecting the Air Quality Sensor box. NOTE • The air quality sensor should always be engaged in order to obtain the best air in the passenger compartment. • Recirculation is limited in cold weather to avoid fogging. • If the insides of the windows start fogging, disengage the air quality sensor. Use the defroster function to increase airflow to the front, side, and rear windows. Related information • • • Air quality (p. 177) Passenger compartment air filter (p. 179) Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)* (p. 178) NOTE In order to retain the CZIP standard, the IAQS filter must be replaced at the specified intervals. Consult your Volvo retailer. 178 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. CLIMATE Passenger compartment air filter Automatic climate control All air entering the passenger compartment through the climate system air intake is filtered. The Auto feature automatically controls a number of climate system functions. Related information • Climate system controls in the center display (p. 180) Filter replacement The filter must be replaced according to the service schedule for your vehicle. When driving in e.g., dusty or industrial areas, the filer may need to be replaced more often. Consult your Volvo retailer. Related information • • • • Air quality (p. 177) Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)* (p. 178) Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* (p. 178) Volvo's service program (p. 488) The Auto climate button in Climate view 1. Go to the center display's Climate view. 2. Tap or press and hold AUTO. > Auto mode is activated (button lights up)/ deactivated (button is off). Auto mode automatically controls air recirculation, air conditioning, and air distribution. Blower speed and temperature change depending on how long the button is pressed. • • Tap: return to previous settings. Press and hold: change to default settings (level 3 and 72 °F (22 °C). * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 179 CLIMATE Climate system controls Climate system functions are controlled using buttons on the center console, the center display and the climate system panel on the rear side of the tunnel console*. Overview of climate system controls • • Defrosting windows and mirrors (p. 187) Climate system voice commands (p. 122) Climate system controls in the center display All climate system functions can be controlled from the center display's climate bar and Climate view. Climate bar The most common climate system functions can be controlled from the climate bar. Climate system controls in the center display Defroster buttons on the center console Climate system panel on the rear side of the tunnel console* Related information 180 • Climate system controls in the center display (p. 180) • • Climate control system (p. 176) Temperature control for the driver and passenger sides. Control for heated* and ventilated* driver/ passenger seats and heated steering wheel*. Button for opening Climate view. The graphic in the button shows the activated climate system settings. Rear climate system controls on the tunnel console (p. 182) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. CLIMATE Blower control for the front seats (also for the rear seat on models with a 2-zone climate system). Climate view Tap the center button on the climate bar to access Climate view, which is divided into the following tabs: Main climate, Rear climate* and Parking climate *1. Toggle between the tabs by swiping the screen from left to right and by tapping the respective headings. AUTO: climate system Auto mode. Main climate In addition to the climate bar's functions, other primary climate system functions can also be controlled from the Main climate tab. Max, Electric, Rear: controls for defrosting windows and door mirrors. AC: air conditioning controls. Recirc: recirculation controls. Air distribution controls. 1 Not available in all markets. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 181 CLIMATE Rear climate* Parking climate1 All of the climate system functions for the rear seat can be controlled from the Rear climate tab. All of the parking climate functions can be controlled from the Parking climate tab. Related information • • Rear climate system controls on the tunnel console The rear seat climate system functions are controlled from the rear side of the tunnel console. Climate system controls (p. 180) Defrosting windows and mirrors (p. 187) Rear seat heating* Rear seat blower speed Rear seat temperature control Blower control for the second row of seats. Blower control for the third row of seats*. Rear seat temperature control. Rear seat heating control*. 182 If the vehicle is equipped with a climate panel on the rear side of the tunnel console but also has heated rear seats*, there will be buttons on the panel for this function. Related information • • • • Climate system controls (p. 180) Turning seat heating* on and off (p. 191) Setting the blower speed (p. 183) Setting the temperature (p. 184) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. CLIMATE Setting the blower speed The blower can be set to seven different speeds. In models with the 4-zone climate system*, blower speed can be set separately for the front and rear seats. Setting blower speed for the front seats3 NOTE If the blower is turned off completely, the air conditioning is disengaged, which may result in fogging on the windows. Setting the rear seat blower speed* From the front seat 3. Tap the desired blower speed: 1–5. The blower can be turned off for the second and third row of seats* by tapping 2nd row climate. The blower speed for the third row of seats * is the same as for the second row but can be turned off separately* by tapping 3rd row climate. > The blower speed will change and the button for the selected speed will light up. Blower control buttons in Climate view 1. Go to the center display's Climate view. 2. Tap the desired blower speed: Off, 1–5 or Max. > The blower speed will change and the button for the selected speed will light up. 1 Not available in all markets. 3 The same setting applies to Blower control buttons in the Rear climate tab in Climate view 1. Go to the center display's Climate view. 2. Go to Rear climate. the rear seats in models with the 2-zone climate system. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 183 CLIMATE From the rear seat Related information • Climate system controls in the center display (p. 180) • Rear climate system controls on the tunnel console (p. 182) Setting the temperature4 The temperature can be set separately for the left and right sides of the passenger compartment. In models with the 4-zone climate system*, it can also be set for the front and rear seats separately. Setting the temperature for the front seats5 Blower controls on the climate panel on the rear side of the tunnel console – Tap the desired blower level: Off or 1–5 on the climate panel. > The blower speed will change and the button for the selected speed will light up. NOTE • Blower speed for the rear seat cannot be set if the front seat blower setting is Off. • The climate system will adapt air flow within each set blower speed, which means that the blower speed may vary slightly. 4 Shown here in Celsius but also applies to Fahrenheit 5 The same setting applies to the rear seats in models 184 Temperature buttons in the climate bar 1. Tap the right or left side temperature button in the center display's climate bar to open the control. with the 2-zone climate system. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. CLIMATE Synchronizing the temperature Setting the rear seat temperature* From the front seat Temperature control 2. Set a temperature by: • • dragging the control to the desired temperature or tapping +/− to raise/lower the temperature. > The temperature will change and the new temperature will be shown in the button. Synchronization button on the driver's side temperature control 1. Tap the driver's side temperature button to open the control. 2. Tap Synchronize temperature . > The temperature for all of the vehicle's climate zones will be synchronized with the one set for the driver's side and the synchronization symbol will be displayed in the temperature button. Temperature buttons in the Rear climate group in Climate view 1. Go the center display's Climate view. 2. Go to Rear climate. 3. Tap the left or right side temperature buttons to open the control. Synchronization can be stopped by tapping Synchronize temperature again or by changing the temperature for the passenger's side or the rear seat*. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 185 CLIMATE From the rear seat Turning recirculation on and off Recirculation can be used to shut out exhaust fumes, smoke, etc., from the passenger compartment. Temperature control 4. Set the temperature by: • • dragging the control to the desired temperature or tapping +/− to raise/lower the temperature. > The temperature will change and the new temperature will be shown in the button. Temperature controls on the climate panel on the rear side of the tunnel console – Tap the left or right side's </>buttons on climate panel to lower/raise the temperature. > The temperature will change and the climate panel screen will show the new temperature. Recirculation button in Climate view 1. Go to Climate view in the center display. 2. Press Recirc. > Recirculation is activated (button lights up)/deactivated (button is off) NOTE Heating or cooling cannot be speeded up by selecting a higher/lower temperature than the actual temperature required. 186 NOTE • If recirculation is on for too long, there is a risk of condensation forming on the insides of the windows, especially in winter. • Recirculation cannot be deactivated if max. defroster is being used. CLIMATE Defrosting windows and mirrors Models without a heated windshield. With the timer activated, recirculation will switch off automatically after 20 minutes. The max. defroster, heated windshield* and heated rear window/door mirror functions are used to remove ice or condensation. – 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. Using the buttons in the center console 2. Tap Climate. 3. Activate/deactivate the timer by selecting/ deselecting the box for Recirculation Timer. Activating/deactivating the recirculation timer Related information • The buttons in the center console offer quick access to the defroster functions. Press button (1). > Max. defroster is activated (button indicator light on)/deactivated (button indicator light off). Models with a heated windshield*. – On models with the optional heated windshield, the max. defroster function can only be activated separately from the Climate view in the center display. Press button (1) repeatedly to access the function's three levels: • • Activate windshield heating Activate windshield heating and max. defroster • Climate system controls in the center display (p. 180) Deactivated > The windshield heating is activated (button indicator light on)/deactivated (button indicator light off). NOTE Max. defroster starts after a slight delay to avoid a brief increase in blower speed if the heated windshield function has been deactivated by pressing the button twice in quick succession. Center console buttons Button for the heated windshield* and max. defroster. Button for the heated rear window and door mirrors. Heated rear window and door mirrors – Press button (2). > Heating for the rear window/door mirrors is activated (button indicator light on)/ deactivated (button indicator light off). * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 187 CLIMATE From the center display's Climate view Activate/deactivate max. defroster Activating/deactivating windshield heating* NOTE • Triangular areas at the far sides of the windshield are not heated electrically and will take slightly longer to defrost/de-ice. • The heated windshield may affect the performance/range of e.g., transponders used to automatically pay highway tolls or other communication equipment. Activating/deactivating rear window and door mirror heating Max. defroster button in Climate view Windshield heating button in Climate view 1. Go to Climate view in the center display. 1. Go to Climate view in the center display. 2. Tap Max. > Max. defroster is activated (button lights up)/deactivated (button is off). 2. Tap Electric. > Windshield heating is activated (button lights up)/deactivated (button is off). Max. defroster overrides automatic climate control and recirculation, and activates the air conditioning, changes blower speed to 56 and the temperature to HI6. When max. defroster is deactivated, the climate system returns to the previous settings. 6 188 If windshield heating is activated while the Start/ Stop function has turned off the engine, the engine will restart. Rear window/door mirror heating button in Climate view 1. Go to Climate view in the center display. 2. Tap Rear. > Rear window/door mirror heating is activated (button lights up)/deactivated (button is off). In models with the 4-zone climate system*, front seats only. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. CLIMATE Automatically activating/deactivating the defrosting function when the engine is started The rear window/door mirror/windshield heating* can be set to start automatically when the engine is started. 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view and select Climate. 2. Activate/deactivate the respective defroster functions when the engine is started by selecting/deselecting the boxes for Auto Electric Front Defroster and Auto Electric Rear Defroster. • Turning steering wheel heating* on and off (p. 189) Turning steering wheel heating* on and off The steering wheel can be heated electrically for added comfort. Activating/deactivating steering wheel heating The heating function will switch off automatically when the window/mirror is sufficiently warm and the ice/condensation has disappeared. Related information • • • • • • • • • Climate system controls (p. 180) Climate system controls in the center display (p. 180) Defrosting windows and mirrors (p. 187) Air conditioning (p. 190) Turning recirculation on and off (p. 186) Adjusting air distribution (p. 195) Setting the blower speed (p. 183) Automatic climate control (p. 179) Buttons for heated steering wheel and seats in the climate bar 1. Tap the driver side steering wheel and seat button in the center display's climate bar to open the steering wheel and seat heating controls. If the vehicle is not equipped with the optional heated or ventilated seats, the button for steering wheel heating will be directly accessible in the climate bar. Turning front seat ventilation* on and off (p. 193) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 189 CLIMATE 2. Tap the steering wheel heating button repeatedly to select one of four levels: Off, High, Middle or Low. > The level changes and is displayed in the button. Automatic steering wheel heating Air conditioning • Activating/deactivating the main air conditioning unit For the air conditioning to function optimally, close the side windows and laminated panoramic roof* • The air conditioning cannot be activated if the blower is set to Off. 1. The automatic function starts heating the steering wheel when the temperature is sufficiently cold and turns it off automatically when the wheel is sufficiently warm. 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. 2. Tap Climate. 3. Under Auto Steering Wheel Heating Level, select Off, Low, Middle or High to activate/deactivate the automatic function. NOTE The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies the air in the passenger compartment. For the air conditioning to function optimally, close the side windows and laminated panoramic roof*. Activating/deactivating the rear air conditioning unit* Related information • • • 190 Climate system controls (p. 180) Climate system controls in the center display (p. 180) Steering wheel (p. 157) Air conditioning button in Climate view 2. Go to Climate view in the center display. 3. Tap AC. > The air conditioning is activated (button lights up)/deactivated (button is off). Air conditioning button in the Rear climate tab in Climate view 1. Go to Climate view in the center display. 2. Go to Rear climate. 3. Tap 3rd row climate. > The air conditioning is activated (button lights up)/deactivated (button is off). * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. CLIMATE NOTE Air conditioning for the third row of seats* cannot be activated if the main air conditioning unit or the air conditioning for the second row of seats* is/are deactivated. Turning seat heating* on and off 2. The seats can be heated for added comfort in cold weather. Activating/deactivating front seat heating Tap the seat heating button repeatedly to select one of four levels: Off, High, Middle or Low. > The level changes and is displayed in the button. Activating/deactivating rear seat heating Activating/deactivating the third row air conditioning when the engine is started From the front seat* The air conditioning for the optional third row of seats7 can be set to start automatically when the engine is started. 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. 2. Tap Climate. 3. Select Third Row Climate On At Engine Start to activate/deactivate the air conditioning for the third row of seats when the engine is started. Related information • 7 Climate system controls in the center display (p. 180) Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate bar 1. Tap the left or right side steering wheel and seat button in the center display's climate bar to open the steering wheel and seat heating controls. If the vehicle is not equipped with the optional heated steering wheel or ventilated seats, the button for seat heating will be directly accessible in the climate bar. Temperature buttons for Rear climate in Climate view 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. 2. Tap Climate. 3. Under Auto Driver Seat Heating Level and Auto Passenger Seat Heating Level, select Off, Low, Middle or High to activate/ deactivate and to select the desired level. Models with the optional 4-zone climate system only. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 191 CLIMATE From the rear seat With the 4-zone climate system* With the 2-zone climate system Automatically activating/deactivating the seat heating function when the engine is started The seat heating* can be set to start automatically when the engine is started. The automatic function starts heating the seats when the temperature is sufficiently cold and turns it off automatically when the seats are sufficiently warm. Seat heating buttons on the climate panel on the rear side of the tunnel console – Press repeatedly on the left or right side buttons on the climate panel on the rear side of the tunnel console to select one of four levels: Off, High, Middle or Low. > The level changes and the indicator lights in the button display the level. Seat heating indicator and control on the climate panel on the rear side of the tunnel console – Tap repeatedly on the left or right side seat heating buttons on the climate panel on the rear side of the tunnel console to select one of four levels: Off, High, Middle or Low. > The level changes and is displayed on the screen in the climate panel. NOTE Rear seat heating switches off automatically after 15 minutes. 192 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. 2. Tap Climate. 3. Under Auto Driver Seat Heating Level and Auto Passenger Seat Heating Level, select Off, Low, Middle or High to activate/ deactivate the automatic function. Related information • • • Climate system controls (p. 180) Climate system controls in the center display (p. 180) Rear climate system controls on the tunnel console (p. 182) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. CLIMATE Turning front seat ventilation* on and off Activating/deactivating front seat ventilation NOTE Seat ventilation cannot be started if the temperature in the passenger compartment is too low. Seat ventilation can be used e.g., to help remove dampness from the seat occupant's clothing. The ventilation system consists of fans in the seats and backrests that draw air through the seat upholstery. The cooling effect increases as the air in the passenger compartment becomes cooler. This feature can be activated when the engine is running and it monitors the seat's temperature, sunlight in the passenger compartment and the ambient temperature. For use over extended periods, the setting Low is recommended. Related information • • Climate system controls (p. 180) Climate system controls in the center display (p. 180) Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate bar 1. Tap the left or right side steering wheel and seat button in the center display's climate bar to open the steering wheel and seat controls. If the vehicle is not equipped with the optional heated steering wheel/seats, the button for seat ventilation will be directly accessible in the climate bar. 2. Tap the seat ventilation button repeatedly to select one of four levels: Off, High, Middle or Low. > The level changes and is displayed in the button. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 193 CLIMATE Air distribution Opening/closing/directing air vents The incoming air is distributed through a number of different vents in the passenger compartment. Some of the passenger compartment air vents can be open/closed/directed individually. Air distribution overview Direct the dashboard and door pillar outer air vents toward the side windows to defrost. Direct the vents into the passenger compartment to help maintain a comfortable temperature in warm weather. Opening/closing air vents Location of the air vents 2-zone system: four vents on the dashboard and one on each of the pillars between the front and rear doors. 4-zone system*: two additional vents on the rear side of the tunnel console. Air distribution with a 4-zone climate system Adjustable air vents There are 6, 8* or 10* adjustable air vents in the passenger compartment, depending on the climate system in the vehicle and the number of seats. 8 194 4-zone system*: one additional vent on each of the pillars behind the rear seats. Related information • • • • • Climate control system (p. 176) Adjusting air distribution (p. 195) Opening/closing/directing air vents (p. 194) Air distribution table (p. 196) Automatic climate control (p. 179) Air vent thumb wheel 8 – Turn the thumb wheel to open/close the air flow from the vent. The more of the white line on the thumb wheel that is visible, the greater the air flow. The illustration is generic; its design varies, depending on its location. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. CLIMATE Directing air flow Adjusting air distribution Air distribution can be adjusted manually. Related information • • • • Air distribution (p. 194) Opening/closing/directing air vents (p. 194) Air distribution table (p. 196) Climate system controls in the center display (p. 180) Air flow control 8 – Move the control from side to side or up/ down to direct the flow of air from the vent. Air distribution buttons in Climate view Defrost the windshield Related information • • • 8 Air vents in the dashboard and center console Air distribution (p. 194) Adjusting air distribution (p. 195) Floor air vents Air distribution table (p. 196) 1. Go to Climate view in the center display. 2. Tap one or more of the air distribution buttons to open/close the corresponding air flow. > Air distribution changes and the buttons light up or go out. The illustration is generic; its design varies, depending on its location. 195 CLIMATE Air distribution table Air distribution can be adjusted manually. Air distribution Use If all air distribution buttons are deselected in manual mode, the climate system will revert to automatic mode. 196 Main air flow from the defroster vents, some flow from the other vents. To remove ice and condensation (with moderate blower speed). Main air flow from the defroster and dashboard vents, some flow from the other vents. For best comfort in hot and dry weather. Main air flow from the dashboard vents, some flow from the other vents. For best cooling in hot weather. CLIMATE Air distribution Use Main air flow from the defroster and floor vents, some flow from the other vents. For best comfort and defrosting in humid conditions. Main air flow from the dashboard and floor vents, some flow from the other vents. For good comfort in sunny, cool weather. Main air flow from the floor vents, some flow from the other vents. For cooling or heat to the floor. Main air flow from the defroster, dashboard and floor vents. For cooler air toward the floor in warm weather or warmer air upward in cold weather. Related information • • • Climate system controls in the center display (p. 180) • Adjusting air distribution (p. 195) Air distribution (p. 194) Opening/closing/directing air vents (p. 194) 197 LOADING AND STORAGE LOADING AND STORAGE Cargo space The vehicle has flexible cargo capacity that makes it possible to load and secure large objects. By folding down the backrests in the second and third rows* of seats, the cargo capacity of the vehicle increases considerably. To make loading easier, the rear section of the vehicle can be raised and lowered using the pneumatic suspension*. Use the load anchoring eyelets or the grocery bag holder to secure objects and the cargo compartment cover helps conceal the load. Passenger compartment storage spaces The following is an overview of the passenger compartment and its storage spaces. Front seats Storage spaces, cup holders and 12-volt socket in the tunnel console The spare tire, jack and tools can be found under the cargo compartment's floor. Second row of seats Related information • • • • • • Loading (p. 207) Cargo compartment cover* (p. 213) Cargo net (p. 209) Storage spaces in the door panel, near the steering wheel, the glove compartment and the sun visors Grocery bag holder (p. 209) Load anchoring eyelets (p. 212) Steel cargo grid* (p. 211) Storage compartments in the door panels, cupholders in the center seat's backrest, storage pockets on the rear side of the front seat backrest, and 12-volt socket on the rear side of the tunnel console 200 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOADING AND STORAGE Third row of seats* Using the glove compartment Locking the glove compartment The glove compartment provides a lockable storage compartment for small items. 1. This can be done from the center display's Function or Settings view: • Go to Function view and tap Private locking unlocked. • Go to Settings view and select My Car Locking. Tap the Private Locking box. > A pop-up window will appear. NOTE Storage space and cup holder in the side panel and the storage space between the seats WARNING Always stow loose items such as cell phones, cameras, remote controls, etc. in the glove compartment or other storage spaces to help keep them from becoming projectiles in the event of sudden braking, etc. Related information • • • • Tunnel console (p. 202) Using the glove compartment (p. 201) Electrical sockets (p. 204) Sun visors (p. 203) The glove compartment and opening button on the center console The owner's manual and maps can be kept here. There are also holders for pens on the inside of the glove compartment door. Opening the glove compartment – A security code has to be selected the first time this function is used. This code is used to reset the function if an attempt has been made to deactivate private locking using an incorrect code. Keep this code in a safe place. 2. Enter the code to be used to unlock the glove compartment and tap Confirm. > The glove compartment will be locked. Press the glove compartment button on the center console. > The glove compartment door will open. Locking/unlocking the glove compartment The glove compartment can be locked when e.g., the vehicle is in a workshop for service, etc. When the private locking function is activated, the tailgate is also locked. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 201 LOADING AND STORAGE Unlocking the glove compartment Tunnel console 1. The tunnel console, located between the front seats, contains a 12-volt electrical socket, cup holders and storage spaces, etc. This function can be deactivated from the center display's Function or Settings view: • Go to Function view and tap Private locking locked. • Go to settings and select My Car Locking. Deselect the Private Locking box. > A pop-up window will appear. 2. Specify the code to be used to lock the glove compartment and tap Confirm. > The glove compartment will be unlocked. Using the glove compartment as a cooler* The glove compartment can be used to cool drinks or food and the cooling feature functions when the climate system is active (i.e., when the ignition is in mode II or when the engine is running). Cooling activated Cooling deactivated – Activate/deactivate cooling by moving the control as far as possible toward the passenger compartment/glove compartment. Related information • Passenger compartment storage spaces (p. 200) • Locking/unlocking the tailgate (p. 233) Storage space Storage space with cup holders for the driver and passenger and a 12-volt socket Storage space and USB/AUX sockets under the armrest Climate control panel for the rear seats* NOTE One of the alarm sensors, which is sensitive to metallic objects, is located under the tunnel console cup holders. Avoid leaving coins, keys, etc., in the cup holders because they may inadvertently trigger the alarm. 202 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOADING AND STORAGE Related information • • • • Passenger compartment storage spaces (p. 200) Sun visors There are vanity mirrors with card holders on the upper sides of the sun visors. Electrical sockets (p. 204) Alarm (p. 216) Rear climate system controls on the tunnel console (p. 182) Lighted vanity mirrors and card holder The vanity mirror lighting comes on when the mirror is opened. The vanity mirror's frame has a holder for e.g., a card or ticket. Related information • Passenger compartment storage spaces (p. 200) 203 LOADING AND STORAGE Electrical sockets 2. There are two 12-volt sockets in the tunnel console, a 120-volt socket on the rear side of the tunnel console, and one 12-volt socket in the cargo area*. Pull up the cover over the socket when it is not in use. Disconnect the device by pulling its plug, not its cord. WARNING • Be sure to place any devices connected to the socket safely so that they do not become projectiles in the event of a sudden stop and injure the occupants of the vehicle. • Be aware that connected devices may generate heat and become very hot. • Only connect devices that function correctly and are free from defects. These devices should be intended for use in a 120-volt, 60Hz socket with a plug intended for the socket in the vehicle and be UL-approved (or the equivalent thereof). • Never let the device, its plug or the socket itself come in contact with fluids of any kind. Never touch or use the socket if it appears to be damaged or wet. • Never connect multiple plugs, adapters or extension cords to the socket. This could override the socket's safety functions. • Never let children play or tamper with the socket, or attempt to insert any objects into it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle when the socket is active. • Never try to modify or repair the 120-volt socket. This should only be done by a CAUTION 120-volt socket in the tunnel console • Do not connect devices with large or heavy plugs that could come loose while driving. • Do not use devices that can cause interference with the vehicle's radio receiver or electrical system. 120-volt socket in the tunnel console for the second row of seats This socket is intended for 120-volt devices such as laptops, chargers, etc. The max. current provided is 150W. Using the socket 1. 204 Pull down the cover over the socket and plug in the device. > The socket's indicator light will indicate its status. The socket can only provide electrical current when the light is green. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOADING AND STORAGE trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Failure to follow the points above could result in electrical shock and/or serious injury. Status indication An LED (Light Emitting Diode) on the socket indicates its status: Status indicator light Socket status Action Steady green light The socket is providing current to a connected device. None. Flashing orange light The socket's voltage converter is too hot (the connected device draws too much current, etc. or the temperature in the passenger compartment is very high). Unplug the device, let the converter cool down and plug in the device again. The connected device draws too much current (constantly or currently) or is not functioning properly. None. The device should not be plugged into the socket. The socket has not detected a plugged in device. Be sure the device is correctly plugged into the socket. The socket is not active. Put the vehicle's ignition in at least mode I. The socket has been active but has been deactivated. Start the engine and/or charge the start battery. Indicator light off If a problem persists, have the socket checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. 205 LOADING AND STORAGE 12-volt socket in the tunnel console phones. For the sockets to provide electrical current, the ignition must be in at least mode I. 12-volt socket in the cargo area WARNING Always keep the sockets covered when not in use. CAUTION 12-volt socket in the tunnel console for the front seats Max. current provided is 10 A (120 W) if one socket is used at a time. If both of the sockets in the tunnel console are used at the same time, the max. current provided per socket is 7.5 A (90 W) If a tire sealing system's compressor is being used, no other device should be connected to any of the other sockets while the compressor is operating. 12-volt socket in the cargo area Fold down the cover to access the socket. Max. current provided is 10 A (120 W). NOTE The 12-volt socket in the cargo area provides electrical current even when the ignition is switched off. Using the socket while the engine is not running will drain the battery. Related information 12-volt socket in the tunnel console for the second row of seats The electrical sockets can be used for 12-volt devices such as monitors, MP3 players and cell 206 • Passenger compartment storage spaces (p. 200) • Ignition modes (p. 355) LOADING AND STORAGE Loading The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is determined by factors such as the number of passengers, the amount of cargo, the weight of any accessories that may be installed, etc. the function of the Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS). • Unstable loads can be secured to the load anchoring eyelets with straps or web lashings to help keep them from shifting. • Stop the engine and apply the parking brake when loading or unloading long objects. The gear selector can be knocked out of position by long loads, which could set the vehicle in motion. WARNING • • The vehicle's driving characteristics may change depending on the weight and distribution of the load. • A 44-pound (20 kg) object produces a force of 2,200 pounds (1,000 kg) in a head-on collision at 30 mph (50 km/h). • The cargo area and rear seat should not be loaded to a level higher than 2 in. (5 cm) below the upper edge of the rear side windows. Objects placed higher than this level could impede the function of the Inflatable Curtain. Tailgate opening button on the lighting panel Open the tailgate by pressing the button on the button on the lighting panel, pressing the remote key or by using the optional foot movement sensor under the rear bumper. Loading recommendations • Load objects in the cargo compartment against the backrest whenever possible. • If the backrests of the second row seats are folded down, they should not be in contact the front seat backrests. This could impede 1 Stop the engine, put the gear selector in P, and apply the parking brake when loading or unloading long objects. WARNING • Cover sharp edges on long loads to help prevent injury to occupants. Secure the load to help prevent shifting during sudden stops. • Always secure large and heavy objects with a seat belt or cargo retaining straps. • Always secure the load to help prevent it from moving in the event of sudden stops. • Switch off the engine, apply the parking brake and put the gear selector in P when loading and unloading the vehicle. Raising/lowering the rear-end of the vehicle* Using the buttons on the read edge of the cargo compartment, the rear-end of the vehicle (the level of the cargo compartment floor) can be raised or lowered for easier loading or to make attaching a trailer1 simpler. An accessory trailer hitch can be purchased from a Volvo retailer. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 207 LOADING AND STORAGE Extra loading space • The rear seat backrests can be folded down to added cargo space or for transporting long objects. The vehicle's wind resistance and fuel consumption will increase with the size of the load. • Drive smoothly. Avoid rapid starts, fast cornering and hard braking. Roof loads Load carriers are available as Volvo accessories. Observe the following points when in use: • Level control buttons on the rear edge of the cargo compartment Volvo-approved removable roof racks are designed to carry the maximum allowable roof load for this vehicle (see the article "Weights" for specific information). The level control consists of two buttons: one to raise and one to lower the rear-end of the vehicle. • Press and hold the respective buttons until the desired level has been reached. Never exceed the rack manufacturer's weigh limits. • Avoid single-point loads. Distribute loads evenly. • Place heavier cargo at the bottom of the load. • Secure the cargo correctly with appropriate tie-down equipment. • Check periodically that the load carriers and load are properly secured. • Remember that the vehicle's center of gravity and handling change when you carry a load on the roof. NOTE The level cannot be adjusted if a door or the hood are open (this does not apply to the tailgate). WARNING Be sure that the entire area under the vehicle is completely unobstructed before lowering the level. 208 • To avoid damaging your vehicle and to achieve maximum safety when driving, we recommend using the load carriers that Volvo has developed especially for your vehicle. See the article "Weights" for information about the maximum permissible load that can be transported on the roof. Related information • • • • • • • Folding the second row backrests (p. 170) Folding the third row* backrests (p. 172) Weights (p. 539) Cargo net (p. 209) Cargo compartment cover* (p. 213) Load anchoring eyelets (p. 212) Whiplash protection system (p. 89) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOADING AND STORAGE Grocery bag holder On the sides of the cargo compartment The grocery bag holders (hooks) and elastic strap help keep shopping bags in place. Cargo net The cargo net helps protect passengers from objects in the cargo compartment in the event of a sudden stop or hard braking. Under the cargo compartment floor2 The cargo net is attached at four points. There are also two fold-out holders in the side panels, one on each side. CAUTION There are two grocery bag holders and an elastic strap3 in the hatch that is part of the cargo area floor. The strap can be attached in four positions. Open the hatch to access the grocery bag holders and attach the elastic strap. Grocery bags with handles can also be hung on the hooks. 2 5-seat models only. 3 Can be replaced by ordering The grocery bag holders (hooks) are only intended to hold weights less than approx. 11 lbs (5 kg). Related information • • • Cargo net (p. 209) Steel cargo grid* (p. 211) Cargo net The cargo net can be mounted in two positions: • Rear mounting: behind the second row seats' backrests. • Front mounting: behind the front seats' backrests. Cargo compartment cover* (p. 213) a new one from a Volvo retailer. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 209 LOADING AND STORAGE WARNING • Objects in the cargo compartment should always be securely anchored. • The nets upper hooks must be securely inserted into the ceiling mounting points and the lower spring hooks must be securely hooked onto the cargo anchoring eyelets. • A damaged net must never be used. 3. Insert the other upper hook into the ceiling mounting point on the opposite side. It is spring-loaded to make mounting easier. Press each of the hooks as far forward into the respective mounting points as possible. 4. Rear mounting: with the upper hooks inserted into the rear ceiling mounting points, hook the lower straps through the load anchoring eyelets on the floor of the cargo compartment as show in the illustration. Attaching 1. Fold out the cargo net and fold out the upper rod. Be sure it locks in position. 2. Insert one of the net's upper hooks into the front or rear ceiling mounting point with the net's lower straps' locks facing you. Rear mounting Front mounting Front mounting: with the upper hooks inserted into the front ceiling mounting points, hook the lower straps through the eyelets on the front seat rails as shown in the illustration. Attaching the net is easier if the front seat backrests are upright and the seats are moved slightly forward. Adjust the front seats so that they only touch the net but do not apply pressure to it. 210 LOADING AND STORAGE CAUTION Pressure from the front seats against the cargo net could damage the net and/or its brackets. 5. Pull the lower straps taut. Removing and storing 1. Reduce tension on the net by pressing the button on the lower straps' respective locks and allow some slack on both sides. 2. Press in the catches and release both of the straps' hooks. 3. Remove the upper hooks from the ceiling mounting points. 4. Press the red button on the upper rod to allow it to fold. 5. Fold and roll up the net. Store the net under the cargo compartment floor. Steel cargo grid* Mounting Your vehicle can be equipped with a steel grid that helps prevent objects in the cargo area from moving forward into the passenger compartment. 1. Fold down the rear seats (second row of seats in 7-seat models) and lift in the steel grid through one of the rear doors or the tailgate. The curved (convex) side of the grid should face toward the cargo compartment and the hooks on each side of the grid should face upward. The mounting brackets and plastic sleeves are not needed in this step. 2. Press one of the grid's hooks into the larger part of the opening in the ceiling attachment point (1) as shown in the illustration. 3. Grasp the grid near the hook and move it toward the smaller opening (2). > This secures the hook in the attachment point. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the hook on the opposite side of the grid. The steel grid is made up of the grid itself and two separate mounting brackets. Each of the brackets has a screw cover and there are two plastic sleeves for the grid. WARNING • No one should ever be allowed to remain in the cargo compartment when the vehicle is moving. • The steel grid may only be used in the rear position described in this article. The ceiling attachment points above the front seats are not intended to anchor the steel grid. • The third row of seats (7-seat models* only): these seats must be folded down when the steel grid is mounted in the vehicle. • After being mounted, be sure that the steel grid is securely anchored in place. Related information • • • • Cargo compartment cover* (p. 213) Load anchoring eyelets (p. 212) Steel cargo grid* (p. 211) Loading (p. 207) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 211 LOADING AND STORAGE Related information • • • • 5. Attach the mounting bracket's hook through the cargo anchoring eyelet near the floor of the cargo compartment and insert the threaded section of the bracket through the grid's lower attachment hole (1). 6. Slide the plastic sleeve onto the threaded section of the of the mounting bracket with the sleeve's flange turned upward and press it down through the hole. Screw the screw cover into place until its underside is approx. 0.2 in. (5 mm) from the grid (2). 7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 for the opposite side. 8. Center the grid and tighten both mounting brackets alternately until the grid is held securely in place. Removing Perform the steps above in reverse order. The hooks can be removed before the plastic sleeves are removed from the holes in the grid. 212 Cargo net (p. 209) Load anchoring eyelets Load anchoring eyelets (p. 212) The eyelets in the cargo compartment can be folded out to secure objects with straps, a net, etc. Loading (p. 207) Load anchoring eyelets Cargo compartment cover* (p. 213) WARNING • Cover sharp edges on long loads to help prevent injury to occupants. Secure the load to help prevent shifting during sudden stops. • Always secure large and heavy objects with a seat belt or cargo retaining straps. • Always secure the load to help prevent it from moving in the event of sudden stops. • Switch off the engine, apply the parking brake and put the gear selector in P when loading and unloading the vehicle. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOADING AND STORAGE Related information • Loading (p. 207) Cargo compartment cover* The cover can be used to conceal objects in the cargo area. or partially retracted to make it easier to reach farther into the cargo compartment. Fully open Installing the cover Third row seats, 7-seat models*: hang the seat belt latches in the hooks provided in the side panels. For 5-seat models, see the following step. With the cover retracted, press the end piece on one side of the cargo area cover into the retaining bracket in the side panel of the cargo area. Do the same on the opposite side. Press both sides of the cover, one at a time, until they click into place. > The red mark will no longer be visible. Check that both ends of the cover are securely locked in place. With the cover retracted, grasp its handle and pull it out completely. Press the attaching pins on the rear corners of the cover into the grooves in the side panels and release the cover. > The cover is now fixed in the fully open position. Use The cover can be used in two positions: fully open to completely cover the cargo compartment * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 213 LOADING AND STORAGE Partially retracted If you are holding something in one of your hands: From the fully open position, push the cover's handle slightly upward with e.g., your elbow. > The cover will close until it reaches the partially retracted position. With the cover retracted, grasp its handle and pull it so that it is above the cargo compartment's side panels until it is fully open. Press the attaching pins on the rear corners of the cover into the grooves in the side panels. If the cover is already fully open see the next step. With the cover completely pulled out, press it upward lightly and allow it to retract slowly. > Allow the cover to retract until it stops in the partially retracted position. From the partially retracted position: – Grasp the handle and lift it slightly to release the attaching pins from their grooves. Pull the cover to the fully open position. > Allow the cover to retract completely. Removing the cover To fully open the cover from the partially open position: 1. With the cover retracted, press the button on one of the cover's ends and lift out that end. 1. Grasp the handle and pull out the cover to the fully open position. 2. 2. Let the cover retract slightly and press the handle slightly downward. > The cover will be secured n the fully open position. For 7-seat models: Release the seat belt latches from the hooks in the side panels. For 5-seat models, see the following step. 3. Carefully lift the cover up/out. > The other end will release automatically. Lift the cover out of the cargo compartment. Avoid placing any objects on the cover when it is open. WARNING 7-seat models: remove the cargo compartment cover completely from the vehicle if one or both of the third row seats will be occupied. Related information • • • • Cargo net (p. 209) Steel cargo grid* (p. 211) Loading (p. 207) Load anchoring eyelets (p. 212) Retracting the cover From the fully open position: – 214 Lift the cover's handle and pull it rearward slightly to release the attaching pins from their grooves. Allow the cover to retract. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOCKS AND ALARM LOCKS AND ALARM Locks and remote keys The vehicle can be locked and unlocked in various ways and there are several types of remote keys that can be used. These keys can also be linked to a driver profile, which contains vehiclerelated settings that have been stored. Locking/unlocking/opening/closing The vehicle can be locked/unlocked from the passenger compartment, using the buttons on the remote key or by using the optional Passive Entry system where it is only necessary to have a key in your possession to lock or unlock the doors. On models equipped with a power tailgate*, the tailgate can be opened/closed by moving your foot under a sensor* beneath the rear bumper. If for any reason a remote key does not function properly, it may be necessary to replace its batteries but the vehicle can always be locked or unlocked manually using the remote key's detachable key blade. Remote key The remote key does not have to be physically handled in order to start the engine because the vehicle is equipped with the standard Passive Start system (the key only needs to be in the front part of the passenger compartment). If the vehicle is equipped with the optional Passive Entry system that enables keyless entry and start, 216 the key can be anywhere in the vehicle when the engine is started. Models with Passive Entry* also have an extra, smaller key without buttons called a Key Tag. A special restricted Red Key makes it possible to limit some of the vehicle's functionality, such as by setting a maximum speed or limiting the maximum volume from the infotainment system's speakers. The various keys can also be linked to driver profiles, which make it possible to store different personal preferences (settings) in the vehicle. Additional keys can be ordered from a Volvo retailer. Alarm The alarm system provides a warning if an attempt is made to break into the vehicle. The following conditions will trigger the alarm: • • • a door/hood/tailgate are opened the battery is disconnected the alarm siren is disconnected If a problem is detected in the alarm system, a message will be displayed in the instrument panel. Do not attempt to repair any of the components in the alarm system yourself; this could affect the insurance policy on the vehicle. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Related information • • • • • • • Immobilizer (p. 221) Alarm (p. 216) Child safety locks (p. 218) Remote key (p. 224) Restricted key* (p. 226) Foot movement tailgate operation* (p. 228) NOTE One of the alarm sensors, which is sensitive to metallic objects, is located under the tunnel console cup holders. Avoid leaving coins, keys, etc., in the cup holders because they may inadvertently trigger the alarm. Locking/unlocking from inside the vehicle (p. 231) • Locking/unlocking from outside the vehicle (p. 232) • • Locking/unlocking the tailgate (p. 233) Starting the engine (p. 356) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOCKS AND ALARM Arming the alarm – Lock the vehicle by pressing the remote key's lock button, pressing the outer indentation for locking on one of the door handles1 or by pressing the tailgate's rubberized pressure plate1. If the door that triggered the alarm is left open, the alarm cycle will be repeated 10 times. Related information • Alarm indicator Automatically arming/disarming the alarm (p. 218) • Deactivating the alarm without a functioning remote key (p. 218) A red indicator light on the upper side of the dashboard shows the alarm's status: If the vehicle is equipped with a power tailgate*, the button on the lower edge of the tailgate can also be used to lock the vehicle and arm the alarm. Disarming the alarm – Unlock the vehicle by pressing the remote key's unlock button, pressing the pressuresensitive area on the inside of one of the door handles1 or by pressing the tailgate's rubberized pressure plate1. Turning off a triggered (sounding) alarm – Press the remote key's unlock button or put the ignition in mode I by turning the start knob to START and releasing it. Alarm signals The following occurs if the alarm has been triggered: • A siren will sound for 30 seconds or until the alarm is turned off • Passenger compartment lighting illuminates and all turn signals flash for 5 minutes or until the alarm is turned off 1 • • • Indicator off: the alarm is disarmed Indicator flashes once every two seconds: the alarm is armed Indicator flashes quickly after the alarm has been disarmed until the ignition has been put in mode I (turn the start knob to START and release it): the alarm has been triggered Models withe the optional Passive Entry only. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 217 LOCKS AND ALARM Automatically arming/disarming the alarm Deactivating the alarm without a functioning remote key Automatically arming the alarm helps prevent inadvertently leaving the vehicle without alarm protection. If the remote key is not functioning properly, the alarm can be turned off and the vehicle can be started as follows: If the vehicle has been unlocked with the remote key (and the alarm has been disarmed) but no door or the tailgate has been opened within 2 minutes, the vehicle will automatically relock and the alarm will re-arm. 1. Unlock and open the driver's door with the detachable key blade. > This will trigger the alarm. In certain markets, the alarm will be re-armed automatically after a slight delay after the driver's door has been opened and closed without being locked. Child safety locks Child safety locks help prevent children from inadvertently opening one of the rear doors from inside the vehicle. Electronic* activation/deactivation The electronic child safety locks can be activated/deactivated as long as the ignition is not completely switched off and this can be done for up to two minutes after the engine has been switched off if no door has been opened. To activate: Related information • • Alarm (p. 216) Deactivating the alarm without a functioning remote key (p. 218) Location of the back-up key reader in the cup holder 2. Place the remote key on the back-up key reader in the tunnel console's cup holder. 3. Turn the start knob to START and release it. > The alarm will turn off. Related information • • • • 218 Alarm (p. 216) Child safety lock button on the driver door control panel 1. Switch on the ignition or start the engine. Detachable key blade (p. 227) Starting the engine (p. 356) Automatically arming/disarming the alarm (p. 218) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOCKS AND ALARM 2. Press the button on the driver's door control panel. > Rear child lock Activated will be displayed in the instrument panel and the indicator light in the button will illuminate to show that the child safety locking function is activated. Manual activation/deactivation Related information • • Detachable key blade (p. 227) Ignition modes (p. 355) While the child safety locks are activated: • the rear door windows can only be opened from the driver door control panel • the rear doors cannot be opened from the inside To deactivate: Manual child safety locks in the rear doors – – Press the button in the driver door control panel. > Rear child lock Deactivated will be displayed in the instrument panel and the indicator light in the button will go out to show that the child safety locking function is deactivated. When the ignition is switched off, the current setting for the child safety locks will be stored. If the locks were activated at that time, they will continue to be activated when the ignition is switched on again. Use the detachable key blade in the remote key to adjust these controls. The rear doors can only be opened from the outside. The rear doors can be opened from the inside or the outside. NOTE • Each control on the respective doors control that door only, not both doors. • There are no manual child safety locks on models equipped with the electronic option. 219 LOCKS AND ALARM Antenna locations for the start and lock system WARNING People with implanted pacemakers should not allow the pacemaker to come closer than 9 inches (22 cm) to any of the Passive Entry system's antennas. This is to help prevent interference between the pacemaker and the Passive Entry system. The vehicle is equipped with a keyless2 start and lock system that requires a number of antennas located at various points in the vehicle. Related information • • Remote key (p. 224) Remote key's range (p. 224) Start and lock system type designations The following information contains type designations for the start and lock system. Alarm system USA FCC ID: MAYDA 5823(3) This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Canada IC: 4405A-DA 5823(3) Location of the antennas Under the cup holders in the front section of the tunnel console In the upper front section of the driver side rear door2 In the upper front section of the passenger side rear door2 In the center of the rear seat backrest2,3 2 3 220 This device is subject to the following conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Remote keys (Passive entry/Passive start*) USA Volvo Standard Key FCC ID: YGOHUF8423 Volvo Tag ID FCC ID: YGOHUF8432 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: Vehicles with the optional Passive Entry system only. In a seven-seat model, the antenna is located between the seats where the backrest and seat cushion meet. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOCKS AND ALARM (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any changes or modification not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment. Canada Volvo Standard Key IC: 4008C-HUF8423 Volvo Tag ID IC: 4008C-HUF8432 This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Immobilizer and Passive entry/Passive start* systems (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any changes or modification not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment. Canada–IC:3659A-VO3134 This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Immobilizer The immobilizer is a start inhibitor that helps prevent unauthorized persons from starting the engine. Each of the keys supplied with your vehicle contains a unique coded transponder. The vehicle code in the key is transmitted to the vehicle's ignition system where it is compared to the code stored in the start inhibitor module. The following message (which may appear in the instrument panel) is related to the immobilizer: Message Explanation Car key not found Remote key not recognized during start. Place the remote key on the key symbol in the tunnel console cup holder and try to start the vehicle again. Related information • • Alarm (p. 216) Remote key (p. 224) Related information • • Remote key's range (p. 224) Remote key (p. 224) USA–FCC ID: LTQVO3134 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 221 LOCKS AND ALARM Changing the remote key's battery The remote key can be opened if the battery needs to be replaced. The battery should be replaced if: • The information symbol illuminates and Unavailable Battery level too low is shown in the display and/or • if the locks do not react after several attempts to unlock or lock the vehicle Replacing the battery Move the button to the side and slide rear cover slightly upward. The cover will loosen and can be removed from the key. Use e.g., a screwdriver to turn the battery cover counterclockwise so that the markers align toward OPEN. Remove the cover carefully by pressing e.g., a finger nail into the indentation. Pry the cover up. Hold the remote key with the front side (with the Volvo symbol) toward you and move the button on lower edge of the key near the key ring to the right. Slide the front cover slightly upward. The cover will loosen and can be removed from the key. 222 LOCKS AND ALARM Insert a new battery4 with the positive (+) side up. Put the battery cover back in place and turn until the marker points to CLOSE. The battery's positive (+) side is up. Remove the battery as shown in the illustration. NOTE CAUTION When handling batteries, avoid touching their contact surfaces as this could result in poor battery function in the remote key. Turn the remote key over, put the front cover back on the key and slide in the opposite direction (compared to point 2 above) it into position. > A click indicates that the cover is correctly in place. Volvo recommends that the batteries used in the remote control meet the UN Manual of Test and Criteria, Part III, sub-section 38.3. Batteries installed in the key from the factory and batteries exchanged by an authorized Volvo workshop fulfill the above criteria. Related information • Remote key (p. 224) Old batteries should be disposed of properly at a recycling center or at your Volvo retailer. 6. 4 Put the rear cover in place on the remote key and slide it into position. > A click indicates that the cover is correctly in place. Use a CR2032, 3 V battery. 223 LOCKS AND ALARM Remote key's range Manual use For keyless entry into the vehicle, the remote key must be within approximately 5 feet (1.5 meters) of the sides of the vehicle or approximately 3 feet (1 meter) of the tailgate as shown in the illustration. The remote key's functions, such as locking and unlocking the vehicle, which are activated by or buttons, have a range pressing the of approx. 65 feet (20 meters) from the vehicle. The remote key may not function properly due to ambient radio waves, buildings or topographical obstructions, etc. The vehicle can always be locked/unlocked with the detachable key blade. Buildings or other obstacles may interfere with the function of the remote key. The vehicle can also be locked or unlocked with the key blade. If the remote key is removed from the vehicle In order to function correctly, the remote key must be within a certain distance of the vehicle. If the vehicle's locks do not react, move closer and try again. Keyless use5 If all of the remote keys are removed from the vehicle while the engine is running or if the ignition is on and all of the doors are then closed, a message will appear in the instrument panel and an audible signal will sound. When at least one remote key has been returned to the vehicle, the message will be erased in the display and the audible signal will stop. If the key is not returned to the vehicle, the message will be erased in the display and the audible signal will stop when the vehicle's speed exceeds 20 mph (30 km/h). Related information • • The shaded areas illustrate the range of the Passive Entry system's antennas 5 224 Models equipped with the optional Passive Entry only. Remote key (p. 224) Antenna locations for the start and lock system (p. 220) Remote key The remote key is used to lock/unlock the vehicle and must be in the passenger compartment in order to start the engine. The standard remote key (left) and the Key Tag (right) In models with the standard Passive Start system, the remote key only needs to be in the front section of the passenger compartment or in the tunnel console cup holders in order to start the engine. The keyless Passive Entry system for locking/ unlocking the vehicle is available as an option. This system has a range of approximately 5 feet (1.5 meters) from the sides of the vehicle or approximately 3 feet (1 meter) from the tailgate. With this system, a remote key can be anywhere in the vehicle. LOCKS AND ALARM Avoid keeping the remote key closer than approx. 4-6 in. (10-15 cm) from a cell phone or metallic object. If interference persists, unlock the vehicle with the detachable key blade and place the remote key in the backup key reader in the tunnel console cup holder to disarm the alarm. WARNING Always remove the remote key from the passenger compartment when leaving the vehicle and ensure that the ignition in mode 0, especially if there are children in the vehicle. Ordering new keys Two remote keys are provided with the vehicle (a Key Tag is also included for vehicles equipped with the optional Passive Entry system). Additional keys (a total of 12) can be ordered and used with the vehicle. A new driver profile will be added to each new key (including the Key Tag). Loss of a remote key If a remote key is lost, the others should be taken with the vehicle to a Volvo retailer. As an antitheft measure, the code of the lost remote key must be erased from the system. The number of registered keys for the vehicle can be found in the center display's Top view. NOTE The remote key's buttons Additional or duplicate remote control keys can be obtained from any authorized Volvo retailer. You can also obtain additional or duplicate remote control keys from certain independent repair facilities and locksmiths that are qualified to make remote control keys. Each key must be programmed to work with your vehicle. A list of independent repair facilities and/or locksmiths known to Volvo that can cut and code replacement keys can be found: The remote key has four buttons: one on the left side and three on the right side • on the Volvo website, www.volvocars.com/us • Lock: Press to lock the doors/tailgate and arm the alarm. by calling Volvo Customer Care at 1-800-458-1552. Unlock: Press to unlock the driver's door and disarm the alarm. Press again to unlock the other doors and the tailgate. This setting can be changed in the center display's Settings menu. Key Tag In addition to the two remote keys provided, a smaller third key, called a Key Tag, is also provided for vehicles equipped with the optional Passive Entry system. This key functions in the same way as a standard remote key but does not have a detachable key blade and its battery cannot be replaced; a new Key Tag has to be ordered. Tailgate: Press to unlock the tailgate only (and disarm the alarm for the tailgate). On vehicles equipped with the power tailgate*, press and hold to open the tailgate. Press and hold to close an open tailgate (an audible warning signal will sound). Panic alarm: Press to attract attention during emergency situations. To activate, press and hold this button for at least 3 seconds or press it twice within 3 seconds to activate * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 225 LOCKS AND ALARM the turn signals and horn. To deactivate, wait approximately 5 seconds and press the button again (the panic alarm will also deactivate automatically after several minutes). NOTE Additional or duplicate remote control keys can be obtained from any authorized Volvo retailer. Interference A restricted key, also called a Red Key, makes it possible to limit several of the vehicle's functions to help ensure that it is operated safely, for instance if the vehicle is used by a young driver. You can also obtain additional or duplicate remote control keys from certain independent repair facilities and locksmiths that are qualified to make remote control keys. Each key must be programmed to work with your vehicle. Metallic objects or electromagnetic fields may interfere with the remote key's function. Avoid placing the remote key within 4-6 in. (10-15 cm) of a cell phone or a metallic object. If interference persists, use the remote key's detachable key blade to unlock the vehicle and place the remote key in the backup key reader in the tunnel console cup holder. A list of independent repair facilities and/or locksmiths known to Volvo that can cut and code replacement keys can be found: Loss of a remote key If a remote keys is lost, a new one can be ordered. The other keys should be taken with the vehicle to a Volvo retailer or authorized independent locksmith. As an anti-theft measure, the code of the lost remote key must be erased from the system. The number of registered keys for the vehicle can be found in the center display's Top view. Restricted key* • on the Volvo website, www.volvocars.com/us • by calling Volvo Customer Care at 1-800-458-1552. Related information • • • • • Driver profiles (p. 112) Remote key's range (p. 224) Restricted key* (p. 226) Detachable key blade (p. 227) Changing the remote key's battery (p. 222) A restricted key makes it possible to limit the vehicle's maximum speed, add speed reminders and limit the audio system's volume. Several of the vehicle's safety systems will also always be active. Otherwise, this key functions in the same way as a standard remote key. One or more restricted keys can be ordered from a Volvo retailer after the vehicle has been purchased. A total of 11 keys can be programmed and used for the same vehicle, one of which has to be a standard remote key. Settings for the restricted key can be made by a standard remote key user from the center dis- 226 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOCKS AND ALARM play's Top view: Settings Profile Red key. System Driver Several of the vehicle's safety function cannot be turned off the by a restricted key user. The restrictions are designed to help reduce the risk of an accident and they cannot be changed by a restricted key user. These settings cannot be changed by the Red Key's user. Possible settings The following settings can be made for a restricted key: Speed Limiter* (On/Off) • • • • Setting interval: 30-160 mph (50-250 km/h) Default setting: 75 mph (120 km/h) Increments: 5 mph (10 km/h) See the article "Speed limiter" for additional information. Speed reminder (On/Off): • • • • Setting interval: 0-160 mph (0-250 km/h Default settings: 30, 45 and 55 mph (50, 70 and 90 km/h.) Increments: 1 mph (1 km/h) Max. number of reminders: 6 Reduced max. volume (on/off) • 6 Default settings: On Adaptive cruise control * (On/Off) • • Initial setting: On at the longest interval See the article "Adaptive cruise control" for additional information Safety functions The following safety functions will always be active for a restricted key user: • • Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* • • • • Distance Alert* Lane Departure Warning/Lane Keeping Aid (LDW/LKA)* City Safety* Driver Alert Control (DAC)* Road Sign Information* Related information • • • • • • • • • • Remote key (p. 224) Detachable key blade Your vehicle's remote key contains a detachable key blade that can be used to unlock the driver's door, etc. A Volvo retailer can provide you with the key blade's unique code. Using the detachable key blade The remote key's detachable key blade can be used to: • Unlock the driver's door if the central locking system cannot be activated using the remote key • • Lock all doors Activate/deactivate the mechanical child safety locks in the rear doors The Key Tag6 does not have a detachable key blade. Driver profiles (p. 112) Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 252) Speed limiter (SL)* (p. 283) Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* (p. 315) Driving lane assistance (p. 323) Distance Alert* (p. 314) City Safety™ (p. 273) Driver Alert Control (DAC) (p. 312) Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 290) Models with the optional Passive Entry system only. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 227 LOCKS AND ALARM Foot movement tailgate operation* Detaching the key blade The foot movement sensor* makes it easy and convenient to open or close the tailgate without using your hands.7 Hold the remote key with the front side (with the Volvo symbol) toward you and move the button on lower edge of the key near the key ring to the right. Slide the front cover slightly upward. The cover will loosen and can be removed from the key. After use, press the key blade back into its position in the key, put the cover back on the key and slide it into position. > A click indicates that the cover is correctly in place. Related information • Locking/unlocking with the detachable key blade (p. 237) • Child safety locks (p. 218) Foot movement sensor under the rear bumper8 NOTE One of the remote keys must be in your possession when you are behind the vehicle in order to activate the foot movement sensor, even if the tailgate is already unlocked. This is done to help prevent the sensor from inadvertently opening the tailgate, for example, in a car wash. Remove the key blade. 7 8 228 Models equipped with the optional power tailgate only. If the vehicle is equipped with a skid plate*, the sensor is located farther to the left under the bumper. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOCKS AND ALARM Operation Locking and unlocking confirmation – The turn signals can be used to indicate that the vehicle has been locked/unlocked with the remote key. These settings can also be changed. Move your foot back and forth under sensor on the underside of the rear bumper. It is not necessary to touch the bumper. > A brief audible signal will sound when the tailgate begins to open/close. If several attempts have been made to open/ close the tailgate without a remote key in your possession, the function will time out and will not be available for a short period. The tailgate can be closed (or closed and locked) or buttons on the lower by pressing the edge of the tailgate9. It can also be operated manually or by pressing the button on the lighting panel in the passenger compartment or on the remote key. NOTE Interior confirmation Exterior confirmation • Locking: the turn signals flash once and the door mirrors will fold in (retract)10 • Unlocking: the turn signals flash twice and the door mirrors will fold out10 When the vehicle is locked, confirmation will only be given if all doors/tailgate and the hood are closed. If the vehicle is locked while only the driver's door is closed, all doors/tailgate will lock but confirmation will only be given when all doors/tailgate/ hood are closed. Lock and alarm indicator light on the dashboard A long flash indicates the vehicle is locked. While the vehicle is locked, the indicator will flash briefly. LEDs in the lock buttons on the doors illuminate when the doors are locked. Foot operation may not be possible if the sensor is obstructed by snow, ice, etc. Related information • • • 9 10 Power tailgate* (p. 235) Locking/unlocking the tailgate (p. 233) Remote key's range (p. 224) Vehicles equipped with the optional Passive Entry system only. Models with retractable door mirrors only. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 229 LOCKS AND ALARM Indicators in the interior lock buttons In all doors Related information Lock buttons in the front doors Rear door lock buttons and indicator lights Front door lock buttons and indicator lights Indicator lights on: all doors are locked. If a door is opened, the lights in both buttons will go out. Indicator light in the respective door on: that door is locked. If either of the rear doors is opened, the light in that door will out but the other indicator lights will remain on. Confirmation alternatives Various alternatives for locking/unlocking confirmation can be selected in the center display. 230 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. 2. Tap My Car 3. Change the settings under Locking & Unlocking Feedback. Locking. • Locking/unlocking from outside the vehicle (p. 232) • • Home safe lighting (p. 146) Adjusting the power door mirrors (p. 100) LOCKS AND ALARM Locking/unlocking from inside the vehicle Lock buttons on the rear doors* A rear door must be closed before it can be locked. The lock buttons on either of the front doors can be used to lock or unlock all doors and the tailgate at the same time. The rear doors can be locked using their respective lock buttons*. The central locking button on the front doors can also be used to lock the vehicle when you leave it. To do so: The central locking system 1. Open the door. 2. Press the lock section of the button. 3. Close the door. This will lock the vehicle completely and arm the alarm. Alternative locking when parking12 Lock button in a rear door The lock buttons in the rear doors lock/unlock each door respectively. To unlock a rear door: – Central locking/unlocking buttons and indicator lights on the front doors – Press the button on the driver's door to to lock all doors/tailgate and press unlock. Unlocking Press the button on either of the front doors to unlock all doors and the tailgate. 11 12 To open one of the rear doors individually, pull its handle once and release it to unlock the door. Pull the handle again to open the door11. NOTE Please be aware that locking the vehicle in this way makes it possible to lock the remote key in the passenger compartment. To help avoid this, lock the vehicle from the outside by pressing the lock button on the remote key. If the vehicle is locked using the central locking button, be sure that the remote key is in your possession before closing the door. Locking – Press the button on either of the front doors (both front doors must be closed). All doors/tailgate are locked. The rear doors can also be locked individually by pressing the lock button on the respective door. Assuming that the child safety locks are not activated. This does not apply to models equipped with the optional Passive Entry system. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 231 LOCKS AND ALARM Automatic locking All of the doors/tailgate can be locked automatically when the vehicle begins to move. To activate/deactivate this setting: 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. 2. Tap My Car 3. Select Auto Door Locking > Doors and tailgate lock when the vehicle moves will be displayed and the doors and tailgate will lock automatically when the vehicle begins to move. Locking Related information • Locking/unlocking from outside the vehicle (p. 232) • Child safety locks (p. 218) Locking/unlocking from outside the vehicle The buttons on the remote key can be used to lock or unlock all doors and the tailgate at the same time. This can also be done without pressing the remote key buttons on models equipped with the optional keyless Passive Entry system. The power tailgate* can also be opened/closed by moving your foot under a sensor beneath the rear bumper*. The lock/unlock settings can be changed in the center display's Top view. driver's door can be unlocked with the detachable key blade. Keyless Passive Entry* If the vehicle is equipped with this system, it is only necessary to have a remote key in your possession to operate the central locking system. Models with Passive Entry have an indentation on the outside of the handle for locking the vehicle and a pressure-sensitive area on the inside of the handle for unlocking. The tailgate has a rubberized button used only for locking/unlocking. Go to: Settings My Car Remote Unlock and select Unlock All Doors or Driver Door Only. In order to lock the vehicle, the driver's door must be closed. If the tailgate or any of the other doors are open, they will be locked and the alarm will be armed when they are closed. NOTE Be sure the remote key is outside of the vehicle before the other doors/tailgate are closed to help avoid locking the remote inside the vehicle. Outer indentation for locking, the pressure sensitive area on the inside of the handle is for unlocking If the locks repeatedly do not react when the unlock button is pressed, it may be necessary to replace the battery in the remote. In this case, the 232 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOCKS AND ALARM The lock/unlock settings can be changed in the center display's Top view: Go to: Settings My Car Keyless Unlock and select All Doors or Single Door. Automatic relocking If no door or the tailgate is opened within two minutes after being unlocked, the vehicle will automatically relock. Locking/unlocking the tailgate The tailgate can be locked/unlocked in different ways, depending on whether the vehicle is equipped with the optional keyless Passive Entry system. Unlocking with the remote key Remote door unlock Rubberized button on the tailgate used only for locking/ unlocking Locking All of the doors have to be closed before the vehicle can be locked but the tailgate can be open. Lock the doors and tailgate by pressing the pressure sensitive area on any of the door handles or by pressing the rubberized button on the tailgate. The lock indicator light on the dashboard will begin to flash to show that the vehicle is locked and the alarm has been armed. The vehicle can be unlocked using the Volvo On Call app. See the article "Volvo On Call mobile app" for additional information. Related information • • • • • Remote key (p. 224) Remote key's range (p. 224) Detachable key blade (p. 227) Alarm (p. 216) Remote key tailgate button 1. button on the remote key. Press the > The tailgate will be unlocked but remain closed. The alarm indicator on the dashboard will go out to indicate that the tailgate alarm is no longer armed. The other doors will remain locked and the alarm will remain armed for them. 2. Open the tailgate. > If the tailgate is not opened in within two minutes, it will relock and the alarm will rearm. Volvo On Call mobile app (p. 416) Unlocking Pull a door handle to unlock and open the door or press the rubberized button under the tailgate opening control. The lock indicator light on the dashboard will go out to show that the vehicle is unlocked and the alarm has been disarmed. 233 LOCKS AND ALARM CAUTION To unlock the tailgate: • When pressing the rubberized pressure plate, only light pressure is necessary to release the tailgate's electronic locking mechanism. – • When opening the tailgate, pull it up using the handle. Too much pressure on the rubberized pressure plate can damage its electrical connections. Keyless unlocking* Locking with the remote key – WARNING Rubberized pressure plate Opening the tailgate: 1. 2. With the remote key in your possession, unlock the tailgate by pressing lightly on the rubberized pressure plate under the outer tailgate handle. If the remote key is not detected, the tailgate cannot be unlocked/ opened. Three audible signals will sound. Avoid driving with the tailgate open if at all possible. Doing so could allow exhaust gases to enter the passenger compartment. Unlocking the tailgate from inside the vehicle Press the button on the lighting panel. > The tailgate will unlock and can be opened within two minutes (if the vehicle has been locked from the inside). Press the button on the remote key. > The alarm indicator on the dashboard will begin to flash to show that the alarm has been armed. Related information • • • • Remote key (p. 224) Power tailgate* (p. 235) Foot movement tailgate operation* (p. 228) Remote key's range (p. 224) Lift the handle to open the tailgate fully. Tailgate unlock button 234 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOCKS AND ALARM Power tailgate* Closing the tailgate The optional power tailgate can be opened/ closed in several ways. The tailgate can be closed by moving your foot under a sensor beneath the rear bumper*, by pressing the button on the lighting panel, with the remote key or by pressing the button on the lower edge of the tailgate*13 The power tailgate can be opened/closed using the button on the lighting panel in the passenger compartment, the on the remote key or by moving your foot under a sensor under the rear bumper*. To close the tailgate14: – Button on the lighting panel in the passenger compartment Press the button on the lighting panel or on the button on the remote key. > The tailgate will close automatically and audible signal will sound. This will not lock the tailgate. Opening the tailgate The power tailgate can be opened electrically by: • • Buttons in the lower edge of the tailgate 13 14 Pressing and holding the button on the lighting panel until the tailgate begins to open. button on the Pressing and holding the remote key until the tailgate begins to open. • Pressing lightly on the rubber-covered button under the tailgate's outside handle. • Moving your foot under a sensor under the rear bumper*. Buttons on the lower edge of the tailgate Models equipped with the optional Passive Entry system have a button to close the tailgate and a button to close and lock the tailgate. See also the article "Foot movement tailgate opening/closing." * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 235 LOCKS AND ALARM – – Press the button13 on the lower edge of the tailgate. > The tailgate will close automatically but will not be locked. Press the button13 on the lower edge of the tailgate. > The tailgate will close automatically. The tailgate and doors will also be locked and the alarm will be armed. Programming the tailgate's maximum opening angle The tailgate's maximum opening angle can be programmed, for example, if the tailgate has to be opened in a garage with a low ceiling. Programming the opening angle: – If the remote key is not close enough to the tailgate, automatic locking/unlocking/opening/closing will not be possible. Three short audible signals will sound. Interrupting opening/closing – This can be done in five ways: • • • Press the button on the lighting panel • Press lightly on the rubber-covered button under the tailgate's outside handle Press the button on the remote key Press either of the buttons on the lower edge of the tailgate Open the tailgate manually to the desired angle and press and hold the closing button on the tailgate's lower edge for at least 3 seconds. Release the tailgate. > Two audible signals will sound to indicate that the selected opening angle has been stored. Erasing tailgate programming – Open the tailgate manually to its highest position and press and hold the closing button on the tailgate's lower edge for at least 3 seconds. Release the tailgate. > Two audible signals will sound to indicate that the programmed opening angle has been erased. • Move your foot under a sensor beneath the rear bumper* > The tailgate will stop moving 13 236 NOTE If the tailgate has been opened and closed continuously too long, the automatic function will be deactivated to avoid overloading the electrical system. The automatic function can be used again after approximately 2 minutes. If the vehicle's battery has been discharged or disconnected, or if the tailgate has been open for more than 24 hours, the tailgate must be opened and closed once manually to reset the system. Pinch protection If the tailgate is obstructed when being opened/ closed, a pinch protection mechanism is activated. • While opening: the tailgate will stop moving and an audible signal will sound. • While closing: the tailgate will stop and return to the maximum programmable opening position. An audible signal will sound. WARNING Be sure that no one is near the tailgate when it is opened or closed automatically. The tailgate should never be obstructed in any way when it is operated. Models equipped with the optional Passive Entry system have a button to close the tailgate and a button to close and lock the tailgate. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. LOCKS AND ALARM Related information • • • Remote key's range (p. 224) Locking/unlocking from outside the vehicle (p. 232) Foot movement tailgate operation* (p. 228) Locking/unlocking with the detachable key blade Lock the door in the same way, but turn the key in step 3 counterclockwise. The detachable key blade can be used to e.g., unlock the driver's door from the outside if, for example, the remote key's battery is weak. Turning off the alarm Unlocking Backup key reader under the tunnel console cup holders To turn off the alarm: Pull out the driver's door handle as far as possible to access the lock cylinder. Remove the key blade from the remote key and insert it into the lock cylinder. Turn it clockwise 45 degrees so that the key blade points straight rearward. 5. 1. Place the remote key in the cup holder (on the key symbol) in the tunnel console (see the illustration). 2. Turn the start knob to START and release it. > The start knob will return to its original position and the alarm will be turned off. Turn the key blade back 45 degrees to its original position. Remove the key blade from the lock cylinder and release the door handle. Locking Pull the door handle again to open the door. > This will trigger the alarm. Each of the other doors has a lock mechanism that must be pressed in using the key blade so that the door cannot be opened from the outside. The doors can still be opened from the inside. If necessary, the vehicle can be locked by inserting the detachable key blade into the lock cylinder in the driver's door. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 237 LOCKS AND ALARM NOTE If the child safety locks are activated for the rear doors and the mechanical locking mechanism has also been activated with the key blade, it will not be possible to open these doors from the inside or the outside. To unlock, use the central unlocking button on either of the front doors or the unlock button on the remote key. Manually locking a door (this is not the child safety lock) – Remove the detachable key blade from the remote key. Insert it into the opening for the lock mechanism and press it in as far as possible. The door can be opened from inside and the outside. The door cannot be opened from the outside. To override the locking function, open the door from the inside. The doors can also be unlocked by pressing the unlock button on the remote key or by pressing the unlock button on the driver's door panel. 238 Related information • Detachable key blade (p. 227) DRIVER SUPPORT DRIVER SUPPORT Driver support systems Park Assist Camera (PAC)* (p. 296) Driver support system camera The camera is used by a number of driver support systems to e.g., detect a driving lane's side marker lines or traffic signs. Some of these systems are standard while others are optional and they are designed to e.g., help the driver maintain a set speed or a set distance to a vehicle ahead, or warn the driver of a potential collision situation and in certain cases apply the brakes if necessary. Certain optional systems can also assist in various parking situations. The camera is used by the following driver support systems: Related information • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 240 • The vehicle is equipped with a number of driver support systems that help provide the driver with active/passive support. Adjustable steering force* (p. 308) Electronic Stability Control (ESC) (p. 308) Speed limiter (SL)* (p. 283) Cruise Control (CC) (p. 248) Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 252) Pilot Assist* (p. 259) Distance Alert* (p. 314) City Safety™ (p. 273) Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* (p. 315) • • • • • • Lane Departure Warning/Lane Keeping Aid* Driver Alert Control* Pilot Assist* City Safety Road sign information* Active high beams* Related information • • • • • • High and low beam headlights (p. 140) Driving lane assistance (p. 323) Pilot Assist* (p. 259) Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 290) City Safety™ (p. 273) Driver Alert Control (DAC) (p. 312) Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* (p. 318) Driver Alert Control (DAC) (p. 312) Driving lane assistance (p. 323) Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 290) Park Assist* (p. 292) Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 301) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT Camera limitations The camera used by several of the driver support systems has certain limitations, which also affect the systems using it. WARNING Obstructions Never place any objects, decals, etc., on the windshield in front of the camera/radar unit. This could reduce or block these components' functions, and could cause one or more of the systems that utilize the them to stop functioning. Reduced visibility WARNING • • The camera has the same limitations as the human eye. In other words, its “vision is impaired” by adverse weather conditions such as heavy snowfall, dense fog, etc. These conditions may reduce the function of systems that depend on the camera or cause these systems to temporarily stop functioning. Strong sunlight, reflections from the road surface, ice or snow covering the road, a dirty road surface, or unclear lane marker lines may drastically reduce the camera’s capacity to detect the side of a lane, a pedestrian, a cyclist or another vehicle. The marked area must not be obstructed in any way. This area of the windshield should always be kept clean The camera is located at the upper, center section of the windshield along with the radar unit. If this symbol and Windscreen sensor Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual appear in the instrument panel, this indicates that the camera and/or radar sensor cannot detect other vehicles ahead. The following table shows some of the situations that can cause the message to be displayed and suggested actions. Cause Action The area of the windshield in front of the camera/radar sensor is dirty or covered by ice or snow. Clean the windshield or remove the ice/ snow. Thick fog or heavy rain/snow blocks reduces the camera/radar sensor's range of visibility. No action. The driver should be extra alert in conditions of this type. 241 DRIVER SUPPORT Cause Action Water or snow on the surface of the road swirl up and block radar signals or the camera's view. No action. The driver should be extra alert in conditions of this type. There is dirt between the inside of the windshield and the camera/radar sensor. Have the area of the windshield cleaned by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. High temperatures If the temperature in the passenger compartment is very high, the camera and radar sensor may be temporarily turned off for approx. 15 minutes after the engine has been started to protect their electronic components. When the temperature has cooled sufficiently, the camera and radar sensor will restart automatically. CAUTION • • Service and maintenance on City Safety may only be carried out by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Volvo recommends the use of only Genuine Volvo Replacement Windshields. • When replacing windshield wipers, use the same type or ones approved by Volvo. • If a crack, scratch or stone chip should occur in the section of the windshield in front the camera/radar sensor, contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician to repair or replace the windshield. Failing to do so may result in reduced City Safety functionality. After the windshield has been replaced, the camera/radar sensor will have to be recalibrated by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician to help ensure proper function of all of the vehicle's camera-/radar-based systems. To help prevent limited or reduced functionality, please also observe the following: 242 used, this may cause City Safety to function improperly or not at all. Damaged windshield • Volvo recommends that cracks, scratches or stone chips on the windshield in front of the camera/radar sensor should not be repaired; in such cases, the entire windshield should be replaced. • Before the windshield is replaced, contact a Volvo retailer to ensure that the correct windshield is ordered and installed. If the wrong type of windshield is Maintenance In order for camera and radar sensor to function properly, the area of the windshield must be kept free of dirt, ice, snow, etc. and should be washed regularly with a suitable car washing detergent. Related information • • • City Safety™ (p. 273) Radar sensor limitations (p. 245) Driver support systems (p. 240) DRIVER SUPPORT • • • • • Road Sign Assistance (RSI)* limitations (p. 291) Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* limitations (p. 305) City Safety limitations (p. 278) Driving lane assistance (p. 323) Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 252) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 243 DRIVER SUPPORT Driver support system radar unit The radar unit is used by a number of driver support systems to e.g., help detect other vehicles. The radar unit is used by the following functions: • • • • Distance Alert* Adaptive Cruise Control* Pilot Assist* City Safety Any modifications to the radar unit may make its use illegal. Related information • • • • • 244 Radar sensor (p. 269) Distance Alert* (p. 314) Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 252) Pilot Assist* (p. 259) City Safety™ (p. 273) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT Radar sensor limitations The radar sensor used by several of the driver support systems has certain limitations, which also affect the systems using it. Obstructions The radar sensor is located at the upper, center section of the windshield along with the camera. The following table shows some of the situations that can cause the message to be displayed and suggested actions. WARNING Never place any objects, decals, etc., on the windshield in front of the camera/radar unit. This could reduce or block these components' functions, and could cause one or more of the systems that utilize the them to stop functioning. If this symbol and Windscreen sensor Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual appear in the instrument panel, this indicates that the camera and/or radar sensor cannot detect other vehicles ahead. The marked area must not be obstructed in any way. This area of the windshield should always be kept clean Cause Action The area of the windshield in front of the camera/radar sensor is dirty or covered by ice or snow. Clean the windshield or remove the ice/ snow. Thick fog or heavy rain/snow blocks reduces the camera/radar sensor's range of visibility. No action. The driver should be extra alert in conditions of this type. 245 DRIVER SUPPORT Cause Action Water or snow on the surface of the road swirl up and block radar signals or the camera's view. No action. The driver should be extra alert in conditions of this type. There is dirt between the inside of the windshield and the camera/radar sensor. Have the area of the windshield cleaned by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. The radar sensor's capacity to detect vehicles ahead is impeded: a vehicle that suddenly enters the lane between your vehicle and the target vehicle. • Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or vehicles not driving in the center of the lane may remain undetected. if the speed of the vehicle ahead differs greatly from your vehicle's speed. Limited field of vision In curves, the radar sensor may detect the wrong vehicle or lose sight of the target vehicle. The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In some situations it may detect a vehicle later than expected or not detect other vehicles at all. Low trailer in the radar shadow Radar sensor's field of vision In certain situations, the radar sensor cannot detect vehicles at close quarters, for example 246 Low trailers may also be difficult to detect or may not be detected at all. The driver should be extra alert in situations of this type. DRIVER SUPPORT High temperatures If the temperature in the passenger compartment is very high, the camera and radar sensor may be temporarily turned off for approx. 15 minutes after the engine has been started to protect their electronic components. When the temperature has cooled sufficiently, the camera and radar sensor will restart automatically. Damaged windshield After the windshield has been replaced, the camera/radar sensor will have to be recalibrated by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician to help ensure proper function of all of the vehicle's camera-/radar-based systems. CAUTION • Service and maintenance on City Safety may only be carried out by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. • If a crack, scratch or stone chip should occur in the section of the windshield in front the camera/radar sensor, contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician to repair or replace the windshield. Failing to do so may result in reduced City Safety functionality. To help prevent limited or reduced functionality, please also observe the following: • • Volvo recommends that cracks, scratches or stone chips on the windshield in front of the camera/radar sensor should not be repaired; in such cases, the entire windshield should be replaced. Before the windshield is replaced, contact a Volvo retailer to ensure that the correct windshield is ordered and installed. If the wrong type of windshield is used, this may cause City Safety to function improperly or not at all. • Volvo recommends the use of only Genuine Volvo Replacement Windshields. • When replacing windshield wipers, use the same type or ones approved by Volvo. Maintenance In order for camera and radar sensor to function properly, the area of the windshield must be kept free of dirt, ice, snow, etc. and should be washed regularly with a suitable car washing detergent. Related information • • • • • • • City Safety™ (p. 273) Driver support systems (p. 240) Road Sign Assistance (RSI)* limitations (p. 291) Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* limitations (p. 305) City Safety limitations (p. 278) Driving lane assistance (p. 323) Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 252) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 247 DRIVER SUPPORT Cruise Control (CC) Set speed indicator Cruise Control (CC) is designed to assist the driver by maintaining a set speed. It is primarily intended for use on long straight roads in steady traffic, such as on highways and other main roads. The vehicle's current speed The set speed Starting and activating Cruise Control Cruise Control (CC) helps the driver maintain a set speed. Starting CC (putting it in standby mode) WARNING Overview • The vehicle must always be driven according to current traffic/road conditions. The driver must take action if CC does not maintain a suitable speed and/or distance to other vehicles. • The driver is always responsible for operating the vehicle in a safe manner. Related information Function buttons and symbols : CC switches from standby mode to active mode and the set speed will be resumed : Increases the set speed : From standby mode, press to put CC in active mode and set the current speed or from active mode, press to put CC in standby mode —: Reduces the set speed 248 • Starting and activating Cruise Control (p. 248) • • Changing Cruise Control speed (p. 249) • • Turning Cruise Control off (p. 251) Deactivating/resuming Cruise Control (CC) (p. 250) Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 252) Function buttons and symbols – Press â—€ (1) or â–¶ (3) to scroll to the CC ( ) function. The symbol (4) will be displayed in the instrument panel. > This indicates that CC has been started and is in standby mode. In standby mode, the vehicle will not maintain a set speed. NOTE Before CC can be activated, the vehicle's speed must be at least 20 mph (30 km/h). This is also the lowest speed that can be set. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT Activating CC (putting it in active mode and setting a speed) – With the symbol displayed (CC is in standby mode), press the button (2) on the left-side steering wheel keypad. The symbol will change colors from GRAY to WHITE. > This puts CC in active mode and sets the vehicle's current speed. Changing Cruise Control speed Cruise Control (CC) helps the driver maintain a set speed. Changing a set speed A temporary increase in speed, such as when passing another vehicle, does not affect the CC set speed. The vehicle will return to the set speed when the accelerator pedal is released. Engine braking instead of applying the brakes CC regulates speed by applying the brakes lightly. To avoid a loss of speed when driving down hills, use the engine braking function instead of letting the CC apply the brakes. In this situation, the driver can temporarily deactivate the CC braking function. Related information • become the set speed assuming that the accelerator pedal is still depressed when the button is pressed. Cruise Control (CC) (p. 248) Function buttons and symbols – Change a set speed by pressing the (1) or — (2) buttons briefly or by pressing and holding them: • • Press briefly: changes speed in +/– 1 mph (+/– 1 km/h) increments. Each press changes the vehicle's speed by +/– 1 mph (+/– 1 km/h). To do so: – Press the accelerator pedal approx. halfway down and release it. > CC will automatically deactivate the automatic brake function and will then only use the engine braking function. Related information • Cruise Control (CC) (p. 248) Press and hold: Release the button when the set speed indicator (4) has moved to the desired speed. If speed is increased by pressing the accelerator button is pressed, the vehipedal before the cle's speed when the button is pressed will 249 DRIVER SUPPORT Deactivating/resuming Cruise Control (CC) Cruise Control (CC) can be temporarily deactivated and put in standby mode. Deactivating and putting CC in standby mode To temporarily deactivate and put Cruise Control in standby mode: Standby mode due to action by the driver Reactivating CC from standby mode CC is temporarily deactivated and put in standby mode if: To reactivate CC after it has temporarily been put in standby mode: • • • the brakes are applied The gear selector is moved to N the vehicle is driven faster than the set speed for more than 1 minute. In these cases, the driver will have to regulate the vehicle's speed. A temporary increase in speed, such as when passing another vehicle, does not affect the CC set speed. The vehicle will return to the set speed when the accelerator pedal is released. Automatic standby mode CC switches automatically to standby mode if: Function buttons and symbols – Press the button (2). > The set speed marker (4) and symbols will change colors from WHITE to GRAY. This indicates that CC is temporarily in standby mode and will not maintain a set speed. 250 • • • • – Press the button (1). > The set speed marker (4) will change color from GRAY to WHITE. The vehicle will then return to the most recently set speed. the wheels lose traction engine speed (rpm) is too high/low brake temperature is too high the vehicle's speed goes below approx. 20 mph (30 km/h) In these cases, the driver will have to regulate the vehicle's speed. WARNING There may be a significant increase in speed after the button has been pressed. or DRIVER SUPPORT – Press the button (2). > The set speed marker (4) and symbols will change colors from GRAY to WHITE. CC will then set and maintain the vehicle's current speed. Turning Cruise Control off Cruise Control (CC) can be deactivated (turned off). Related information • • Cruise Control (CC) (p. 248) Starting and activating Cruise Control (p. 248) Related information • • Cruise Control (CC) (p. 248) Starting and activating Cruise Control (p. 248) Function buttons and symbols 1. button (2) on the left-side Press the steering wheel keypad. > This puts CC in standby mode. 2. Press the â—€ or â–¶ button to switch to another function. > The Cruise Control symbol in the instrument panel ( 3. ) will go out. button (2) again. Press the > Another function will be activated and the set speed in the CC system's memory will be erased. 251 DRIVER SUPPORT Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* • It is advisable to read through all of the related articles pertaining to ACC (see the list at the end of this article). The driver sets that desired speed and time interval to the vehicle ahead. When the camera and radar sensor detects a slower moving vehicle ahead, your vehicle's speed is automatically adapted. When there are no longer slower moving vehicles ahead, your vehicle will accelerate to resume the set speed. • • ACC is designed to follow a vehicle ahead in the same lane and maintain a time interval to that vehicle set by the driver. If the radar sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead, ACC will instead maintain the speed set by the driver. ACC is designed to smoothly regulate speed. However, the driver must apply the brakes in situations that require immediate braking. This applies when there are great differences in speed between vehicles, or if the vehicle ahead brakes suddenly. Due to limitations in the radar sensor, braking may occur unexpectedly or not at all. Adaptive Cruise Control can follow another vehicle from a standstill up to 125 mph (200 km/h). Always observe posted speed limits. 252 WARNING ACC is an optional system designed to assist the driver by maintaining a set speed or a set time interval to the vehicle ahead. • WARNING • Adaptive Cruise Control cannot cover all driving situations and traffic, weather and road conditions. Adaptive Cruise Control is not a collision avoidance system. The driver is always responsible for applying the brakes if the system does not detect another vehicle. • This system is designed to be a supplementary driving aid. It is not, however, intended to replace the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is responsible for maintaining a safe distance and speed and must intervene if Adaptive Cruise Control does not maintain a suitable speed or suitable distance to the vehicle ahead. Adaptive Cruise Control does not react to people or animals, or small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles. It also does not react to slow moving, parked or approaching vehicles, or stationary objects. • Do not use Adaptive Cruise Control in demanding driving conditions such as city driving or other heavy traffic situations, in slippery conditions, when there is a great deal of water or slush on the road, during heavy rain or snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on highway on- or offramps. Maintenance of ACC components may only be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo technician. Overview The distance to the vehicle ahead (in the same lane) is monitored by a radar sensor. Your vehicle's speed is regulated by accelerating and braking. The brakes may emit a sound when they are being modulated by the adaptive cruise control system. This is normal. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT Controls Instrument panel Collision warning Function buttons and symbols Speed indicators Warning light Increases the set speed or puts ACC back into active mode (previous settings will be resumed) Set speed Puts ACC in active mode and stores the current speed or puts ACC standby mode The current speed of your vehicle Reduces the set speed Target vehicle indicator: ACC has detected and is following a target vehicle using the set time interval Speed of the vehicle ahead Adaptive Cruise Control can exert brake force that is equivalent to approximately 40% of the vehicle's total braking capacity. In situations requiring more brake force than ACC can provide and if the driver does not apply the brakes, an audible signal from the City Safety system will sound and warning light will illuminate in the windshield to alert the driver to react. NOTE Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is not looking straight ahead may make the visual warning signal in the windshield difficult to see. 253 DRIVER SUPPORT Head-up-display* • Setting an Adaptive Cruise Control time interval (p. 258) Starting and activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) • Changing Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) speed (p. 257) • Deactivating/resuming Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (p. 255) ACC must first be put in active mode before it can be started in order to regulate speed or a set time interval to the vehicle ahead. • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) symbols and messages (p. 272) Starting ACC (putting it in standby mode) A flashing light alerts the driver A flashing icon will appear in the head-up display* to alert the driver of a collision risk. WARNING Adaptive Cruise Control only warns of vehicles detected by the radar sensor. In some cases there may be no warning or the warning may be delayed. The driver should always apply the brakes when necessary. Related information 254 • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) - fault tracing (p. 271) • Starting and activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (p. 254) • Adaptive cruise control passing assistance (p. 270) Function buttons and symbols – Press â—€ (2) or â–¶ (3) to scroll to the ACC ( ) function. The symbol (4) will be displayed in the instrument panel. > The symbol indicates that ACC has been started and is in standby mode. In standby mode, the vehicle will not maintain a set speed or a time interval to the vehicle ahead. Activating ACC (putting it in active mode and setting a speed) Before ACC can be put in active mode: * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT • The driver's seat belt must be buckled and the driver's door must be closed. • There must be a vehicle ahead (a target vehicle) or your vehicle's current speed must be at least 10 mph (15 km/h). A speed interval will also be indicated: ACC can be put temporarily in standby mode and then reactivated. • • The higher speed is the one set in ACC The lower one is the speed of the vehicle ahead (the target vehicle). Related information • • – With the symbol displayed (ACC is in standby mode), press the button (1) on the left-side steering wheel keypad. > This puts ACC in active mode and sets the vehicle's current speed, which is indicated by digits in the center of the speedometer. Deactivating/resuming Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Deactivating and putting ACC in standby mode If ACC is in standby mode and your vehicle comes too close to the vehicle ahead, the driver will be warned by the Distance Alert system instead. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 252) Setting an Adaptive Cruise Control time interval (p. 258) • Changing Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) speed (p. 257) • Deactivating/resuming Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (p. 255) The time interval to the vehicle ahead will only be shown when two vehicles are displayed. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 255 DRIVER SUPPORT To temporarily deactivate and put Adaptive Cruise Control in standby mode: In these cases, the driver will have to regulate the vehicle's speed. A temporary increase in speed, such as when passing another vehicle, does not affect the ACC set speed. The vehicle will return to the set speed when the accelerator pedal is released. Automatic standby mode ACC interacts with other systems, such as Electronic Stability Control. If any of these other systems are not functioning properly, ACC will turn off automatically. WARNING Press the button (2). > The symbol in the instrument panel will change colors from WHITE to GRAY and the set speed in the center of the speedometer will change from BEIGE to GRAY. Standby mode due to action by the driver • 256 the brakes are applied • the vehicle's speed goes below approx. 3 mph (5 km/h) and the vehicle ahead changes lanes or turns so that ACC no longer has a target vehicle to follow • • the driver opens the door The gear selector is moved to N the vehicle is driven faster than the set speed for more than 1 minute. the vehicle's speed goes below approx. 3 mph (5 km/h) and ACC cannot determine if the vehicle ahead is stationary or is an object such as a speed bump, etc engine speed (rpm) is too high/low the wheels lose traction the parking brake is applied the stability system's ESC Sport Mode is activated the Off Road drive mode is selected The radar sensor is covered by e.g., wet snow or if heavy rain interferes with radar waves Reactivating ACC from standby mode To reactivate ACC after it has temporarily been put in standby mode: – Press the button (1). > The vehicle will then return to the most recently set speed. WARNING There may be a significant increase in speed button has been pressed. after the ACC switches automatically to standby mode if: ACC is temporarily deactivated and put in standby mode if: • • • • • If this happens, the driver will be alerted by an audible signal and a message in the instrument panel. The driver will have to adapt the vehicle's speed, apply the brakes when necessary and keep a safe distance to the vehicle ahead. Function buttons and symbols – • • • • Related information • • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 252) • Changing Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) speed (p. 257) • Setting an Adaptive Cruise Control time interval (p. 258) Starting and activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (p. 254) the driver unbuckles the seat belt * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT • Adaptive cruise control passing assistance (p. 270) Changing Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) speed • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) symbols and messages (p. 272) ACC makes it possible to set various speeds. Changing a set speed If speed is increased by pressing the accelerator pedal before the button is pressed, the vehicle's speed when the button is pressed will become the set speed assuming that the accelerator pedal is still depressed when the button is pressed. A temporary increase in speed, such as when passing another vehicle, does not affect the ACC set speed. The vehicle will return to the set speed when the accelerator pedal is released. The lowest speed that can be set for ACC is 20 mph (30 km/h). However, ACC can monitor and react to the speed of the vehicle ahead down to a standstill. ACC not installed at the factory Change a set speed by pressing the (1) or — (3) buttons briefly or by pressing and holding them: This function can be installed in the vehicle after delivery if it is equipped with the normal cruise control. If ACC was installed after the vehicle was purchased, it will differ from the factory-installed version as follows: • Press briefly: changes speed in +/– 5 mph (+/– 5 km/h) increments. Each press changes the vehicle's speed by +/– 5 mph (+/– 5 km/h). • • Press and hold: changes the speed +/– 1 mph (+/– 1 km/h) at a time. Release the button when the set speed indicator (4) has moved to the desired speed. If the speed of the vehicle ahead goes below 18 mph (30 km/h), ACC disengages (goes into standby mode) and will no longer modulate the brakes. The driver will then have to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead • The lowest speed at which ACC can be started is 20 mph (30 km/h) Function buttons and symbols – 257 DRIVER SUPPORT Related information • • • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 252) Starting and activating Pilot Assist (p. 262) Setting an Adaptive Cruise Control time interval (p. 258) Setting an Adaptive Cruise Control time interval Changing a time interval ACC makes it possible to set various time intervals to the vehicle ahead. Different time intervals to the vehicle ahead can be selected and are shown in the instrument panel as 1–5 horizontal bars. The greater the number of bars, the longer the time interval. One bar between the vehicles represents a time interval of approximately 1 second; 5 bars is approximately 3 seconds. Controls for setting a time interval The same symbol appears if Distance Alert is activated. • If the symbol shows two vehicle's, ACC is actively following the vehicle ahead. • If only one vehicle is displayed, ACC is not actively following another vehicle. Reduce the time interval Increase the time interval Distance/time indicator – Press buttons (1) or (2) to reduce or increase the time interval. > The distance/time indicator (3) shows the current time interval. In order to follow the vehicle ahead as smoothly as possible, ACC allows the time interval to vary considerably in certain situations. At low speeds, when the distance to the vehicle ahead is short, ACC increases the time interval slightly. • 258 If ACC does not seem to react when it is put in active mode, this may be because the set * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT time interval to the vehicle ahead does not allow an increase in speed. • The higher the speed, the greater the distance to the vehicle ahead for a given time interval. • Only use time intervals permitted by local traffic regulations. WARNING • Only use a time interval that is suitable in current traffic conditions. • A short time interval gives the driver limited reaction time if an unexpected situation occurs in traffic. Pilot Assist* The Pilot Assist feature helps keep the vehicle in its current traffic lane, at a set speed and a set time interval to the vehicle ahead. Function The vehicle's camera monitors the traffic lane's side marker lines and a distance monitor helps maintain the set time interval to the vehicle ahead. Pilot Assist helps provide more relaxed driving in heavy, slow-moving traffic at speeds up to 30 mph (50 km/h) on highways and major roads. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 252) • Deactivating/resuming Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (p. 255) • Adaptive cruise control passing assistance (p. 270) • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) symbols and messages (p. 272) Pilot Assist's steering assistance is based on monitoring the direction of the vehicle ahead and the traffic lane's side marker lines. The driver can always override Pilot Assist and steer the vehicle to e.g., change lanes, etc. If the camera and radar sensor cannot detect the lane's side marker lines or a vehicle ahead, Pilot Assist goes into standby mode. Related information • • The driver sets the desired time interval to the vehicle ahead. Pilot Assist monitors that vehicle and the traffic lane's side market lines using the camera and radar sensor mounted in the upper, center section of the windshield. It helps maintain the set time interval by automatically adjusting speed and by providing steering assistance to help keep your vehicle in the lane. When Pilot Assist is in standby mode and your vehicle comes too close to the vehicle ahead, the driver will be alerted by the Distance Alert function. Starting and activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (p. 254) Function overview Windshield module containing the camera/ radar sensor Monitoring distance Monitoring side marker lines * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 259 DRIVER SUPPORT WARNING • Pilot Assist is designed to be a supplementary driving aid and cannot cover all driving situations, traffic, weather and/or road conditions. • The driver should be familiar with all of the information in this article regarding Pilot Assist, including its limitations. • Pilot Assist is not intended to replace the driver's attention and judgement. • Pilot Assist must only be used where there are clearly visible traffic lane side marker lines on both sides of the current traffic lane. In other circumstances there is an increased risk of collision with surrounding obstacles that are not detected by the system. • The driver is always responsible for steering the vehicle and maintaining a suitable speed and distance to the vehicle ahead and must intervene if necessary, even if Pilot Assist is being used. Pilot Assist is designed to regulate speed smoothly but in situations calling for fast braking, the driver must apply the brakes. This applies to situations where there are considerable differences in speed or if the vehicle ahead brakes suddenly. Due to the limitations of the camera and radar sensor, the system may apply the brakes in your vehicle suddenly or not at all. 260 The default speed for Pilot Assist is preset to approx. 30 mph (50 km/h) and cannot be changed. If the vehicle ahead increases speed to over 30 mph (50 km/h) and pulls away from your vehicle, Pilot Assist will go into standby mode. Pilot Assist overview Controls NOTE • Pilot Assist maintenance should only be carried out by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. • Pilot Assist regulates your vehicle's speed using the accelerator pedal and the brakes. Please be aware that there may be a faint sound from the brakes when the system is using them. WARNING • • Pilot Assist does not react to people or animals, or small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles. It also does not react to low trailers, slow moving, parked or approaching vehicles, or stationary objects. Do not use Pilot Assist in demanding driving conditions such as city driving or other heavy traffic situations, in slippery conditions, when there is a great deal of water or slush on the road, during heavy rain or snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on highway on- or off-ramps. Function buttons and symbols [ ]: Press to activate Pilot Assist or put it in standby mode Arrow key [ < ]: change from Pilot Assist to Adaptive Cruise Control (symbol (6) will also change) Reduce the distance (time interval) to the vehicle ahead Arrow key [ > ]: change from Adaptive Cruise Control to Pilot Assist (symbol (6) will also change) Increase the distance (time interval) to the vehicle ahead Function symbols DRIVER SUPPORT Instrument panel Collision warning Head-up-display* Speed indication Warning light A flashing symbol alerts the driver Pilot Assist can exert brake force that is equivalent to approximately 40% of the vehicle's total braking capacity. If the vehicle is equipped with a head-up display*, a flashing symbol in the windshield will alert the driver. Set speed Speed of the vehicle ahead Your vehicle's current speed. In situations requiring more brake force than Pilot Assist can provide and if the driver does not apply the brakes, an audible signal from the City Safety system will sound and warning light will illuminate in the windshield to alert the driver to react. NOTE Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is not looking straight ahead may make the visual warning signal in the windshield difficult to see. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 261 DRIVER SUPPORT WARNING Pilot Assist only provides warnings for vehicles that its radar sensor and camera have detected. For this reason, a warning may be given later than expected or not at all. The driver should never wait for a warning before applying the brakes. Starting and activating Pilot Assist • In other cases, the WHITE arrow pointing to the right indicates that the system is available. A YELLOW symbol with a flashing WHITE arrow indicates that the system is about to shift into standby mode. Related information • • • • A WHITE symbol indicates that Pilot Assist has been selected. The Pilot Assist feature helps keep the vehicle in its current traffic lane, at a set speed and a set time interval to the vehicle ahead. Pilot Assist limitations (p. 266) With ACC in standby mode: Pilot Assistauto-hold brake function (p. 266) Distance Alert* (p. 314) 1. Tap â–¶ (4). > The symbol will be displayed and Pilot Assist will go into standby mode. 2. button (1) on the left-side Press the steering wheel keypad. > Pilot Assist will go into active mode. Other Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) functions (p. 268) Setting an Adaptive Cruise Control time interval (p. 258) Function buttons and symbols Prerequisites The prerequisites for activating Pilot Assist are: 262 • The vehicle ahead must be within a reasonable (detectable) distance • The camera must be able to clearly detect the traffic lane's side marker lines • The vehicle's speed must be under approx. 30 mph (50 km/h). WARNING • Pilot Assist is not a collision avoidance system. The driver is always responsible for applying the brakes if the system does not detect another vehicle. • Do not use Pilot Assist in demanding driving conditions such as city driving or other heavy traffic situations, in slippery conditions, when there is a great deal of water or slush on the road, during heavy * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT rain or snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on highway on- or off-ramps. • Pilot Assist does not "see" pedestrians, animals, etc. Deactivating/resuming Pilot Assist Pilot Assist uses the vehicle's camera and radar sensor, which have limitations. Pilot Assist may deactivate or not function optimally if: • Pilot Assist's steering capacity is limited and may not always be able to help the driver keep the vehicle in the lane. Putting Pilot Assist in standby mode • • the lane's side market lines are missing, badly faded or cross each other. • the division of lanes is not clear, e.g., when a line divides or merges with another, at exits or if there are many road signs/markers. • if there are edges or other lines on or near the lane, e.g., curbs, cracks, repaired areas, sharp shadows, etc. • • the lane is narrow or winding. the weather conditions (rain, snow, fog, slush, poor visibility, backlighting, etc). The driver should also be aware that Pilot Assist has the following limitations: • • High curbs, barriers and temporary obstacles (cones, barriers etc) may not be detected or could be detected incorrectly as side marker lines, which may create a risk of collision. The driver must ensure a safe distance to these obstacles. Hands on the steering wheel Pilot Assist only functions when the driver's hands are on the steering wheel, which is continuously monitored by the system. If this is not the case, the driver will be alerted by a text message in the instrument panel. If the driver's hands are not returned to the steering wheel, an audible signal will sound. If the driver does not return his/her hands to the steering wheel after the audible signal, Pilot Assist will go into standby mode and must be . reactivated by pressing Related information • Function buttons and symbols 1. button (1). Press the > Pilot Assist will go into standby mode. 2. Press the â—€ button (2). > Pilot Assist will be turned off and shift to ACC in standby mode. Pilot Assist* (p. 259) or – Press the â—€ button (2). > Pilot Assist will be turned off and switch to ACC in active mode. The camera or radar sensor may not be able to detect objects if there are potholes or if there are stationary objects partially or completely blocking the road. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 263 DRIVER SUPPORT Standby mode due to driver action WARNING If a turn signal is used or if the accelerator pedal is pressed, Pilot Assist will temporarily go into standby mode. When the turn signal is switched off or the accelerator pedal is released, Pilot Assist will reactivate automatically. Automatic reactivation from standby mode can be done within 1 minute. After 1 minute has elapsed, Pilot Assist must be reactivated manbutton. ually by pressing the Pilot Assist will temporarily go into standby mode if: • • the brakes are applied the gear selector is moved to the N position. The driver will then have to regulate speed and distance to the vehicle ahead, or reactivate Pilot Assist manually by pressing the button on the left-side steering wheel keypad. Automatic standby mode Pilot Assist interacts with other systems, such as Electronic Stability Control. If any of these other systems are not functioning properly, Pilot Assist will automatically be deactivated. 264 If this happens, the driver will be alerted by an audible signal and a message in the instrument panel. The driver will have to adapt the vehicle's speed, apply the brakes when necessary and keep a safe distance to the vehicle ahead. Reactivating Pilot Assist from standby mode – Press the button (1). > The most recently set speed will be used. Related information • Pilot Assist* (p. 259) Pilot Assist switches automatically to standby mode if: • the camera cannot detect the traffic lane's side marker lines • the vehicle ahead is not within a reasonable (detectable) distance • the driver's hands are not on the steering wheel • • • • • the driver unbuckles the seat belt • • engine speed (rpm) is too high/low the wheels lose traction brake temperature is too high the stability system's ESC Sport Mode is activated drive mode Off Road is selected The camera/radar sensor is covered by e.g., wet snow or if heavy rain interferes with radar waves * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT Setting a Pilot Assist time interval WARNING Different time intervals to the vehicle ahead can be selected and are shown in the instrument panel as 1–5 horizontal bars. Changing the time interval The greater the number of bars, the longer the time interval. One bar between the vehicles represents a time interval of approximately 1 second; 5 bars is approximately 3 seconds. The same symbol appears if Distance Alert is activated. • Only use a time interval that is suitable in current traffic conditions. • A short time interval gives the driver limited reaction time if an unexpected situation occurs in traffic. Related information • Pilot Assist* (p. 259) Time interval controls Press to reduce the time interval to the vehicle ahead Press to increase the time interval to the vehicle ahead Distance indicator In order to follow the vehicle ahead as smoothly as possible, Pilot Assist allows the time interval to vary considerably in certain situations. At low speeds, when the distance to the vehicle ahead is short, Pilot Assist increases the time interval slightly. • If Pilot Assist does not seem to react when it is put in active mode, this may be because the set time interval to the vehicle ahead does not allow an increase in speed. • The higher the speed, the greater the distance to the vehicle ahead for a given time interval. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 265 DRIVER SUPPORT Pilot Assistauto-hold brake function Deactivating the auto-hold brake function Pilot Assist limitations At certain speeds, Pilot Assist provides braking effect. In certain situations, auto-hold will be deactivated when the vehicle is at a standstill and Pilot Assist will go into standby mode. Pilot Assist functionality may be limited in certain situations. Stop-and-go driving During brief stops in slow-moving traffic or att traffic lights where the vehicle is not stopped for more than 3 seconds, driving will resume automatically. If it takes more than 3 seconds for the vehicle ahead to begin moving again, Pilot Assist will go into standby mode and the auto-hold brake function will activate. The driver will then have to reactivate Pilot Assist as follows: • • – Press the button Press the accelerator pedal > Pilot Assist will resume following the vehicle ahead if it begins to move within approx. 6 seconds. • • This means that the brakes will be released and the vehicle can begin to roll. The driver must actively apply the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill. This can occur in the following situations: • • • • the driver presses the brake pedal the parking brake is set the gear selector is moved to the P, N or R positions the driver puts Pilot Assist in standby mode Automatically setting the parking brake In certain situations, the parking brake is set automatically to help keep the vehicle at a standstill. NOTE This occurs if: Pilot Assist can keep the vehicle stationary for max. 5 minutes, after which the parking brake will be set and Pilot Assist will go into standby mode. • the driver unbuckles the seat belt or opens the door • Pilot Assist has kept the vehicle at a standstill for more than approx. 5 minutes The parking brake must be released before Pilot Assist can be reactivated. • • the engine is turned off the brakes overheat Related information • 266 Pilot Assist* (p. 259) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT • WARNING • • Pilot Assist is not a collision avoidance system. The driver is always responsible for applying the brakes if the system does not detect another vehicle. Do not use Pilot Assist in demanding driving conditions such as city driving or other heavy traffic situations, in slippery conditions, when there is a great deal of water or slush on the road, during heavy rain or snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on highway on- or off-ramps. • Pilot Assist uses the vehicle's camera and radar sensor, which have limitations. Pilot Assist may deactivate or not function optimally if: • the lane's side market lines are missing, badly faded or cross each other. • the division of lanes is not clear, e.g., when a line divides or merges with another, at exits or if there are many road signs/markers. • if there are edges or other lines on or near the lane, e.g., curbs, cracks, repaired areas, sharp shadows, etc. • • the lane is narrow or winding. the weather conditions (rain, snow, fog, slush, poor visibility, backlighting, etc). The driver should also be aware that Pilot Assist has the following limitations: High curbs, barriers and temporary obstacles (cones, barriers etc) may not be detected or could be detected incorrectly as side marker lines, which may create a risk of collision. The driver must ensure a safe distance to these obstacles. • The camera or radar sensor may not be able to detect objects if there are potholes or if there are stationary objects partially or completely blocking the road. • Pilot Assist does not "see" pedestrians, animals, etc. • Pilot Assist's steering capacity is limited and may not always be able to help the driver keep the vehicle in the lane. • • • • Setting a Pilot Assist time interval (p. 265) Deactivating/resuming Pilot Assist (p. 263) Pilot Assistauto-hold brake function (p. 266) Camera limitations (p. 241) The driver can always take action to override Pilot Assist. Steep roads and/or heavy loads Pilot Assist is primarily intended for use on relatively level roads. The function may not be able to maintain the correct time interval to the vehicle ahead on when driving down steep hills, when the vehicle is transporting a heavy load or if it is towing a trailer. The driver should be attentive and prepared to apply the brakes in these situations. Related information • • • Radar sensor limitations (p. 245) Pilot Assist* (p. 259) Starting and activating Pilot Assist (p. 262) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 267 DRIVER SUPPORT Other Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) functions WARNING If ACC changes targets from a moving vehicle to a stationary one at speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the system will not react to the stationary vehicle and will accelerate to the previously set speed. ACC is an optional system designed to assist the driver by maintaining a set speed or a set time interval to the vehicle ahead. ACC has several supplementary functions: • • Changing target vehicles • • • Auto-hold brake function Automatic standby mode when changing targets Deactivation of the auto-hold brake function Automatically setting the parking brake The driver must actively apply the brakes to slow/stop the vehicle. Automatic standby mode when changing targets ACC disengages and goes into standby mode if: • Changing target vehicles • your vehicle's speed goes below approx. 3 mph (5 km/h) and ACC cannot determine if the target object is a stationary vehicle or some other type of object such as a speed bump, etc the vehicle's speed goes below approx. 3 mph (5 km/h) and the vehicle ahead changes lanes or turns so that ACC no longer has a target vehicle to follow Auto-hold brake function If the target vehicle turns suddenly, there may be a stationary vehicle ahead When ACC is actively following another vehicle at speeds under 20 mph (30 km/h) and changes targets from a moving vehicle to a stationary one, the system will brake for the stationary vehicle. 268 In slow-moving, stop-and-go traffic or when stopped at a traffic light, driving will resume automatically if the vehicle is not stopped for more than approx. 3 seconds. If it takes more than 3 seconds for the vehicle ahead to begin moving again, ACC will go into standby mode and the auto-hold brake function will activate. – The driver will then have to reactivate ACC in one of the following ways: • Press the button on the left-side steering wheel keypad • Press the accelerator pedal > ACC will resume following the vehicle ahead (target vehicle) if it begins to move within approx. 6 seconds. NOTE ACC can keep the vehicle at a standstill for up to 5 minutes, after which the parking brake will be set and ACC will go into standby mode. The parking brake has to be released before ACC can be reactivated. DRIVER SUPPORT Deactivation of the auto-hold brake function In certain situations, auto-hold will be deactivated when the vehicle is at a standstill and ACC will go into standby mode. This means that the brakes will be released and the vehicle can begin to roll. The driver must actively apply the brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill. This can occur in the following situations: • • • • the driver presses the brake pedal the parking brake is set the gear selector is moved to the P, N or R positions the driver puts ACC in standby mode Related information • • • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 252) Auto-hold brake function (p. 332) Parking brake (p. 335) Radar sensor The radar sensor is used by several driver support functions to help detect other vehicles. The radar sensor is used by the following functions: • • • • Distance Alert* Adaptive Cruise Control* Pilot Assist* City Safety* Modification of the radar sensor could make its use illegal. Related information • • Radar sensor - type approval (p. 270) Radar sensor limitations (p. 245) Automatically setting the parking brake In certain situations, the parking brake is set automatically to help keep the vehicle at a standstill. This occurs if: • the driver unbuckles the seat belt or opens the door • ACC has kept the vehicle at a standstill for more than approx. 5 minutes • • the engine is turned off the brakes overheat * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 269 DRIVER SUPPORT Radar sensor - type approval USA & Canada: FCC ID: L2C0054TR IC: 3432A-0054TR FCC ID: L2C0055TR IC: 3432A-0055TR This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: Adaptive cruise control passing assistance • ACC can assist the driver when passing other vehicles. Starting passing assistance How passing assistance works • (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and When ACC is following another vehicle and the driver indicates that he/she is about to pass that vehicle by using the left turn signal, ACC will begin accelerating toward the vehicle ahead before your vehicle has moved into the passing lane. (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. The function will then delay a speed reduction to avoid early braking as your vehicle approaches the slower-moving vehicle. WARNING Related information • 270 Radar sensor (p. 269) To start a passing assistance sequence: Activate the left turn signal. Passing assistance limitations WARNING The driver should be prepared for sudden changes when passing assistance is used. In certain cases, there may be undesired acceleration. Certain situations should be avoided, such as: The function is active until your vehicle has passed the other vehicle. Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term “IC:” before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. The speed set for ACC must be high enough to safely pass the vehicle ahead. • If the vehicle is approaching an exit to the left or a left turn. • If the vehicle ahead slows down before your vehicle has moved into the passing lane. • Traffic in the passing lane slows down. WARNING Be aware that this function may be activated in situations other than when passing a vehicle, such as if the turn signal is used to indicate a lane change or to indicate a turn. The vehicle will accelerate briefly. Using passing assistance To activate passing assistance: • Your vehicle (ACC) must be following another vehicle (the target vehicle). • Current speed must be at least approx. 45 mph (70 km/h ). Passing assistance in these situations can be deactivated by putting ACC in standby mode. Related information • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 252) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) fault tracing This message also indicates that the following systems may have reduced functionality: ACC is an optional system designed to assist the driver by maintaining a set speed or a set time interval to the vehicle ahead. • • • • • • • If this symbol is displayed in the instrument panel and the message Windscreen sensor Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual appears, the ACC radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect vehicles ahead. The following table lists possible causes for this message being displayed and suitable actions: Distance Alert City Safety Driver Alert Control Pilot Assist Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) Traffic Sign Information (TSI) Cause Action The windshield in front of the radar is dirty or covered with snow/ice. Clean/clear the windshield in front of the radar. Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals. No action possible. Heavy precipitation may affect the function of the radar. Swirling water or snow from the surface of the road may interfere with the radar signals. No action possible. A very wet or snow-covered road surface may affect the function of the radar. The windshield in front of the radar is clean but the message remains in the display. Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect that it is no longer obstructed. A text message can be erased by briefly pressing the O button on the right-side steering wheel keypad. If the message recurs, contact a trained and authorized Volvo service technician or retailer. Related information • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 252) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 271 DRIVER SUPPORT Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) symbols and messages The following table lists several ACC-related symbols and messages. In certain cases, ACC will display symbols (in different colors) and text messages. Symbol Message Explanation WHITE symbol ACC is in active mode and maintaining the set speed. GRAY symbol and Unavailable ACC is in standby mode. Adaptive cruise The system is not functioning properly. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo Service technician. Service required Windscreen sensor Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual Clean the windshield in front of the camera/radar sensor. Related information • 272 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)* (p. 252) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT City Safety™ City Safety™ is a support system designed to help alert the driver to pedestrians, cyclists and vehicles that may appear suddenly in front of your vehicle. Visual and audible alerts are provided. The vehicle will brake automatically if the driver is unable to react quickly enough. City Safety introduction WARNING • • City Safety™ is a supplemental aid to the driver. It can never replace the driver’s attention to traffic conditions or his/her responsibility for operating the vehicle in a safe manner. City Safety™ does not function in all driving situations or in all traffic, weather or road conditions. The City Safety function can help the driver avoid a collision when e.g., there is a sudden change in the traffic ahead if the driver's does not take action. Normally, the occupants of the vehicle will not be aware of City Safety except when the system intervenes when a collision is imminent. City Safety parameters City Safety functions at speeds up to 30 mph (50 km/h) to help avoid a collision with another vehicle or a cyclist. In the case of pedestrians, City Safety functions at speeds up to 28 mph (45 km/h). If the difference in speed between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead is greater than 30 mph (50 km/h), City Safety alone cannot avoid a collision. The driver must apply the vehicle’s brakes for full braking effect. The function assists the driver by applying the brakes automatically if there is an imminent risk of a collision and the driver does not react in time. Location of the camera and radar sensor City Safety can help prevent a collision or lower the vehicle's speed at the point of impact. City Safety triggers brief, forceful braking in an attempt to stop your vehicle immediately behind the vehicle or object ahead. This braking may be perceived as being very sudden. City Safety activates in situations where the driver has not applied the brakes in time, which means that the system cannot help the driver in all situations. City Safety is designed to intervene as late as possible to help avoid unnecessary activation. Function overview Audio-visual collision warning Distance monitoring by a camera and radar sensor 273 DRIVER SUPPORT When triggered, City Safety carries out three steps in the following order: 1. Collision warning 2. Brake assistance 3. Auto-brake 1: Collision warning The driver is first alerted to the risk of an imminent collision. City Safety can detect pedestrians, cyclists or vehicles that are stationary or that are moving in the same direction as your vehicle. The driver is alerted by a flashing red warning signal, an audible signal and pulsations in the brake pedal. 2: Brake assistance If City Safety has prevented a collision, the vehicle will be kept at a standstill until the driver takes action. If the vehicle has slowed to avoid colliding with the vehicle ahead, your speed will be reduced to that vehicle's speed. Warnings will only be provided if there is an imminent risk of a collision taking place. The driver should be aware of the system's limitations before operating the vehicle. When auto-break is triggered, the seat belt pretensioners may also be activated, see the article "Seat belts" for additional information. Warnings for pedestrians and cyclists will not be provided if the vehicle's speed is above 50 mph (80 km/h). Auto-braking can be cancelled if the driver presses hard on the accelerator pedal. City Safety's auto-brake function can help prevent a collision or reduce the speed at which a collision occurs. However, the driver should always apply the brakes, even if autobrake is operating. WARNING When City Safety applies the brakes, the brake lights will illuminate. The driver is always responsible for maintaining the correct speed and distance in relation to the vehicle ahead. Never wait for a collision warning or for City Safety to intervene. When City Safety is triggered and applies the brakes, a text message will be displayed in the instrument panel. If the risk of a collision increases, brake support will be activated. This function increases pressure on the brake pedal if the driver does not apply enough pressure to the pedal. 3: Auto-brake The brakes will be applied automatically. If the driver has not taken action at this stage and a collision is imminent, auto-braking will be triggered. Full braking effect will be used to avoid the collision if possible or to make the speed at the point of impact as low as possible. In certain situations, auto-braking may begin with limited effect before full braking is used. 274 City Safety maintenance may only be carried out by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Related information • • • • • • • City Safety™ troubleshooting (p. 280) City Safety in crossing traffic (p. 277) City Safety limitations (p. 278) City Safety symbols and messages (p. 282) Detecting cyclists and pedestrians with City Safety (p. 275) Rear Collision Warning (RCW) (p. 277) City Safety warning level settings (p. 275) DRIVER SUPPORT City Safety warning level settings WARNING City Safety is always activated but the function's warning distance can be adjusted. • NOTE City Safety cannot be turned off and activates automatically each time the engine is started. • Setting a warning level (distance) The distance set for warnings determines the system's responsiveness and sets the distance at which visual, audible and tangible (haptic) warnings will be triggered. • If the driver feels that warnings are given too often, the warning level can be lowered. This means that warnings will be provided later, resulting in fewer warnings being given. • No automatic system can be guaranteed to function 100% correctly in all situations. For that reason, never test City Safety by driving toward a person or object. This could result in serious injury or death. Even if the setting Earlier has been selected, warnings may be perceived as being given late, e.g., if the difference in speed is great or if the vehicle ahead brakes suddenly. City Safety can provide a warning for a potential collision but it can never shorten the driver's reaction time. Detecting cyclists and pedestrians with City Safety City Safety can detect vehicles, cyclists and pedestrians. Vehicles City Safety detects most types of vehicles that are either stationary, moving in the same direction as your vehicle or approaching when you are about to turn left. In order for City Safety to detect a vehicle in darkness, its headlights and taillights must be on and clearly visible. Cyclists To help make City Safety as effective as possible, always using the setting Earlier is recommended. To do so: 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. 2. Tap My Car 3. Choose among Earlier, Normal or Later. IntelliSafe City Safety. Begin by choosing Earlier. If too many warnings are given, change to Normal. The setting Later should only used in exceptional circumstances, e.g., for a more dynamic driving style. Related information • • • City Safety limitations (p. 278) City Safety™ (p. 273) Rear Collision Warning (RCW) (p. 277) Optimal example of what the system considers to be a cyclist: clear body/bike contours To help function optimally, City Safety's function for cyclist detection needs clear information about the bike itself and the rider's head, arms, 275 DRIVER SUPPORT shoulders, legs, the upper and lower parts of the body and a cyclist's normal pattern of movement. • If major parts of the cyclist's body are not visible to the camera, the system cannot detect the cyclist. • The cyclist must be an adult riding an "adultsize" bike. Pedestrians • If major parts of the pedestrian's body are not visible to the camera, he/she may not be detected. • In order to detect a pedestrian, the system must have a full view of the person's entire body and the person must be at least 32 in. (80 cm) tall. WARNING WARNING City Safety is designed to be a supplementary driving aid. City Safety is designed to be a supplementary driving aid. It cannot detect pedestrians: It cannot detect: • all cyclists in all situations, e.g., a partially obscured cyclist will not be detected. • a cyclist whose clothing prevents a clear view of the person's body contours. • a cyclist transporting a large object. The driver is always responsible for operating the vehicle in a safe manner. To help function optimally, City Safety's function for pedestrian detection needs clear information about the person's head, arms, shoulders, legs, the upper and lower parts of the body and a person's normal pattern of movement. In order to detect a pedestrian, there must be a contrast to the background. If there is little contrast, the person may be detected late or not at all, which may result in a late or no reaction from the system. City Safety can also detect pedestrians in darkness with the help of the vehicle's headlights. 276 • Optimal example of what the system considers to be a pedestrian: clear body contours who are partially obscured, wearing clothing that prevents a clear view of the person's body contours or who are not at least 32 in. (80 cm) tall. • carrying a large object. The driver is always responsible for operating the vehicle in a safe manner. Related information • • • City Safety™ (p. 273) City Safety limitations (p. 278) City Safety in crossing traffic (p. 277) DRIVER SUPPORT City Safety in crossing traffic WARNING City Safety can help the driver when making a left turn in an intersection. • City Safety is a supplementary driving aid and does not function in all driving situations or in all traffic, weather or road conditions. • Warnings and braking for an approaching vehicle will usually come at a very late stage. Turning at an intersection • The driver is responsible for maintaining a safe distance and speed. Never wait for a warning or for City Safety to take action. Limitations 1. The area in which City Safety can detect an oncoming vehicle In order for City Safety to detect an approaching vehicle in situations where there is a risk of a collision, that vehicle must be within City Safety's range (the red area in the illustration). The following criteria must also be met: In certain situations, it may be very difficult for City Safety to help the driver avoid a collision with an approaching vehicle in crossing traffic, for example: • on slippery roads when Electronic Stability Control is active • if the approaching vehicle is detected at a late stage • If the approaching vehicle is partially obscured by another vehicle if the approaching vehicle moves erratically (e.g., sudden lane changes at a late stage) • your vehicle's speed must be at least 3 mph (4 km/h) • • the approaching vehicle's headlights must be on Related information • • Rear Collision Warning (RCW) The Rear Collision Warning with braking at standstill (RCW) function can help the driver avoid rear-end collisions. RCW is activated automatically each time the engine is started and cannot be turned off. RCW can warn the driver of a vehicle approaching yours from behind by rapidly flashing your rear turn signals. RCW is only activated when a vehicle is rapidly approaching your vehicle from behind. At speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h), if RCW determines that your vehicle is at risk of a rearend collision, the front seat belt pretensioners and the Whiplash Protection System are activated. Just prior to the collision, the brakes are also applied to help reduce your vehicle's forward movement if and when the collision occurs. However, this can only happen if your vehicle is stationary. The brakes will be released immediately if the accelerator pedal is pressed. City Safety™ (p. 273) City Safety limitations (p. 278) 277 DRIVER SUPPORT NOTE • • • Due to local traffic regulations in certain markets, RCW will not activate the rear turn signals. That part of the function will be deactivated. The use of the rear turn signals will also be deactivated if the City Safety warning level is set at Later. See also the section "Setting a warning level (distance)" in the article "City Safety settings." If RCW detects a vehicle approaching from behind, the seat belt pretensioners and Whiplash Protection System will be activated. Limitations In some circumstances, it may be difficult for RCW to help the driver if there is a risk of a collision, such as: 278 • In slippery conditions when Electronic Stability Control is active • If the vehicle approaching from the rear is detected at a late stage • If the vehicle approaching from the rear changes lanes at a late stage • If the vehicle approaching from the rear is moving at a speed above approx. 50 mph (80 km/h) detected at a late stage Related information • • • • City Safety™ (p. 273) Whiplash protection system (p. 89) Seat belts (p. 58) City Safety warning level settings (p. 275) City Safety limitations City Safety™ may have limited or reduced functionality in certain situations. The function has several limitations that the driver should be familiar with: Low objects Hanging objects, such as flags for overhanging loads or accessories such as auxiliary lights or front protective grids that extend beyond the height of the hood may limit City Safety's function. Slippery driving conditions The extended braking distance on slippery roads may reduce City Safety's capacity to help avoid a collision. In situations of this type, the ABS brakes and Electronic Stability Control will help provide braking power and stability. Backlighting Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is not looking straight ahead may make the visual warning signal in the windshield difficult to see. DRIVER SUPPORT Heat If the temperature in the passenger compartment is very high, the camera and radar sensor may be temporarily turned off for approx. 15 minutes after the engine has been started to protect their electronic components. When the temperature has cooled sufficiently, the camera and radar sensor will restart automatically. The visual warning signal may also be temporarily disabled due to high passenger compartment temperatures caused by strong sunlight. Warnings may not be given if the distance to the vehicle ahead is short and the driver is actively operating the vehicle (clearly depressing a pedal or turning the steering wheel). Reduced visibility City Safety's functions may be greatly impeded or deactivated by e.g., intense snowfall or rain, in dense fog, in very dusty conditions or if there is blowing snow in front of the vehicle. Condensation, ice, snow or dirt on the windshield may also reduce the system's functionality. NOTE • Keep the windshield in front of the radar sensor free of ice, snow, dirt, etc. • Snow or ice on the hood deeper than 2 inches (5 cm) may obstruct the sensor. Keep the hood free of ice and snow. • Do not mount or in any way attach anything on the windshield that could obstruct the radar sensor. Camera and radar sensor's field of vision The camera and radar sensor have limited fields of vision. In some situations they may detect a vehicle, pedestrian or cyclist later than expected or not detect them at all. Other vehicles that are dirty may be detected later than others and in dark conditions, motorcycles may be detected late or not at all. If a text message is displayed in the instrument panel indicates that the camera or radar sensor are blocked, it may be difficult for City Safety to detect a vehicle, pedestrian or cyclist and the system's functionality may be reduced. Camera and radar sensor components should only be serviced or replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Other limitations WARNING • Warnings and braking may be delayed or not occur at all if traffic, weather or other conditions prevent the camera and/or radar sensor from detecting pedestrians, cyclists or other vehicles correctly. • Other vehicles can only be detected in darkness if their headlights and taillights are clearly visible. • The sensors have a limited range for pedestrians and cyclists. The system functions best at speeds up to 30 mph (50 km/h). For stationary or slow-moving vehicles, the system functions best at speeds up to approx. 43 mph (70 km/h). • Warnings for stationary or slow-moving vehicles may be impeded by darkness or poor visibility. • Warnings and braking for pedestrians and cyclists will not be provided at speeds above approx. 50 mph (80 km/h). • Do not place, attach or mount any objects on the inside or outside of the windshield near or over the sensor. This could affect the camera-based functions. 279 DRIVER SUPPORT Action by the driver City Safety™ troubleshooting Backing up City Safety is temporarily deactivated while the vehicle is backing up. Messages pertaining to any possible problems with City Safety will be displayed in the instrument panel. Low speed Troubleshooting and remedial action Cause Action City Safety is not activated at very low speeds (under approx. 3 mph (4 km/h). This means that the system will not be triggered if your vehicle approaches a vehicle ahead, such as when parking. The area of the windshield in front of the camera/radar sensor is dirty or covered by ice or snow. Clean the windshield or remove the ice/ snow. Active driver Thick fog or heavy rain/ snow blocks reduces the camera/radar sensor's range of visibility. No action. The driver should be extra alert in conditions of this type. There is dirt between the inside of the windshield and the camera/ radar sensor. Have the area of the windshield cleaned by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Action by the driver always has priority. For this reason, City Safety may not react or react later than expected in situations in which the driver is actively operating the vehicle, even if a collision is imminent. This is also done to help eliminate excessive warnings. Related information • City Safety™ (p. 273) Location of the camera and the radar sensor If a message is displayed in the instrument panel saying that the camera/radar sensor is blocked, City Safety cannot detect vehicles, cyclists or pedestrians ahead of you, which means that the system is not functioning properly. However, this message will not be displayed in all situations in which the camera/radar sensor is obstructed. For this reason, the driver must ensure that the area of the windshield in front of the camera/radar sensor is always kept clean. 280 The following table shows some of the situations that can cause the message to be displayed and suggested actions. DRIVER SUPPORT After the windshield has been replaced, the camera/radar sensor will have to be recalibrated by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician to help ensure proper function of all of the vehicle's camera-/radar-based systems. CAUTION • Service and maintenance on City Safety may only be carried out by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. • If a crack, scratch or stone chip should occur in the section of the windshield in front the camera/radar sensor, contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician to repair or replace the windshield. Failing to do so may result in reduced City Safety functionality. To help prevent limited or reduced functionality, please also observe the following: • • • • Volvo recommends that cracks, scratches or stone chips on the windshield in front of the camera/radar sensor should not be repaired; in such cases, the entire windshield should be replaced. Before the windshield is replaced, contact a Volvo retailer to ensure that the correct windshield is ordered and installed. If the wrong type of windshield is used, this may cause City Safety to function improperly or not at all. Volvo recommends the use of only Genuine Volvo Replacement Windshields. When replacing windshield wipers, use the same type or ones approved by Volvo. WARNING • The camera has the same type of limitations as the human eye, i.e., it cannot see as well in heavy snowfall or rain, thick fog or in heavy blowing dust or snow. In such conditions, systems depending on the camera may experience greatly reduced functionality or may be temporarily deactivated. • Never place any objects, decals, etc., on the windshield in front of the camera. This could reduce or block the camera’s function, and could cause one or more of the systems that utilize the camera to stop functioning. • Strong sunlight, reflections from the road surface, ice or snow covering the road, a dirty road surface, or unclear lane marker lines may drastically reduce the camera’s capacity to detect the side of a lane, a pedestrian, a cyclist or another vehicle. Maintenance In order for City Safety to function properly, the area of the windshield must be kept free of dirt, ice, snow, etc. Other vehicle functions If a message is displayed in the instrument panel, this means that the other systems using the camera/radar sensor (see the list below) will not have full functionality or may not function at all. The radar sensor is used by the following functions: • • • • • • • Distance Alert* Driver Alert Control* Adaptive Cruise Control* Radar sensor for other functions Pilot Assist* City Safetyuses the same radar sensor as Adaptive Cruise Control. See the article "Radar sensor limitations" for detailed information. Road Sign Information* Active High Beams* Lane Keeping Aid* Do not mount or in any way attach anything on the windshield that could obstruct the camera/ radar sensor. Related information • • • Radar sensor limitations (p. 245) Radar sensor (p. 269) City Safety limitations (p. 278) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 281 DRIVER SUPPORT City Safety symbols and messages A number of City Safety-related messages may be displayed in the instrument panel. Symbol Message Explanation City Safety When City Safety is braking or has applied the brakes, one of more symbols may illuminate in the instrument panel and a text message will be displayed. City Safety was activated City Safety Reduced functionality Service required Related information • 282 City Safety™ (p. 273) The system is not functioning properly. Contact a trained and authorized Volvo service technician. DRIVER SUPPORT Speed limiter (SL)* Set maximum speed indicator • The Speed Limiter (SL) is a feature that helps prevent the driver from exceeding a preset maximum speed. The vehicle's current speed Changing tolerance for the Automatic Speed Limiter (p. 287) • Turning the Speed Limiter* off (p. 290) The set maximum speed Overview WARNING Function buttons and symbols SL switches from standby mode to active mode and the set maximum speed will be used Increases the set maximum speed From standby mode, press to put SL in active mode and set the current speed as the maximum or from active mode, press to put SL in standby mode (the set maximum speed can be exceeded) — Decreases the set maximum speed • The Speed Limiter cannot cover all driving situations and traffic, weather and road conditions. • The vehicle must always be driven according to current traffic/road conditions. • The driver must take action if SL does not maintain the set maximum speed. • The driver is always responsible for operating the vehicle in a safe manner and observing posted speed limits. Related information • Starting and activating the Speed Limiter (SL)* (p. 284) • Deactivating/reactivating the Speed Limiter* (p. 288) • Changing a Speed Limiter (SL)* maximum speed (p. 285) • • Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)* (p. 285) Activating/deactivating the Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)* (p. 286) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 283 DRIVER SUPPORT Starting and activating the Speed Limiter (SL)* Activating SL (putting it in active mode and setting a maximum speed) • Activating/deactivating the Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)* (p. 286) The Speed Limiter (SL) is a feature that helps prevent the driver from exceeding a preset maximum speed. The engine must be running before SL can be put in active mode. The lowest maximum speed that can be set is 20 mph (30 km/h). • Changing tolerance for the Automatic Speed Limiter (p. 287) • Turning the Speed Limiter* off (p. 290) Starting SL (putting it in standby mode) – Function buttons and symbols – Press â—€ (1) or â–¶ (3) to scroll to the Speed ) function. Limiter ( > The symbol (4) will be displayed in the instrument panel. This indicates that SL has been started and is in standby mode. 284 With SL in standby mode (the will be displayed), press the button (2). > This puts SL in active mode and sets the vehicle's current speed as the maximum speed. Related information • • Speed limiter (SL)* (p. 283) • Changing a Speed Limiter (SL)* maximum speed (p. 285) • Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)* (p. 285) Deactivating/reactivating the Speed Limiter* (p. 288) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT Changing a Speed Limiter (SL)* maximum speed The Speed Limiter (SL) is a feature that helps prevent the driver from exceeding a preset maximum speed. Limitations Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)* When driving down steep hills, the Speed Limiter's braking effect may not be adequate and the set maximum speed may be exceeded. The message Speed limit exceeded will appear in the instrument panel to alert the driver. The Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL) reads road signs and adapts the vehicle's maximum speed to the posted speed limits. NOTE This message will appear if the maximum speed is exceeded by more than 2 mph (3 km/h). The Speed Limiter function can be switched to Automatic Speed Limiter. Symbols in the instrument panel Symbols in the instrument panel indicate which function is active: Speed Limiter Related information • Automatic Speed Limiter Speed limiter (SL)* (p. 283) A A Function buttons and symbols – Change a set maximum speed by pressing the (1) or — (3) buttons briefly or by pressing and holding them: • Press briefly: changes the maximum speed in +/– 5 mph (+/– 5 km/h) increments. Each press changes the maximum speed by +/– 5 mph (+/– 5 km/h). • Press and hold: changes the maximum speed +/– 1 mph (+/– 1 km/h) at a time. Release the button when the indicator (4) has moved to the desired maximum speed. and Sign symbolB after "70": ASL is activated. A B WHITE symbol: the function is active, GRAY symbol: the function is in standby mode. See the section "ASL symbol" below for an explanation of the symbol's different colors. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 285 DRIVER SUPPORT ASL symbol Related information A road sign symbol (next to the stored speed in the center of the speedometer) can be displayed in three different colors as explained in the following table: Road sign symbol's color Explanation Green/yellow ASL is active Gray Amber/orange ASL is in standby mode • • Speed limiter (SL)* (p. 283) • Changing tolerance for the Automatic Speed Limiter (p. 287) • Starting and activating the Speed Limiter (SL)* (p. 284) • Deactivating/reactivating the Speed Limiter* (p. 288) • Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 290) Activating/deactivating the Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)* (p. 286) Adjusting a set speed is done first when the vehicle passes a speed limit sign. If a speed limit sign cannot be read (e.g., because it is twisted, damaged, faded, dirty, covered by snow, etc.) ASL will go into standby mode because the system will not have "seen" the speed posted on the sign (SL will activate). The driver will have to react and adapt the vehicle's speed. ASL will reactivate when the vehicle passes a speed limit sign that the system can read. 286 ASL is activated/deactivated in the center display's Function view. Activating 1. If SL is not activated, tap the Speed Sign Assist button1 in the center display's Function view. > ASL will go into standby mode and a green indicator light in the button will illuminate. A road sign symbol will be displayed in center of the speedometer. 2. Press the button on the left-side steering wheel keypad. > ASL will be activated with the vehicle's current speed. ASL is temporarily in standby mode (e.g., because a speed limit sign could not be read) Limitations 1 Activating/deactivating the Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)* If this button is tapped while SL is activated, ASL will immediately begin reading road signs. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT Deactivating 1. Tap the Speed Sign Assist button in the center display's Function view. > ASL will be deactivated and the Speed limiter (SL) will be activated. 2. Press the button on the left-side steering wheel keypad. > SL will go into standby mode. Changing tolerance for the Automatic Speed Limiter Posted speed limit tolerance ASL can be set to allow the vehicle to drive a maximum of 5 mph (10 km/h) above or below the posted speed limit. For example, if the current posted speed limit is 50 mph (70 km/h), the driver can opt to allow the vehicle to drive at a speed of 55 mph (80 km/h). WARNING After switching from ASL to SL, the vehicle will no longer adapt speed to posted speed limits. It will only limit the vehicle's maximum speed. Related information • • Speed limiter (SL)* (p. 283) Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)* (p. 285) Function buttons and symbols – Press the button (1) briefly to change 50 mph (70 km/h) to 55 mph (75 km/h) in the center of the speedometer (6). > The vehicle will then use the selected tolerance if the speed limit sign detected is 50 mph (70 km/h). This will continue until the vehicle passes a sign with a lower or higher speed limit. The vehicle will then adjust to the new maximum speed and the set tolerance will be deleted from the system's memory. The set tolerance can be adjusted in the same way as the set Speed Limiter's set maximum speed. If the Road Sign Information system* is activated, the posted speed limit will be indicated by a RED marker (4) on the speedometer's speed scale. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 287 DRIVER SUPPORT Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)* (p. 285) Deactivating/reactivating the Speed Limiter* Deactivating and putting SL in standby mode Activating/deactivating the Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL)* (p. 286) The Speed Limiter (SL) can be temporarily deactivated and put in standby mode. Using the left-side steering wheel keypad Related information • • • • Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 290) To temporarily put the Speed Limiter in standby mode: Changing a Speed Limiter (SL)* maximum speed (p. 285) Function buttons and symbols – Press the button (2). > The maximum speed marker (4) and symbols will change colors from WHITE to GRAY. This indicates that SL is temporarily in standby mode and will not limit the vehicle's maximum speed. 288 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT Using the accelerator pedal Reactivating SL from standby mode2 This can be useful in situations where quick acceleration is desirable. To reactivate SL after it has temporarily been put in standby mode: 1. Press the accelerator pedal as far down as possible and release it when the vehicle has reached the desired speed. > This makes it possible to temporarily exceed the set maximum speed. 2. Release the accelerator pedal when the temporary acceleration is completed. > After the accelerator pedal has been released, SL is automatically reactivated, the vehicle will slow down to the set maximum speed and the vehicle's speed will then be limited to the set maximum speed. – Related information • • Speed limiter (SL)* (p. 283) Starting and activating the Speed Limiter (SL)* (p. 284) Press the button (1). > The maximum speed marker (4) and symbols will change colors from GRAY to WHITE and the vehicle's maximum speed will be limited to the previously set maximum speed3. or – 2 This also applies to the 3 When reactivating ASL, Press the button (2). > The maximum speed marker (4) and symbols will change colors from GRAY to WHITE and the vehicle's current speed will be set as the maximum speed. Automatic Speed limiter (ASL). the vehicle's maximum speed will be limited to the previously set maximum speed unless the vehicle passed a sign with a higher or lower speed limit while ASL was in standby mode. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 289 DRIVER SUPPORT Turning the Speed Limiter* off Road Sign Information (RSI)* The Speed Limiter (SL) can be turned off. RSI is a feature that helps the driver see road signs showing the posted speed limit. Related information • Road Sign Assistance (RSI)* operation (p. 291) • Road Sign Assistance (RSI)* limitations (p. 291) • Speed limiter (SL)* (p. 283) Function buttons and symbols 1. 2. 3. Press the button (2). > SL will go into standby mode. Press the â—€ (1) or â–¶ (3) buttons to change to another function. > The SL symbol (4) in the instrument panel will go out. button (2) again. Press the > Another function will be activated. The set maximum speed will be erased from the system's memory. Examples of readable road signs If the vehicle passes a sign showing the speed limit, this will be displayed in the instrument panel and the head-up display*. WARNING RSI does not function in all situations and is only intended to provide supplementary information. The driver is always responsible for operating the vehicle safely. Related information • • 290 Speed limiter (SL)* (p. 283) Starting and activating the Speed Limiter (SL)* (p. 284) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT Road Sign Assistance (RSI)* operation Settings RSI settings can be made in the center display's Top view. Go to: Settings My Car Road Sign Information. IntelliSafe RSI On/Off Speed limit displays can be turned off. Speed warning On/Off The driver can be alerted if the current speed limit is exceeded (the symbol for the current speed limit will begin to flash). This function can be activated or deactivated and the limit for a warning can be set. Speed limit information Audible alert On/Off The audible alert can be activated/deactivated and the limit for a warning can be set. Road Sign Assistance (RSI)* limitations RSI is a feature that helps the driver see road signs showing the posted speed limit. RSI may have difficulty reading signs that are: • • • • • • Located in a curve Twisted or damaged Positioned high above the road Obstructed (by bushes, etc.) Partially covered by snow, ice, etc. The camera used by RSI (and other driver support systems such as Adaptive Cruise Control*) has certain limitations. See the article "City Safety limitations" for additional information. Related information • Faded NOTE Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 290) RSI may perceive certain types of bicycle holders (with wiring attached to the trailer electrical socket) as a trailer, which may result in faulty speed limit information to the driver. Related information When RSI registers a road sign showing the speed limit, this sign is displayed as a symbol on the instrument panel. • • City Safety limitations (p. 278) Road Sign Information (RSI)* (p. 290) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 291 DRIVER SUPPORT Park Assist* The Park Assist system is designed to assist you when driving into parking spaces, garages, etc. An audible signal and symbols in the instrument panel and center display indicate the distance to the object. The tone becomes constant when you are within approximately 1 ft (30 cm) of an object and the active sensor fields will be completely filled in. If there are objects within this distance both behind and in front of the vehicle, the tone alternates between front and rear speakers. While an audible signal is being given, its volume level can be raised/lowered using the >II control in the center console. WARNING Park Assist is an information system, NOT a safety system. This system is designed to be a supplementary aid when parking the vehicle. It is not, however, intended to replace the driver's attention and judgement. The system's rear sensors are activated automatically when the engine is started and are active if the vehicle rolls rearward with the gear selector in N or if R has been selected. The distance monitored behind the vehicle is approximately 5 ft (1.5 m). The audible signal comes from the rear speakers. The rear sensors will be deactivated automatically when towing a trailer if Volvo genuine trailer wiring is used. If a non-Volvo trailer hitch is being used, it may be necessary to switch off the system manually. Side park assist Rear park assist Display view showing object zones and sensor sectors The center display shows an overview of the vehicle in relation to objects that have been detected. The highlighted sector shows which of the sensors has detected the object. The closer the vehicle symbol is to the highlighted sector, the closer the actual object is to your vehicle. The Park Assist system uses an intermittent tone that pulses faster as you come closer to an object. Sound from the infotainment system will be temporarily turned down. 292 The system's side sensors are activated automatically when the engine is started and are active at speeds below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT The distance monitored along the sides of the vehicle is approximately 1 ft (0.3 m). The audible signal comes from the side speakers. Front park assist Related information • • • Activating/deactivating Park Assist (p. 293) Park Assist limitations (p. 294) Park assist symbols and messages (p. 295) Activating/deactivating Park Assist The Park Assist system can be turned on or off. On/Off Park Assist's front and side sensors are activated automatically when the engine is started. The rear sensors activate if the vehicle rolls rearward in N or if P is selected. This function can be activated/ deactivated in the center display's Function view. – The system's front sensors are activated automatically when the engine is started and are active at speeds below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). The distance monitored in front of the vehicle is approximately 2.5 ft (0.8 m). The audible signal comes from the front speakers. Tap the Park Assist button. > Green indicator: the function is active. Gray indicator: the function is deactivated. Related information • • • Park Assist* (p. 292) Park Assist limitations (p. 294) Park assist symbols and messages (p. 295) Front Park Assist is deactivated if the driver presses the brake pedal or if the gear selector is put in P. When installing auxiliary headlights, be sure that they do not obstruct the front sensors. Otherwise, these lights could trigger a Park Assist warning. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 293 DRIVER SUPPORT Park Assist limitations Cleaning the sensors The Park Assist system has certain limitations. NOTE A trailer hitch whose wiring is integrated with the vehicle's electrical system will be included in the measurement of the available space behind the vehicle. NOTE • The system will not detect high objects, such as a loading dock, etc. • Objects such as chains, thin shiny poles or low objects may temporarily not be detected by the system. This may result in the pulsing tone unexpectedly stopping instead of changing to a constant tone as the vehicle approaches the object. In such cases, use caution when backing up or stop the vehicle to help avoid damage. • 294 In certain circumstances, the park assist system may give unexpected warning signals that can be caused by external sound sources that use the same ultrasound frequencies as the system. This may include such things as the horns of other vehicles, wet tires on asphalt, pneumatic brakes, motorcycle exhaust pipes, etc. This does not indicate a fault in the system. Location of the Park Assist sensors The sensors must be cleaned regularly to ensure that they work properly. Clean them with water and a suitable car washing detergent. NOTE If the sensors are obstructed by e.g., dirt, snow, or ice, this could result in false warning signals from the park assist system. Related information • • • Park Assist* (p. 292) Activating/deactivating Park Assist (p. 293) Park assist symbols and messages (p. 295) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT Park assist symbols and messages The following table provides some examples. A number of symbols and messages relating to Park Assist will appear in the instrument panel. Symbol Message Explanation Park Assist System The system is not functioning properly. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Unavailable Service required Park Assist System One or more of the system's sensors are blocked. Check and clean the sensors as soon as possible. Sensors blocked, cleaning needed Related information • Park Assist limitations (p. 294) 295 DRIVER SUPPORT Park Assist Camera (PAC)* The Park Assist Camera system is designed to provide the driver with a view of the area around the vehicle in the form of a camera image and graphics in the center display. PAC is a supplementary parking aid that can be activated automatically when the gear selector is in R or by tapping a button in the center display, depending on the selected settings. See also the article "Park Assist Camera settings." Cross Traffic Alert* On/Off Camera views Zoom5 Panorama (360°) view NOTE A trailer hitch whose wiring is integrated with the vehicle's electrical system will be included in the measurement of the available space behind the vehicle. WARNING • Guiding lines On/Off Guiding lines for a trailer hitch*4 On/Off Park Assist On/Off 4 5 296 PAC is designed to be a supplementary aid when parking the vehicle. It is not, however, intended to replace the driver’s attention and judgment. • The camera has blind spots where it cannot detect objects or people behind the vehicle. • Pay particular attention to people or animals that are close to the vehicle. • Objects seen on the screen may be closer than they appear to be. Location of the cameras and their fields of vision All four sides of the vehicle are shown in the center display to help the driver monitor objects close-by when maneuvering at low speeds. Each camera view can be displayed separately: • Tap the center display in the desired "field of vision," e.g., behind the rear camera, etc. The camera view selected (front/left/right/rear) will be indicated at the top of the graphic. The cameras can be activated automatically or manually, see the article "Park Assist Camera settings." Not available in all markets. Only available on vehicles with a trailer hitch. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT Backing up detected. See also the article "Park Assist Camera guiding lines and fields." Side camera The camera is turned off when the gear selector is moved from R or if the vehicle's speed exceeds approx. 6 mph (10 km/h). Front camera Location of the rear Park Assist Camera The side cameras are located in the respective door mirrors. The rear camera shows a wide area, part of the bumper and the trailer hitch (if installed). Related information Some objects on the screen may appear to “lean” slightly, which is normal. When the gear selector is moved to R, a graphic with solid lines will appear in the center display to indicate the direction that the vehicle will take as it moves rearward, which helps simplify parallel parking, backing into a tight space or when attaching a trailer to the vehicle. These lines can be turned off, see the article "Park Assist Camera settings." The front camera is located behind the grill and can be useful when driving off in areas with limited visibility (hedges, bushes, etc). • Park Assist Camera (PAC)* guiding lines and fields (p. 298) • Park Assist Camera (PAC)* limitations (p. 300) • Starting the Park Assist Camera (PAC)* (p. 300) If the vehicle is also equipped with the optional Park Assist system, this information will be displayed on the screen as colored fields showing the distance to obstacles that have been * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 297 DRIVER SUPPORT Park Assist Camera (PAC)* guiding lines and fields NOTE When backing up with a trailer, the guiding lines show the path that the vehicle will take, not the trailer. The Park Assist Camera system uses guiding and lines and fields to indicate the vehicle's position in relation to its immediate surroundings. WARNING Guiding lines Sample guidelines The lines on the screen are projected as if they were a path on the ground around the vehicle and are directly affected by the way in which the steering wheel is turned. This enables the driver to see path the vehicle will take, even if he/she turns the steering wheel. These lines also indicate the outermost limits that any object (door mirrors, corners of the body, a trailer hitch, etc.) extends out from the vehicle, even when it turns. 298 Keep in mind that when the rear camera has been selected, the image on the screen only shows the area behind the vehicle. The driver must always watch for people, animals, other vehicles, etc., near the sides or the front of the vehicle when turning while backing up. Location of the cameras and their fields of vision The opposite is true when the front camera is selected. With 360° view selected, the center display will show views from all of the parking cameras. Please note that the guiding lines show the shortest path. Be sure that the vehicle’s sides do not come into contact with or scrape against any obstacle/obstruction when the steering wheel is turned while driving forward or that the front of the vehicle does not come into contact with or scrape against any obstacle/obstruction when backing up. To select a specific camera, tap its "field of vision." Models with the 360° panorama camera system and Park Assist sensors* On models with the 360° panorama camera system, guiding lines will be shown in front of or to the sides of the vehicle, depending on its direction. • • When driving forward: front lines When backing up: side/rear lines * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT Guiding lines for a trailer hitch (towbar) Front and rear sensor fields Side sensors Front and rear sensors The side fields will only be shown in 360° view and the color will only be orange. Side field color Distance to the object Orange 0–1 ft (0–0.3 m) Related information • • Towbar: activate guiding lines for a trailer hitch Zoom: zoom in/out6 The camera can help make hitching a trailer easier by showing the "line" that the trailer hitch will take toward the trailer. 1. Tap Towbar (2). > The guiding lines will be displayed and the guiding lines for the vehicle will disappear. 2. Tap Zoom (5) for a close-up view. > The camera will zoom in. Guiding lines for the trailer hitch and the vehicle cannot be shown at the same time. 6 Park Assist Camera (PAC)* (p. 296) Starting the Park Assist Camera (PAC)* (p. 300) If the vehicle is also equipped with the optional Park Assist system, distance will also be indicated by colored fields for each sensor that has detected an object. The front and rear fields change colors (yelloworange-red) as the vehicle moves closer to an object. Front/rear field colors Distance to the object Yellow 2–4.9 ft (06.–1.5 m ) Orange 1.3–2 ft (0.4–0.6 m) Red 0–1.3 ft (0–0.4 m) Only models with a trailer hitch. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 299 DRIVER SUPPORT Starting the Park Assist Camera (PAC)* 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. Park Assist Camera (PAC)* limitations PAC starts automatically when the gear selector is moved to R or can be started manually from the center display. 2. Tap My Car 3. Select Rear View Instead of 360° to set the rear view as default. The Park Assist Camera system has certain limitations that the driver should be aware of. Starting the camera PAC can be started manually in the center display's Function view if it is turned off. Park Assist. NOTE Bicycle carriers or other accessories mounted on the tailgate may obstruct the camera's field of vision. Blind sectors – Tap the Camera button in Function view. > The camera will start. Activating/deactivating automatic start of PAC Even if a fairly small section of the screen image appears to be obstructed, this may mean that a relatively large area is hidden and objects there may not be detected until they are very near the vehicle. PAC can be started automatically when reverse gear is selected. 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. 2. Tap My Car 3. Select Auto Camera Reverse Activation to activate/deactivate automatic start. Park Assist. Selecting the camera's basic view* Rear camera view can be set as the default instead of the 360° view* when the camera is started. 300 The "blind" sectors between the cameras' fields of vision * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT • • With 360° view selected, objects/obstacles may not be detected at the edges of the individual cameras' fields of vision. A crossed-out camera icon means that the camera is not functioning properly. Ambient lighting The camera images are adjusted automatically to the ambient light, which means the image may vary slightly in terms of light and quality. Poor ambient lighting may reduce the quality of the image. Maintenance • Keep the camera's lens free of dirt, ice and snow. This is particularly important in poor ambient lighting conditions. • Remove dirt, ice and snow carefully to avoid scratching the lenses. • Clean the lens regularly with warm water and a suitable car washing detergent. Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* Types of parking Park Assist Pilot (PAP) helps the driver drive into and leave parking spaces. Parallel parking Park Assist Pilot (PAP) provides assistance when parking by measuring the parking space and turning the steering wheel to guide the vehicle into the space. Information about the actions required by the driver is provided in the center display in the form of symbols, images and text. NOTE The driver's task is to follow the instructions, select a gear (D or R), regulate the vehicle's speed, apply the brakes when necessary and stop. Procedure for parallel parking PAP helps park the vehicle as follows: 1. The system searches for and measures a possible parking space. While this is being done, the vehicle's speed may not exceed approx. 20 mph ( 30 km/h). When backing into a space, the speed may not exceed approx. 12 mph ( 20 km/h). 2. The vehicle is steered while it is backing into the parking space. 3. The vehicle's position is adjusted in the parking space by moving forward and rearward. Related information • Park Assist Camera (PAC)* (p. 296) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 301 DRIVER SUPPORT Perpendicular parking Related information • • • Using Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 302) Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* limitations (p. 305) Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* symbols and messages (p. 307) Using Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* Park Assist Pilot (PAP) gives the driver instructions during the parking procedure. Symbols, images and text in the center display indicate when the various steps in the parking procedure will be carried out. PAP can be activated if the following conditions are met after the engine has started: • • The vehicle may not be towing a trailer. The vehicle's speed must be below approx. 30 mph (50 km/h). Procedure for perpendicular parking NOTE PAP helps park the vehicle as follows: 1. The system searches for and measures a possible parking space. While this is being done, the vehicle's speed may not exceed approx. 12 mph ( 20 km/h). 2. The vehicle is steered as it backs into the parking space and its position is adjusted in the space by moving forward and rearward. WARNING 302 • PAP does not function in all situations and is only intended to assist the driver during parallel or perpendicular parking. • As the driver, you have full responsibility for parking the vehicle in a safe manner. If a trailer hitch is configured in the vehicle's electrical system, PAP will take the trailer hitch into consideration when determining the necessary size of a parking space. Parking Procedure for parking: 1. The system searches for and measures a possible parking space. 2. The vehicle is steered while it is backing into the parking space. 3. The vehicle's position is adjusted in the parking space by moving forward and rearward. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT 1. Tap the Park Assist button in the center display's Function view. If necessary, slow down to a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h) for parallel paring or approx. 12 mph ( 20 km/h) for perpendicular parking. 1: Searching and measuring Parallel parking 2. Keep an eye on the display and be prepared to stop the vehicle when you are instructed by PAP to do so. 3. Select Park in followed by Parallel parking or Perpendicular parking. 4. Keep an eye on the display and be prepared to stop the vehicle when you are instructed by PAP to do so. 5. Stop the vehicle when instructed to do so. 2: Backing into the parking space Parallel parking NOTE PAP normally searches for available parking spaces along the curb on the right (passenger's) side of the vehicle. However, it can also assist in finding and parking in spaces on the driver's side. To do so: • Perpendicular parking PAP searches for a potential parking space and measures it to see if there is sufficient space for your vehicle. To start this procedure: Activate the left turn signal. PAP will then search for a parking space on the left side of the vehicle. Perpendicular parking 303 DRIVER SUPPORT When the vehicle is backing up, PAP will steer it into the parking space. Do as follows: 1. Check that the area behind the vehicle is clear and put the gear selector in R. 2. Back up slowly without moving the steering wheel. The vehicle's speed must be below approximately 4 mph 7 km/h. 3. 3: Adjusting the vehicle's position Keep an eye on the instrument panel and be prepared to stop the vehicle when you are instructed by PAP to do so. NOTE • Release the wheel while PAP is steering the vehicle. • The steering wheel must be able to turn freely. • For PAP to function optimally, wait until the steering wheel is no longer turning before beginning the next phase of the parking procedure. Parallel adjusted by driving slightly forward and backing up. 1. Put the gear selector in D, wait until the steering wheel has turned and drive forward slowly. 2. Stop the vehicle when you are instructed by PAP to do so. 3. Put the gear selector in R, back up slowly and stop when you are instructed by PAP to do so. When the parking procedure is finished (this will be indicated by a text message and a graphic image), PAP switches off automatically. If necessary, the driver may need to make minor adjustments to ensure that the vehicle is parked correctly. CAUTION The warning distance is shorter when PAP is using the sensors than when Park Assist is using them. Leaving a parking space Perpendicular After the vehicle has backed into the parking space, its position in the space has to be This function can only be used for a vehicle that has been parallel parked and is activated in the center display's Function view. 1. Tap the Park out button in the center display's Function view. 304 DRIVER SUPPORT 2. Follow the instructions provided. The procedure is the same as when parking the vehicle. The steering wheel may turn back slightly when the function is completed and the driver may have to turn the back before leaving the parking space. If PAP determines that the driver can leave the parking space without assistance, the function will deactivate before the vehicle is completely out of the space. Related information • • • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* limitations Points to keep in mind The PAP function may be limited in certain situations. PAP is a parking aid only and the driver should always be prepared to take control and cancel a parking sequence. This can be due to one or more of the following factors: The PAP parking sequence is cancelled A parking sequence will be cancelled: • if the vehicle is driven too fast (above approx. 4 mph (7 km/h) • • • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* symbols and messages (p. 307) PAP's function is based on the way that the vehicles are parked behind and in front of your parking space. If they are, for example, parked too close to the curb, there is a risk that your vehicle's tires or wheel rims could be damaged by the curb during the parking procedure. • PAP is intended to provide parking assistance on straight streets, not sections of street with curved or irregular curbs. Be sure that your vehicle is parallel to the curb when PAP measures the parking space. • PAP may not be able to provide parking assistance on narrow streets due to lack of space to maneuver the vehicle. In situations like this, it may help to drive as close to the side of the road as possible where the parking space is located. • Use only approved tires with the correct inflation pressure because this affects PAP's capacity to provide parking assistance. Changing to a different approved tire size may affect PAP's parameters. Consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. • Heavy rain or snow may inhibit PAP's capacity to correctly measure a parking space. if the driver taps Cancel in the center display if the driver touches the steering wheel if the anti-lock brakes or Electronic Stability Control are activated (e.g., if a wheel begins to spin or lose traction) Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 301) Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* limitations (p. 305) • In such cases, a text message will explain why the parking sequence was cancelled. NOTE • PAP will not function correctly if its sensors are obstructed by dirt, snow, etc. • In certain situations, PAP may not be able to measure a parking space. This could be due to external sources of sound (e.g., a vehicle's horn, tires on wet asphalt, pneumatic brakes, noise from a motorcycle's exhaust, etc.) emitting ultrasound using approximately the same frequencies as PAP. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 305 DRIVER SUPPORT • Do not use PAP if snow chains or a temporary spare tire are being used. • Do not use PAP if there are any objects protruding from the vehicle. Maintenance WARNING • The front end of your vehicle may turn out toward oncoming traffic during the parking procedure. • Objects located above the parking sensors' field of vision are not included when PAP measures a parking space. For this reason, PAP may turn into the parking space too soon. Avoid parking spaces of this type. • The driver is always responsible for determining if PAP has selected a suitable parking space. Location of the PAP sensors PAP uses the same sensors as the Park Assist system. To function correctly, these sensors must be cleaned regularly with water and a suitable car washing detergent. Related information • • • 306 Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 301) Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* limitations (p. 305) Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* symbols and messages (p. 307) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* symbols and messages Park Assist Pilot uses symbols, graphics and text messages to indicate if there is a problem with the system. Symbol Various PAP-related combinations of symbols, graphics and text messages are displayed in the instrument panel and sometimes also include suitable actions. The following table provides some examples. Message Explanation Park Assist System The system is not functioning properly. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Unavailable Service required Park Assist System One or more of the system's sensors are blocked. Check and clean the sensors as soon as possible. Sensors blocked, cleaning needed A text message can be erased by briefly pressing the O button in the center of the right-side steering wheel keypad. Contact a Volvo retailer or a trained and qualified Volvo service technician If a message indicating that PAP is not functioning properly remains displayed or recurs. Related information • • • Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 301) Using Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* (p. 302) Park Assist Pilot (PAP)* limitations (p. 305) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 307 DRIVER SUPPORT Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Adjustable steering force* Steering force increases with the speed of the vehicle to give the driver an enhanced sense of control and stability. At low speed the vehicle is easier to steer in order to facilitate parking, etc. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) helps reduce wheel spin, counteract skidding and to generally help improve directional stability. A pulsating sound will be audible when the system is actively operating and is normal. Acceleration may also be slightly slower than normal. Changing the steering force level Tap Settings in the center display's Top 1. view. 2. Tap My Car force. 3. Select Low, Medium or High to set the desired level. Drive Mode Steering WARNING ESC is a supplementary aid and cannot deal with all situations or road conditions. The driver is always responsible for operating the vehicle in a safe manner in accordance with current traffic regulations. NOTE • This steering force level menu function cannot be accessed when the vehicle is in motion. • In certain situations, the power steering function may become too hot and must be temporarily cooled. During cooling, power steering effect will be reduced and more force may be necessary to turn the steering wheel and a message will be displayed in the instrument panel. Related information • Driver support systems (p. 240) 7 This 308 ESC consists of the following functions: • • • • • Traction control Spin control Active Yaw Control Engine Drag Control Trailer Stability Assist Traction control This function is designed to help reduce wheel spin by transferring power from a drive wheel that begins to lose traction to the wheel on the opposite side of the vehicle (on the same axle). Spin control This function is designed to help prevent the drive wheels from spinning while the vehicle is accelerating. Active Yaw Control At low speeds, this function helps maintain directional stability by braking one or more of the wheels if the vehicle shows a tendency to skid or slide laterally. Engine Drag Control EDC EDC helps keep the engine running if the wheels show a tendency to lock, e.g., when shifting down in the manual shifting mode or while using the engine's braking function on a slippery surface. If the wheels were to lock, the vehicle would become more difficult to steer. Trailer Stability Assist*7 TSA helps stabilize a vehicle that is towing a trailer when the vehicle and trailer have begun to sway. This system is automatically deactivated if the driver selects Sport mode. Related information • • Detachable trailer hitch (p. 353) Driving with a trailer (p. 351) function is included if the vehicle is equipped with a Volvo original trailer hitch. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT • • • Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) (p. 354) Electronic Stability Control (ESC) sport mode (p. 309) Electronic Stability Control (ESC) symbols and messages (p. 310) Electronic Stability Control (ESC) sport mode ESC is always activated and cannot be switched off. However, the driver can select Sport mode, which offers more active driving characteristics. In Sport mode, the engine management system monitors movement of the accelerator pedal and steering wheel for sportier driving and allows more lateral movement of the rear wheels before ESC is triggered. When Sport mode is activated, this symbol will illuminate in the instrument panel. It will remain on until the driver deactivates the function. ETC will also return to normal mode when the engine is restarted. Related information • Electronic Stability Control (ESC) (p. 308) Under certain circumstances, such as when driving with snow chains, or driving in deep snow or loose sand, it may be advisable to temporarily use Sport mode for maximum tractive force. If the driver releases pressure on the accelerator pedal, ETC will also activate to help stabilize the vehicle. Activating/deactivating Sport mode In the center display's Function view, tap ESC Sport Mode. The green indicator light in the button will illuminate to show that the function has been activated or gray when the function is deactivated. 309 DRIVER SUPPORT Electronic Stability Control (ESC) symbols and messages Electronic Stability Control (ESC) helps reduce wheel spin, counteract skidding and to generally help improve directional stability. Symbol Message Description Steady glow for 2 seconds when the engine is started. The system is performing a self-diagnostic test. Flashing symbol. ESC is actively functioning to help counteract wheel spin and/or a skid. Steady glow. Sport mode has been activated. Please note that ESC is not deactivated at this time but its functionality is reduced. ESC Temporarily off 310 See the message in the instrument panel. DRIVER SUPPORT Symbol Message Description ESC Temporarily off The ESC system function has been temporarily reduced due to high brake disc temperature. The function reactivates automatically when the brakes have cooled. ESC Service required The ESC system is not functioning properly. • • Stop the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine and restart it. If the message is still displayed when the engine has restarted, drive to an authorized Volvo workshop to have the system inspected. WARNING The stability system is intended to help improve driving safety. It supplements, but can never replace, the driver's judgment and responsibility when operating the vehicle. Speed and driving style should always be adapted to traffic and road conditions. Related information • Electronic Stability Control (ESC) (p. 308) 311 DRIVER SUPPORT Driver Alert Control (DAC) WARNING DAC is intended to alert the driver if his/her driving becomes erratic due to e.g., distraction or fatigue. • DAC is not intended to extend the duration of driving. Always plan breaks at regular intervals to help remain alert. DAC is designed to help detect a slowly changing driving pattern. It is primarily intended to be used on main roads and is not meant for use in city traffic. • A warning from DAC should not be ignored. A driver may not be aware of how fatigued he/she has become. • In certain cases, fatigue may not affect the driver’s behavior. In situations of this type, no warning will be provided. Therefore, it is important to take breaks at regular intervals, regardless of whether or not DAC has given a warning. The function activates initially when the vehicle's speed first exceeds 40 mph (65 km/h) and remains active as long the speed remains above approx. 38 mph (60 km/h) If the driving pattern becomes noticeably erratic, the driver will be alerted by an audible signal and Driver Alert Time for a break will appear in the instrument panel along with a symbol. The warning will be repeated if the driving pattern does not change. A camera monitors the traffic lane's side marker lines and compares the direction of the road with the driver’s movements of the steering wheel. 312 Related information • • Using Driver Alert Control (DAC) (p. 313) Driver Alert Control limitations (p. 313) DRIVER SUPPORT Driver Alert Control limitations Using Driver Alert Control (DAC) The camera used by DAC (and other driver support systems such as Adaptive Cruise Control*) has certain limitations. DAC settings are made in the center display's menu system. In certain situations, DAC may provide warnings even if the driver’s driving pattern has not become erratic: • • in strong crosswinds view. 2. Tap My Car Control. 3. Select Alertness Warning to activate/deactivate DAC. on grooved road surfaces Related information • • • • Activating/deactivating Driver Alert Control 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top Driver Alert Control (DAC) (p. 312) Using Driver Alert Control (DAC) (p. 313) Driver Alert Control limitations (p. 313) Camera limitations (p. 241) IntelliSafe 2. Tap My Car Control. 3. Select Driving Stimuli to activate/deactivate this feature. IntelliSafe Driver Alert Related information • Driver Alert Control (DAC) (p. 312) Driver Alert Activating/deactivating guidance to a rest area With this feature activated, DAC will propose a nearby rest area if a warning has been given. 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. 2. Tap My Car Control. 3. Select Rest Stop Guidance to activate/ deactivate guidance to a rest area. IntelliSafe Driver Alert Activating/deactivating extra stimuli With this feature activated, DAC will use the passenger compartment lighting as an enhanced DAC warning. 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 313 DRIVER SUPPORT Distance Alert* NOTE Distance Alert is a function that alerts the driver if the time interval to the vehicle ahead is too short. Distance Alert only monitors distance to the vehicle ahead while Adaptive Cruise Control is in standby mode or off. Distance Alert is active at speeds above approximately 18 mph (30 km/h) and only reacts to a vehicle ahead that is driving in the same direction. No information is provided for vehicles driving toward you, moving very slowly, or at a standstill. WARNING Distance Alert only indicates the distance to the vehicle ahead. It does not affect the speed of your vehicle. Using Distance Alert* Distance Alert is used as follows: Operation Pull down the center display's Top view and select Settings followed by Distance alert. Tap to turn the function On or Off. Setting a time interval Related information • • Warning light An warning light in the windshield glows steadily if your vehicle is closer to the one ahead than the set time interval. If your vehicle is equipped with the optional headup display, a symbol showing a vehicle will appear. 314 Distance Alert* limitations (p. 315) Using Distance Alert* (p. 314) Controls for setting a time interval Reduce the time interval Increase the time interval Distance/time indicator * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT Different time intervals to the vehicle ahead can be selected and are shown in the instrument panel as 1–5 horizontal bars. The greater the number of bars, the longer the time interval. Distance Alert* limitations Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* Distance Alert uses the same radar sensor as Adaptive Cruise Control* and has several limitations. Blind Spot Information is a system designed to alert the driver to the presence of other vehicles moving in the same direction as your vehicle on roads with several lanes. WARNING • One bar between the vehicles represents a time interval of approximately 1 second; 5 bars is approximately 3 seconds. The same symbol appears if Adaptive Cruise Control is activated. NOTE • The set time interval is also used by Adaptive Cruise Control*. The radar sensor cannot cover all driving situations and traffic, weather and road conditions. • The driver is responsible for maintaining a safe distance and speed and must intervene if the various driver support systems do not maintain a suitable speed or suitable distance to the vehicle ahead. • Only use time intervals permitted by local traffic regulations. • • Related information • • The greater the vehicles' speed, the greater the distance between them for a set time interval. • Distance Alert* (p. 314) The radar sensor has a limited field of vision. In some situations it may detect a vehicle later than expected or not detect other vehicles at all. Maintenance of radar sensor components may only be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo technician. Strong sunlight, reflections from the road surface, strong lighting contrasts or using sunglasses may make the warning light in the windshield difficult to see. For additional information, see also the article "Radar sensor limitations." Blind Spot Information is a driving aid intended to: • detect other vehicles in your door mirrors' "blind area" • detect vehicles that are about to pass your vehicle or are approaching your vehicle quickly from behind in the left and/or right lanes WARNING • Blind Spot Information is an information system, NOT a warning or safety system and does not function in all situations. • Blind Spot Information does not eliminate the need for you to visually confirm the conditions around you, and the need for you to turn your head and shoulders to make sure that you can safely change lanes or back up. • As the driver, you have full responsibility for changing lanes/backing up in a safe manner. Related information • • Radar sensor limitations (p. 245) Distance Alert* (p. 314) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 315 DRIVER SUPPORT Overview WARNING • Blind Spot Information does not function in sharp curves. • Blind Spot Information does not function when your vehicle is backing up. Related information Blind Spot Information indicators Indicator light Blind Spot Information symbol The indicator light illuminates on the side of the vehicle where the system has detected another vehicle. If your vehicle is passed on both sides at the same time, both lights will illuminate. Principle for Blind Spot Information: Zone 1. Blind area, Zone 2. Area for approaching/passing vehicles • Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* On/Off (p. 317) • Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* limitations (p. 317) • Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* (p. 318) Blind Spot Information functions when your vehicle is moving at speeds above approx. 6 mph (10 km/h). Blind Spot Information is designed to react to: • • vehicles that are passing your vehicle other vehicles that are rapidly approaching your vehicle When Blind Spot Information detects a vehicle in zone 1 or a fast-approaching vehicle in zone 2, the indicator light in the respective door mirror will glow steadily. If the driver then uses the turn signal on the side on which the warning is given, the indicator light will begin flashing and become brighter. 316 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* On/Off The Blind Spot Information function can be activated/deactivated. If BLIS is deactivated when the engine is switched off, it will remain off the next time the engine is started and the indicator lights in the door mirrors will not illuminate. Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* limitations Related information • Dirt, ice and snow on the sensors may reduce functionality and prevent the system from providing warnings. • Do not attach any objects, tape, decals, etc., on the surface of the sensors. • BLIS is deactivated if a trailer is attached to the vehicle's electrical system. • Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* (p. 315) Blind Spot Information functionality may be reduced in certain situations. Blind Spot Information indicators Indicator light Blind Spot Information symbol Blind Spot Information can be activated/deactivated in the center display's Function view. – In Function view, tap BLIS. > When Blind Spot Information is activated/ deactivated, the indicator light in the button will be green/gray. If BLIS is activated when the engine is started, the indicator lights in the door mirrors will flash once. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 317 DRIVER SUPPORT Maintenance CAUTION The BLIS/CTA8 sensors are located on the inside of the rear fenders/bumper. Repairs to the BLIS/CTA systems and/or repainting the rear bumper should only be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Related information • Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* On/Off (p. 317) • • Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* (p. 315) Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) is a supplementary part of Blind Spot Information and is intended to detect vehicles crossing behind your vehicle while you are backing up. When does Cross Traffic Alert function Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* (p. 318) Keep the highlighted area clean (on both sides of the vehicle) For the system to function optimally, the area over and around the sensors must be kept clean. If one or both of the sensors are blocked and "Rear sensors blocked, cleaning needed" is displayed in the instrument panel, clean the area over and around the sensors as soon as possible. A text message can be erased by briefly pressing the O button on the right-side steering wheel keypad. Principle for CTA CTA supplements BLIS by warning the driver of crossing traffic behind your vehicle, for example, when backing out of a parking space. It is primarily designed to detect another vehicle but in certain cases may also detect pedestrians or smaller objects such as bicycles. CTA is only activated when the vehicle is rolling rearward or backing up and is activated automatically when the gear selector is put in reverse. 8 318 Cross Traffic Alert* * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT • An audible signal indicates that CTA has detected something that is approaching from the side. The signal will come from either the left or right infotainment system speakers, depending on which the side of your vehicle the approaching vehicle/ object has been detected. • A warning is indicated using the Park Assist* system's graphic in the instrument panel. • An icon is also shown in the Park Assist Camera's* Top view. Related information • Activating/deactivating Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* (p. 319) • Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* with Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* symbols and messages (p. 322) • Activating/deactivating Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) can be activated/deactivated separately from Blind Spot Information (BLIS). Related information • • Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* (p. 318) Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* On/Off (p. 317) CTA is activated/deactivated in the center display's Function view. – Tap Cross Traffic Alert in Function view. > CTA activates/deactivates (the indicator light in the button will be green/gray). CTA is activated when the engine is started. Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* limitations (p. 320) WARNING • BLIS and CTA are information systems, NOT warning or safety systems and do not function in all situations. • BLIS and CTA do not eliminate the need for you to visually confirm the conditions around you, and the need for you to turn your head and shoulders to make sure that you can safely change lanes or back up. • As the driver, you have full responsibility for changing lanes/backing up in a safe manner. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 319 DRIVER SUPPORT Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* limitations CTA functionality may be reduced in certain situations. Limitations CTA has limitations in certain situations, for example, the CTA sensors cannot "see" through other parked vehicles or obstructions. The following are several examples where CTA's "field of vision" may initially be limited and approaching vehicles cannot be detected until they are too close: In angled parking spaces, CTA may be "blind" on one side CTA's blind area CTA's "field of vision" However, as you back your vehicle out of a parking space, CTA's "field of vision" expands. Keep the highlighted area clean (on both sides of the vehicle) For the system to function optimally, the area over and around the sensors must be kept clean. Do not attach any objects, tape, decals, etc., on the surface of the sensors. CAUTION Examples of other limitations include: The vehicle is pulled far into a parking space • Dirt, ice or snow obstructing the sensors may reduce the system's function or make it impossible to detect other vehicles or objects. • CTA is deactivated if a trailer's wiring is connected to the vehicle's electrical system. Maintenance The CTA sensors are located on the inside of the rear fenders/bumper. 320 Repairs to the BLIS/CTA systems and/or repainting the rear bumper should only be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Related information • • Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* (p. 318) Activating/deactivating Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* (p. 319) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT • Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* with Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* symbols and messages (p. 322) • Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* limitations (p. 317) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 321 DRIVER SUPPORT Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* with Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* symbols and messages In situations where Blind Spot Information and/or Cross Traffic Alert are not functioning Symbol properly or if the function is interrupted, a symbol and a text message may be displayed in the instrument panel. Follow the instructions provided. Message Explanation Blind spot sensor The system is not functioning properly. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician Service required Blind spot sensor Rear sensors blocked, cleaning needed Blind spot system off Trailer attached One or more of the system's sensors are blocked. Check and clean the sensors as soon as possible. BLIS and CTA have been deactivated because a trailer has been connected to teh vehicle's electrical system. Related information • • 322 Cross Traffic Alert (CTA)* (p. 318) Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* (p. 315) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT Driving lane assistance The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) and Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* functions are designed to help reduce the risk of accidents in situations where the vehicle unintentionally leaves its lane on highways or other major roads. Driving lane assistance systems: LDW or LKA There are two versions of the driving lane assistance system: • LDW (Lane Departure Warning): provides an audible signal or vibrations in the steering wheel. • LKA (Lane Keeping Aid): actively steers the vehicle to help keep it in its traffic lane and/or alerts the driver using an audible signal or through vibrations in the steering wheel. A camera monitors the road/traffic lane's marker lines Depending on the version and settings used, driving lane assistance functions in different ways: The driving lane assistance systems are active at speeds from approx. 40 mph (65 km/h) up to the vehicle's permitted top speed on roads with clearly visible traffic lane marker lines. On narrow roads, the systems may not function and will go into standby mode. They will return to active mode if the road becomes sufficiently wide. 9 LKA attempts to steer the vehicle back into its lane Both LDW and LKA provide vibrations in the steering wheel9 • If the system is activated (either LDW or LKA): if the driver does not react and the vehicle is moving out of its traffic lane, an audible signal and/or vibrations in the steering wheel will be provided. • If the system is activated (LKA only): when the vehicle approaches a traffic lane marker line, LKA will provide active steering assistance to help steer it back into the lane. The level of vibrations varies; the longer the vehicle is over a lane marker line, the greater the number of vibrations: * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 323 DRIVER SUPPORT Dynamic cornering NOTE If the turn signal is used, neither of the driving lane assistance systems (LDW or LKA) will provide an alert or steering assistance. Related information This feature is only intended to assist the driver and does not function in all driving, weather, traffic or road conditions. As the driver, you have full responsibility for operating the vehicle in a safe manner. In order for LKA's steering assistance to function, the driver's hands must be on the steering wheel, which the system monitors continuously. If this is not the case, this symbol will illuminate in the instrument panel and Lane Keeping Aid Apply steering will appear to alert the driver to actively steer the vehicle. If the driver does not take action, an audible signal will sound and LKA will go into standby mode. The function will not become available again until the driver actively steers the vehicle. • Activating/deactivating Lane Departure Warning (LDW) (p. 325) • Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* (p. 325) • Camera limitations (p. 241) The traffic lane assistance systems do not intervene in sharp curves In certain cases, such as during active driving or if the turn signal is used, neither of the traffic lane systems will react if the vehicle crosses a lane marker line. Limitations In certain demanding driving situations, the driving lane assistance functions may not be able to assist the driver. In these situations, it may be advisable to turn the function off. Examples of these situations: • • • • 324 winter driving conditions bad weather with reduced visibility The driving lane assistance function use the vehicle's camera, which has general limitations. See the article "Camera limitations." WARNING Steering assistance (LKA only) • • road construction poor road surfaces edges or lines other than the lane's marker lines a very active driving style * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. DRIVER SUPPORT Activating/deactivating Lane Departure Warning (LDW) 3. LDW can be activated/deactivated. Under Lane Departure Warning feedback, select: Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* • Sound: an audible warning signal will be LKA can be activated/deactivated. provided Activating/deactivating • Vibrations: the driver will be warned by Activating/deactivating vibrations in the steering wheel Related information • Driving lane assistance (p. 323) The function can be activated/deactivated in the center display's Function view. The function can be activated/deactivated in the center display's Function view. – – Tap the Lane Departure Warning button. > LDW is activated (GREEN indicator light in the button), or is deactivated (GRAY indicator light in the button). Tap Lane Keeping Aid. > LKA is activated (GREEN indicator light in the button), or is deactivated (GRAY indicator light in the button). Type of warning Type of warning Choose the type of warning that the driver will receive if the vehicle starts to leave its driving lane. Choose the type of warning that the driver will receive if the vehicle starts to leave its driving lane. 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. 2. Tap My Car IntelliSafe Departure Warning. 2. Tap My Car Aid. Lane IntelliSafe Lane Keeping * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 325 DRIVER SUPPORT 3. Under Lane Keeping Aid Warning Feedback, select: • Sound: an audible warning signal will be provided • Vibrations: the driver will be warned by vibrations in the steering wheel Type of assistance Select the type of assistance LKA should provide: 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. 2. Tap My Car Aid. 3. Under Lane Keeping Aid Assistance Mode, select: IntelliSafe Lane Keeping • Assist: the system will provide steering assistance but no warning. • Both: the system will provide steering assistance and warning • Warning: the system will provide warning but no steering assistance Related information • 326 Driving lane assistance (p. 323) DRIVER SUPPORT Driving lane assistance symbols and messages LDW/LKA are monitoring the driving lane's marker line(s). A number of symbols and messages relating to Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) and Lane Departure Warning (LDW) may appear in the instrument panel. Not available Steering/warning indicator Symbols in the instrument panel The driving lane assistance systems use a symbol in the instrument panel in different situations. Steering/warning: the side marker lines in the symbol will be colored When the driving lane assistance systems are not available, the marker lines in the symbol will be gray Several examples of the symbol's appearance will be given here: Available This is because LDW/LKA cannot monitor (detect) the driving lane's marker line(s) or the vehicle's speed is too low or the road is too narrow. LDW/LKA alerts the driver that the vehicle is leaving its lane. LKA attempts to steer the vehicle back into the lane. LKA also indicates if the system is attempting to steer the vehicle back into its lane. When the driving lane assistance systems are available, the marker lines in the symbol will be white 327 DRIVER SUPPORT Symbols and messages Symbol Message Explanation Driver support system The system is not functioning properly. Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Reduced functionality Service required Windscreen sensor The camera's functionality is limited. Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual Lane Keeping Aid Apply steering LKA's steering assistance does not function if the driver's hands are not on the steering wheel. Steer the vehicle actively. Related information • • • 328 Driving lane assistance (p. 323) Activating/deactivating Lane Departure Warning (LDW) (p. 325) Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* (p. 325) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. STARTING AND DRIVING STARTING AND DRIVING Starting and driving Brakes The vehicle is equipped with features that supplement its basic functions, such as shifting gears with steering wheel paddles* and the fuelconserving start/stop function. The brake system is a hydraulic system consisting of two separate brake circuits. If a problem should occur in one of these circuits, it is still possible to stop the vehicle with the other brake circuit. The vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission that also makes it possible to shift gears manually. Certain functions can also be used when the engine is not running, depending on the ignition mode being used. Related information • • • • • • Starting the engine (p. 356) Ignition modes (p. 355) Automatic transmission (p. 367) Opening/closing the fuel filler door (p. 348) Start/Stop (p. 364) Parking brake (p. 335) Brake system If one of the brake circuits is not functioning, more pressure will be needed on the brake pedal (and the pedal will go down farther) for normal braking effect. If the brake pedal must be depressed farther than normal and requires greater foot pressure, the stopping distance will be longer. Pressure on the brake pedal is enhanced by the power braking function. The power brakes only function when the engine is running. If the power brakes are not working, considerably higher pressure will be required on the brake pedal to compensate for the lack of power assistance. This can happen for example when towing your vehicle or if the engine is switched off when the vehicle is rolling. The brake pedal feels stiffer than usual. When the Hill Start Assist function is being used, it will take slightly longer for the brake pedal to return to its normal position if the vehicle is parked on an incline or uneven surface. 330 When driving in very hilly areas or if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load, manual gear shifting can be used (move the gear selector toward +/-) for engine braking to augment the brakes. Hill Descent Control or the Off Road* driving mode can also be used to increase the engine braking effect at low speeds. Anti-lock Braking System ABS The ABS system helps to improve vehicle control (stopping and steering) during severe braking conditions by limiting brake lockup. When ABS is operating, there may be some vibration in the brake pedal, which is normal. The system performs a brief self-diagnostic test when the engine has been started and driver releases the brake pedal. Another automatic test may be performed when the vehicle first reaches a speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). The brake pedal will pulsate several times and a sound may be audible from the ABS control module, which is normal. Cleaning the brake discs Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs may result in delayed brake function. This delay is minimized by cleaning the brake linings. Cleaning the brake pads is advisable in wet weather, prior to long-term parking, and after the vehicle has been washed. Do this by braking gently for a short period while the vehicle is moving. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. STARTING AND DRIVING Driving on wet or salted roads Prolonged driving on wet or salted roads can affect brake function and increase stopping distance. Be sure to keep a safe distance to the vehicle ahead when driving under these conditions. Brake pad inspection On vehicles equipped with a jack*, the condition of the brake pads can be checked by raising the vehicle and performing a visual inspection of the brake pads. WARNING • If the vehicle has been driven immediately prior to a brake pad inspection, the wheel hub, brake components, etc., will be very hot. Allow time for these components to cool before carrying out the inspection. • Apply the parking brake and put the gear selector in the Park (P) position. • Block the wheels standing on the ground, use rigid wooden blocks or large stones. WARNING • Use the jack intended for the vehicle when changing a tire. For any other job, use stands to support the vehicle. • The jack should be kept well-greased and clean, and should not be damaged. • Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, nonslippery surface. • No objects should be placed between the base of jack and the ground, or between the jack and the attachment bar on the vehicle. • The jack must correctly engage the jack attachment. • Never allow any part of your body to be extended under a vehicle supported by a jack. Instrument panel symbols Symbol Explanation Red symbol: Check the brake fluid level. If the level is low, top up and have the system inspected to determine the cause of the loss of fluid. Yellow symbol: Time for brake system service. Steady glow for 2 seconds when the engine is started: automatic function control. Steady glow for more than 2 seconds: there is a fault in the ABS system. The normal brake system will still function but without ABS brake modulation. WARNING If the fluid level is below the MIN mark in the reservoir or if a brake system message is shown in the information display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician and have the brake system inspected. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 331 STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING If both symbols illuminate at the same time and the brake level is below the MIN mark in the reservoir or if a brake system- related message is shown in the information display: DO NOT DRIVE. Have the vehicle towed to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician and have the brake system inspected. Related information • • • Brake functions (p. 332) Brake functions Auto-hold brake function The vehicle's standard braking features are augmented by a number of auxiliary help functions. With the Auto-hold brake function, the driver can release the brake pedal and the brakes will remain applied, for example, when the vehicle has stopped at a traffic light or intersection. In addition to the wheel brakes and the parking brake, the vehicle is equipped with several automatic brake assist functions. These systems help the driver by e.g., keeping the vehicle stationary when the brake pedal is not depressed (at a traffic light or intersection), when starting up a hill or when driving down a hill. Brake assist system (p. 333) These systems include: Emergency brake lights (p. 334) • • • • Auto-hold brakes Hill Start Assist Braking assist after a collision When the vehicle is no longer moving forward, Auto-hold applies the brakes automatically, either using the normal brakes or the parking brake. The brakes will be released when the accelerator pedal is depressed. If the driver's door is opened or the engine is turned off, the parking brake will be applied automatically. Auto-hold control Hill Descent Control* Related information • • • • Brakes (p. 330) Parking brake (p. 335) Hill Descent Control (HDC) (p. 334) Auto-hold brake function (p. 332) Auto-hold control and indicator light Turn Auto-hold on or off by pressing the control in the tunnel console. The indicator light illuminates when the function is on. 332 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. STARTING AND DRIVING When Auto-hold is off, Hill Start Assist (HSA) will be activated to help prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards when starting up a hill. Instrument panel symbol Symbol Explanation The symbol in the instrument panel illuminates when this function is using the normal brakes to keep the vehicle stationary. A This symbol in the instrument panel illuminates when Auto-hold is using the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary Brake assist system Braking effect after a collision The Brake Assist System (BAS) increases braking force, thereby helping reduce braking distance. In the event of a collision in which the airbags or seat belt pretensioners deploy or if a collision with an animal is detected, the vehicle's brakes are applied to help prevent or mitigate a secondary collision. The system monitors the driver's braking habits and increases braking force when necessary. Brake force can be increased up to the point at which the ABS system is activated. The function is deactivated when pressure on the brake pedal decreases. NOTE B A B US models Canadian models Related information • • Hill Start Assist (p. 335) Brake functions (p. 332) • When BAS is activated, the brake pedal will go down farther than usual. Depress the pedal as long as necessary. • Braking will stop when the pedal is released. Related information • Brakes (p. 330) Maintaining control of the vehicle after a collision may be difficult. To help avoid or mitigate the effect of a secondary collision, the brakes are applied automatically to help bring the vehicle to a stop. The brake lights and hazard warning flashers will be activated and the flashers will remain on after the vehicle has come to a standstill. The parking brake will then be applied automatically. In a situation where stopping the vehicle may not be desirable, the driver can override this system by pressing the accelerator pedal. This feature can only function if the brake system is intact after the collision. Related information • • • Brake functions (p. 332) Airbag system (p. 83) Rear Collision Warning (RCW) (p. 277) 333 STARTING AND DRIVING Emergency brake lights Hill Descent Control (HDC) Activating HDC The emergency brake lights activate in the event of hard braking/rapid deceleration at most normal driving speeds or if the ABS system is activated. This function causes an additional taillight on each side of the vehicle to illuminate to help alert vehicles traveling behind. HDC is a type of low-speed automatic engine brake and makes it possible to increase or decrease the vehicle's speed on steep downhill gradients using only the accelerator pedal, without applying the brakes. HDC is integrated into the Off Road drive mode. HDC only functions at low speeds. Once the emergency brake lights have been activated, if the driver releases the brake pedal, the brake lights will return to their normal function. HDC is particularly useful when driving down steep hills with rough surfaces, and where the road may have slippery patches. Related information • • • Brakes (p. 330) Hazard warning flashers (p. 144) Brake lights (p. 143) WARNING HDC does not function in all situations, and is a supplementary braking aid. The driver has full responsibility for driving in a safe manner. Function HDC allows the vehicle to roll forward or in reverse at very low speed with enhanced engine braking. However, speed can be adjusted with the accelerator pedal. When the accelerator pedal is released, the vehicle will return to very low speed. The driver can use the brakes to slow or stop the vehicle at any time. HDC is activated along with Low Speed Control (LSC), which together make driving on slippery surfaces at low speeds easier. When HDC and LSC are activated, this changes the response from the accelerator pedal and engine. 334 Using the driving mode control* Select the Off Road driving mode to activate HDC. Select a different drive mode to turn HDC off. If this is done while the vehicle is on a steep downgrade, engine braking will decrease gradually. NOTE When LSC with HDC is activated by the Off Road drive mode, the feel of the accelerator pedal and engine response will change. The function is deactivated when driving at higher speeds and must be reactivated at lower speeds if so desired. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. STARTING AND DRIVING Related information • • • Brake functions (p. 332) Low Speed Control (LSC) (p. 371) Drive modes* (p. 359) Hill Start Assist Parking brake Hill Start Assist (HSA) helps prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards when starting up a hill. If you are backing up a hill, HSA helps prevent the vehicle from rolling forward. The electric parking brake helps to keep the vehicle stationary when it is parked. HSA makes it easier to start or back up on a hill by retaining pressure on the brake pedal for several seconds after the pedal has been released in order to keep the vehicle at a standstill. The brakes will be released after several seconds or when the driver presses the accelerator pedal. HSA is available even if the Auto-hold braking function is turned off. Related information • • Brake functions (p. 332) Auto-hold brake function (p. 332) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 335 STARTING AND DRIVING Related information • • • Brake functions (p. 332) Using the parking brake Using the parking brake (p. 336) The electric parking brake helps to keep the vehicle stationary when it is parked. Parking brake malfunctions (p. 338) Applying the parking brake Parking brake control in the tunnel console between the front seats NOTE • • A faint sound from the parking brake's electric motor can be heard when the parking brake is being applied. This sound can also be heard during the automatic function check of the parking brake. Put the gear selector in P. Press firmly on the brake pedal. 3. Pull up the control. > The symbol in the instrument panel flashes while the parking brake is being applied and glows steadily when the parking brake has been fully applied. 4. Release the brake pedal and ensure that the vehicle is stationary. The brake pedal will move slightly when the electric parking brake is applied or released. If the vehicle is not moving when the parking brake is applied, only the rear wheels are affected. If it is applied while the vehicle is moving, the normal brakes are used on all four wheels. The brakes will only be applied on the rear wheels once the vehicle has stopped. 336 1. 2. STARTING AND DRIVING Symbol in the instrument panel Symbol Releasing the parking brake NOTE Explanation • For safety reasons, the parking brake is only released automatically if the engine is running and the driver is wearing a seat belt. • The electric parking brake will be released immediately when the accelerator pedal is pressed and the gear selector is in position D or R. The symbol flashes while the parking brake is being applied. A If the symbol flashes at any other time, this indicates a fault. See the message in the instrument panel. B A B US models Canadian models Parking on a hill Automatic function Put the gear selector in P. The parking brake is applied automatically: • If the vehicle is pointing uphill, turn the front wheels so that they point away from the curb. • If the vehicle is pointing downhill, turn the front wheels so that they point toward the curb. • If the Auto Hold function is activated and the vehicle has been stationary for approx. 5 minutes. • If the gear selector is moved to P on a steep hill. • When the engine is turned off (this function can be selected, see "Parking brake settings" below). Emergency braking In an emergency, the parking brake can be applied when the vehicle is moving by pressing and holding up the control. Braking will be interrupted when the control is released. An audible signal will sound during this procedure if the vehicle is moving at higher speeds. Releasing manually 1. Press firmly on the brake pedal. 2. Press the control. > This releases the parking brake and the symbol in the instrument panel will go out. Releasing automatically 1. The driver must fasten his/her seat belt. 2. Start the engine. 3. Press firmly on the brake pedal. 4. Move the gear selector to D or R and press the accelerator pedal. > This releases the parking brake and the symbol in the instrument panel will go out. The parking brake should also be applied. WARNING Always apply the parking brake when parking on hills or uneven surfaces. 337 STARTING AND DRIVING Heavy load uphill Parking brake malfunctions A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the vehicle to roll backward when the parking brake is released automatically on a steep incline. To help avoid this: If it has not been possible to apply or release the parking brake after several attempts, consult a trained and authorized Volvo service technician or retailer. 1. Keep the electric parking brake control pushed in. 2. While pressing the accelerator pedal to pull away, release the parking brake control only after the vehicle begins to move. An audible signal will sound if the parking brake is applied when the vehicle is being driven. If the vehicle must be parked while the parking brake is not functioning properly: • • Put the gear selector in P. Parking brake settings Automatically setting the parking brake can be turned on or off in the center display's Top view. • If the vehicle is pointing downhill, turn the front wheels so that they point toward the curb. • Put the gear selector in P. 1. Tap Settings in Top view. 2. Tap My Car Electric Parking Brake and deselect Auto Activate Parking Brake. Related information • • • Low battery charge level Parking brake malfunctions (p. 338) Auto-hold brake function (p. 332) Replacing brake pads The rear brake pads have to be replaced by a trained and authorized Volvo service technician due to the design of the electric parking brake. 338 Symbol A Explanation If the symbol flashes, a parking brake fault has been detected. See the message in the instrument panel. B Fault in the brake system. If the vehicle is pointing uphill, turn the front wheels so that they point away from the curb. If the battery is discharged, the parking brake cannot be operated. Connect an auxiliary battery to the vehicle. Parking brake (p. 335) Symbols in the instrument panel A B A B US models Canadian models Related information • • • • Using the parking brake (p. 336) Using the parking brake (p. 336) Brake functions (p. 332) Jump starting (p. 350) STARTING AND DRIVING Before a long distance trip It is always worthwhile to have your vehicle checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician before driving long distances. Your retailer will also be able to supply you with bulbs, fuses, spark plugs and wiper blades for your use in the event that problems occur. As a minimum, the following items should be checked before any long trip: • Check that engine runs smoothly and that fuel consumption and the oil level are normal. • • • • • Check for fuel, oil, and fluid leakage. • The brakes, front wheel alignment, and steering gear should be checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician only. • • Check all lights, including high beams. • Have a word with a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if you intend to drive in countries where it may be difficult to obtain the correct fuel. • Consider your destination. If you will be driving through an area where snow or ice are likely to occur, consider using snow tires. Driving economically Better driving economy can be obtained by thinking ahead, avoiding rapid starts and stops and adjusting the speed of your vehicle to immediate traffic conditions. Economical driving conserves natural resources Observe the following rules: • Bring the engine to normal operating temperature as soon as possible by driving with a light foot on the accelerator pedal for the first few minutes of operation. A cold engine uses more fuel and is subject to increased wear. • Whenever possible, avoid using the vehicle for driving short distances. This does not allow the engine to reach normal operating temperature. • Drive carefully and avoid rapid acceleration and hard braking. • Use the transmission's Drive (D) position as often as possible and avoid using kick-down. • Using the engine's Eco function can help improve fuel economy. • • Do not exceed posted speed limits. • Maintain correct tire pressure. Check tire pressure regularly (when the tires are cold). Have the transmission oil level checked. Check condition of drive belts. Check state of the battery's charge. Examine tires carefully (including the spare tire where applicable), and replace those that are worn. Also, check tire inflation pressure. Reflective warning triangles are legally required in some states/provinces. Avoid carrying unnecessary items (extra load) in the vehicle. 339 STARTING AND DRIVING • Remove snow tires when threat of snow or ice has ended. • Note that roof racks, ski racks, etc, increase air resistance and also fuel consumption. • At highway driving speeds, fuel consumption will be lower with the air conditioning on and the windows closed than with the air conditioning off and the windows open. • Using the onboard trip computer's fuel consumption modes can help you learn how to drive more economically. Other factors that decrease gas mileage are: • • • • Dirty air cleaner Dirty engine oil and clogged oil filter Dragging brakes Incorrect front end alignment Some of the above mentioned items and others are checked at the standard maintenance intervals. Handling and roadholding 340 • Vehicle load, tire design and inflation pressure all affect vehicle handling. Therefore, check that the tires are inflated to the recommended pressure according to the vehicle load. Loads should be distributed so that capacity weight or maximum permissible axle loads are not exceeded. • At the specified curb weight your vehicle has a tendency to understeer, which means that the steering wheel has to be turned more than might seem appropriate for the curvature of a bend. This ensures good stability and reduces the risk of rear wheel skid. Remember that these properties can alter with the vehicle load. The heavier the load in the cargo compartment, the less the tendency to understeer. Driving through standing water The vehicle should be driven with extreme caution if it is necessary to drive through standing water. The vehicle can be driven through water up to a depth of approximately 17.7 in. (45 cm) at walking speed to help prevent water from entering the differential and the transmission. This reduces the oil's lubricating capacity and may shorten the service life of these components. • Take particular care when driving through flowing water. • After driving through water, apply the brakes and check that they are functioning correctly. • Clean the electrical connections for trailer wiring after driving in mud or water. • When driving through water, maintain low speed and do not stop in the water. STARTING AND DRIVING CAUTION • Engine damage will occur if water is drawn into the air cleaner. • Damage to any components, the engine, transmission, turbo-charger, differential or its internal components caused by flooding, vapor lock or insufficient oil is not covered under warranty. • • • • Related information • Towing recommendations (p. 344) Overheating the engine and transmission In demanding driving conditions, such as when transporting heavy loads, driving in mountainous areas or in very hot weather there is a risk of overheating the engine or transmission. • The engine's output may be slightly limited if there is a risk of overheating. • Remove e.g., auxiliary lights mounted in front of the grille in hot weather. • If the temperature of the engine coolant becomes too high, the warning symbol will illuminate and the message Engine temperature/Stop safely will be displayed. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible in a safe place and let the engine idle for several minutes. WARNING • Avoid driving through standing or rushing water. Doing so can be dangerous and it may also be difficult to determine the actual depth of the water. • If the message Engine temperature/High temperature Turn off engine or Engine coolant/Stop safely is displayed, stop safely and turn off the engine. If the transmission begins to overheat, an alternative gear shifting program will be selected. An integrated protective function will also by activated, the warning symbol will illuminate and the message Transmission warmHigh temperature Reduce speed or Transmission warmStop safely, wait for cooling will be displayed in the instrument panel. Do not allow the vehicle to stand in water up to the door sills longer than absolutely necessary. This could result in electrical malfunctions. If the engine has been stopped while the vehicle is in water, do not attempt to restart it. Have the vehicle towed out of the water. If water cannot be avoided, after driving through the water, press lightly on the brake pedal to ensure that the brakes are functioning normally. Water or mud can make the brake linings slippery, resulting in delayed braking effect. 341 STARTING AND DRIVING • The air conditioning may be switched off temporarily. • After a prolonged period of driving, do not turn off the engine immediately after stopping. • The engine cooling fan commonly continues to run for several minutes after the engine has been turned off. Winter driving Check your vehicle before the approach of cold weather. The following advice is worth noting: • Make sure that the engine coolant contains 50 percent antifreeze. Any other mixture will reduce freeze protection. This gives protection against freezing down to –31 °F (–35 °C). The use of "recycled" antifreeze is not approved by Volvo. Different types of antifreeze must not be mixed. • Volvo recommends using only genuine Volvo antifreeze in your vehicle's radiator. • Try to keep the fuel tank well filled – this helps prevent the formation of condensation in the tank. In addition, in extremely cold weather conditions it is worthwhile to add fuel line de-icer before refueling. WARNING The cooling fan (located at the front of the engine compartment, behind the radiator) may start or continue to operate (for up to 6 minutes) after the engine has been switched off. Related information • • Driving with a trailer (p. 351) Before a long distance trip (p. 339) • • 342 The viscosity of the engine oil is important. Oil with low viscosity (thinner oil) improves cold-weather starting as well as decreasing fuel consumption while the engine is warming up. Full synthetic 0W-30 oil is recommended for driving in areas with sustained low temperatures. The load placed on the battery is greater during the winter since the windshield wipers, lighting, etc., are used more often. Moreover, the capacity of the battery decreases as the temperature drops. In very cold weather, a poorly charged battery can freeze and be damaged. It is therefore advisable to check the state of charge more frequently and spray an anti-rust oil on the battery posts. • Volvo recommends the use of snow tires on all four wheels for winter driving. • To prevent the washer fluid reservoir from freezing, add washer solvents containing antifreeze. This is important since dirt is often splashed on the windshield during winter driving, requiring the frequent use of the washers and wipers. Volvo Washer Solvent should be diluted as follows: Down to 14 °F (–10 °C): 1 part washer solvent and 4 parts water Down to 5 °F (–15 °C): 1 part washer solvent and 3 parts water Down to 0 °F (–18 °C): 1 part washer solvent and 2 parts water Down to –18 °F (–28 °C): 1 part washer solvent and 1 part water. • • Use Volvo Teflon Lock Spray in the locks. Avoid using de-icing sprays as they can cause damage to the locks. Related information • Snow tires and chains (p. 473) STARTING AND DRIVING Towing eyelet 4. When used, the towing eyelet should always be securely attached in the openings on the right side of the front and rear bumpers. There are covers over these attachment points. After use, the eyelet should be removed and returned to its storage location. Screw the towing eyelet into place, first by hand and then using the tire iron, etc. until it has been screwed in as far as possible. Reinsert the cover into the bumper. CAUTION Take out the towing eyelet, which is stored under the floor in the cargo compartment. In certain conditions, the towing eyelet may be used to pull the vehicle onto a flatbed tow truck. Front bumper: Carefully pry open the cover by inserting a small screwdriver or the remote key's removable key blade into the groove on its left side. > The cover can now be folded out and removed. Rear bumper: Remove the cover by pressing the mark in the lower left corner with a finger and folding out the upper right corner. > The cover folds out and can then be removed. • The vehicle's position and ground clearance determine if it can be pulled up onto a flatbed tow truck using the towing eyelet. • If the angle of the tow truck’s ramp is too steep or the ground clearance under the vehicle is insufficient, damage could occur by attempting to pull the vehicle using the towing eyelet. • If necessary, lift the vehicle using the tow truck’s lifting device. WARNING No person or object should be behind the tow truck while the vehicle is being pulled up onto the flatbed. Related information • Towing recommendations (p. 344) 343 STARTING AND DRIVING Towing recommendations Always check with state and local authorities before attempting to tow another vehicle because this type of towing is subject to regulations regarding maximum towing speed, length and type of towing device, lighting, etc. CAUTION General towing precautions: • Towing your vehicle behind another vehicle 1. 2. 344 After securely attaching the towing line to both vehicles, put the gear selector in position N and release the parking brake. Put the ignition in mode II by turning the start knob to START (without depressing the brake pedal) and hold it in this position for approx. 4 seconds. Release the knob. 3. Put the gear selector in position N and release the parking brake. 4. The towing vehicle can now begin driving. 5. Keep the tow rope taut when the towing vehicle slows down by applying light pressure on the brake pedal. This will help prevent jarring movements of the vehicle being towed. 6. Be prepared to apply the brakes to stop the vehicle being towed. If the vehicle's battery is dead, an auxiliary battery will be necessary to provide current for releasing the electric parking brake and to move the gear selector from the P position to N. If this is not possible, use the shiftlock override procedure to manually release the gear selector from P and move it to N. • Maximum speed: 50 mph (80 km/h). Do not exceed the maximum allowable towing speed. • Maximum distance with front wheels on ground: 50 miles (80 km). • The vehicle should only be towed in the forward direction. WARNING • When the vehicle is being towed, the ignition should be in mode II (in mode I, all of the vehicle's airbags are deactivated). • The remote key must remain inside the vehicle. • The power brakes and power steering will not function when the engine is not running. Approximately 5 times more pressure will be required on the brake pedal and the steering wheel will be considerably harder to turn. • The towing eyelets must not be used for pulling the vehicle out of a ditch or for any similar purpose involving severe strain. STARTING AND DRIVING Tow trucks CAUTION In certain conditions, the towing eyelet may be used to pull the vehicle onto a flatbed tow truck. • The vehicle's position and ground clearance determine if it can be pulled up onto a flatbed tow truck using the towing eyelet. • If the angle of the tow truck’s ramp is too steep or the ground clearance under the vehicle is insufficient, damage could occur by attempting to pull the vehicle using the towing eyelet. • If necessary, lift the vehicle using the tow truck’s lifting device. WARNING No person or object should be behind the tow truck while the vehicle is being pulled up onto the flatbed. Vehicle with pneumatic suspension* If the vehicle is equipped with the optional pneumatic suspension, this feature must be deactivated before the vehicle is lifted onto a tow truck. To do so: WARNING 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. 2. Tap My Car 3. Select Disable Suspension & Leveling Control. Suspension . CAUTION • Models equipped with All Wheel Drive (AWD) may not be towed with the front wheels off the ground at speeds above approx. 40 mph (70 km/h). It should not be towed farther than approx. 30 miles (50 km). • The towing eyelet is only intended for use if the vehicle is on a road, not if is off the road surface or stuck in mud, snow, etc. In these cases, contact professional towing help. PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. CAUTION Connect the jumper cables carefully to avoid short circuits with other components in the engine compartment. Jump starting Do not attempt to start the engine by towing the vehicle. This could result in damage to the threeway catalytic converter. Use a 12-volt auxiliary battery or one in another vehicle. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 345 STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING • Do not connect the jumper cable to any part of the fuel system or to any moving parts. Avoid touching hot manifolds. • Batteries generate hydrogen gas, which is flammable and explosive. • Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If contact occurs, flush the affected area immediately with water. Obtain medical help immediately if eyes are affected. • Never expose the battery to open flame or electric spark. • • Do not smoke near the battery. Failure to follow the instructions for jump starting can lead to injury. Related information • • • • 346 Towing eyelet (p. 343) Jump starting (p. 350) Parking brake (p. 335) Ignition modes (p. 355) Fuel Volvo recommends the use of detergent gasoline to control engine deposits. Deposit control gasoline (detergent additives) Detergent gasoline is effective in keeping injectors and intake valves clean. Consistent use of deposit control gasolines will help ensure good drivability and fuel economy. If you are not sure whether the gasoline contains deposit control additives, check with the service station operator. NOTE Volvo does not recommend the use of external fuel injector cleaning systems. Unleaded fuel Each Volvo has a three-way catalytic converter and must use only unleaded gasoline. U.S. and Canadian regulations require that pumps delivering unleaded gasoline be labeled "UNLEADED". Only these pumps have nozzles which fit your vehicle's filler inlet. It is unlawful to dispense leaded fuel into a vehicle labeled "unleaded gasoline only". Leaded gasoline damages the threeway catalytic converter and the heated oxygen sensor system. Repeated use of leaded gasoline will lessen the effectiveness of the emission control system and could result in loss of emission warranty coverage. State and local vehicle inspection programs will make detection of misfueling easier, possibly resulting in emission test failure for misfueled vehicles. NOTE Some U.S. and Canadian gasolines contain an octane enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). If such fuels are used, your Emission Control System performance may be affected, and the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator light) located on your instrument panel may light. If this occurs, please return your vehicle to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for service. Gasoline containing alcohol and ethers, "Oxygenated fuels" Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing "oxygenates" which are usually alcohols or ethers. In some areas, state or local laws require that the service pump be marked indicating use of alcohols or ethers. However, there are areas in which the pumps are unmarked. If you are not sure whether there is alcohol or ethers in the gasoline you buy, check with the service station operator. To meet seasonal air quality standards, some areas require the use of "oxygenated" fuel. Volvo allows the use of the following "oxygenated" fuels; however, the octane ratings listed must still be met. STARTING AND DRIVING Alcohol – Ethanol Octane rating Fuels containing up to 10% ethanol by volume may be used. Ethanol may also be referred to as Ethyl alcohol, or "Gasohol". Volvo recommends premium fuel for best performance, but using 87 octane1 or above will not affect engine reliability. Ethers – MTBE: Fuels containing up to 15% MTBE may be used. Minimum octane performance and reliability. TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline meets a new standard jointly established by leading automotive manufactures to meet the needs of today’s advanced engines. Qualifying gasoline retailers (stations) will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met the “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” standards. Methanol NOTE Do not use gasolines containing methanol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). This practice can result in vehicle performance deterioration and can damage critical parts in the fuel system. Such damage may not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Information about TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is available at www.toptiergas.com. Demanding driving Related information • • Octane rating (p. 347) Opening/closing the fuel filler door (p. 348) Typical pump octane label NOTE Vehicles equipped with the high performance 4-cylinder engines (B4204T9 and B4204T10) require premium fuel2. TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Volvo endorses the use of “TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline” where available to help maintain engine 1 2 In demanding driving conditions, such as operating the vehicle in hot weather, towing a trailer, or driving for extended periods at higher altitudes than normal, it may be advisable to switch to higher octane fuel (91 or higher) or to change gasoline brands to fully utilize your engine's capacity, and for the smoothest possible operation. NOTE When switching to higher octane fuel or changing gasoline brands, it may be necessary to fill the tank more than once before a difference in engine operation is noticeable. AKI (ANTI KNOCK INDEX) is an average of the Research Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane Number (MON), MON+RON/2. Refer to your Warranty and Maintenance Records booklet for additional information. 347 STARTING AND DRIVING Fuel Formulations WARNING Do not use gasoline that contains lead as a knock inhibitor, and do not use lead additives. Besides damaging the exhaust emission control systems on your vehicle, lead has been strongly linked to certain forms of cancer. Never carry a cell phone that is switched on while refueling your vehicle. If the phone rings, this may cause a spark that could ignite gasoline fumes, resulting in fire and injury. Many fuels contain benzene as a solvent. Unburned benzene has been strongly linked to certain forms of cancer. If you live in an area where you must fill your own gas tank, take precautions. These may include: • standing upwind away from the filler nozzle while refueling • refueling only at gas stations with vapor recovery systems that fully seal the mouth of the filler neck during refueling • wearing neoprene gloves while handling a fuel filler nozzle. Use of Additives With the exception of gas line antifreeze during winter months, do not add solvents, thickeners, or other store-bought additives to your vehicle's fuel, cooling, or lubricating systems. Overuse may damage your engine, and some of these additives contain organically volatile chemicals. Do not needlessly expose yourself to these chemicals. 348 Opening/closing the fuel filler door The fuel tank has a filling system that does not have a cover. Opening/closing the fuel filler door The vehicle must be unlocked before the fuel filler door can be opened. WARNING Carbon monoxide is a poisonous, colorless, and odorless gas. It is present in all exhaust gases. If you ever smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, make sure the passenger compartment is ventilated, and immediately return the vehicle to a trained and qualified Volvo service technician for correction. Related information • Fuel (p. 346) An arrow next to the fuel pump symbol in the instrument panel indicates the side of the vehicle where the fuel filler door is located. 1. Open the fuel filler door by pressing lightly on its rear edge. 2. After refueling, close the fuel filler door by pressing it closed until it clicks into place. Refueling from a service station pump STARTING AND DRIVING To refuel: 1. Open the fuel filler door. Do not refuel with the engine running3 2. Insert the pump's nozzle into the fuel filler pipe's opening as far as possible (see the illustration). 3. Avoid overfilling the fuel tank. Do not press the handle on the filler nozzle after it has stopped pumping. Too much fuel in the tank in hot weather conditions can cause the fuel to overflow. Overfilling could also cause damage to the emission control systems. CAUTION Avoid spilling gasoline during refueling. In addition to causing damage to the environment, gasolines containing alcohol can cause damage to painted surfaces, which may not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Related information • • 3 Fuel (p. 346) Octane rating (p. 347) Emission controls or location or removing components, and/or repeated use of leaded fuel. Three-way catalytic converter • • Keep your engine properly tuned. Certain engine malfunctions, particularly involving the electrical, fuel or distributor ignition systems, may cause unusually high three-way catalytic converter temperatures. Do not continue to operate your vehicle if you detect engine misfire, noticeable loss of power or other unusual operating conditions, such as engine overheating or backfiring. A properly tuned engine will help avoid malfunctions that could damage the three-way catalytic converter. Do not park your vehicle over combustible materials, such as grass or leaves, which can come into contact with the hot exhaust system and cause such materials to ignite under certain wind and weather conditions. • Excessive starter cranking (in excess of one minute), or an intermittently firing or flooded engine can cause three-way catalytic converter or exhaust system overheating. • Remember that tampering or unauthorized modifications to the engine, the Engine Control Module, or the vehicle may be illegal and can cause three-way catalytic converter or exhaust system overheating. This includes: altering fuel injection settings or components, altering emission system components NOTE Unleaded fuel is required for vehicles with three-way catalytic converters. Heated oxygen sensors The heated oxygen sensors monitor the oxygen content of the exhaust gases. Readings are fed into a control module that continuously monitors engine functions and controls fuel injection. The ratio of fuel to air into the engine is continuously adjusted for efficient combustion to help reduce harmful emissions. Related information • Octane rating (p. 347) If the engine is running when the vehicle is refueled, the Check Engine Light (malfunction indicator lamp) may indicate a fault. However, your vehicle's performance will not be affected. 349 STARTING AND DRIVING Jump starting 2. Follow the instructions provided here to jump start your vehicle or to jump start another vehicle. If the 12-volt auxiliary battery to be used is in another vehicle, switch off that vehicle's ignition while the jumper cables are being attached. Be sure to follow jump starting instructions provided for the other vehicle. CAUTION Connect the jumper cables carefully to avoid short circuits with other components in the engine compartment. 3. Connect one of the red jumper cable's clamps to the auxiliary battery's positive (+) terminal (1) 4. Fold back the cover over the positive (+) jump start terminal on your vehicle's battery (2). 5. Connect the red jumper cable's other clamp to your vehicle's positive (+) jump start terminal (2). 6. Connect one of the black jumper cable's clamps to the auxiliary battery's negative (–) terminal (3). 7. Connect the black jumper cable's other clamp to your vehicle's negative ground point (4). 8. Check that the jumper cables are securely attached. Connecting the jumper cables If the 12-volt auxiliary battery to be used is in another vehicle, check that the vehicles are not touching to prevent premature completion of a circuit. Be sure to follow jump starting instructions provided for the other vehicle. 1. 350 Switch off the ignition in your vehicle (set the ignition to mode 0). 9. Start the engine in the assisting vehicle and run it at approx. 1,500 rpm. 10. Start the engine in the vehicle with dead battery. 11. After the engine has started, carefully remove the negative (–) terminal jumper cable (black). Then remove the positive (+) terminal jumper cable (red). WARNING PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. STARTING AND DRIVING WARNING • Do not connect the jumper cable to any part of the fuel system or to any moving parts. Avoid touching hot manifolds. • Batteries generate hydrogen gas, which is flammable and explosive. • Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If contact occurs, flush the affected area immediately with water. Obtain medical help immediately if eyes are affected. Driving with a trailer When towing a trailer, always observe the legal requirements of the state/province. • • Increase tire pressure to recommended full pressure. • When your vehicle is new, avoid towing heavy trailers during the first 620 miles (1,000 km). • Never expose the battery to open flame or electric spark. • • Do not smoke near the battery. • Failure to follow the instructions for jump starting can lead to injury. Maximum speed when towing a trailer: 50 mph (80 km/h). • Engine and transmission are subject to increased loads. Therefore, engine coolant temperature should be closely watched when driving in hot climates or hilly terrain. Use a lower gear and turn off the air conditioner if the temperature gauge needle enters the red range. Ignition modes (p. 355) Starting the engine (p. 356) Turning the engine off (p. 359) • Do not connect the trailer's brake system directly to the vehicle's brake system. • More frequent vehicle maintenance is required. • Remove the ball holder when the hitch is not being used. Trailer towing does not normally present any particular problems, but take into consideration: Related information • • • All Volvo models are equipped with energyabsorbing shock-mounted bumpers. Trailer hitch installation should not interfere with the proper operation of this bumper system. stop (check and observe state/local regulations). • If the automatic transmission begins to overheat, a message will be displayed in the text window. • • Avoid overload and other abusive operation. • It is necessary to balance trailer brakes with the towing vehicle brakes to provide a safe Hauling a trailer affects handling, durability, and economy. NOTE • When parking the vehicle with a trailer on a hill, apply the parking brake before putting the gear selector in P. Always follow the trailer manufacturer's recommendations for wheel chocking. • When starting on a hill, put the gear selector in D before releasing the parking brake. • If you use the manual (Geartronic) shift positions while towing a trailer, make sure the gear you select does not put too much strain on the engine (using too high a gear). • The drawbar assembly/trailer hitch may be rated for trailers heavier than the vehicle is designed to tow. Please adhere to Volvo's recommended trailer weights. • Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more than 15%. 351 STARTING AND DRIVING CAUTION The maximum trailer weights listed are only applicable for altitudes up to 3,280 ft (1000 m) above sea level. With increasing altitude the engine power and therefore the car's climbing ability are impaired because of the reduced air density, so the maximum trailer weight has to be reduced accordingly. The weight of the vehicle and trailer must be reduced by 10% for every further 3,280 ft (1000 m) (or part thereof). When towing 5,950 lbs (2,700kg) hill inclination is restricted to 14%. WARNING • Bumper-attached trailer hitches must not be used on Volvos, nor should safety chains be attached to the bumper. • Trailer hitches attaching to the vehicle rear axle must not be used. • Never connect a trailer's hydraulic brake system directly to the vehicle brake system, nor a trailer's lighting system directly to the vehicle lighting system. Consult your nearest authorized Volvo retailer for correct installation. • When towing a trailer, the trailer's safety chains or wire must be correctly fastened to the attachment points provided in the trailer hitch on the vehicle. The safety chain or wire must never be fastened to or wound around the towing ball. Related information • • • Detachable trailer hitch (p. 353) Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) (p. 354) Weights (p. 539) Trailer cable An adapter is required if the vehicle's trailer hitch has a 13-pin connector and the trailer has 7 pins. Use an adapter cable approved by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag on the ground. Self-leveling suspension* With this system, the rear suspension maintains a constant level, regardless of the load in the cargo compartment (up to the max. permissible load). When the engine is not running, the rear of the vehicle sinks down slightly, which is normal. 352 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. STARTING AND DRIVING Detachable trailer hitch 3. Volvo recommends the use of Volvo trailer hitches that are specially designed for the vehicle. Align the hole in the ball holder with the one in the hitch assembly. 4. Slide the locking bolt through the hitch assembly/ball holder. 5. Insert the cotter pin in the hole at the end of the locking bolt. Stowing the ball holder Removing the ball holder 1. Remove the cotter pin from the locking bolt and slide the locking bolt out of the ball holder/hitch assembly. 2. Pull the ball holder out of the hitch assembly. Compartment for the detachable trailer hitch NOTE Ball holder WARNING A cover for the hitch assembly is also included in the kit. When not in use, the detachable trailer hitch should always be kept in its compartment in the foam block under the cargo compartment floor (see the illustration). Cotter pin Hitch assembly Locking bolt Safety wire attachment Related information • • Driving with a trailer (p. 351) Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) (p. 354) Installing the ball holder 1. If necessary, remove the cotter pin from the locking bolt and slide the locking bolt out of the hitch assembly. 2. Slide the ball holder into the hitch assembly. 353 STARTING AND DRIVING Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) How TSA works Trailer Stability Assist is a system designed to help stabilize a vehicle that is towing a trailer when the vehicle and trailer have begun to sway and is part of the Electronic Stability Control system. Once swaying has begun, it can be very difficult to stop, which makes it difficult to control the vehicle and trailer. Function A vehicle towing a trailer may begin to sway for various reasons. Normally this only occurs at high speeds but, for example, if the trailer is overloaded or if the load is unevenly distributed in the trailer, there is risk of swaying. Swaying may be caused by factors such as: • The vehicle and trailer are hit by a sudden, strong crosswind • The vehicle and trailer are traveling on an uneven road surface or drive over a bump • Sudden movements of the steering wheel Facts about TSA 354 • The stability system symbol in the instrument panel will flash when TSA is working • If the driver switches off the stability system's Spin Control function, TSA will also be switched off (but will be on again the next time the engine is started) • TSA may not intervene when the vehicle and trailer begin to sway if the driver tries to compensate for the swaying motion by moving the steering wheel rapidly The TSA system continuously monitors the vehicle's movements, particularly lateral movement. If the system detects a tendency to sway, the brakes are applied individually on the front wheels, which has a stabilizing effect on the vehicle and trailer. This is often enough to enable the driver to regain control of the vehicle. If this is not adequate to stop the swaying motion, the brakes are applied to all of the wheels on the vehicle and on the trailer if it is equipped with brakes, and engine power is temporarily reduced. As the swaying motion begins to decrease and the vehicle-trailer have once again become stable, TSA will now stop regulating the brakes/ engine power and the driver regains control of the vehicle. TSA is deactivated if the driver deactivates ESC in the center display's menu system. When the ESC symbol in the instrument panel flashes, TSA is active. Related information • • • Detachable trailer hitch (p. 353) Driving with a trailer (p. 351) Electronic Stability Control (ESC) (p. 308) STARTING AND DRIVING Ignition modes The vehicle's ignition can be put in various modes (levels) to make different functions available. Mode 0 Functions available • • • The vehicle's ignition has 3 modes: 0, I, and II that can be used to operate various functions without starting the engine. The following table shows examples of which functions are available in the respective modes. The odometer, clock and temperature gauge are illuminated II Power seats* can be adjusted • The 12-volt socket in the cargo compartment can be used • The center display is activated and can be used • The infotainment system can be used for a limited time • The laminated panoramic roof*, power seats*/windows,12-volt sockets in the passenger compartment, Bluetooth, navigation system*, climate system blower, windshield wipers can be operated • The infotainment system will start (if it was started when the ignition was switched off) Functions available • • • The power windows can be operated In this mode, certain functions can only be used for a limited time to help minimize battery drain I Mode The headlights illuminate Warning/indicator lights illuminate for 5 seconds A number of other functions will also be activated. However, the heated seats* and heated rear window functions can only be activated when the engine is running. This mode should only be used for very short periods to help avoid draining the battery. Selecting an ignition mode Start knob in the tunnel console • Ignition mode 0: unlock the vehicle and keep the remote key in the passenger's compartment. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 355 STARTING AND DRIVING NOTE To access ignition modes I or II without starting the engine, the brake pedal must not be depressed when these modes are selected. • Ignition mode I: Turn the start knob to START and release it. The knob will return automatically to its original position. • Ignition mode II: Turn the start knob to START and hold it there for approx. 4 seconds. Release the knob. • Returning to ignition mode 0: To return to mode 0 from mode II or I, turn the start knob to STOP and release it. Related information • • Starting the engine (p. 356) Turning the engine off (p. 359) Battery drain Starting the engine Your vehicle's electrical functions drain the battery to varying extents. The engine can be started using the start knob on the tunnel console if there is a remote key in the passenger compartment. Avoid using ignition mode II as much as posssible, or electrical functions that require a great deal of electrical current when the engine is not running. Using ignition mode I whenever possible consumes less electrical current. Functions that require a great deal of electrical current include: • • • • the climate system blower headlights wipers infotainment system (especially at high volume). If the battery's charge level is low, a text message will appear in the instrument panel. The vehicle's energy-saving function will then turn off or reduce certain functions that are currently consuming electrical current. If the battery needs to be recharged, start the engine and let it idle for at least 15 minutes or drive the vehicle (driving charges the battery faster than letting the engine idle). Related information • 356 Ignition modes (p. 355) STARTING AND DRIVING To start the engine. Start knob in the tunnel console between the front seats WARNING 1. A remote key must be in the passenger compartment. On models with the standard Passive Start, the key has to be in the front section of the passenger compartment. If the vehicle is equipped the optional Passive Entry system (keyless locking/unlocking) the key can be anywhere in the vehicle. 2. Press firmly on the brake pedal4. 3. Turn the start knob toward START and release it to start the engine. > The starter motor will crank until the engine starts or its overheating protection is triggered. Before starting the engine: • • Fasten the seat belt. • Make sure the brake pedal can be depressed completely. Adjust the seat if necessary. WARNING • Never use more than one floor mat at a time on the driver's floor. Before driving, remove the original mat from the driver's seat floor before using any other type of floor mat. Any mat used in this position should be securely and properly anchored in the attaching pins. An extra mat on the driver's floor can cause the accelerator and/or brake pedal to catch. Check that the movement of these pedals is not impeded. • Volvo's floor mats are specially manufactured for your car. They must be firmly secured in the clips on the floor so that they cannot slide and become trapped under the pedals on the driver's side. Check that the seat, steering wheel and mirrors are adjusted properly. Back-up reader in the tunnel console 4 If the vehicle is moving, it is only necessary to turn the start knob toward START to start the engine. 357 STARTING AND DRIVING If Vehicle key not found is displayed in the instrument panel, place the remote key in the back-up reader in the tunnel console (see the illustration) and try again to start the engine. CAUTION If the engine does not start after the third try, wait for approximately 3 minutes before trying to start it again to give the battery time to recover its starting capacity. NOTE After a cold start, idle speed may be noticeably higher than normal for a short period. This is done to help bring components in the emission control system to their normal operating temperature as quickly as possible, which enables them to control emissions and help reduce the vehicle's impact on the environment. CAUTION WARNING 358 • When starting in cold weather, the automatic transmission may shift up at slightly higher engine speeds than normal until the automatic transmission fluid reaches normal operating temperature. • Always remove the remote key from the passenger compartment when leaving the vehicle and ensure that the ignition in mode 0. • On vehicles with the optional Passive Entry, never remove the remote key from the vehicle while it is being driven or towed. • Do not race a cold engine immediately after starting. Oil flow may not reach some lubrication points fast enough to prevent engine damage. • Always place the gear selector in Park and apply the parking brake before leaving the vehicle. Never leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running. • • Always open garage doors fully before starting the engine inside a garage to ensure adequate ventilation. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, which is invisible and odorless but very poisonous. The engine should be idling when you move the gear selector. Never accelerate until after you feel the transmission engage. Accelerating immediately after selecting a gear will cause harsh engagement and premature transmission wear. • Selecting P or N when idling at a standstill for prolonged periods of time will help prevent overheating of the automatic transmission fluid. Related information • • • Ignition modes (p. 355) Turning the engine off (p. 359) Changing the remote key's battery (p. 222) STARTING AND DRIVING Turning the engine off To turn off the engine: Drive modes* The engine can be turned off using the start knob on the tunnel console. – Selecting a drive mode affects the vehicle's driving characteristics to help make driving more enjoyable or easier in certain types of situations. Turn the start knob toward STOP and release it to switch the engine off. If the gear selector is in P or if the vehicle is moving: – Hold the knob in the STOP position until the engine stops. Related information • • Starting the engine (p. 356) Ignition modes (p. 355) The following systems are adapted to help provide the best vehicle performance in the respective drive modes: • • • • • • • Steering Engine/transmission/All Wheel Drive Brakes Pneumatic suspension and shock absorbers Instrument panel Start/Stop Climate system settings Select the drive mode best suited to the current driving conditions. Please be aware that not all modes can be selected in all driving situations. The selected mode will be displayed in the instrument panel. Start knob in the tunnel console between the front seats * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 359 STARTING AND DRIVING Selecting a drive mode tion will be activated. This setting offers driving comfort and light steering. ECO ECO drive mode is designed to help promote fuel-efficient driving. In this mode, Start/Stop is activated, ground clearance is lowered to help reduce wind resistance and certain climate system functions will be reduced. There is an ECO guage in the instrument panel to indicate the current level of fuel-efficiency. See also the article "ECO drive mode." 1. 2. Press theDRIVE MODE control in the tunnel console. > A pop-up menu will open in the center display. Roll the control upward or downward to scroll to the desired drive mode. A drive mode can also be selected by tapping its button on the center display. 3. Press the control again to select it. Available drive modes COMFORT This is the default mode. When the engine is started, COMFORT5 drive mode will be selected and the Start/Stop func5 360 OFF ROAD This mode helps maximize the vehicle's capacity to traverse difficult terrain or poor roads. In OFF ROAD, ground clearance is maximized, the steering is light, All Wheel Drive and Hill Descent Control are activated and a compass and altimeter will be displayed in the instrument panel. Start/Stop is deactivated. This drive mode can only be activated at low speeds (the permissable speed range will be shown on the speedometer). At higher speeds, OFF ROAD mode will be cancelled and another drive mode will be activated. This mode is not intended for normal street driving. If the OFF ROAD mode was selected when the engine was switched off, it will also restart in this mode. CAUTION OFF ROAD drive mode may not be used if the vehicle is towing a trailer without an electrical connection. This could result in damage to the pneumatic suspension system's bellows. Due to the increased ground clearance, if the OFF ROAD mode was selected when the engine was switched off, it will also restart in this mode. DYNAMIC DYNAMIC driving mode is designed to provide sportier driving characteristics. Steering response will be more immediate, the suspension will be stiffer and low ground clearance will help reduce body roll when cornering. Start/Stop will be deactivated. STARTING AND DRIVING 3. INDIVIDUAL This setting allows you to adapt a driving mode to your personal preferences. The following settings can be modified: • • • • • Select one of the other driving modes as a basis and change the settings to provide the driving characteristics that you prefer. These settings will be stored in a separate driver profile. This driving mode is only available if it has been activated in the center display. INDIVIDUAL is only available if it has been activated in the center display. Driver Display Steering force Powertrain Characteristics Brake Characteristics Pneumatic suspension and shock absorbers Related information • • • • • • • Settings 6 Select: Eco, Comfort or Dynamic. view6 Adjustable steering force* (p. 308) Loading (p. 207) Start/Stop (p. 364) ECO drive mode (p. 362) All Wheel Drive (AWD) (p. 372) Hill Descent Control (HDC) (p. 334) Driver profiles (p. 112) for INDIVIDUAL driving mode 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. 2. Tap My Car Individual Drive Mode and tap Individual Drive Mode. Generic ilustration. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 361 STARTING AND DRIVING ECO drive mode Selecting ECO mode The Eco drive mode is a function designed to give the driver the opportunity to drive more economically and to help reduce fuel consumption. When the engine is switched off, ECO mode is deactivated and must be reactivated each time the engine is started. ECO will appear in the instrument panel when the function is activated. When this mode is activated, the following characteristics are modified: • • The automatic transmission's shifting points • Eco Coast functionality is activated: engine braking is disabled at speeds between approx. 40 and 85 mph (65 and 140 km/h) • Climate system settings: certain functions will be temporarily reduced or deactivated • The suspension's self-leveling function* lowers ground clearance to help reduce wind resistance • Information is shown in an ECO gauge in the instrument panel to help promote more economical driving Via Function view Select Driving mode ECO in the center display's Function view. A green indicator light in the button shows that the function is activated. The engine management system and accelerator pedal response With the drive mode control* Some of these functions can be restarted manually but full functionality will not be restored until Eco is deactivated. 362 Press the control again to select it. A drive mode can also be selected by tapping its button on the center display. Eco Coast Eco Coast essentially deactivates engine braking, allowing the vehicle to roll freely. When the driver releases the accelerator pedal, the transmission is automatically disengaged from the engine to allow the vehicle to roll as far as possible, which helps reduce fuel consumption. This feature is primarily intended to be used in driving situations where the vehicle can roll freely, such as down gentle hills or when a decrease in speed is expected, such as when approaching an intersection or a traffic light. Eco Coast enables proactive driving with as little braking as possible. Depending on the driving situation, Eco and Eco Coast can be used in different ways to help reduce fuel consumption: NOTE When Eco is activated, several climate system parameters are changed and the function of certain current-consuming systems will be reduced. 3. • 1. 2. Press the DRIVE MODE control. > A pop-up menu will open in the center display. Roll the control upward or downward to scroll to the desired drive mode and With Eco activated: this enables Eco Coast, which allows the vehicle to roll freely for as far as possible when the driver releases the accelerator pedal (e.g., when approaching a traffic light or intersection). or • With Eco deactivated: engine braking can be used when the vehicle will only roll for * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. STARTING AND DRIVING a short distance (in heavy traffic, etc.) or when driving down hills. To help keep fuel consumption as low as possible, Eco Coast should not be used in traffic situations where the brakes have to be used frequently. • The steering wheel paddles* are used for manual shifting Deactivating and turning off Eco Coast In certain situations, it may be advisable to switch off the Eco Coast function, such as: • When driving down steep hills, in order to utilize engine braking Eco Coast is activated when the accelerator pedal is released completely if: • Prior to passing another vehicle, in order to do so as safely as possible • • • Eco is activated Deactivating Eco Coast (and reactivating engine braking) can be done in the following ways: • The gradient of a down-slope is less than approximately 6% Activating Eco Coast The gear selector is in D The vehicle's speed is between approximately 25–85 mph (40–140 km/h). Always observe posted speed limits COASTING will appear in the instrument panel when Eco Coast is being used. Limitations Eco Coast is not available if: • • • The engine and/or transmission have not reached their normal operating temperature Cruise control is activated The gear selector is moved from D to "+/-" for manual shifting • The vehicle's speed is not within the 25–85 mph (40–140 km/h) range • The gradient of a down-slope is more than approximately 6% • Move the gear selector to the manual "+/–" position • Change gears using the steering wheel paddles* • Press the brake or accelerator pedal situation. This is indicated by a diamond in the gauge. Related information • • • Driving economically (p. 339) Drive modes* (p. 359) Start/Stop (p. 364) Turn the function off by changing drive modes* or by turning ECO off in the center display's Function view. ECO gauge in the instrument panel The ECO gauge in the instrument panel helps improve driving economy. • A low reading in the green area indicates economical driving. • A higher reading indicates higher fuel consumption. The ECO gauge also has an indicator showing how a "reference" driver would drive in the same * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 363 STARTING AND DRIVING Start/Stop Using the Start/Stop function Auto-start Start/Stop is a function that temporarily switches off the engine when the vehicle is not moving, for instance in heavy traffic or at a traffic light, to help reduce fuel consumption. The engine starts again automatically when the brake pedal is released. Start/Stop is a function that temporarily switches off the engine when the vehicle is not moving, for instance in heavy traffic or at a traffic light, to help reduce fuel consumption. The engine starts again automatically when the brake pedal is released. The following conditions must be met for the engine to auto-start: • Start/Stop is one of several fuel-conserving features that also help reduce emissions. Start/Stop is available when the engine has been started. The instrument panel will indicate if the function is available/unavailable/active. Release the brake pedal; the engine will automatically restart. When starting on an uphill incline, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) function will be activated to help prevent the vehicle from rolling backward. • When the brake system's Auto Hold function is activated, the engine will not auto-start until the accelerator pedal is pressed. • When Adaptive cruise or Pilot Assist are activated, the engine will auto-start when the accelerator pedal is pressed or if the button is pressed on the left-side steering wheel keypad. • Keep the brake pedal depressed but press the accelerator pedal. The engine will autostart. • On a downhill incline, release the brake pedal so that the vehicle begins to roll. The engine will auto-start after a slight increase in speed. This feature helps make it possible to drive more economically by allowing the engine to auto-stop in certain situations. Using the Start/Stop function (p. 364) All of the vehicle's normal systems such as lighting, infotainment, etc., function normally when the engine has auto-stopped. However, certain functions, such as climate system blower speed or very high infotainment system volume, will be temporarily reduced. ECO drive mode (p. 362) Auto-stop Related information • • • Conditions for Start/Stop (p. 365) The following conditions must be met for the engine to auto-stop: • Stop the vehicle by applying the brakes and keep the brake pedal depressed. The engine will auto-stop. If the COMFORT8 or ECO driving modes are activated, the engine can auto-stop before the vehicle has come to a standstill. If the Adaptive cruise or Pilot Assist functions are activated, the engine will auto-stop after approx. 3 seconds. See also the article "Conditions for Start/Stop." 8 364 The default driving mode. STARTING AND DRIVING is not available. Tap the Start/Stop button in the center display's Function view. The green indicator light in the button will go out. Start/ Stop will remain off until the button is tapped again, the driving mode is changed COMFORT or ECO, or until the engine is restarted. No text will be displayed when Start/Stop is turned off. Related information Symbols in the instrument panel • READY will be displayed in the tachometer when Start/Stop is available. • An indicator in the tachometer will point toward READY when Start/Stop is active and the engine has auto-stopped. • READY will be grayed-out when Start/Stop • Conditions for Start/Stop Certain conditions must be met for the Start/ Stop feature to function. If a condition is not met, this will be indicated in the instrument panel. The engine does not auto-stop In certain situations or conditions, the engine may not auto-stop when the vehicle comes to a standstill, such as when: • the vehicle's has not reached a speed of approx. 8 mph (12 km/h) after starting. • after several auto-stops, the speed must again exceed approx. 8 mph (12 km/h) before the next auto-stop. • • the driver's seat belt is unbuckled. • the engine has not reached its normal operating temperature. • the ambient temperature is below approx. 23°F (-5°C) or above approx. 85°F (30°C). • the windshield's heating function* is activated. Turning Start/Stop off • In certain situations (e.g., heavy stop-and-go traffic), it may be advisable to temporarily turn this function off. To do so: the climate system cannot keep the desired settings in the passenger compartment. • • Instrument panel when Start/Stop is active and the engine has auto-stopped • • Conditions for Start/Stop (p. 365) Start/Stop (p. 364) • the main battery's charge is below the minimum level. the vehicle is backing up. the main battery's temperature is above or below the permitted limits. the driver is turning the steering wheel hard. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 365 STARTING AND DRIVING • • • the road's incline is very steep. • driving at high altitude and the engine has not reached its normal operating temperature. • the gear selector is in the manual shifting position. • • the ABS brakes have activated. • many starts during a short time period have triggered the starter motor's overheating protection. • a trailer's electrical system is connected to the vehicle's electrical system. the hood is opened. the transmission has not reached its normal operating temperature. hard braking (even if the ABS brakes have not activated). • condensation forms on the inside of the windows. • the climate system cannot keep the desired settings in the passenger compartment. • electrical current consumption is temporarily high or the main battery's charge is below the minimum level. • • • the brake pedal is pumped repeatedly. • the driver's seat belt is unbuckled while the gear selector is in the D or N positions. the hood is opened. the vehicle begins to move or increases speed slightly (if the engine auto-stopped before the vehicle was at a standstill). • • the gear selector is moved from D to R or ±. the driver's door is opened with the gear selector in D: an audible signal and a text message will inform the driver that the ignition is on. The engine does not auto-start In certain situations or conditions, the engine may not auto-start after an auto-stop, such as: • • if the driver is not wearing a seat belt the gear selector is in the P position and the driver's door is open. The engine must be started normally. The engine auto-starts while the brake pedal is depressed In the following situations, the engine will autostart even though the brake pedal is depressed: 366 WARNING Do not open the hood if the engine has autostopped. The engine could suddenly autostart. Before opening the hood: • Switch off the ignition by turning the start knob in the tunnel console toward STOP. • Be aware that if the engine has been running, components in the engine compartment will be very hot. Related information • Using the Start/Stop function (p. 364) STARTING AND DRIVING Automatic transmission Gear selector positions The automatic transmission has 8 forward gears and shifts up or down based on the level of acceleration, speed and engine speed (measured in revolutions per minute - rpm). Manual shifting is also possible. The gear indicator in the instrument panel shows the gear currently being used or gear shift mode. The transmission automatically shifts between the various forward gears, based on the level of acceleration and speed. The automatic transmission has 8 forward gears and also offers manual shifting. Gear selector positions CAUTION The transmission’s temperature is monitored to help prevent damage to the transmission or other drivetrain components. If there is a risk of overheating, the warning symbol on the instrument panel will illuminate and a text message will be displayed. Follow the instructions provided there. The gear selector must be in the P position before the vehicle can be locked and the alarm armed. WARNING Reverse – R The vehicle must be stationary before R can be selected. Gear selector positions (p. 367) Gear shift indicator (p. 370) In position P, the transmission is mechanically locked. Always apply the parking brake when the vehicle is parked. Always apply the parking brake when the vehicle is parked, particularly when parking on a hill. The transmission's P mode may not be able to keep the vehicle stationary if it is parked on an incline. Related information • • • • • The ignition must be in mode II and the brake pedal must be depressed before the gear selector can be moved from P. Shiftlock (p. 369) The following gear selector positions are shown in the instrument panel: Steering wheel paddles* (p. 370) P, R, N, D or M. All Wheel Drive (AWD) (p. 372) For manual shifting, the gear number (1 – 8) will be displayed. Park – P Select P when the vehicle is parked or when the starting the engine. The vehicle must be stationary when P is selected. Neutral – N No gear is selected and the engine can be started. Always apply the parking brake if the vehicle is not moving and the gear selector is in the N position. The ignition must be in mode II and the brake pedal must be depressed before the gear selector can be moved from N. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 367 STARTING AND DRIVING D is the normal driving position and gear shifting is fully automatic. The vehicle must be stationary when the gear selector is moved from R to D. For smooth shifting and engine performance, the transmission will shift down automatically if the vehicle's speed becomes too low for the selected gear. The transmission may shift down one or more gears, depending on the engine's rpm and will shift up again when max. rpm is reached for a specific gear. Manual shifting – M (shown on the instrument panel) Move the gear selector to the side toward D at any time to resume automatic gear shifting. When the pedal is released from this position, the transmission will shift up. Drive – D Manual shifting can be selected at any time and engine braking will occur when the accelerator pedal is released. To select, move the gear selector from D to the side toward "±". The current gear (1 - 8) will be shown in the instrument panel. • Press the gear selector forward toward "+" (plus) and release it to shift up one gear. • Pull the gear selector rearward toward "–" (minus) and release it to shift down one gear. Slippery driving conditions Selecting 3rd gear in manual shifting mode can help provide better traction when starting off on slippery surfaces. To do so: 1. Depress the brake pedal and move the gear selector to the side from D toward "±". The gear information in the instrument panel will change from D to 1. 2. Press the gear selector forward and release it twice to select 3rd gear. The gear shown in the instrument panel will change from 1 to 3. 3. Release the brake pedal and press gently on the accelerator pedal. Safety function To help avoid excessive rpm that might cause engine damage, the transmission control module has a down-shift protection feature that in some situations may prevent kickdown. Related information • • • Steering wheel paddles* (p. 370) Shiftlock (p. 369) Gear shift indicator (p. 370) This allows the vehicle to start off at lower rpm with less power to the driven wheels. Kickdown Manual shift indicator in the instrument panel10. 10 368 Pressing down the accelerator pedal quickly and as far as possible triggers an automatic downshift called kickdown, which is used when maximum acceleration is required, e.g., when passing another vehicle. Generic illustration. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. STARTING AND DRIVING Shiftlock Automatic shiftlock The automatic transmission's shiftlock feature helps prevent inadvertently moving the gear selector between different positions. From Park – P There are two different types of shiftlock: mechanical and automatic. Mechanical shiftlock from the P or D positions into N so that the vehicle can be moved. To do so: Lift away the rubber mat on the bottom of the storage compartment in front of the gear selector to expose the small hole for overriding the shiftlock feature. In order to move the gear selector from the P position, the brake pedal must be depressed and the ignition must be in mode II. From neutral – N If the gear selector is in N and the vehicle has been stationary for more than 3 seconds (regardless of whether or not the engine is running), the shiftlock feature will lock the gear selector in this position. In order to move the gear selector from the N position, the brake pedal must be depressed and the ignition must be in mode II. Shiftlock override Press a small screwdriver or similar item into the hole and hold it down. Press the button on the front side of the gear selector and move the selector to the N position. Release the button and remove the screwdriver from the hole. 4. Put the rubber mat back into place. Related information • • Gear selector positions (p. 367) Automatic transmission (p. 367) The gear selector can be moved back and forth freely between N and D. There is a mechanical shiftlock for the other positions. To move the gear selector to between P, R, N and D, press the button on the front of the gear selector (see the illustration). If the vehicle cannot be driven (e.g., due to a discharged battery), the shiftlock feature has to be overridden in order to move the gear selector 369 STARTING AND DRIVING Gear shift indicator Steering wheel paddles* During manual gear shifting, the gear shift indicator will prompt the driver to shift up or down to help get the best possible fuel economy. In addition to the manual gearshift function using the gear selector, the paddles make it possible to manually shift gears from the steering wheel. The gear shift indicator shows the current gear in the instrument panel and uses an upward arrow to recommend shifting to a higher gear or a downward arrow to recommend shifting to a lower gear. In order to shift gears with the paddles, they have to first be activated. To do so: – Pull either paddle toward the steering wheel and release it. Activating the paddles – Pull either paddle toward the steering wheel and release it; the D in the instrument panel will change to M and the number of the gear currently being used will be displayed. "–": Shift down one gear. "+": Shift up one gear. A gear shift will take place each time a paddle is pulled if the engine speed (rpm) is within the permissible range for the selected gear. The gear number shown in the instrument panel will change after each gear shift. Gear shift indicator (generic illustration) Deactivating the paddles Related information • • Gear selector positions (p. 367) Manually shifting gears Manually Steering wheel paddles* (p. 370) In shift mode M, the paddles are automatically activated. – Shifting To shift one gear: 370 Pull both paddles toward the steering wheel and hold them until the indicator changes from M and number of the current gear in the instrument panel changes to "D". * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. STARTING AND DRIVING Automatically Low Speed Control (LSC) Select the Off Road drive mode to activate LSC. If the paddles are not used for a period of time, they will deactivate automatically. The number of the current gear in the instrument panel changes to "D". Low Speed Control (LSC) helps make off-road driving easier on slippery surfaces when towing a trailer on grass, etc. This feature is part of the Off Road drive mode. Select any other drive mode to turn it off. The paddles will remain active if engine braking is currently being used. When driving at low speeds, LSC prioritizes low gears and all wheel drive to help avoid wheel spin and to improve the vehicle's tractive force. The accelerator pedal and engine react differently to make low-speed driving easier. Related information • • Gear selector positions (p. 367) Gear shift indicator (p. 370) It is activated along with Hill Descent Control (HDC), which increases engine braking to help keep vehicle speed low and smooth, even driving down steep hills. Activating LSC This function can be activated in different ways, depending on how the vehicle is equipped. NOTE When LSC with HDC is activated by the Off Road drive mode, the feel of the accelerator pedal and engine response will change. The function is deactivated when driving at higher speeds and must be reactivated at lower speeds if so desired. Related information • • • Brake functions (p. 332) Hill Descent Control (HDC) (p. 334) Drive modes* (p. 359) Using the driving mode control* * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 371 STARTING AND DRIVING All Wheel Drive (AWD)11 Suspension and leveling control* Your Volvo can be equipped with All Wheel Drive, which means that power is distributed automatically between the front and rear wheels. The leveling control system adjusts the suspension and shock absorbers automatically to help provide good comfort and control while driving. Leveling can also be controlled manually to make loading or getting in and out of the vehicle easier. Under normal driving conditions, most of the engine's power is directed to the front wheels. However, if there is any tendency for the front wheels to spin, an electronically controlled coupling distributes power to the wheels that have the best traction. AWD reacts differently, depending on the drive mode* selected. Related information • • Drive modes* (p. 359) Low Speed Control (LSC) (p. 371) Pneumatic suspension and shock absorbers This system is linked to the selected drive mode and is adapted to the vehicle's speed. The pneumatic suspension reduces the vehicle's ground clearance at higher speeds to reduce wind resistance and increase stability. The shock absorbers are normally set to provide the best possible comfort and are adjusted continuously according to the road surface, acceleration, braking and cornering. Select Settings Vehicle Easy Entry/Exit Control via the center display's Top view to lower the vehicle when getting in or out. When the vehicle is parked and the engine is turned off, the level is lowered (if a side door is opened, the level adjustment will stop). When the engine is started and the vehicle begins to move, the level will be raised to the height set by the selected drive mode. Turning off suspension and leveling control In certain situations, this function has to be turned off, for example when lifting the vehicle on a jack or garage hoist. 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. 2. Tap My Car A message will be displayed in the instrument panel when the suspension level is being adjusted. 3. Select Disable Suspension & Leveling Control. The level cannot be adjusted if one of the side doors or the hood is open. Three different levels of suspension control can be selected from the center display: Suspension leveling settings 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. 2. Tap My Car 3. Under Suspension Control, select Comfort, Normal or Dynamic. Changing suspension control Easy entry The vehicle can be lowered to entering and exiting easier. 11 372 Suspension . Drive Mode. Standard equipment on certain models. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. STARTING AND DRIVING Loading mode Use the buttons in the cargo compartment to raise or lower the vehicle to make loading or unloading easier or when attaching a trailer. Parking the vehicle When parking, be sure that there is adequate space above and below the vehicle since its ground clearance may vary, e.g., depending on the ambient temperature, how the vehicle is loaded, if loading mode is being used or the drive mode selected after the engine is started. The level may also be adjusted for a certain time after the vehicle has been parked to compensate for possible height adjustments due to temperature changes in the pneumatic suspension when the vehicle has cooled. Transport When transporting the vehicle on a ferry, train or a tow truck, it may only be secured (lashed) around the tires, not using any other chassis components. Changes in the pneumatic suspension may occur during transport that could negatively affect the lashing and result in damage. Related information • • • Drive modes* (p. 359) Driving with a trailer (p. 351) Loading (p. 207) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 373 INFOTAINMENT INFOTAINMENT The infotainment system The infotainment system consists of a radio, media player and has the capacity to communicate with a Bluetooth-connected cell phone. It is also possible to connect to the Internet to e.g., stream audio content via apps. The system's functions can be controlled from the right-side steering wheel keypad, the center display or by using voice commands. Infotainment overview Related information • • • • • • • Media player (p. 393) Radio (p. 377) Phone (p. 387) Internet connected vehicle (p. 401) Apps (applications) (p. 403) Ignition modes (p. 355) Symbols in the center display status bar (p. 44) • • Voice control (p. 120) • System updates (p. 490) Infotainment system license information (p. 408) Sound settings The infotainment system is precalibrated for optimal sound reproduction but these settings can be changed to suit your personal preferences. The system's volume is normally adjusted using the right-side steering wheel keypad or the volume control below the center display. Optimal sound reproduction settings The audio system is precalibrated for optimal sound reproduction using digital signal processing. This calibration takes into account the speakers, amplifier, cabin acoustics, listener position, etc., for each combination of vehicle and infotainment system. Dynamic calibration is also available, which monitors the setting of the volume control, radio reception and the vehicle's speed. Specific sound settings are described in the respective articles/sections of this owner's information. System updates The infotainment system is constantly being developed and improved. For optimal functionality, updates can be downloaded. See the article "System updates" and the support site support.volvocars.com. 1 Certain 376 models only. To change a setting, pull down the center display's Top view and tap Settings Sound. Active noise suppression1 The vehicle can be equipped with an active noise suppression function that reduces engine noise in the passenger compartment by utilizing the infotainment system. The microphone(s) in the INFOTAINMENT ceiling liner react to engine noise and the infotainment system produces signals (white noise) to counteract this. Radio Radio settings Your vehicle's radio offers AM and FM with HD Radio ™ Technology and SiriusXM® Satellite radio*. The following information lists the settings that can be made for the various wavebands. The radio can be controlled using the right-side steering wheel keypad, the center display or by using voice commands. Related information Microphone in the ceiling liner. The number and position vary, depending on the vehicle NOTE Avoid covering or obstructing the noise suppression speakers because doing so could result in a rumbling noise. Related information • • • Media sound settings (p. 398) Voice control settings (p. 125) Phone settings (p. 392) • Changing and searching for radio stations (p. 378) • • • • Radio settings (p. 377) SiriusXM® Satellite radio* (p. 383) HD Radio™reception (p. 380) Pull down the center display's Top view and select Settings Media for the desired waveband. Tap to activate/deactivate. AM/FM • Show Radio Text: displays information about program content, artists, etc. • Freeze Program Service Name: select to stop excessive scrolling to freeze after 20 seconds. • AM HD Radio: Enables HD Radio ™ Technology for AM audio quality comparable to analogue FM. • FM HD Radio: - Enables HD Radio ™ Technology for audio comparable to CD quality. See the article "HD Radio" for detailed information. Changing and searching for radio stations (p. 378) SiriusXM® Satellite radio With SiriusXM® Satellite radio activated, pull down the center display's Top view and tap SiriusXM Settings to display a list of available alternatives. See the article "SiriusXM Satellite radio settings" for detailed information. Related information • • SiriusXM® Satellite radio* settings (p. 385) SiriusXM® Satellite radio* (p. 383) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 377 INFOTAINMENT • • Radio (p. 377) RBDS radio HD Radio™reception (p. 380) RBDS radio RBDS (Radio Data Broadcast System) enables certain functionality2, such as: • Searches for program types or new broadcasts • Text information about currently broadcast programs For example, if news is broadcast, the currently playing sound source will be interrupted so that the news can be heard. The infotainment system will return to the previous sound source when the news broadcast has been completed. butTo cancel the announcement, press the ton on the right-side steering wheel keypad or tap Cancel on the center display. This function can be activated/deactivated in the center display's Settings menu. Related information • • Radio (p. 377) Radio settings (p. 377) Changing and searching for radio stations The radio automatically compiles a list of the strongest stations that it is currently receiving. Turning the radio on 1. Open the app (e.g., FM, radio favorites) from the center display's App view. 2. Select a station. Changing a list in a waveband 1. Tap Library. 2. Sect from Stations, Favorites or Genres. 3. Tap the desired station in the list. Favorites: only plays stations from the list of favorites (see "Favorites" below). Genres: only plays stations broadcasting the selected genre or program type, e.g., pop, classical, etc. Changing stations in a selected list – Tap < > under the center display or on the right-side steering wheel keypad. > Move step-by-step through the selected list. The center display can also be used to change stations. 2 378 Certain stations only. INFOTAINMENT Favorites Changing wavebands If a favorite station from a list is currently available, the radio will automatically tune to that station. See "Changing a list in a waveband" above for information about selecting favorites on a waveband. See "Radio favorites" below for information about selecting a station among all of your favorites. – 2. . Tap > The search view with a keyboard will open. 3. Enter a search word(s). > The search will start and change as characters are entered and the search results will be categorized. Searching for a station manually Searching manually makes it possible to find and tune to stations that are not on the automatically compiled list of the strongest stations in the area. Tap to add or remove a station for the waveband's list of favorites or Radio favorites. – Radio favorites Radio favorites shows all of the favorite stations that have been saved for e.g., AM, FM. 1. Open the Radio favorites app in App view. 2. Tap the desired station to listen. When a station is removed, it will also be removed from the respective waveband's list of favorites. Tap Manual tuning, drag the control or tap < > to go to the desired frequency. Related information • • – SiriusXM® Satellite radio* (p. 383) HD Radio™reception (p. 380) Tap an app, e.g., FM in App view or open the app menu from the right-side steering wheel keypad to select. Searching for a radio station Searching is done differently, depending on the waveband selected. • • • AM: stations and frequencies. 1. Tap Library. FM: stations, genres and frequencies. SiriusXM®: program types, genres, stations. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 379 INFOTAINMENT HD Radio™reception HD Radio is a brand name registered by the iBiquity digital corporation3. They are the developer of a broadcasting technology called IBOC or In Band On Channel, which refers to the method of transmitting a digital radio broadcast signal centered on the same frequency as the AM or FM station's present frequency. Introduction Display when the radio is receiving an HD Radio broadcast (generic illustration) NOTE HD Radio volume may fade in and out at times due to coverage limitations. 3 380 The IBOC system is referred to as a "hybrid" since it is both analogue and digital. During hybrid operation, receivers still continue to receive the analogue (non-digital) signal. HD Radio receivers incorporate both modes of reception, where the receiver will automatically switch to the analogue signal if the digital signal cannot be decoded or is lost by the receiver. When you have tuned to an HD Radio station, the symbol will appear in the infotainment system display. The symbol will be displayed in different colors: be displayed immediately. Album art is synched with the artist that you are currently listening to. iTunes tagging This feature is common to both HD Radio and SiriusXM® Satellite radio*. See the section "iTunes tagging" in the article "SiriusXM satellite radio settings" for more detailed information. Ball game mode • Grayed-out symbol: NoHD Radio broadcast reception • White symbol: the radio is actively receiving an HD broadcast • This feature means that a main FM station (HD1) will broadcast live events, where the content of the programming is more important than sound quality, in analog mode only to help prevent the delay between analog and digital broadcasting. The HD Radio symbol will be white during live broadcasts and "Live" will be displayed next to the symbol. Orange symbol: the radio is receiving an HD broadcast with digital sound Benefits of digital broadcasting More information about HD Radio and IBOC can be found on Ibiquity's website, www.hdradio.com and www.ibiquity.com. • Better sound (FM sounds near CD quality and AM as analogue FM). • Some FM frequencies offer a greater number of listening choices through “multicasting” (consisting of a frequency's main channel and any sub-channels that may also be available on that particular frequency.) • When receiving a digital signal there is no multipath disturbance or hisses/pops/crackling due to outside influences. Artist Experience™ A radio station's logo and album art can be displayed. If a station opts to provide this information, it is broadcast once every 12 minutes, which means that there may be a delay before the logo/album art appear on the screen. The radio can store 100 station logos so the next time the radio is tuned to the same station, the logo will HD Radio (TM) technology is manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio(TM) and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INFOTAINMENT How HD Radio ™ Technology broadcasting works HD Radio works similarly to conventional radio and broadcasts of this type are available in many areas of the United States. However, there are a few key differences: • Instead of transmitting one analogue signal, stations send out a bundled signal – both analogue and digital. • An HD Radio receiver can receive both digital and analogue broadcasts. Depending on the terrain and location of the vehicle (which will influence the signal strength), the receiver will determine which signal to receive. Switching HD Radio on and off The factory setting for HD Radio is off. Switching HD on or off When listening to an HD Radio station and driving through areas with weak HD signals (fringe areas), you may experience that the radio repeatedly switches between analogue/digital and digital/analogue reception. If this happens, it may be desirable to switch HD off. 1. Be sure the infotainment system is switched on and in AM or FM mode. 2. To access the settings menu from the center display's Home view, pull down Top view and tap AM/FM radio. Switching HD Radio on and off (p. 381) HD Radio sub-channels (p. 382) HD Radio limitations (p. 382) Radio (p. 377) Changing and searching for radio stations (p. 378) • • • HD Radio™reception (p. 380) HD Radio sub-channels (p. 382) SiriusXM® Satellite radio* settings (p. 385) To do so: Related information • • • • • Related information Go to Adjust settings for media. 3. Tap the AM HD Radio or FM HD Radio box to select/deselect this function. This will disable the radio's capability to receive digital broadcasts but it will continue to function as a conventional (analogue) AM/FM receiver. Please note that when HD is switched off, it will not be possible to tune to sub-channels (see the article "HD Radio subchannels" for a more detailed explanation of sub-channels). Please note that this will only switch HD Radio on or off (selecting or deselecting the function) only affects the selected waveband. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 381 INFOTAINMENT HD Radio sub-channels In many cases, a main HD Radio station (FM wavebands only) will also have sub-channels offering additional types of programming or music. If you tap a sub-channel favorite, it may take up to 6 seconds before the channel becomes audible. If you tap a station while you are out of digital range of the transmitter, No reception will be displayed. Sub-channels Related information • • • HD Radio limitations Limitations • Main channel vs. sub-channels (FM only): The main channel is the only channel that can receive in hybrid mode (both digital and analogue). If a frequency has sub-channels, they are broadcast in digital mode only. The main FM channel will be displayed as, for example, "WRIF-FM HD1". The sub-FM channels will be displayed as"WRIF-FM HD2", "WRIF-FM HD3", etc. • Reception coverage area: Due to current IBOC transmitter power limitations, the reception coverage area in digital mode is somewhat more limited than the station's analogue coverage area. Please be aware that as with any radio broadcast technology, terrain, time of day, foliage level and building location can have positive or negative effects on radio reception. • Analogue to digital/digital to analogue blending: Analogue to digital blending will occur as the signal strength reaches a preset threshold in the receiver. This will be noticeable in fringe areas (areas with weak reception) and is normal. HD Radio™reception (p. 380) Switching HD Radio on and off (p. 381) Changing and searching for radio stations (p. 378) Example of an HD Radio station with sub-channels If any sub-channels are available, they will listed below the main channel on the screen. In this example, "WRIF-FM HD2" is a sub-channel. Selecting sub-channels To listen to a station's sub-channel(s), tap the station on the screen or press the forward/back arrow keys on the right-side steering wheel keypad or below the screen. Sub-channels can also be stored as favorites, see the article "Changing and searching for radio stations". 382 INFOTAINMENT NOTE There may be a noticeable difference in sound quality when a change from analogue to digital or digital to analogue occurs, such as: • • Volume increase or decrease • Time alignment (Digital program material in extreme cases can be as much as 8 seconds behind the analogue). This will noticeable as a "stuttering" effect. Equalizer settings, i.e., Bass/ Midrange/ Treble cut or boost The above items are dependant on the broadcaster's equipment settings and do not indicate a fault in the vehicle's radio receiver or antenna systems. SiriusXM® Satellite radio* The SiriusXM® Satellite system broadcasts from of a number of high elevation satellites in geosynchronous orbit. Listening to satellite radio The digital signals from the satellites are line-ofsight, which means that physical obstructions such as bridges, tunnels, etc, may temporarily interfere with signal reception. Avoid any obstructions, such as metallic objects transported on roof racks or in a ski box, or other antennas that may impede signals from the SiriusXM® satellites. Selecting SiriusXM® Satellite radio mode 1. From the center display's Home view, swipe from right to left to come to App view. Related information • • HD Radio sub-channels (p. 382) HD Radio™reception (p. 380) 2. Tap the SiriusXM® Satellite radio icon. Home view with SiriusXM® Satellite radio activated If there is no subscription activated, tap channel 1, where you will be prompted on the screen to phone SiriusXM®. If a cell phone is paired and connected to the vehicle, you can also subscribe by: 1. From Home view, pull down the Settings menu. 2. Open the settings menu for SiriusXM® Satellite radio. 3. Tap Unsubscribed Services 4. Tap the phone number to call SiriusXM®, who will activate the subscription of your choice. This may take several minutes. When the subscription has been activated, tap the SiriusXM® Satellite radio icon to start the * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 383 INFOTAINMENT function and display the channel list included in your subscription. Using SiriusXM® Satellite radio radio* Related information SiriusXM® Satellite radio offers several features for finding and listening to music, news, sporting events, etc. being broadcast on satellite radio stations. • Using SiriusXM® Satellite radio radio* (p. 384) SiriusXM® Satellite radio functions Search Tap the magnifying glass to display a screen where you can enter text using the center display's keyboard or by writing in the free-text field to search for e.g., a station number, an artist, song title, etc. Channels Tap to display a complete list of the channels included in your subscription. Tap a channel name to listen. If a subscription to a channel has expired, its name will be grayed-out on the screen. For quick access to a channel that you often listen to, tap the star to the right of the channel's name to add it to the list of favorites. Favorites Tap to display the channels that you have added to this list. Tap a channel name to listen. Categories/Genres With SiriusXM® Satellite radio activated, tap Library to display a screen offering the following functions: • • • • Search (the magnifying glass icon) Channels Favorites Categories If you have used this view previously, you will be returned to the most recently used one. 384 Tap to display the categories available. Tap a category or genre name to display the channels that it contains and then tap a channel to listen. If an alert has been set (see the section "Alerts" below) and an alert is active for an artist, song or team, virtual categories will also be temporary created and displayed. The channels currently broadcasting the song, artist or broadcasting a program with the selected team will be listed in a virtual category. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INFOTAINMENT EPG (Electronic Program Guide) iTunes tagging SiriusXM® Satellite radio* settings On the center display's Home screen, tap EPG for information about e.g., when a program is being broadcast and its name, description, artist, etc. If no information is currently available, No information will be displayed. From the center display's Top view, tapSiriusXM Settings. Tap theiTunes Tagging menu. Tap the iTunes Tagging box to activate/deactivate this function and tap Close to return to Home view. Tap List Of Tags to display a list of all tagged songs. There are numerous settings that can be made to enhance your SiriusXM® Satellite radio listening experience. Alerts If this feature has been selected under SiriusXM Settings, the Alerts button will be displayed on the Home screen. To add e.g., an artist's name, song title or a sports team to the list of alerts: 1. Tune to any channel that is broadcasting a song, game, etc., of your choice. 2. Press the Alerts button. 3. A pop-up window will be displayed showing a list of alerts (nothing will be displayed if the selected channel does not support the alert function). 4. Select one of the alternatives in list (only one can be selected at a time). 5. The song/artist/team will now be added to the list of alerts. Favorite sports teams can also be added to the list using the "Game Alert" setting as described in the article "SiriusXM satellite radio settings." > When your choice is being broadcast on a channel, you will be informed by a pop-up. If the function is activated, the iTunes tag button will be displayed in Home view. If a song is played that you would like to buy in the iTunes store, tap this button while the song is playing to tag it. If a song with iTunes Tagging information is available, the button will be selectable. Tap the button to tag the song. If you would like to buy a tagged song via iTunes, Tap the iTunes tag button. Settings To access the settings menu from the center display's Home view, pull down Top view and tap SiriusXM Settings. The following alternatives will be displayed: To buy a song in iTunes, begin by connecting an iPhone/iPod/iPad to the USB socket in the tunnel console. The iTunes tagging list will automatically be transferred to the device and removed from the list in the vehicle. If the device is connected when a song is tagged, the data will automatically be saved in the device. To purchase the song, consult the iTunes support page. Related information • • • • SiriusXM® Satellite radio* (p. 383) Using the center display keyboard (p. 32) SiriusXM® Satellite radio* settings (p. 385) Connecting a device via the AUX/USB socket (p. 393) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 385 INFOTAINMENT Traffic Jump Tap to display a list of cities from which you can choose to get traffic/weather information (or Traffic jump off to deactivate the feature). Tap to select a city (JUMP will be displayed on the Home screen next to Library). Tap Back to return to the list of settings or Close to return to the Home screen. From the Home screen, tap JUMP to activate the function. When traffic/weather information is available from the selected city, the radio will automatically tune to the channel providing the information. When the information/announcement is finished, the radio will automatically return to the channel that you were previously listening to. During an announcement, tap JUMP to interrupt the message and return to the station that you were currently listening to. Alert notifications Tap the box to activate/deactivate. When activated, you will be notified if a song, artist, etc. that you have selected is playing. You will be asked if you want to listen. Alert notifications sound Opt to receive an audible alert when one of your selected choices is being played. iTunes tagging Tap to display a menu with the options: iTunes Tagging and List Of Tags. With this feature 386 activated, songs can be tagged for later purchase from the iTunes store. Game Alerts Tap to display a list of sports. Tap a sport to display a list of teams and tap a box on the right side of the screen to select a team as a favorite. An alert will then be provided when information about the team is being broadcast. Skipped categories Tap to display a list of categories. Tap a category to skip (hide) it. It will not be displayed in the list of categories. Related information • Using SiriusXM® Satellite radio radio* (p. 384) • SiriusXM® Satellite radio* (p. 383) Tap Confirm below the list to return to the list of sports. Tap Back to return to the list of settings or Close to return to the main screen. Unsubscribed services If you have a SiriusXM® Satellite radio subscription, any channels not included in the subscription will be listed here. Call SiriusXM™ to subscribe. The phone number will be shown on the screen. If a cell phone is paired and connected to the vehicle, tap the phone number to make the call. Skipped stations Tap to display a list of channels that you would like to skip (hide). Hide channels from the channel list by tapping the boxes to the right of the screen. Skipped (hidden) channels will not be shown in the channel list. However, a channel previously selected as a favorite will still be displayed in the list of favorites, even it has been added to the skip list. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INFOTAINMENT Phone Overview Pairing a cell phone A Bluetooth®-enabled cell phone or other device can be paired and wirelessly connected to the infotainment system. A Bluetooth-enabled cell phone can be paired and connected to the vehicle's integrated handsfree system. The infotainment system offers hands-free functionality for remote-controlling a number of a cell phone's features. The phone's integrated controls can also be used, even when it is connected to the vehicle. When the phone has been paired and connected to the infotainment system, it can be used to make or receive calls, send or receive text messages, to stream music, etc., or as an Internet connection. Microphone Cell phone The phone is controlled from the center display but the App menu (accessed using the right-side steering wheel keypad) and voice commands can also be used to control certain functions. Center display Keypad for controlling phone functions shown in the center display and voice commands Instrument panel Related information • • • • • • Connecting/disconnecting a cell phone (p. 389) Handling phone calls (p. 390) Handling text messages (p. 391) Pairing a cell phone (p. 387) Phone settings (p. 392) Text message settings (p. 392) When a cell phone or other device is connected, audio can be streamed to the infotainment system. Toggle between the devices by pressing the TEL and MEDIA buttons to access the respective sources' functions. Before a Bluetooth device can be used with the infotainment system, it has to be paired ("registered"). This procedure only needs to be done once for each device (a maximum of 20 Bluetooth devices can be paired to the system). Once a device has been paired and its Bluetooth function is acti- 387 INFOTAINMENT vated, it can then be selected for use (wirelessly connected) to the vehicle's infotainment system. Two Bluetooth devices can be connected at the same time. However, if two cell phones are connected, only the most recently connected one can be used as a phone. The other one can be used to e.g., to stream audio or video. To change what the phone will be used for, see the article "Bluetooth settings." A paired and connected cell phone can also be used to connect the vehicle to the Internet. To do so, its tethering/personal hotspot function must be activated. There are two ways of pairing a Bluetooth device to the infotainment system: • Searching for the phone (or other device) from the vehicle • Searching for the vehicle from the phone (or other device) The following instructions assume that a cell phone is to be paired to the infotainment system but the procedure is the same for any Bluetooth device. Alternative 1: searching for the phone from the vehicle 1. 388 Make the phone discoverable/visible using its Bluetooth function. Refer to the phone's user guide if necessary. 2. Open the Phone view on the center display. > • If no phones have been paired to the vehicle, tap Add phone. • If a list of phones is displayed, tap Change and tap Add phone in the pop-up window. 3. Tap the name of the phone to be connected. 4. Check that the code displayed in the vehicle is the same as the one in the phone. Confirm in both places. 5. 6. For the phone selected, accept or cancel the alternatives for the phone book (list of contacts), text messages, etc. Full functionality may not be available in all cell phones. To connect the vehicle to the Internet via the phone's Bluetooth function, activate the phone's function for tethering/personal hotspot, etc. Alternative 2: searching for the vehicle from the phone 1. Open the center display's Phone view. • If no phones have been paired to the vehicle, tap Add phone Make vehicle discoverable. • If a phone has previously been paired to the vehicle, tap Change and tap Add phone Make vehicle discoverable in the pop-up window. 2. Activate the phone's Bluetooth function. 3. Search in the phone for Bluetooth devices. > A list of Bluetooth devices will be displayed. 4. Select the vehicle's name in the list. 5. Check that the code displayed in the phone is the same as the one in the vehicle. Confirm in both places. 6. For the phone selected, accept or cancel the alternatives for the phone book (list of contacts), text messages, etc. Full functionality may not be available in all cell phones. 7. To connect the vehicle to the Internet via the phone's Bluetooth function, activate the phone's function for tethering/personal hotspot, etc. NOTE If your cell phone's operating system is updated, this may break the connection between the phone and the vehicle. If this happens, delete the phone from the list of paired phones and repeat the pairing procedure described in this article. Compatible cell phones Many of the cell phones available today have Bluetooth functionality but not all of them are fully compatible with the vehicle. Go to INFOTAINMENT www.volvocars.com for a list of compatible phones or contact your Volvo retailer. Connecting/disconnecting a cell phone Disconnecting a phone Related information Once a cell phone or other Bluetooth device has been paired to the infotainment system, it can be connected, disconnected or removed from the list of available devices. If a phone is carried out of range of the vehicle, it will automatically be disconnected. • Connecting/disconnecting a cell phone (p. 389) • • • • Handling phone calls (p. 390) Handling text messages (p. 391) Phone settings (p. 392) Connecting automatically 1. Bluetooth settings (p. 404) 2. Before switching on the vehicle's ignition, be sure that the phone's Bluetooth and personal hotspot (tethering) functions are activated. Switch on the ignition. > The phone (or other device) will be connected to the system and can be used wirelessly. Connecting manually 1. 2. 3. Be sure that the phone's Bluetooth and personal hotspot (tethering) functions are activated. In the center display, open Phone view and tap Change phone. > A list of available Bluetooth devices (ones that have already been paired to the infotainment system) will be displayed. Tap the name of the phone or other device to be connected. > The phone (or other device) will be connected. – Deactivate the phone's Bluetooth function. If a call in progress when this is done, the call will be transferred from the vehicle's speakers/microphone to the cell phone. Changing phones 1. In the center display, open Phone view. 2. Tap Change . > A list of available Bluetooth devices (ones that have already been paired to the infotainment system) will be displayed. 3. Tap the name of the phone (or other device) to be connected. Removing a phone (or other device) from the list 1. In the center display, open Phone view. 2. Tap Settings Communication Bluetooth. > A list of available Bluetooth devices (ones that have already been paired to the infotainment system) will be displayed. 3. Tap the name of the phone to be deleted from the list. 389 INFOTAINMENT 4. Tap Remove device and confirm. > The phone or other device is no longer paired to the vehicle. Before this device can be used again, the pairing procedure will have to be repeated. Handling phone calls 3. Tap Call or Calls can be made to one or more parties. 4. Tap End call to end a phone call. Calls can also be made from the list of recent calls using the App menu, which can be opened using the right-side steering wheel keypad's symbol. Related information • . Pairing a cell phone (p. 387) Making multiple calls While a call is in progress: 1. Tap Add call. 2. Select from the list of recent calls or from the phone book. 3. Tap a line in the list of recent calls or call a contact in the phone book. 4. Tap Swap call to toggle between calls. 5. Tap End call to end a phone call. to Group (conference) calls While multiple calls are in progress: Making calls 390 1. In the center display, open Phone view. 2. Initiate a call from: recently made calls, the phone book (list of contacts) or enter a number. Search for or scroll to a contact in the phone book. Tap in the phone book to add a contact to your list of Favorites. 1. Tap Join calls to merge ongoing calls. 2. Tap End call to end a phone call. Incoming calls Information about incoming calls is displayed in the instrument panel and the center display. Handle the calls using the right-side steering wheel keypad or the center display. 1. Tap Answer/Decline. INFOTAINMENT 2. Tap End call to end a phone call. Incoming calls while another call is in progress 1. Tap Answer/Decline. 2. Tap End call to end a phone call. Privacy While a call is in progress: – Tap Privacy. > The vehicle's integrated microphone will be turned off. • Switch to mobile phone: the hands-free function will be disconnected and the call will continue in the cell phone. • Driver only: the microphone in the ceiling liner on the passenger's side will be muted and the call will continue using vehicle's the hands-free function on the driver's side. Related information • • • • • Phone (p. 387) Voice control for cell phones (p. 121) Using the center display (p. 46) Handling text messages Text messages can be received and sent from a connected cell phone. Text message functionality has to be activated in certain cell phones and not all phones offer full compatibility/functionality. Go to support.volvocars.com for additional information. Reading text messages in the center display 1. From App view, tap Messages to open. 2. Tap the name of the contact who sent the message. 3. Tap Read out to have the message read aloud or tap the message to be displayed. Reading new text messages in the instrument panel Text messages are only displayed in the instrument panel if this has been selected. See the article "Text message settings" for more information. – Press the "down" arrow in the right-side steering wheel keypad to display the message. To have the message read aloud, select Read out using the keypad. Using the center display keyboard (p. 32) Phone settings (p. 392) 391 INFOTAINMENT Sending text messages Phone settings Text message settings The following settings can be made for a paired and connected cell phone. The following settings can be made for text messages received through a paired and connected cell phone. Cell phones Text message settings – 1. From App view, tap Messages to open. Pull down the center display's Top view and tap Settings Communication Phone and choose among the following settings: 2. • To reply to a message: tap the name of the contact who sent the message and then tap Answer. • Ringtones: select a ring tone (tones from • To create a new message: tap Create new +. Select the contact who will receive the message or enter a phone number. 3. Write the message. 4. Tap Send. the cell phone or the vehicle can be used). Not all cell phones are fully compatible and it may not be possible to use their ring tones in the vehicle. Go to www.volvocars.com for additional information. Related information • 392 Text message settings (p. 392) text messages in the center display's status bar. • Notification in driver display: shows text messages in the instrument panel. With this alternative active, incoming messages can be handled from the right-side steering wheel keypad. teria for the phone book (list of contacts). To show call notifications in the head-up display*, see the article "Head-up display." Related information • • • • • Text message settings (p. 392) Bluetooth settings (p. 404) Phone (p. 387) Handling phone calls (p. 390) Pull down the center display's Top view and tap Settings Communication Text Messages and choose among the following settings: • Notification in center display: shows • Sort order for contacts: select sort cri- Message notification See the article "Text message settings" for a list of possible settings. – • Text message tone: select an audible signal for incoming text messages. Related information • • • Connecting/disconnecting a cell phone (p. 389) Pairing a cell phone (p. 387) Handling text messages (p. 391) Head-up display (HUD)* (p. 117) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INFOTAINMENT Connecting a Bluetooth® device Bluetooth®-enabled devices can be paired and connected to the infotainment system to stream media and in some cases connect to the Internet. Many cell phones and other devices currently on the market offer wireless Bluetooth® technology. Consult your Volvo retailer or go to support.volvocars.com for any questions regarding a device's compatibility with the vehicle's infotainment system. Connecting a device via the AUX/USB socket External audio sources such as an iPod® or mp3 player can be connected to the infotainment system via the AUX and USB sockets in the tunnel console. Video can also be viewed from devices connected to the USB socket. If the vehicle is connected to the Internet, it may also be possible to listen to web radio, audio books and to use various music services through apps. The procedure for pairing and connecting a Bluetooth®-enabled device is the same as for a cell phone. See the articles "Pairing a cell phone" and "Connecting/disconnecting a cell phone" for details. Related information • • Pairing a cell phone (p. 387) Media player The media player can play audio from a CD*, from external media devices connected to the USB/AUX sockets or it can stream audio from an external device connected to the infotainment system through a Bluetooth connection. AUX/USB sockets in the tunnel console Connecting/disconnecting a cell phone (p. 389) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 393 INFOTAINMENT • • • Apps (applications) (p. 403) CD (media) player* CD (media) player* (p. 394) The CD (media) player can play commercially purchased discs as well as ones that you have burned yourself. See the article "Media player technical data" for information about compatible file formats. Playing media through the AUX/USB sockets (p. 397) Location of the CD player in the tunnel console Disc slot The media player is controlled from the center display but certain functions can also be controlled from the right-side steering wheel keypad or by using voice commands. Eject button Related information • Media player technical data (p. 400) Related information • • • 394 Playing media (p. 395) Voice control for radio and media (p. 122) Radio (p. 377) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INFOTAINMENT Playing media 2. The media player can controlled from the rightside steering wheel keypad, the center display or by using voice commands. Open the CD app in the center display's App view. 3. Select a track. > Playback will begin. 3. Start playback from the connected device. 4. Open the Bluetooth app in the center display's App view. > Playback will begin. The radio is also controlled from the media player. See the articles relating to the radio. USB flash drive Internet media 1. Insert the flash drive in the USB socket. 1. Connect the vehicle to the Internet. Starting a media source 2. Open the USB app in the center display's App view. 2. 3. Select a track. > Playback will begin. Open the app in the center display's App view. > Playback will begin. Mp3 player and iPod® Video 1. Connect the device. 2. Open the USB app in the center display's App view. 3. Tap the title of the video content to be played. > Playback will begin. NOTE Use the iPod app ( not the USB app) to start playback. When an iPod is the media source, the infotainment system will use a menu structure similar to the iPod's own menu structure. 1. Connect the device. 2. Start playback in the connected device. 3. Open the iPod, USB, AUX) app in the center display's App view. > Playback will begin. Controlling and changing media The media player can be controlled using voice commands, the right-side steering wheel keypad or the center display. Bluetooth-connected device CD 1. Insert a CD. 1. Connect the device. 2. Activate Bluetooth in the device. 395 INFOTAINMENT Fast forward/reverse, move within a track: press the time axis on the center display and drag from side to side, press and hold the < > buttons under the center display or use the keypad. Change media source: Tap a media source under Recents, tap the desired app in the center display's App view or use the keypad. Library: tap to play a track from the library. Shuffle: tap to play tracks in random order. Similar: tap to use Gracenote to search for similar music on the USB device and create a playlist based on the results. The playlist can contain up to 50 tracks. Change device: tap to toggle between USB devices if more than one is connected. Video settings Volume: use the buttons on the keypad or turn the control under the center display to raise or lower the volume. 396 2. Go to vod.divx.com for additional information and to complete the registration process. Related information • • • • • • • • • • • CD (media) player* (p. 394) Media player technical data (p. 400) Media player (p. 393) Voice control for radio and media (p. 122) Apps (applications) (p. 403) Connecting a Bluetooth® device (p. 393) Connecting a device via the AUX/USB socket (p. 393) Gracenote (p. 399) Connecting to the Internet (p. 402) Media searches (p. 397) Video (p. 399) The following can be adjusted with the video player in full screen or by opening the center display's Top view and tapping Settings Video: Primary Audio Default Language, Subtitle and Primary Subtitle Default Language. Play DivX® Play/pause: tap the track's image, press the symbol on the keypad or press the button under the center display. This DivX device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) movies. Change tracks: tap the desired track on the center display, press the < > buttons under the center display or use the keypad. 1. Open the center display's Top view and tap Settings Video DivX® VOD to get a registration code. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INFOTAINMENT Media searches Searches can be made for information such as artists, composers, song titles, albums, video, audio books, playlists and podcasts (digital media on the Internet). 3. Tap Search. > The infotainment system will search through all connected devices and any results will be displayed by category. Related information • • • Media player (p. 393) Playing media (p. 395) Using the center display keyboard (p. 32) Playing media through the AUX/USB sockets An external media device, such as an iPod or an mp-3 player can be connected to the infotainment system. A device with rechargeable batteries can be recharged when it is connected to the USB socket (if the ignition is on or the engine is running). To simplify the use of a USB flash drive, it is advisable to only store files with compatible file formats on it. It will take considerably longer for the system to index the files on the drive if it contains anything other than compatible files. In addition to audio, the vehicle's media player also supports video playback when the external device is connected to the USB socket. Certain mp-3 players have proprietary file formats that are not supported by the infotainment system. Related information • 1. Tap . > The center display's Search view opens and the keyboard will be displayed. 2. Enter a search word/phrase. Connecting a device via the AUX/USB socket (p. 393) 397 INFOTAINMENT Streaming media through a Bluetooth connection The media player is equipped with Bluetooth® for streaming audio files from external Bluetooth®-enabled devices. Related information • • • • • • Connecting a Bluetooth® device (p. 393) Playing media (p. 395) Voice control for radio and media (p. 122) Media player (p. 393) Ignition modes (p. 355) Media player technical data (p. 400) Media sound settings increasing media volume in relation to the vehicle's speed. This can be set to one of several different levels. Sound settings for the media player can be personalized. 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. 2. Tap Sound and select among the following: Related information • • Playing media (p. 395) Sound settings (p. 376) • Sound Experience*: this feature offers several ways of adapting media sound settings to replicate e.g., a concert hall or a recording studio. These settings override any of the ones below that may have been adjusted. • Tone: personal settings for bass, treble, equalizer, etc. • Balance: adjust the front/rear and left/right sound settings in the passenger compartment. System volumes for media Open the center display's Top view and tap Settings Sound System Volumes: • AUX: an external device (e.g., an mp3 player, an iPod, etc.) connected to the AUX socket may have a different volume level than the one set for the infotainment system (e.g., for the radio). This setting enables you to adjust the AUX socket's volume. Please note that if this volume is set too high, sound quality may be affected. • Speed/Volume Compensation: the info- tainment system will compensate for disrupting noises in the passenger compartment by 398 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. INFOTAINMENT Gracenote Related information Gracenote identifies artists, albums, tracks and any associated images that can be displayed during playback. Gracenote MusicID® is a standard for music recognition. Activating/deactivating Gracenote When activated, Gracenote data will replace original data. 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. 2. Tap Media 3. Activate/deactivate Gracenote by tapping the Gracenote® box. 4. Select among the following Gracenote alternatives: Gracenote®. • Infotainment system license information (p. 408) • Playing media (p. 395) Video The media player can play video from USB-connected devices. No video will be available when the vehicle is moving. Video will resume playing when the vehicle is stationary. See the article "Media player technical data" for a list of video formats supported by the media player. Related information • • • Playing media (p. 395) Media player (p. 393) Media player technical data (p. 400) • Gracenote Online Look Up: Gracenote will search through its online database for information about the currently playing media. • Gracenote Multiple Results: select how Gracenote data is to be displayed if there are several search results. 1: the file's original data will be used. 2: Gracenote data will be used. 3: Gracenote or original data can be selected. • None: no results will be shown. 399 INFOTAINMENT Media player technical data Format File extension File extension .divx, .avi The following tables list compatible file formats and other technical specifications for the media player. AVI .avi Max. file size 4 GB AVI (DivX) .avi, .divx Audio codec MP3, AC3 Audio files ASF .asf, .wmv Subtitles XSUB .mkv Special functions Multiple subtitles, multiple audio, resume play Reference Meets all requirements of the DivX® Home Theater profile. Visit divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX® Home Theater. video. Format File extension Codec MP3 .mp3 MPEG1 Layer III, MPEG2 Layer III, MP3 Pro (mp3 compatible), MP3 HD (mp3 compatible) AAC .m4a, .m4b, .aac AAC LC (MPEG-4 part III Audio), HE-AAC (aacPlus v1/v2) WMA .wma WMA8/9, WMA9/10 Pro WAV .wav LPCM FLAC .flac FLAC Video files 400 Format File extension MP4 .mp4, .m4v MPEG-PS .mpg, .mp2, .mpeg, .m1v MKV Subtitles Format File extension SubViewer .sub SubRip .srt SSA .ssa DivX® DivX Certified devices have been tested for high quality DivX (.divx, .avi) video playback. When you see the DivX logo, you have the freedom to play your favorite DivX movies. Profile DivX Home Theater Video codec DivX, MPEG-4 Resolution 1280x720 Audio speed (bit rate) 4.8Mbps Frame per second 30 fps Storing information on a USB device In order for the system to read data stored on a USB device, the following specifications must be met. Any folder structures will not be shown in the center display during playback. Max. number Files 15,000 Folders 1,000 Folder levels 8 Playlists 100 INFOTAINMENT Max. number Tracks in a playlist 1,000 Subfolders No limit Internet connected vehicle Connecting to the Internet makes it possible to e.g., use certain navigation services, listen to web radio, stream music using apps, contact a retailer and download software. Related information • CD (media) player* (p. 394) Related information The vehicle can connect to the Internet using Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, a cell phone connected by a cable to the USB socket or via the integrated modem. • • • • • • • Connecting to the Internet (p. 402) Apps (applications) (p. 403) Booking service and repairs (p. 491) System updates (p. 490) Volvo ID (p. 27) Symbols in the center display status bar (p. 44) Tethering (Wi-Fi sharing) (p. 406) When connected, it is possible to share (tether) a Wi-Fi-hotspot to allow other devices to use the connection4. Connection status is shown in the center display's status bar. 4 This does not apply to Wi-Fi connections. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 401 INFOTAINMENT Connecting to the Internet Connect the vehicle to the Internet using Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, by connecting a phone through a cable to the USB socket or via the vehicle's integrated modem. The cell phone and the network service provider must support Internet sharing (tethering) and the subscription must included data transfer. Connect using Bluetooth See the article "Pairing a cell phone." Connect using Wi-Fi 7. Activate tethering/personal hotspot in the cell phone. 2. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. 3. Tap Communication 4. Tap Wi-Fi to activate/deactivate. 5. Tap the name of the network to be used. 6. Enter the network password. Wi-Fi. Insert a personal SIM card in the holder. 2. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. 3. Tap Communication Internet. 4. Tap Vehicle modem Internet to activate/ deactivate. 5. If a different connection was used previously, confirm the connection change. 6. Enter the SIM card's PIN code. > The vehicle will connect to the network. See the article "Wi-Fi technology and security" for network connection requirements. Connect using a cable-connected to the USB socket 1. 1. When a phone is connected to the vehicle, it is saved for future use. When a max. number of 50 have been saved, the first one connected will be deleted. To show the list of saved networks or to manually delete a network, tap Settings Wi-Fi Saved networks. 1. 402 If a different connection was used previously, confirm the connection change. > The vehicle will connect to the network. Connect the phone via a cable to the USB socket in the tunnel console storage compartment. 2. Activate USB tethering in the cell phone. 3. If a different connection was used previously, confirm the connection change. > The vehicle will connect to the network. Connect using the vehicle's integrated modem When the vehicle is connected using the modem, Volvo On Call services will use the connection. Vehicle Modem Related information • • Pairing a cell phone (p. 387) Connecting/disconnecting a cell phone (p. 389) INFOTAINMENT • • Connecting a device via the AUX/USB socket (p. 393) Wi-Fi technology and security (p. 407) Apps (applications) Apps (applications) are programs used to control some of the vehicle's features and functions. Some apps are only available if the vehicle is connected to the Internet. – In the center display's App view, tap an app to start it. Related information • • • Internet connected vehicle (p. 401) Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps (p. 404) Changing settings in different types of apps (p. 45) The center display's App view Several basic apps are always available and others can be downloaded. Downloadable apps include navigation services, web radio, streaming music services, retailer contact and software downloads. 403 INFOTAINMENT Bluetooth settings The following settings apply to a Bluetooth-connected cell phone. Bluetooth Tap Settings in the center display's Top 1. view. 2. Tap Communication Bluetooth and select among the following settings: • Previously paired devices: lists the devices that are paired and connected to the vehicle. • Internet connection: select to connect to the Internet using the device's Bluetooth connection. • Add device: begin the procedure to pair a new device. • Remove device: remove a paired device. • Allowed services for this device: select the services that the device will be used for. Bluetooth compliance United States FCC CAUTION Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This transmitter must not be co-located or 404 operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps Canada Apps can be added (downloaded), kept up-todate or deleted. This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. NOTE Downloading data may affect other services that transfer data such as web radio, streaming music, etc. If this occurs, a download in progress can be cancelled or the other service can be temporarily turned off. Related information • • • • • Apps are managed via the Remote update service in the center display's App view. Internet connected vehicle (p. 401) Pairing a cell phone (p. 387) Phone (p. 387) To download, update or delete apps, the vehicle must be connected to the Internet. Media player (p. 393) Connecting/disconnecting a cell phone (p. 389) Downloading an app 1. Open the Remote update service app. 2. Select Explore to open a list of apps that are available but which are not installed in the vehicle. Tap anywhere in a line for an app to expand the list for additional information. INFOTAINMENT 3. Select Install to start downloading the app. It will remain in the list and a new download can be initiated if necessary. > Download status will be indicated while it is in progress. A message will be displayed if a download cannot be started immediately. The app will remain in the list and a new download can be initiated if necessary. Uninstalling an app Internet connection troubleshooting An app being used must be closed before it can be uninstalled. The following are factors that may affect the vehicle's Internet connection. The amount of data being transmitted depends on the services or apps that are currently in use. For example, streaming audio requires a great deal of data to be transmitted, which requires a good connection and a strong signal. 1. Open the Remote update service app. 2. Select Application updates to open a list of apps that have been installed. 3. Find the desired app and select Uninstall to begin uninstalling the app. > When the app has been uninstalled, it will be removed from the list. Cancelling (aborting) a download – Tap Abort to cancel a download that is currently underway. Only a download can be cancelled. If the installation phase has begun, it cannot be interrupted. Updating apps If an app is being used while an update is in progress, it will be restarted to complete the update. Update (install) all 1. Open the Remote update service app. 2. Select Install all. > The update will begin. Updating certain apps 1. Open the Remote update service app. 2. Select Application updates to open a list of available updates. 3. Find the desired app and select Install. > The update will begin. Related information • • • Internet connected vehicle (p. 401) Media player (p. 393) System updates (p. 490) Cell phone to the vehicle Connection speed may vary depending on the location of the cell phone in the vehicle. Move the phone closer to the center display to increase signal strength. Be sure that there are no obstructing/screening objects between the phone and the screen. Cell phone to the network operator The speed of the mobile network may vary depending on coverage/reception in the vehicle's location. Reception is generally poorer in tunnels, in mountainous areas, in deep valleys or indoors. Connection speed may also depend on the type of subscription that you have with the service provider. Contact your service provider in the event of data transmission problems. Related information • • Internet connected vehicle (p. 401) Connecting to the Internet (p. 402) 405 INFOTAINMENT Tethering (Wi-Fi sharing) When the vehicle is connected to the Internet, this connection can be shared (tethered) with other devices5. The network service provider (the SIM card) must support tethering. 1. Open the center display's Top view. 2. Tap Settings Communication Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot. 3. Tap Network name and assign a name to the hotspot. 4. 5. Tap Password and create a password to be used by devices trying to connect (tether) to the hotspot. Tap Frequency band and select a frequency that the hotspot will use to transmit data. This may not be possible in all markets. 6. Activate/deactivate by tapping the Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot box. 7. If another connection has been used previously, confirm the change of connections. > It is now possible for external devices to connect to the vehicle's Wi-Fi hotspot. Connection status will be indicated in a symbol in the center display's status bar. 5 406 Does not apply for a Wi-Fi connection. Deleting Wi-Fi networks Tap Connected devices to see a list of connected devices. Networks that are not used can be deleted. Related information 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. • • • Wi-Fi technology and security (p. 407) 2. Symbols in the center display status bar (p. 44) Tap Wi-Fi 3. Tap Forget to remove the network. • Internet connection troubleshooting (p. 405) 4. Confirm the selection. > The vehicle will no longer connect to the deleted network. Internet connected vehicle (p. 401) Saved networks. Deleting all networks All networks can be deleted at the same time by returning (resetting) to factory settings. If this is done, all user data and settings will be reset to their default settings. Related information • • Internet connected vehicle (p. 401) Connecting to the Internet (p. 402) INFOTAINMENT Wi-Fi technology and security Vehicle modem settings Change PIN: enter max. 4 digits. The following are types of networks can be connect to. The vehicle is equipped with a modem that can be used to connect the vehicle to the Internet. It is also possible to share (tether) this connection via Wi-Fi. Disable PIN: Allow access to the SIM card without requiring a PIN code. It is possible to connect to the following types of networks: • • • Frequency: 2.4 or 5 GHz6. Standards: 802.11 a/b/g/n. Security type: WPA2-AES-CCMP. The vehicle's Wi-Fi system is designed to manage Wi-Fi devices in the vehicle. If several devices are using a frequency at the same time, this may result in poorer performance. Related information • • • • Internet connected vehicle (p. 401) Connecting to the Internet (p. 402) Tethering (Wi-Fi sharing) (p. 406) Internet connection troubleshooting (p. 405) 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. 2. Tap Communication Vehicle Modem Internet and choose among the following settings: • Send request code: this is used to download the balance remaining on a SIM card. This is specific to your service provider. Related information • • Internet connected vehicle (p. 401) Connecting to the Internet (p. 402) • Vehicle modem Internet: select to use the vehicle's modem to connect to the Internet. • Data usage: %s: Tap Reset to restart (reset) the counter for the amount of data sent/received. • Network Select carrier: select a service provider automatically or manually. Data roaming: select to allow the vehicle to connect to another network if the standard network is not available (e.g., if you are driving in another country). This could entail additional charges, consult your service provider. • SIM card PIN 6 Selecting a frequency is not possible in all markets. 407 INFOTAINMENT Infotainment system license information The following license information pertains to Volvo's agreements with certain manufacturers/ developers. Dirac Live technology has been used in the development and tuning of the sound in order to ensure a world-class sound experience. Dirac Live and the D-symbol are registered trademarks of Dirac Research AB. Gracenote® DivX® Bowers & Wilkins Gracenote, Gracenote logo and logotype, "Powered by Gracenote" and Gracenote MusicID are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote, Inc in the United States and/or other countries. Bowers & Wilkins and B&W are trademarks of the B&W Group Ltd. Nautilus is a trademark of B&W Group Ltd. Kevlar is a registered trademark of DuPont. Dirac Live DivX®, DivX Certified® and asociated logos are trademarks of DivZ, LLC and are used under license. och associerade logotyper är varumärken som tillhör Rovi Corporation eller dess dotterbolag och används på licens. Patent number Covered by one or more of the following U.S. patents: 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274 408 INFOTAINMENT Gracenote® End User License Agreement This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). The software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Software”) enables this application to perform disc and/or file identification and obtain music-related information, including name, artist, track, and title information (“Gracenote Data”) from online servers or embedded databases (collectively, “Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End-User functions of this application or device. You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non-commercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN. You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your license terminates, you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this Agreement against you directly in its own name. The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries without knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote service. The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.” Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error-free or that functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to discontinue its services at any time. GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER- CHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES. © Gracenote, Inc. 2009 Sensus software This software uses parts of sources from clib2 and Prex Embedded Real-time OS - Source (Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993, 1994), and Quercus Robusta (Copyright (c) 1990, 1993), The Regents of the University of California. All or some portions are derived from material licensed to the University of California by American Telephone and Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced herein with the permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided 409 INFOTAINMENT with the distribution. Neither the name of the <ORGANIZATION> nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. This software uses parts of sources from "libtess". The Original Code is: OpenGL Sample Implementation, Version 1.2.1, released January 26, 2000, developed by Silicon Graphics, Inc. The 410 Original Code is Copyright (c) 1991-2000 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Copyright in any portions created by third parties is as indicated elsewhere herein. All Rights Reserved. Copyright (C) [1991-2000] Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice including the dates of first publication and either this permission notice or a reference to http:// oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from Silicon Graphics, Inc. This software is based in parts on the work of the FreeType Team. This software uses parts of SSLeay Library: Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). All rights reserved Linux software This product contains software licensed under GNU General Public License (GPL) or GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL), etc. You have the right of acquisition, modification, and distribution of the source code of the GPL/ LGPL software. You may download Source Code from the following website at no charge: http:// www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/linux/oss/ download/TVM_8351_013 The website provides the Source Code "As Is" and without warranty of any kind. By downloading Source Code, you expressly assume all risk and liability associated with downloading and using the Source Code and complying with the user agreements that accompany each Source Code. INFOTAINMENT Please note that we cannot respond to any inquiries regarding the source code. camellia:1.2.0 Copyright (c) 2006, 2007 NTT (Nippon Telegraph and Telephone Corporation). All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. 2. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer as the first lines of this file unmodified. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY NTT ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL NTT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Unicode: 5.1.0 COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE Copyright c 1991-2013 Unicode, Inc. All rights reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use in http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode data files and any associated documentation (the "Data Files") or Unicode software and any associated documentation (the "Software") to deal in the Data Files or Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of the Data Files or Software, and to permit persons to whom the Data Files or Software are furnished to do so, provided that (a) the above copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear with all copies of the Data Files or Software, (b) both the above copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in associated documentation, and (c) there is clear notice in each modified Data File or in the Software as well as in the documentation associated with the Data File(s) or Software that the data or software has been modified. THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in these Data Files or Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder. Bluetooth® declaration of conformity United States FCC CAUTION 411 INFOTAINMENT Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Canada This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Terms, conditions and confidentiality See terms and conditions for services and customer privacy policy at support.volvocars.com. Terms & Conditions for Services Volvo offers the best possible services to make owning and operating a Volvo safe, convenient, comfortable and enjoyable. Volvo offers a wide array of services, ranging from emergency assistance to navigation and infotainment. Customer privacy policy This policy applies to the way in which customerrelated and personal information are handled. Its purpose is to provide our present, previous and future customers a general understanding of: • The circumstances under which we gather and process your personal information. • • The types of personal information gathered. • How we deal with your personal information. The reasons for gathering your personal information. This policy can be read in its entirety at support.volvocars.com. 412 VOLVO ON CALL WITH SENSUS CONNECT * VOLVO ON CALL WITH SENSUS CONNECT * Volvo On Call (VOC)* WARNING VOC is an integrated, subscription-based system that provides emergency, roadside assistance and security services. VOC is connected to the vehicle's airbag and alarm systems. The vehicle has an integrated Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) module that handles communication between the vehicle and the VOC customer service center. Availability VOC uses the Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) to locate the vehicle and its integrated GSM module to enable communication with the VOC customer service center and the VOC mobile app. From the time that the remote key has been removed from the vehicle, VOC's functions remain available for 5 full days and subsequently once an hour for the following 17 days. After three weeks have elapsed, the system will remain switched off until the engine is started. The system can only function in areas where there is adequate cellular network coverage. Just as in the case of cell phones, atmospheric disturbances or areas with relatively few GSM transmitters can make it impossible for VOC to make a connection, for example, in rural areas. Subscriptions A free, limited-time trial subscription is initiated when the vehicle is purchased and VOC is activated. The subscription can be extended by contacting your Volvo retailer. Using Volvo On Call Volvo On Call (VOC) is controlled using the buttons in the ceiling console and the center display. In the event of an accident in which the seat belt pretensioners, airbags or the inflatable curtains have been triggered, a signal is transmitted automatically to the VOC customer service center, who send the appropriate type of assistance (ambulance, police, etc.) to the site. When a service is active, a symbol will appear on the center display. Information on the Internet For additional information about Volvo On Call, go to: United States http://www.volvocars.com/us/support Canada English: http://support.volvocars.com/en-CA French: http://support.volvocars.com/fr-CA Related information • • • • • 414 VOC buttons in the ceiling console and center display . Volvo On Call convenience services (p. 416) The SOS button: emergency situations Volvo On Call safety services (p. 424) Press and hold the SOS button for approx. 2 seconds to activate the manual alarm function. Volvo On Call security services (p. 425) Using Volvo On Call (p. 414) Volvo ID (p. 27) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. VOLVO ON CALL WITH SENSUS CONNECT * The ON CALL button: roadside assistance Press the ON CALL button for approx. 2 seconds to activate the roadside assistance functions. Alternative to the ON CALL button In the center display's Phone view, tap On Call. Select Call in the pop-up window that opens. NOTE The SOS button should only be used in an emergency situation such as an accident, illness or in the event of a threat to the occupants of the vehicle. Misusing this button could result in extra charges. The ON CALL button can be used for all of the other VOC services, including roadside assistance. Canceling a call Related information • • • • Volvo On Call (VOC)* (p. 414) Volvo On Call (VOC) functions (p. 415) Volvo On Call manual safety service (p. 424) Volvo On Call roadside assistance (p. 425) Volvo On Call (VOC) functions The following table provides an overview of the functions that are available from the VOC customer service center and the mobile app. Please note that these functions are subject to change. For up-to-date information about the range of Volvo On Call functions and services, contact your Volvo retailer or go to: United States http://www.volvocars.com/us/support Canada English: http://support.volvocars.com/en-CA French: http://support.volvocars.com/fr-CA Function A service call that has been initiated can be cancelled within 10 seconds by pressing the EXIT button on the steering wheel keypad. Settings Settings and selections can be made in the center display by going to sSettings Communication Volvo On Call. These settings include activating/deactivating a subscription, button lock, etc. Customer service center AppA Automatic alarm X Manual alarm X Roadside assistance X X Theft notification X X Remote Door Unlock X X Remote Vehicle Immobilizer X * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 415 VOLVO ON CALL WITH SENSUS CONNECT * Function Customer service center AppA Engine remote start (ERS) Locating the vehicle X X X Instrument panel information X Vehicle "checkup" X Driving logbook X Vehicle information X A Some of these functions may not be available for all models. Related information • • • • • Volvo On Call convenience services Volvo On Call mobile app Convenience services are available by using the mobile app to e.g., remote-start the engine*, etc. As a VOC user, you can download a mobile app that enables you to have telephone contact with your vehicle when it is parked. As a VOC user, a mobile app is available that enables you to have telephone contact from an iPhone or from Windows/Android phones with your vehicle when it is parked. With it, you can locate the vehicle, lock it from another location, check the fuel level and much more. Read more about this app in the following section. Related information • • • Certain functions may not be available in all models. The mobile app is updated regularly, which may result in this information not being completely up-to-date with respect to the functionality available. For additional information about the app, go to: Volvo On Call (VOC)* (p. 414) United States Volvo On Call mobile app (p. 416) http://www.volvocars.com/us/support Volvo On Call (VOC) functions (p. 415) Canada English: http://support.volvocars.com/en-CA Volvo On Call (VOC)* (p. 414) French: http://support.volvocars.com/fr-CA Volvo On Call mobile app (p. 416) The Volvo On Call mobile app is available for the iPhone and for Windows/Android phones and can be downloaded from Apple's AppStore, Windows Phone Store or Google Play. Volvo On Call convenience services (p. 416) Volvo On Call safety services (p. 424) Volvo On Call security services (p. 425) A personal Volvo ID is required in order to use the mobile app. For additional information about the Volvo ID, the features it offers and how to create it, see the article "Volvo ID". 416 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. VOLVO ON CALL WITH SENSUS CONNECT * Locating the vehicle Vehicle information The vehicle's location is shown on a map and directions to the vehicle can be provided. There is also a digital compass to help show the owner the right direction. When you are within approx. 100 yards/meters of the vehicle, you can activate its horn and turn signals to help locate it. Basic information such as model, license plate number and VIN number are readily accessible. The vehicle's instrument panel This function provides information such as: the fuel level, range on the remaining fuel, average fuel consumption, average speed and odometer/ trip odometer readings. Vehicle "checkup" The mobile app monitors the vehicle's condition and provides information about bulbs and the levels of brake fluid, coolant and engine oil. Driving logbook Detailed information about each trip made during the past 40 days can be saved and downloaded. All or part of this information can be exported from the mobile app to a spreadsheet format and sent to an email address. This is very useful for e.g., keeping track of business-related driving. This function can be deactivated, in which case the vehicle will not transmit logbook information at the end of each trip. 1 Certain WARNING Keep the following in mind before using ERS: • • • Theft notification If the vehicle's alarm is triggered, the owner will be informed via his/her cell phone. Remote door unlock The status of all doors and windows is provided. The owner can lock/unlock the vehicle from another location but for security reasons, the app's password is always required before the vehicle can be unlocked. When the engine starts, the climate and infotainment systems will restart using the same settings as when the engine was switched off. The vehicle must not be parked indoors or in an enclosed area. Exhaust fumes are harmful to the health. NOTE Always observe applicable state, province and/or local laws regarding engine idling when using ERS. Engine remote start (ERS)*1 ERS makes it possible to remotely start the engine using the remote key to enable the climate system to cool or heat the passenger compartment before driving. The vehicle should be in view. The vehicle should be unoccupied. Related information • • • • • Volvo On Call convenience services (p. 416) Volvo On Call (VOC)* (p. 414) Volvo ID (p. 27) Starting the engine (p. 356) Volvo On Call (VOC) functions (p. 415) You can choose to let the engine run for between 1 and 15 minutes before it automatically switches off again. After 2 ERS starts, the engine must be started in the normal way before ERS can be used again. models only. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 417 VOLVO ON CALL WITH SENSUS CONNECT * Volvo On Call PIN code • The PIN code is used for security purposes to help identify those persons who are authorized to use VOC services in a specific vehicle. Changing ownership of a vehicle with Volvo On Call (p. 424) • Volvo On Call (VOC)* (p. 414) The 4-digit PIN code, which was sent to you when your Volvo retailer activated your subscription, is used for security reasons to help identify those persons who are authorized to use certain VOC services such as remote door unlock or to create an account in the mobile app. If you have forgotten or would like to change your PIN code If you have forgotten your PIN code or would like to change it (e.g., if you have purchased a previously owned Volvo with VOC), contact your Volvo retailer or press the On Call button in your vehicle. The new code will be sent to you via email. If an incorrect PIN code has been entered in the app multiple times If a PIN code has been entered incorrectly 10 times in a row, the account will be frozen. In order to use the app again, a new PIN code must be selected and a new app account will have to be created. Related information 418 • Unlocking the vehicle from the customer service center (p. 426) • Volvo On Call mobile app (p. 416) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. VOLVO ON CALL WITH SENSUS CONNECT * Service center phone number Country Customer service center number United States and Canada 855-399-4691 Related information • • Volvo On Call (VOC)* (p. 414) Volvo On Call availability (p. 422) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 419 VOLVO ON CALL WITH SENSUS CONNECT * Personal information when the service is used, type of service, if airbags have been triggered, if the seat belt tensioners have been triggered, current fuel level, current temperature inside and outside the vehicle, whether the doors are locked and windows are closed and the vehicle's last six locations, including speed and direction. Personal information is gathered for use with the Volvo On Call (VOC) service. Volvo's sales companies are responsible for processing and storing VOC-related information. This information is treated according to legislation and regulations pertaining to data of this type. Country Sales company United States Volvo Cars of North America, LLC Canada Volvo Cars of Canada Why information is gathered Personal information is used by Volvo and its partners to provide and develop the VOC service. Types of personal information gathered The primary types of personal information gathered for VOC-related purposes are: • • 420 Personal information that the customer provides in connection with the activation of the VOC service and during other contact with Volvo, including name, address, telephone number, type of service and the duration of the service. When information about a specific VOC-related event is automatically transmitted from the vehicle. A message of this type contains: the vehicle identification number (VIN), time • Other information associated with the owner/driver, such as telephone calls with people in the vehicle, the customer service center that provided the service and notes made by the customer service operator. Access to my personal information Volvo uses sub-contractors to provide the service. These sub-contractors work on behalf of Volvo and may only process personal information to the extent necessary to provide service. All sub-contractors are bound by agreements requiring them to observe strict confidentiality and to treat personal details in accordance with applicable legislation. Deleting personal information The personal details required to provide the VOC service are stored during the subscription period and thereafter for as long as necessary in order for Volvo to fulfil its obligations according to legislation and other regulations. Information generated during events covered by the VOC service is deleted three months after an event has occurred. Corrections and register extracts Private persons have the right to request corrections of incorrect information and to obtain an extract showing the personal information that has been processed. Requests for extracts from the register must be submitted in writing and signed by the applicant and include name, address and customer number. The request should be posted to: Volvo Cars of North America, LLC Customer Care Center 1 Volvo Drive, P.O. Box 914 Rockleigh, New Jersey 07647 Phone: 1-800-458-1552 Volvo Cars of Canada National Customer Service 9130 Leslie Street, Suite 101 Richmond Hill, Ontario L4B 0B9 Phone: 1-800-663-8255 Consent to gather VOC-related personal information By activating a VOC subscription in accordance with the instructions in this document, the user agrees to the collection of VOC-related personal information. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. VOLVO ON CALL WITH SENSUS CONNECT * Related information • • Volvo On Call (VOC)* (p. 414) Using Volvo On Call (p. 414) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 421 VOLVO ON CALL WITH SENSUS CONNECT * Volvo On Call availability The map shows the areas in which VOC is available. The service is constantly being expanded; 422 contact your Volvo retailer for up-to-date information. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. VOLVO ON CALL WITH SENSUS CONNECT * However, the system can only function in areas where there is adequate cellular network coverage. Related information • • • Volvo On Call (VOC)* (p. 414) Volvo On Call (VOC) functions (p. 415) Service center phone number (p. 419) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 423 VOLVO ON CALL WITH SENSUS CONNECT * Changing ownership of a vehicle with Volvo On Call If the vehicle changes owners, the Volvo On Call (VOC) service should be cancelled. Cancelling the VOC service If your vehicle changes owners, contact your Volvo retailer to cancel the VOC service. The subscription will be terminated and the service history will be erased. When the vehicle changes owners, all personal settings should be reset to the factory defaults, see the owner's manual supplement. Volvo On Call manual safety service Volvo On Call safety services Contact the Volvo On Call (VOC) customer service center in emergency situations. The Volvo On Call (VOC) manual or automatic safety services are intended for use in emergency situations. To contact the VOC customer service center manually: 1. Press SOS to contact the customer service center for help in emergency situations such as illness, injury, a threat, etc. 2. An emergency signal is transmitted to the VOC customer service center with information about the vehicle's location. 3. Starting the VOC service If you purchase a previously owned Volvo with VOC: The new owner should contact his/her Volvo retailer to transfer the remaining period of the VOC subscription. All contact information must be updated in order for VOC to function and to ensure that the previous owner is no longer authorized to use VOC services in the vehicle. The new owner will be given a 4-digit personal code, which is used to identify him/her as being authorized to approve certain VOC services. Related information • • • 424 Volvo On Call (VOC)* (p. 414) Volvo On Call PIN code (p. 418) Resetting user data when the vehicle changes owners (p. 112) The VOC customer service center attempts to establish voice contact with the driver to determine the extent of the accident and/or the need for assistance. If voice contact is not possible, the VOC customer service then contacts the emergency services for appropriate action. Automatic alarm In the event of certain types of accidents, a signal is transmitted automatically to the VOC customer service center, who take appropriate action according to the information that they receive. The following occurs if the seat belt pretensioners, airbags or the inflatable curtains have been triggered: 1. A signal is transmitted automatically to the VOC customer service center with information about the vehicle's location and that an airbag, etc., has been triggered. 2. The VOC customer service center attempts to establish voice contact with the driver to determine the extent of the accident and the need for assistance. 3. The VOC customer service center then contacts the appropriate emergency service (police, ambulance, towing, etc.). Related information • • • Volvo On Call safety services (p. 424) Volvo On Call roadside assistance (p. 425) Using Volvo On Call (p. 414) If voice contact is not possible, the VOC customer service then contacts the emergency services for appropriate action. Manual alarm Press SOS to contact the customer service center for help in emergency situations, see also the article "VOC manual safety service." * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. VOLVO ON CALL WITH SENSUS CONNECT * Roadside assistance Volvo On Call roadside assistance Volvo On Call security services Request help for e.g., flat tires, a discharged battery, if you have run out of fuel, etc. Use VOC to summon help in the event of a flat tire, an empty fuel tank, etc. Emergency number 1. When an emergency call has been initiated, VOC attempts to contact the customer service center. If this is not possible, the call will be transferred to the emergency 911 number instead. Press the ON CALL button for at least 2 seconds. The Volvo On Call (VOC) security services are intended to provide assistance, for instance, if you are locked out of your vehicle, if it has been stolen, etc. 2. The VOC customer service center attempts to establish voice contact with the driver to determine the need for assistance. Related information Related information • • • • Volvo On Call (VOC)* (p. 414) Volvo On Call manual safety service (p. 424) Volvo On Call roadside assistance (p. 425) Using Volvo On Call (p. 414) • • • • Volvo On Call (VOC)* (p. 414) Volvo On Call safety services (p. 424) Volvo On Call manual safety service (p. 424) Using Volvo On Call (p. 414) Volvo On Call's security services are primarily intended to help minimize the risk of the vehicle being stolen. If the vehicle's normal electrical system is not functioning properly, VOC's reserve battery provides the system with current. Theft notification A signal will be sent automatically to the Volvo On Call customer service center in the event of a break-in or theft (if the vehicle's alarm has been triggered). This service will be interrupted if the alarm is turned off using one of the vehicle's remote keys. Remote door unlock If the vehicle's remote key has been lost or locked in the car, the doors can be unlocked remotely within the following 5 days with assistance from the VOC customer service center after the owner's identity has been verified by his/her pin code. Remote vehicle immobilizer If the vehicle has been stolen, the owner or police can contact the VOC customer service center to * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 425 VOLVO ON CALL WITH SENSUS CONNECT * have the vehicle's remote keys immobilized (deactivated). NOTE This applies even if the vehicle has been unlocked and started with one of its remote keys. After contacting the owner/police, the VOC customer service center then deactivates the remote keys. Once the engine has been switched off, it can only be restarted if the owner/police has given the VOC customer service center authorization to reactivate the remote keys. Once this authorization has been verified (using your PIN code), the VOC customer service center will reactivate the remote keys. Related information • • • • Volvo On Call (VOC)* (p. 414) Unlocking the vehicle from the customer service center (p. 426) Service center phone number (p. 419) Unlocking the vehicle from the customer service center The doors can be unlocked remotely with assistance from the VOC customer service center. 1. Contact the VOC customer service center at 855-399-4691 (this number applies in both the United States and Canada). 2. After confirming that the caller is the vehicle's owner or other authorized person (using your PIN code), the VOC customer service center sends a signal to the vehicle to unlock it. 3. The tailgate has to be opened to unlock the other doors. Press lightly on the rubberized pressure plate under the outer tailgate handle. Related information • • • Volvo On Call security services (p. 425) Volvo On Call (VOC)* (p. 414) Locking/unlocking the tailgate (p. 233) NOTE If the tailgate is not opened within the time period set by the VOC customer service center, it will relock. Volvo On Call PIN code (p. 418) NOTE If the vehicle is parked in a garage or other covered area, remote unlocking may not be possible due to poor signal reception. 426 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. NAVIGATION* NAVIGATION* Sensus Navigation Buttons and information on the map List of guidance points in the itinerary Sensus Navigation enables you to set itineraries, search for certain types of points of interest along your route, store special destinations, obtain traffic information en route, etc. The map on the center display contains different function buttons, symbols, types of roads and information about the area around the vehicle and along the selected route. Remaining distance to the destination/estimated time of arrival and a button for changing headers Sensus Navigation shows the vehicle's exact location and if you deviate from the set route, the system can make the necessary adjustments to guide you to your destination. Final destination Intermediate destination Being familiar with the contents of this manual will help you to fully utilize the features and functions offered by Sensus Navigation. Guidance point The vehicle (blue triangle) on the planned route By enabling you to reach your destination quickly and by the most direct route, Sensus Navigation also helps contribute to improving the environment. Traffic problem and related information Minimize (expanded view) or maximize (fullscreen map view) Related information • Getting started with Sensus Navigation (p. 432) • Buttons and information on the map (p. 428) Button for listing the itinerary's Points of Interest (POI) and traffic information Calculating a new route Repeat the most recent voice guidance Voice guidance On/Off Pause/resume guidance Text and symbols on the map The vehicle's current location and a button for viewing the itinerary Map scale 428 Set a final destination/intermediate destination POI (in this case, a restaurant) Button to reset the map to follow the vehicle (blue triangle) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. NAVIGATION* Button for toggling between 2D/3D map views Common navigation system features Compass and button for north at the top of the map/current direction at the top of the map The most common features of the navigation system are described here. Related information • • • Sensus Navigation (p. 428) Using the center display (p. 46) Center display overview (p. 29) • • • • • • • • • Where am I? Direction at the top of the map/North at the top of the map 2D for 3D view Zoom Scroll Find the vehicle symbol on the map Change the headers displayed Go back to the map view "Wrong" language in illustrations Where am I? Where is the vehicle's current location? • Direction at the top of the map/North at the top of the map Click the vehicle symbol (blue triangle) for information directly on the map. Tap the compass to change the way in which the vehicle symbol moves on the map The driver can choose between two views: • North will always be at the top of the map on the center display and the vehicle symbol will move in the current direction on the map (left is west, right is east, etc.). • The vehicle symbol will always move towards the top of the center display. The map will rotate under the vehicle symbol according to the direction in which the vehicle turns. The compass symbol indicates north (N) on the map and the vehicle's direction (NE in the illustration). * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 429 NAVIGATION* Compass symbols Direction N North NE Northeast E East SE Southeast S South SW Southwest W West NW Northwest Tap the center display once with two fingers. vehicle symbol according to the direction in which the vehicle turns. The compass symbol indicates north (N) on the map and the vehicle's direction is shown at the center of the compass. The map scale is not shown in 3D. 2D is described in the previous section "Direction at the top of the map/North at the top of the map." or "Pinch" with two fingers on the center display. Zoom Zoom in To make the map larger: Tap the center display twice in quick succession with one finger. 2D or 3D view Scroll Place a finger on the map and swipe in the desired direction. Scrolling is only possible with the map in maximized view. or "Stretch" with two fingers on the center display. Tap 2D/3D to toggle between a 2D/3D map display In 3D, the vehicle's direction is always upward on the center display. The map will rotate under the 430 Zoom ut To make the map smaller: * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. NAVIGATION* Find the vehicle symbol on the map Change the headers displayed Returning to the map view Tap the crosshairs Tap to change map headings Home button below the center display After scrolling/zooming, it may be difficult to find the vehicle's location on the map. To find it: The following headers can be displayed on the map: To return to the map view from another part of the system: • • 1. Press the Home button. 2. If the center display shows its Home view, tap Navigation at the top of the screen. Tap the crosshairs: the map will be reset and will follow the vehicle symbol. Destination, Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA) or Remaining Time to Arrival (RTA) or • Position and the distance to the destination (Dist). Changing headers is only possible with the map in maximized view. Related information • • Navigation in the instrument panel (p. 448) Sensus Navigation settings (p. 449) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 431 NAVIGATION* Getting started with Sensus Navigation WARNING Observe the following. The vehicle's electrical system (including the navigation system) is activated automatically when the driver's door is opened. • Direct all your attention to the road and make sure that all your concentration is on driving. Navigation On/Off • Follow applicable traffic legislation and drive with good judgment. • Due to weather conditions or time of year affecting the road conditions, some recommendations may be less reliable. Quick guidance to a destination The following table provides quick information about setting a destination and starting navigation. Selecting a destination on the map Step Center display/menu Action 1 If a map is not shown on the center display. Press the Home button under the display to open the display's Home view. 2 Home view is displayed. Tap Navigation in the center display's upper menu bar. 3 A map is displayed. Off The navigation system cannot be switched off while the vehicle is unlocked and is instead active in the background. NOTE The system can be used even when the engine is not running but will be switched off automatically if the battery charge level is low. On If the navigation system does not show a map on the center display, tap Navigation on the upper line on the screen to display a map showing the area around the vehicle and the vehicle's current location (a blue triangle) on the map. 432 Related information • • • • If this button is displayed, tap it to maximize the map. Navigation displays and controls (p. 433) Quick guidance to a destination (p. 432) Center display overview (p. 29) Using the center display (p. 46) 4 The map is displayed. Scroll to the desired location on the map and press and hold that position on the screen to set it as a destination. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. NAVIGATION* Step 5 6 Center display/menu Action Navigation displays and controls Start navigation is displayed on the screen. Tap Start navigation. Volvo Sensus Navigation is presented on the instrument panel and head-up display* and controlled using center display on-screen buttons, the right-side steering wheel keypad and voice commands. A map showing the route to your destination is displayed. Guidance will begin. Follow the directions on the instrument panel. Center display During a trip, the driver receives visual guidance on the instrument panel and voice guidance through the infotainment system's speakers. Related information • • Instrument panel Using the center display (p. 46) Right-side steering wheel keypad and instrument panel Center display overview (p. 29) Searching for and setting destinations and making navigation settings are done on the center display. Some of the navigation system's functions, such as Take me home, are controlled from the rightside steering wheel keypad. If the map is not showing on the center display, tap Navigation at the top of the center display's Home view. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 433 NAVIGATION* 2. Confirm or mark a choice by pressing control (4). > The function will be activated and after making certain choices, the menu will close. Voice control Many settings can be made using voice commands. Press the voice button on the right-side steering wheel keypad, wait for the tone and then say, e.g., "Drive Home." Head-up-display (HUD)* Using voice commands is explained in greater detail in the articles "Navigation system voice control," "Voice control," and "Voice control settings." Open/Close Related information • • Left/Right Up/Down Confirm Opening/closing the menu Navigation guidance on the windshield – The driver can also get guidance and information from the navigation system on the lower section of the windshield. Press Open/Close (1). > Menus with alternatives will be opened or closed. The menu will close automatically after a short period or after certain selections have been made. The position of the HUD can be adjusted (see the article "Head-up display"). • • • • • • • Using the center display keyboard (p. 32) Setting a destination by entering the text of your choice (p. 436) Navigation system voice commands (p. 124) Voice control (p. 120) Using voice commands (p. 121) Voice control settings (p. 125) Using the center display (p. 46) Center display overview (p. 29) Head-up display (HUD)* (p. 117) Navigating and making selections in a menu 1. 434 Scroll among the alternatives using control (3). * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. NAVIGATION* Entering a destination Related information • Viewing the itinerary and alternate routes (p. 442) • Setting a destination by tapping the map (p. 435) • Setting a destination by entering the text of your choice (p. 436) Selecting a recently set destination • Selecting a position marked as a favorite from the library Setting a destination using Recent/Favorites/Library (p. 438) • Using a point of interest (POI) as a destination (p. 440) • Setting a destination by entering an address (p. 441) There are several different ways of choosing a destination. A destination can be chosen by: • • • • Clicking on the map • • • Selecting a saved destination from the library Entering free text or coordinates Selecting a point of interest (POI) Entering an Address: e.g., State/city/street/ intersection/house number Select one of the alternatives and follow the instructions given. Setting a destination by tapping the map Tapping a point on the map is one way to set a destination. To do so: Begin by verifying that the map is in full-screen mode by tapping the symbol (if it is displayed). 1. Scroll to the desired point on the map. 2. Press the point until an icon is created there and a menu is displayed. Destinations and intermediate destinations (waypoints) The first location selected will be the itinerary's final destination. Any other locations will be the itinerary's intermediate destinations (waypoints). An itinerary and its destinations can be edited at any time, see also the section "Editing an itinerary" in the article "Itinerary and alternate routes." 3. Select Go here to start guidance to that point. Deleting the icon Tap Delete. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 435 NAVIGATION* Changing the icon's location Press the icon on the map, drag it to the desired position and release it. Related information • Entering a destination (p. 435) Setting a destination by entering the text of your choice Entering the text of your choice is one way to set a destination. Keyboard The center display's keyboard can be used to enter most characters when searching for a destination. To display the keyboard: Tap Set dest. in the lower margin. The keyboard opens for entering text. Keyboard function keys Filter: limit/filter the list of possible destinations. Hide the keys to display a longer list of possible destinations. Tap the field for entering text to return to the keyboard. Tap to toggle between upper and lower case characters. Numbers and special characters Space bar Delete characters to the left of the cursor. Tap to display an area where you can "write" text. For additional information about using the center display's keyboard, see the article "Using the center display keyboard." 436 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. NAVIGATION* map (or from the center of the map if it has been scrolled). Entering the text of your choice Enter text to search for e.g., streets, cities, map coordinates or points of interest (POIs). 2. Select/mark a selection in the list. Its Info card1 will be displayed. 3. Follow the instructions on the center display and activate guidance to the destination. Filter for POIs A list of available POIs is displayed at the bottom of the screen, under the three filters. Filter Several filters can be used to limit the size of the list. Filters The filters available may vary: • Along route: Lists only destinations found 1. Enter a word. Possible destinations meeting your search criteria will be listed according to their distance from the vehicle symbol on the along the route. • Streets: Lists only streets/roads meeting the search criteria. • Only cities: Lists only cities/towns meeting the search criteria. 1 POIs filtered from the marked category (2) POI categories (there may also be sub-categories). Only POIs from the marked category will be listed and only the Along route filter can be combined with POI. See also the article "Information cards on the map." * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 437 NAVIGATION* Coordinates A destination can also be set by entering its map coordinates. • For example, enter: "N 58.1234 E 12.5678" and tap Search/. Map coordinates can be written in different ways, such as: Setting a destination using Recent/ Favorites/Library Selecting from a list is one way of setting a destination. To display these lists: 1. Tap Set dest. in the lower margin. A keyboard will be displayed with search alternatives in the upper margin. N 58.1234 E 12.5678 (with spaces) 2. Continue by selecting one of the lists in the upper margin: N58.1234 E12.5678 (without spaces) 58.1234N 12.5678E (with the points on the compass after the coordinates) 58.1234 -12.5678 (with a hyphen without the points on the compass) Both periods [.] and commas [,] can be used. Recent • Recent • Favorites • Library After marking an alternative, it will be added as a destination by tapping the Start navigation or Add as waypoint buttons. This is a list of all searches that have been made. Scroll through the list and select. This menu alternative is also available in the instrument panel and can be displayed using the right-side steering wheel keypad (see also the article "Navigation system displays and controls"). Related information • • • • 438 Entering a destination (p. 435) Navigation displays and controls (p. 433) Using the center display keyboard (p. 32) Information cards on the map (p. 446) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. NAVIGATION* Favorites Library that disappears when they have been read. See the article "Saving a destination with send-tocar" for additional information. Use Edit list to edit the respective destinations with respect to Name, Location, Internet address and Phone number (max. 3 phone numbers per destination). Related information • • • This is a list of locations that have been set as favorites from the Library. Scroll through the list and select. This is a list of saved destinations and itineraries. The most recently saved one will be at the top of the list. Scroll through the list and select. A deleted location in Favorites always remains in the Library but the "star" will not be highlighted. To return it to the list of Favorites, go to the Library and tap the location's star again. Tap the destination's "star" to select/deselect it as a favorite. A selected destination will also be shown under the heading Favorites. Use Set home address to program a destination that is used often. A destination set as Home will also be also available in the instrument panel and can be displayed using the rightside steering wheel keypad (see also the article "Navigation system displays and controls"). Use Edit list to edit destinations in the list. Saving a destination with Send to Car (p. 441) Navigation displays and controls (p. 433) Entering a destination (p. 435) A destination deleted from the Library will also be deleted from Favorites. The library can be sorted by: • • • • Added Name Distance Received: this is a filter With Received, destinations sent to the vehicle using the Send to Car function can be filtered. New, unread destinations have a BLUE marker * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 439 NAVIGATION* Using a point of interest (POI) as a destination Selecting a point of interest (POI) is one way of setting a destination. 1. Tap Set dest. in the lower margin. A keyboard will be displayed with search alternatives in the upper margin. See the article "Map settings" for information about selecting the POIs to be displayed on the map. This will show the selected POIs available in the area. This setting does not affect searches for POIs to be used as destinations (even ones that have not been selected for display can be used as a destination). Proposed POIs are listed according to their distance from the vehicle symbol on the map or from the center of the map if it has been scrolled. Related information • • Entering a destination (p. 435) Map settings (p. 450) Certain POIs will only appear if the map scale is greater than 1 mi. (1 km). 2. Continue by selecting a POI from the upper margin. NOTE • The appearance, number and variations of POIs vary from market to market. • Some symbols may be added/deleted when the navigation system's software is updated. The POIs available for the current map system can found in the menu system. Filters Examples of POIs Many POIs (e.g., restaurants) have sub-categories (e.g., Chinese restaurants). Proposed POIs are listed according to their distance to the vehicle symbol or the center of the map (if it has been scrolled). 440 When an itinerary has been activated and a POI category has been selected, a filter will be available to limit the search list to only show POIs along the route. This list can then be sorted by name or distance. • Along route: only shows POIs along the route. With filters activated, the list can be sorted by Name or Distance. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. NAVIGATION* Setting a destination by entering an address Select any of the following alternatives and enter text using the center display's keyboard: Saving a destination with Send to Car Entering an address is one way to set a destination. • • • • • Using the Send to Car feature is one way to save a destination. Tap Set dest. in the lower margin. A keyboard will be displayed with search alternatives in the upper margin. 2. Continue by selecting an Address from the upper margin. Additional search fields will be added. Examples of search fields The following search alternatives may vary somewhat from market to market. Only those available for your market will be shown in the center display. Country/State/Province City/Territory/Zip code Address Number Junction Related information • Entering a destination (p. 435) Send to Car is a function that makes it possible to add a destination/location to the navigation system from a computer. Send to Car can also be done from a cell phone using Volvo's Volvo On Call (VOC) service. VOC can also be used to send a destination from the VOC customer service center to the vehicle. Right-click the desired location and select Send this location to car * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 441 NAVIGATION* (support.volvocars.com) for more information about the Send to Car function. Viewing the itinerary and alternate routes Related information During guidance, it is possible to view the itinerary or see if alternate routes are available. • • • Internet connected vehicle (p. 401) Viewing the itinerary Setting a destination using Recent/Favorites/Library (p. 438) To view/display the itinerary: • Entering a destination (p. 435) Volvo On Call (VOC)* (p. 414) Enter the vehicle's VIN number or Volvo ID and select Send 1. Go to the Internet site here.com: a map service will open. 2. Right-click the desired location. 3. Select Send this location to car. 4. Enter the vehicle's VIN number or Volvo ID. 5. Select Send: the location will be sent to the vehicle's library (list of destinations), where it will be indicated by a blue marker. Tap Position: or Destination: to display the current itinerary. The driver will then be alerted to this by a symbol that illuminates in the center display indicating that a destination/location has been sent to the vehicle. Tap the symbol and a card will open showing information and possible alternatives. Please note that the procedure shown here is just an example from one of many map service providers. See the Volvo Cars support site 442 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. NAVIGATION* Editing an itinerary An itinerary can be edited: Select a particular waypoint or Clear itinerary and confirm the choice Select a line in the itinerary and follow the instructions provided Deleting an itinerary 2. Tap Alternative routes to view alternate routes (if available) for the remainder of the itinerary. 3. Select one of the following: Viewing alternate routes The driver can check for alternate routes at any time while guidance is underway. To do so: The entire itinerary or intermediate destinations (waypoints) can be deleted: 1. Tap Position: or Destination: to display the current itinerary. • Fast • Eco • Scenic * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 443 NAVIGATION* 4. Tap the map. The updated itinerary will be shown on the map and guidance will resume. See also the section "Alternate routes" in the article "Route settings." Guidance points in the itinerary A list of coming guidance points helps the driver prepare for the next turn, etc. by e.g., getting into the correct traffic lane, etc. Related information • • • • Guidance points in the itinerary (p. 444) Related information • • Choosing a detour (p. 447) • • Information cards on the map (p. 446) Viewing the itinerary and alternate routes (p. 442) Route settings (p. 452) Choosing a detour (p. 447) Information cards on the map (p. 446) Route settings (p. 452) Guidance points in an itinerary A list of coming guidance points will appear on the map when the itinerary is activated. The list can be expanded by tapping the down-arrow (tap the up-arrow to minimize). The next guidance point is always at the top of the list. Tapping any of the guidance points in the list will scroll the map to the related position. Subsequently tapping the map's crosshairs (below the 2D/3D button) will return you to the map guidance view where the map shows the vehicle's current location. 444 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. NAVIGATION* POIs along the route A list of points of interest (POIs) along the route can be displayed. A list will show the current POI categories e.g., near an exit or service area 1. Select the desired category to open a list, sometimes with sub-categories. 2. Continue to "zoom in" until a particular POI can be selected. 3. Mark a POI in the list. Its information card will be displayed. 4. Select one of the card's alternatives and follow the instructions. Traffic problems along the route A list of traffic problems along your route can be displayed. POI suggestions will be listed based on their distance on the map from the vehicle symbol or the center of the map (if it has been scrolled). The POI at the top of the list is closest to the vehicle. 1. Tap Ahead 2. Then tap "POI" for information about POIs along the route Related information • 1. Tap Ahead. Using a point of interest (POI) as a destination (p. 440) 2. Then tap Traffic for information about traffic problems along the route * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 445 NAVIGATION* For information about a specific traffic tie-up: Information cards on the map • Each icon on the map for a destination, intermediate destination (waypoint), favorite, POI, traffic problem, etc., has an information card that can be opened by tapping the icon. Select it in the list to get specific information. Use the selection Avoid to be rerouted to an alternate route to your destination. Related information • • Traffic information (p. 448) Traffic information settings (p. 454) Opening an icon's Info card gives the driver upto-date information about the respective icons. Information and possible alternatives vary depending on the type of icon. • Save: save the location in the Library. See also the article "Entering a destination using Recent/Favorites/Library." Related information • Viewing the itinerary and alternate routes (p. 442) • • • • Guidance points in the itinerary (p. 444) Choosing a detour (p. 447) Route settings (p. 452) Setting a destination using Recent/Favorites/Library (p. 438) Example of an information card for a POI In this example of a highlighted POI, the driver can select e.g.,: • Start navigation: save the POI's location as a destination • Add as waypoint: save the POI's location as an intermediate destination 446 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. NAVIGATION* Choosing a detour 3. Select Detour to avoid the next section of a route if e.g., a road is closed. After a proposal has been accepted, guidance will resume, using the detour as the new route. As an alternative to Detour, select another route and leave your itinerary's current route. The system will update the route automatically and continue guidance to your destination along the most suitable route. Detours See also the article "Viewing the itinerary and alternate routes." Detour and information about it 2. Detour button 1. Tap Detour: information about an alternate route will be displayed on the map (the alternate route's distance, estimated travel time, etc.). To accept the proposal, tap the sign with information about the detour To reject the proposal, tap the X button (Cancel). Guidance will continue along the current route. Related information • • • Route settings (p. 452) Viewing the itinerary and alternate routes (p. 442) Information cards on the map (p. 446) Normally, only short detours are proposed to take you quickly back to your itinerary's original route if possible. Detour activated * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 447 NAVIGATION* Traffic information4 lines on both sides of the road if both sides are affected). The navigation system constantly receives traffic messages that are broadcast by local radio stations. • See the article "Traffic settings" for the trafficrelated settings available to the driver. If the traffic problem affects your chosen route, you can opt to select Avoid to prompt the system to find an alternate route. Directly on the map Tap the symbol for additional information about the traffic problem. Navigation in the instrument panel An activated route will automatically be displayed in the instrument panel. Related information • • Traffic information settings (p. 454) Traffic problems along the route (p. 445) Instrument panel (driver display) The driver can opt to get navigation information in the instrument panel even if no route/itinerary has been set. Example of traffic information Traffic jams, road construction areas, accidents, etc. are shown on the map in the form of various symbols. In cases of major traffic disruptions, their extent is shown on the map as RED lines along the side of the road (in e.g., road construction areas). This line will also indicate the direction (there will be 4 448 Not available in all markets. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. NAVIGATION* Sensus Navigation settings These settings affect e.g., the way in which routes are selected and how information is displayed. Navigation can be presented in various ways and the user can set different parameters to personalize the way in which the map is displayed on the screen. To access the navigation settings: Activating/deactivating map display in the instrument panel 1. Pull down the center display's Top view. 2. Select Settings Navigation Route. • Guidance: settings for guidance • System: information about map and software updates Related information • • • • • • • Map settings (p. 450) Navigation in the instrument panel (p. 448) Route settings (p. 452) Traffic information settings (p. 454) Guidance settings (p. 455) System settings (p. 456) Center display overview (p. 29) Path: Settings My Car Displays Driver Display Center Area Driver Display Options • Mark the alternative Show Map. Related information • • Sensus Navigation settings (p. 449) Navigation displays and controls (p. 433) The following types of settings are available: • Map: settings for the content and appearance of the map • Route: settings for the way in which routes are calculated and displayed • Traffic: settings for traffic information * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 449 NAVIGATION* Map settings Alternatives: These settings are used to determine how the map will be displayed on the screen. • • • • • Position Format Map Design POI Favorites Speed Cameras7 Location format Select to display the current location by address or by coordinates: Settings 7 450 Navigation Map • Address • Coordinates and altitude The following illustration shows both alternatives: Not available in all markets. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. NAVIGATION* Map design POI Select map background lighting: Select the POIs to be displayed on the maps. Each main category has two alternatives: every POI category will be displayed or... • Day: bright colors • Night: Dark colors for better night vision • Automatic: the system will shift between Day and Night based on the ambient light in the passenger compartment. ...open the category by tapping the ">" symbol and selecting the sub-categories to be displayed. POI sub-categories • Mark the POI categories to be displayed on the map. Exit the menu by tapping Back or Close. See also the article "POI as destination." POI main categories * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 451 NAVIGATION* Favorites Speed cameras7 Route settings The following settings determine how a route will be calculated. Choose to display Favorites on the map: Choose to display speed cameras on the map: • • Yes/No See also the article "Entering a destination using Recent/Favorites/Library." Yes/No Related information • • • Sensus Navigation settings (p. 449) Setting a destination using Recent/Favorites/Library (p. 438) Using a point of interest (POI) as a destination (p. 440) Path: Settings 7 452 Navigation Route Not available in all markets. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. NAVIGATION* Possible settings: Default route type • • • • • Select the default type of route to be used: Route Learning Alternative Routes Default Route Type Avoid Arrival Time Format Route learning Allow data to be collected to optimize route calculations: • • Fast • Eco • Scenic • • Avoid Related information Alternative routes • 8 Yes/No Arrival time format Choose among: This setting can also be changed while driving. See also the article "Itinerary and alternate route." Yes/No Show 3 alternative routes before guidance begins: • Ferry • Highway • Toll Roads • • ETA (Estimated Time of Arrival) RTA (Remaining Time to Arrival) Sensus Navigation settings (p. 449) Viewing the itinerary and alternate routes (p. 442) Mark the types of roads to be automatically avoided when a route is calculated: • • • • Tunnel International Border8 Congestion Charge Zone Car train Not available in all markets. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 453 NAVIGATION* Traffic information settings9 Traffic events These options determine how traffic information is presented. Filter the type of traffic information to be displayed on the map and determine how a route is to be calculated. The alternatives are: • None • Major • All Related information • • • Sensus Navigation settings (p. 449) Traffic problems along the route (p. 445) Traffic information (p. 448) Free flowing traffic Select if free-flowing traffic is to be displayed on the map (shown as green lines). Select: • Yes/No Orange or red lines are set according to the current traffic situation and cannot be avoided. Avoid traffic events Select to allow the system to automatically avoid traffic problems along the route. Select: Path: Settings Navigation Traffic (Settings > Navigation > Traffic) • • • • Traffic Events • Never • Ask • Always Avoid Traffic Events When calculating a route, the system will take these settings into account. The driver will have to "confirm" events that occur during a trip. Traffic Provider: %s Traffic provider: Free Flowing Traffic Set the source of traffic information10 9 10 454 Not available in all markets. Not available in all markets. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. NAVIGATION* Guidance settings Voice guidance level This section lists guidance settings. Set the amount of guidance information provided: • None: no automatic guidance but guidance can be requested manually once. Related information • • Sensus Navigation settings (p. 449) POIs along the route (p. 445) • Low: one message per guidance point. • Moderate: up to three messages per guidance point, with limited information. • Full: up to four messages per guidance point, with all available information provided. Landmark guidance12 Select to use landmarks when guidance is given: • Yes/No Parking near destination Select to display information about parking when you approach the destination: Path: Settings Navigation Guidance (Settings > Navigation > Guidance) Selections: • • • • • 12 Voice Guidance Landmark Guidance12 • Yes/No Propose gas station Select to display information about nearby gas stations when the vehicle's fuel level is low: • Yes/No POI along the route Parking Near Destination Select to display POIs along the route. Propose Gas Station • POI Along Route A list will be displayed automatically when driving on a highway. See also the article "POIs along the route." Yes/No Certain markets only. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 455 NAVIGATION* System settings Map updates with MapCare Updating navigation system software This article describes settings for the navigation system software and map versions. Volvo Sensus Navigation remote updates can be done directly to the vehicle through a cell phone Internet connection or from a computer with a USB flash drive. In addition to the maps, the system's software is being steadily developed and has to be updated occasionally. This may mean that newly downloaded map information may not be supported by the navigation system's software. If this happens, a message will be displayed indicating that the software needs to be updated. This can be done by a Volvo retailer or from a USB flash drive. General update information The system's maps are divided into a number of fixed regions. When updates are done, it is not necessary to update all of the regions at the same time but instead can be done for a specific region or several regions. One or several regions can be updated from the vehicle's Internet connection. However, for major updates, a computer and a USB flash drive are recommended. Path: Settings Navigation System Software version • Base Map Version_ e.g., 00.20.00.18 See also the article "Updating map data with MapCare". Map version • Map Information: information about maps, updates and your favorite regions. Related information • • 456 Sensus Navigation settings (p. 449) Map updates with MapCare (p. 456) If an itinerary covers several regions, they should all have the same version number to enable the system to calculate the best route to the destination(s). Updating the map structure Changing the map structure may sometimes be necessary, e.g., if a region is added or if a large region is divided into smaller ones. If this is the case, normal updates may not be possible and a message will be displayed explaining what has happened. In this situation, the entire map must be reinstalled from a USB flash drive. For additional information, contact a Volvo retailer. See the section "Software version" in the article "System settings." Updates from the vehicle's Internet connection or from a USB flash drive For detailed information, see the articles "Remote map updates" and "Map updates from the computer with a USB flash drive." FAQs Question Answer Can the map database be changed, e.g., from Europe to North America? Yes, with certain exceptions. Contact a Volvo retailer for upto-date information. How long do map updates take? This depends on the size of the file(s) and the speed of the Internet connection. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. NAVIGATION* Question How big is an update? Updating has not worked. What should I do? Answer This varies from market to market. Consult a Volvo retailer. Remote map updates Downloading maps from the Internet Some preparation is necessary before a remote update can be made through the vehicle's cell phone Internet connection. 1. From the center display's Home view, swipe from right to left to access App view. 2. Select the Remote update service app and follow the instructions provided. Preparations For additional information, see the Volvo Cars support site (support.volvocars.com) or contact a Volvo retailer. Try the Volvo Cars support site (support.volvocars.com) or contact a Volvo retailer. Related information • • • Related information • • • • • • • • • Remote map updates (p. 457) Map updates from a computer with a USB flash drive (p. 458) Map updates with MapCare (p. 456) Internet connected vehicle (p. 401) Connecting to the Internet (p. 402) Sensus Navigation troubleshooting (p. 462) Copyright (p. 462) Navigation license agreements (p. 460) System updates (p. 490) Internet connected vehicle (p. 401) Connecting to the Internet (p. 402) System settings (p. 456) Remote update procedure Internet connection The vehicle has to be connected to the Internet using Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, through a cable connected to the USB socket or using the vehicle's integrated modem. A symbol showing the connection's status can be seen in the center display's status bar. See also the articles "Internet connected vehicle" and "Connecting to the Internet." * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 457 NAVIGATION* Map updates from a computer with a USB flash drive Parameter Requirement Some preparation is necessary before a USB map update can be carried out. USB standard (1.0/2.0/3.0): At least 2.0 File system (Ext2/NTFS/ FAT32): FAT32 Capacity (8/16/32/64 GB): The file size varies from market to market. See the file size under "Detailed information" for your market at the Volvo Cars support site (support.volvocars.com). Preparations Current map version Generic example of a region. Tap Set as home region to set it as a home region Begin by determining the map version before beginning a download. To do so: 1. From the center display's Home view, swipe from right to left to access App view. USB flash drive 2. Select the Remote update service app. For use in updates, a USB flash drive has to meet the following requirements: 3. Mark a region and tap the down-arrow for information about the current map version or tap Install to see if there is a newer version. Computer/USB update procedure Downloading maps from the Internet to a USB flash drive Generic example of map regions. Tap the down-arrow for additional information 458 From a computer with an Internet connection, connect to the Volvo Cars support site * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. NAVIGATION* (support.volvocars.com) and follow the instructions on the screen. • 1. Tap "Detailed information" for the region to be updated. Updating 2. Information about the latest maps for the region will be displayed. Verify that it is newer than the version in the vehicle. 3. Connect a USB flash drive to the computer and download the update to the USB drive. 1. Activate the navigation system (see the previous section "Current map version"). 2. Connect the USB drive to the vehicle's USB socket in the tunnel console. 3. The navigation system will automatically detect any available updates. The update's progress will be displayed on the screen as %. The amount of time for the download varies according to the size of the file and the speed of the Internet connection. Transferring the updated maps from the USB drive to the vehicle The driver must tap Confirm to start the update or Cancel to interrupt it. 4. Tap Confirm. The update will begin and progress information will be shown on the center display. 5. The center display will indicate when the update has been completed. Remove the USB drive from the socket. 6. Verify that the correct map information has been transferred by repeating the procedure in "Current map version." General information This transfer may take between 30–60 minutes depending on the file size. This must be done with the navigation and infotainment systems activated. If the engine is not running, it may be necessary to connect a battery charger to avoid discharging the battery. An update can also be done while driving. Information/media stored on the vehicle's hard drive Interruptions What happens if... Answer ...the infotainment system is turned off while an update is in progress? The process will pause and will continue automatically when the system is reactivated. ...the USB flash drive is removed from the USB socket while an update is in progress? The process will pause and will continue automatically when the USB drive is reconnected to the USB socket. If an update is interrupted, an explanatory text will always appear on the center display. For additional information, see the Volvo Cars support site (support.volvocars.com) or contact a Volvo retailer. Related information • Map updates with MapCare (p. 456) During a complete map download, certain infotainment system functions may not be available or have limited functionality: • • Navigation Voice commands * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 459 NAVIGATION* Navigation license agreements END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR DISTRIBUTION BY HERE Europe, the Middle East and/or Africa. The Data includes certain information and related content provided under license to HERE from third parties and is subject to the applicable supplier terms and copyright notices set forth at the following URL: FOR THE AMERICAS/ASIA PACIFIC here.com/supplierterms The following is information for the end-user of the Sensus Navigation system. END-USER TERMS TERMS AND CONDITIONS The content provided (“Data”) is licensed, not sold. By opening this package, or installing, copying, or otherwise using the Data, you agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. If you do not agree to the terms of this agreement, you are not permitted to install, copy, use, resell or transfer the Data. If you wish to reject the terms of this agreement, and have not installed, copied, or used the Data, you must contact your retailer or HERE North America, LLC (as defined below) within thirty (30) days of purchase for a refund of your purchase price. To contact HERE, please visit www.here.com. The Data is provided for your personal, internal use only and may not be resold. It is protected by copyright, and is subject to the following terms (this “End User License Agreement”) and conditions which are agreed to by you, on the one hand, and HERE and its licensors (including their licensors and suppliers) on the other hand. For purposes of these terms, “HERE” shall mean License Limitations on Use: You agree that your li¬cense to use this Data is limited to and conditioned on use for solely personal, noncommercial purposes, and not for service bureau, timesharing or other similar purposes. Except as otherwise set forth herein, you agree not to otherwise reproduce, copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or reverse engineer any portion of this Data, and may not transfer or distribute it in any form, for any purpose, except to the extent permitted by mandatory laws. (a) HERE North America, LLC with respect to Data for the Americas and/or the Asia Pacific region and (b) HERE Europe B.V. for Data for 460 License Limitations on Transfer: Your limited license does not allow transfer or resale of the Data, except on the condition that you may transfer the Data and all accompanying materials on a permanent basis if: (a) you retain no copies of the Data; (b) the recipient agrees to the terms of this End User License Agreement; and (c) you transfer the Data in the exact same form as you purchased it by physically transferring the original media (e.g., the CDROM or DVD you purchased), all original packaging, all Manuals and other documentation. Specifically, Multidisc sets may only be transferred or sold as a complete set as provided to you and not as a subset thereof. Additional License Limitations: Except where you have been specifically licensed to do so by HERE in a separate written agreement, and without limiting the preceding paragraph, your license is conditioned on use of the Data as prescribed in this agreement, and you may not (a) use this Data with any products, systems, or applications installed or otherwise connected to or in communication with vehicles capable of vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, real time route guidance, fleet management or similar applications; or (b) with, or in communication with, including without limitation, cellular phones, palmtop and handheld computers, pagers, and personal digital assistants or PDAs. Warning: This Data may contain inaccurate or incom¬plete information due to the passage of time, changing circumstances, sources used and the nature of collecting comprehensive geographic Data, any of which may lead to incorrect results. No Warranty: This Data is provided to you “as is”, and you agree to use it at your own risk. HERE and its licensors (and their licensors and suppliers) make no guarantees, representations or warranties of any kind, express or implied, arising by law or otherwise, including but not limited to, content, quality, accuracy, completeness, effectiveness, reliability, fitness for * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. NAVIGATION* a particular purpose, usefulness, use or results to be obtained from this Data, or that the Data or server will be uninterrupted or error free. Disclaimer of Warranty: HERE AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NONINFRINGEMENT. Some States, Territories and Countries do not allow certain warranty exclusions, so to that extent the above exclusion may not apply to you. Disclaimer of Liability: HERE AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THIS DATA; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS DATA, ANY DEFECT IN THIS DATA, OR THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR CON¬DITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF HERE OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some States, Territories and Countries do not allow certain liability exclusions or damages limitations, so to that extent the above may not apply to you. Export Control: You agree not to export from any¬where any part of the Data or any direct product thereof except in compliance with, and with all licenses and ap¬provals required under, applicable export laws, rules and regulations, including but not limited to the laws, rules and regulations administered by the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the U.S. Department of Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and Security of the U.S. De¬partment of Commerce. To the extent that any such export laws, rules or regulations prohibit HERE from complying with any of its obligations hereunder to deliver or distribute Data, such failure shall be excused and shall not constitute a breach of this Agreement. Entire Agreement: These terms and conditions constitute the entire agreement between HERE (and its licensors, including their licensors and suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject matter hereof, and supersedes in their entirety any and all written or oral agreements previously existing between us with respect to such subject matter. Severability: You and HERE agree that if any portion of this agreement is found illegal or unenforceable, that portion shall be severed and the remainder of the Agreement shall be given full force and effect. Governing Law: The above terms and conditions shall be governed by the laws of the State of Illinois (for Data for the Americas and/or the Asia Pacific region) or The Netherlands (for Data for Europe, the Middle East and Africa), without giving effect to (i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations Convention for Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded. For any and all disputes, claims and actions arising from or in connection with the Data (“Claims”), you agree to submit to the personal juris¬diction of (a) the State of Illinois for Claims related to Data for the Americas and/or the Asia Pacific region pro¬vided to you hereunder, and (b) The Netherlands for Data for Europe, the Middle East and/or Africa provided to you hereunder. Government End Users: If the Data is being acquired by or on behalf of the United States government or any other entity seeking or applying rights similar to those customarily claimed by the United States government, this Data is a “commercial item” as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in accordance with this End User License Agreement, and each copy of Data delivered or otherwise furnished shall be marked and embedded as appropriate with the following * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 461 NAVIGATION* “Notice of Use”, and be treated in accordance with such Notice: NOTICE OF USE CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/ SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: 425 West Randolph Street, Chicago, IL 60606. This Data is a commercial item as defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to the End User License Agreement under which this Data was provided. © 1987-2015 HERE. All rights reserved. If the Contracting Officer, federal government agency, or any federal official refuses to use the legend provided herein, the Contracting Officer, federal government agency, or any federal official must notify HERE prior to seeking additional or alternative rights in the Data. © 1987-2015 HERE. All rights reserved. Related information • • Map updates with MapCare (p. 456) Copyright (p. 462) Copyright For © Copyright information, see the article "Licence agreements for map navigation." Related information • • Map updates with MapCare (p. 456) Navigation license agreements (p. 460) Sensus Navigation troubleshooting The following information provides answers to frequently asked questions. The vehicle's location on the map is not correct The navigation system's accuracy is approx. 65 ft (20 meters). Accuracy may be reduced slightly when driving on a road that is parallel with another road, winding roads, multi-level roads and long straightaways with no distinct curves. High mountains, buildings, tunnels, viaducts, multi-level roads, etc., may also affect GPS signal reception, which may also reduce the system's capacity to calculate the vehicle's location accurately. The system does not always calculate the fastest/shortest route Route calculation takes factors such as distance, road width, type of road, number of right/left turns, traffic circles, etc., into account to find the theoretically best route. Familiarity with an area may enable you to find a more efficient route to your destination. The system uses toll roads, highways or ferries even though I have chosen to avoid them When calculating longer routes, the system may have to choose major roads for technical reasons. 462 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. NAVIGATION* The types of roads that you have chosen to avoid will not be used if there are viable alternatives. After being transported, the vehicle's location on the map is not correct If the vehicle has been transported (e.g., on a ferry or train) where GPS signals have been blocked, it may take up to 5 minutes before its location will be shown correctly. The car symbol moves erratically after new tires have been installed In addition to GPS signals, the navigation system also uses the speedometer and a gyroscopic sensor to calculate the vehicle's current location and speed. If e.g., a spare tire or snow tires have been installed, the system has to "learn" the new tire dimensions. To do so, drive for a short period on a road with unobstructed GPS reception. The map does not correspond to actual road conditions Switch off the navigation system and the ignition. Restart but remain at a standstill for a minute or so before driving. The map information is not up-to-date See the next heading. How can I check which map version I have? 1. From the center display's Home view, swipe from right to left to display App view. 2. Select the Remote update service app. This contains information about the current map version. See also "Updating map data with MapCare" for additional information or contact your Volvo retailer. Related information • Getting started with Sensus Navigation (p. 432) • Map updates with MapCare (p. 456) Due to road changes/additions/rerouting/new traffic regulations, the map database may not be up-to-date. The database is continuously being updated. Consult your Volvo retailer. The car symbol jumps forward or spins Before you begin to drive, the system may need several seconds to determine the vehicle's location. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 463 WHEELS AND TIRES WHEELS AND TIRES Tires Your vehicle is equipped with tires according to the vehicle's tire information placard on the Bpillar (the structural member at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door opening). CAUTION Some Volvo models are equipped with an Ultra High Performance tire and wheel combination designed to provide maximum dry pavement performance with consideration for hydroplaning resistance. They may be more susceptible to road hazard damage and, depending on driving conditions, may achieve a tread life of less than 20,000 miles (30,000 km). Even if this vehicle is equipped with Volvo’s advanced AWD or stability system, these tires are not designed for winter driving, and should be replaced with winter tires when weather conditions dictate. The tires have good road holding characteristics and offer good handling on dry and wet surfaces. It should be noted however that the tires have been developed to give these features on snow/ ice-free surfaces. Most models are equipped with "all-season" tires, which provide a somewhat higher degree of road holding on slippery surfaces than tires without the "all-season" rating. However, for optimum 1 466 Not available in all models. road holding on icy or snow-covered roads, we recommend suitable winter tires on all four wheels. When replacing tires, be sure that the new tires are the same size designation, type (radial) and preferably from the same manufacturer, on all four wheels. Otherwise there is a risk of altering the car's roadholding and handling characteristics. New tires Tire age Tires degrade over time, even when they are not being used. It is recommended that tires generally be replaced after 6 years of normal service. Heat caused by hot climates, frequent high loading conditions or Ultra Violet (U.V.) exposure can accelerate the aging process. The temporary spare1 should also be replaced at 6-year intervals, even if it has never been used. A tire's age can be determined by the DOT stamp on the sidewall (see the illustration). A tire with e.g., visible cracks or discoloration should be replaced immediately. Tire economy • • Remember that tires are perishable goods. As of 2000, the manufacturing week and year (Department of Transportation (DOT) stamp) will be indicated with 4 digits (e.g., 0715 means that the tire illustrated was manufactured during week 7 of 2015). Maintain correct tire pressure. Avoid fast starts, hard braking and tire screeching. • • Tire wear increases with speed. • Unbalanced wheels impair tire economy and driving comfort. • Tires must maintain the same direction of rotation throughout their lifetime. • When replacing tires, the tires with the most tread should be mounted on the rear wheels Correct front wheel alignment is very important. WHEELS AND TIRES to reduce the chance of oversteer during hard braking. • Hitting curbs or potholes can damage the tires and/or wheels permanently. Tires not mounted on rims should be stored on their sides or standing upright, but should not be suspended. CAUTION Tire rotation Tires should preferably be stored in a cool, dry, dark place, and should never be stored in close proximity to solvents, gasoline, oils, etc. Your vehicle has no required tire rotation. Tire wear is affected by a number of factors such as tire inflation, ambient temperature, driving style, etc. WARNING NOTE • If the tires are rotated, they should only be moved from front to rear or vice versa. They should never be rotated left to right/right to left. • Ideally, tire rotation should be done the first time after approximately 3,000 miles (5,000 km) and thereafter at 6,000-mile (10,000-km) intervals. Some customers find that tire rotation may help to get extra mileage from tire life. • Tire rotation should only be performed if front/rear tire wear is fairly even and tread height is above 1/16" (1.6 mm). Storing wheels and tires When storing complete wheels (tires mounted on rims), they should be suspended off the floor or placed on their sides on the floor. Tire sidewall designations The following information can be found on a tire's sidewall. • The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo are specified to meet stringent stability and handling requirements. Unapproved wheel/tire size combinations can negatively affect your vehicle's stability and handling. • Any damage caused by installation of unapproved wheel/tire size combinations will not be covered by your new vehicle warranty. Volvo assumes no responsibility for death, injury, or expenses that may result from such installations. Related information • • Federal law mandates that tire manufacturers place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires (see the illustration). The vehicle has been certified with certain combinations of wheels and tires. The following information is listed on the tire sidewall: The tire designation: Checking tire inflation pressure (p. 473) Tread wear indicator (p. 471) 467 WHEELS AND TIRES NOTE Please be aware that the following tire designation is an example only and that this particular tire may not be available on your vehicle. 1. 2. 65: The ratio of the tire's height to its width in percent. 3. R: Radial tire (the designation RF and the symbol indicate that the vehicle is equipped with optional self-supporting run flat tires2. 4. 15: The diameter of the wheel rim (in inches). 5. 95: The tire's load index. In this example, a load index of 95 equals a maximum load of 1521 lbs (690 kg). 6. H: The tire's speed rating, or the maximum speed at which the tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time, carrying a permissible load for the vehicle, and with correct inflation pressure. For example, H indicates a speed rating of 130 mph (210 km/h). 2 468 215: the width of the tire (in millimeters) from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. The larger the number, the wider the tire. Self-supporting run flat tires may not be available on all models NOTE The tire's load index and speed rating may not appear on the sidewall because they are not required by law. 7. M+S or M/S = Mud and Snow, AT = All Terrain, AS = All Season 8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the letters "DOT" and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, 1510 means that the tire was manufactured during week 15 of 2010. The numbers in between are marketing codes used at the manufacturer's discretion. This information helps a tire manufacturer identify a tire for safety recall purposes. 9. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of plies indicates or the number of layers of rubbercoated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others. 10. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in pounds and kilograms that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the vehicle's tire information placard located on the B-Pillar for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle. 11. Treadwear, Traction, and Temperature grades. 12. Maximum permissible inflation pressure: the greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire. This limit is set by the tire manufacturer. Speed Symbol A tire's Speed Symbol (SS) indicates the maximum speed for which the tire has been certified and should be at least equivalent to the vehicle's top speed. Winter tires, with our without studs, are exceptions and may use a lower SS. When winter tires are installed, the vehicle may not be driven faster than the tires' SS. The vehicle's speed should always be determined by the posted speed limit and traffic and road conditions, not the tire's SS. The following table indicates the maximum permissible speed for each SS. WHEELS AND TIRES Speed Symbol Wheel (rim) designations Tire terminology M 81 mph (130 km/h) Wheel and rim dimensions are shown in the following table. The following is a glossary of tire-related terms. Q 100 mph (160 km/h) T 118 mph (190 km/h) H 130 mph (210 km/h) V 149 mph (240 km/h) W 168 mph (270 km/h) Y 186 mph (300 km/h) • • The vehicle has been certified with certain combinations of wheels and tires. The following table shows an example of wheel dimensions: 8Jx18x42.5. This wheel may not be available on your vehicle. 8 Wheel width in inches J Rim flange profile WARNING 18 Wheel diameter in inches The wheel and tire sizes for your Volvo are specified to meet stringent stability and handling requirements. Unapproved wheel/tire size combinations can negatively affect your vehicle's stability and handling. 42.5 Offset in mm (distance from the center of the wheel to the wheel's contact surface on the hub) Any damage caused by installation of unapproved wheel/tire size combinations will not be covered by your new vehicle warranty. Volvo assumes no responsibility for death, injury, or expenses that may result from such installations. The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such as standard load, radial tubeless, etc. • Tire information placard: A placard showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes, recommended inflation pressure, and the maximum weight the vehicle can carry. • Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of each tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacturer. • Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire. • Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tires load carrying capability. • Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire's load carrying capability. • • kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure. Related information • Tire sidewall designations (p. 467) PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure. 469 WHEELS AND TIRES • • Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim. • Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread. • Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle. • Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated. • Maximum load rating: a figure indicating the maximum load in pounds and kilograms that can be carried by the tire. This rating is established by the tire manufacturer. • Maximum permissible inflation pressure: the greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire. This limit is set by the tire manufacturer. • • 470 B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door. Recommended tire inflation pressure: inflation pressure, established by Volvo, which is based on the type of tires that are mounted on a vehicle at the factory. This information can be found on the tire inflation placard(s) located on the driver's side B-pillar and in the tire inflation table in this chapter. Cold tires: The tires are considered to be cold when they have the same temperature as the surrounding (ambient) air. This temperature is normally reached after the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours. Tire direction of rotation Incorrectly mounted tires impair the car's braking properties and ability to force aside rain, snow and slush. The arrows shows the direction of rotation of the tire • The tires with the most tread should always be on the rear axle (to help reduce the risk of skidding). • When switching between summer and winter tires, mark the tires to indicate where they were mounted on the car, e.g., LF = left front, RR = right rear • Tires with tread designed to roll in only one direction are marked with an arrow on the sidewall. • Contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician if you are unsure about the tread depth. Related information • Tires (p. 466) WHEELS AND TIRES Tread wear indicator Loading specifications Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit The tires have wear indicator strips running across or parallel to the tread. Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. 1. Locate the statement "the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds" on your vehicle's placard. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 – 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.) 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Weight designations Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle's Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/CMVSS) label, and the vehicle's tire information placard: Curb weight The weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment. The letters TWI are printed on the side of the tire. When approximately 1/16" (1.6 mm) is left on the tread, these strips become visible and indicate that the tire should be replaced. Tires with less than 1/16" (1.6 mm) tread offer very poor traction. Capacity weight When replacing worn tires, it is recommended that the tire be identical in type (radial) and size as the one being replaced. Using a tire of the same make (manufacturer) will help prevent alteration of the driving characteristics of the vehicle. The maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These numbers are shown on the Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS/CMVSS) label. The total load on each axle must never exceed its maximum permissible weight. Related information • • Tire direction of rotation (p. 470) All weight added to the curb weight, including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer hitch tongue load is also part of cargo weight. Permissible axle weight Gross vehicle weight (GVW) The vehicle's curb weight + cargo + passengers. Checking tire inflation pressure (p. 473) 471 WHEELS AND TIRES WARNING • • Exceeding the permissible axle weight, gross vehicle weight, or any other weight rating limits can cause tire overheating resulting in permanent deformation or catastrophic failure. Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the tires that were original equipment on the vehicle because this will lower the vehicle's GVW rating. Use only tires with the correct load carrying capacity. Consult your Volvo retailer for information. Related information • • Label information (p. 534) Weights (p. 539) Uniform Tire Quality Grading ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST CONFORM TO FEDERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS IN ADDITION TO THESE GRADES. Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between the tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A TREADWEAR The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half (1 ½) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and many depart significantly from the norm due to variation in driving habits, maintenance practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. (straight-ahead) traction tests and is not a measure of cornering (turning) traction. WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight-ahead) traction tests and is not a measure of cornering (turning) traction. TEMPERATURE The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a minimum level of performance that all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. TRACTION The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking 472 WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and tire failure. WHEELS AND TIRES Snow tires and chains The use of snow chains and/or winter tires can help improve traction in winter driving conditions. Snow chains can be used on your Volvo with the following restrictions: • Snow chains should be installed on front wheels only. Use only Volvo approved snow chains. • If accessory, aftermarket or "custom" tires and wheels are installed and are of a size different than the original tires and wheels, chains in some cases CANNOT be used. Sufficient clearances between chains and brakes, suspension and body components must be maintained. • Some strap-on type chains will interfere with brake components and therefore CANNOT be used. • All Wheel Drive models: Snow chains should only be installed on the front wheels. • Certain size tires may not allow the assembly of snow chains/traction devices. Consult your Volvo retailer for additional snow chain information. CAUTION Checking tire inflation pressure • Snow chains should not be used on wheels larger than 19". • Always follow the chain manufacturer's installation instructions carefully. Install chains as tightly as possible and retighten periodically. Correct tire inflation pressure helps improve driving stability, save fuel and increase the service life of the tires. • Check local regulations regarding the use of snow chains before installing. • • Use single-sided snow chains only. • Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns when driving with snow chains. • The handling of the vehicle can be adversely affected when driving with chains. Avoid fast or sharp turns as well as locked wheel braking. Never exceed the chain manufacturer's specified maximum speed limit. (Under no circumstances should you exceed 31 mph (50 km/h). WARNING • Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire failure and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation, or "blow-out," with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury. • Under-inflated tires reduce the load carrying capacity of your vehicle. Cold tires Inflation pressure should be checked when the tires are cold. The tires are considered to be cold when they have the same temperature as the surrounding (ambient) air. This temperature is normally reached after the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours. After driving a distance of approximately 1 mile (1.6 km), the tires are considered to be hot. If you have to drive farther than this distance to pump your tire(s), check and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure when you get to the pump. When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also change. A 10-degree 473 WHEELS AND TIRES temperature drop causes a corresponding drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure, which can be found on the vehicle's tire information placard or certification label. of the factory-mounted tires on your vehicle, as well as load limits and inflation pressure. NOTE • If checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, never "bleed" or reduce air pressure. The tires are hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated. • Recommended inflation pressures • Tire inflation placard A tire inflation pressure placard is located on the driver's side B-pillar (the structural member at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door opening). This placard indicates the designation 3 474 Not available in all models. The placard shown indicates inflation pressure for the tires installed on the vehicle at the factory only. A certain amount of air seepage from the tires occurs naturally and tire pressure fluctuates with seasonal changes in temperature. Always check tire pressure regularly. Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation pressure, including the spare3, at least once a month and before long trips. You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic service station gauges may be inaccurate. • Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire performance and wear. • Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause uneven treadwear patterns. Checking tire pressure 1. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire gauge onto the valve. 2. Add air to reach the recommended air pressure. 3. Replace the valve cap. CAUTION • After inflating the tires, always reinstall the valve cap to help avoid damage to the valve from dirt, gravel, etc. • Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps could corrode and become difficult to remove. 4. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded that could puncture the tire and cause an air leak. 5. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts, bulges or other irregularities. 6. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare. WHEELS AND TIRES NOTE • If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge. • Some spare tires require higher inflation pressure than the other tires. Consult the tire inflation pressure table or the inflation pressure placard. Changing tires When changing wheels to another dimension, always follow Volvo's instructions. Tools in the cargo compartment Tools for e.g., changing wheels, etc. are located under the cargo compartment floor. When changing to tires of another dimension If you mount tires with a dimension other than the factory-installed tires, contact an authorized Volvo retailer to update the vehicle's software. This may also be necessary when changing from summer to winter tires, or vice versa. Related information • • • • Snow tires and chains (p. 473) Spare tire (p. 476) Installing a wheel (p. 479) Removing a wheel (p. 478) The foam block under the cargo compartment floor contains the towing eyelet, the tool for removing plastic wheel bolt covers, the jack* and the lug wrench*. There is also a storage space for the tool used to remove locking wheel bolts. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 475 WHEELS AND TIRES Jack CAUTION The jack is used to raise the vehicle, for example when mounting winter wheels, etc. WARNING 476 • The jack must correctly engage the jack attachment. • Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, nonslippery surface. • Never allow any part of your body to be extended under a vehicle supported by a jack. • Use the jack intended for the vehicle when changing a tire. For any other job, use stands to support the vehicle. • Apply the parking brake and put the gear selector in the Park (P) position. • Block the wheels standing on the ground, use rigid wooden blocks or large stones. • The jack should be kept well-greased and clean, and should not be damaged. • No objects should be placed between the base of jack and the ground, or between the jack and the attachment bar on the vehicle. • When not in use, the jack* should be kept in its storage compartment under the cargo compartment floor. • The jack provided with your vehicle is intended to be used only in temporary situations such as changing wheels in the event of a flat tire. Only the jack that came with your particular model should be used to lift the vehicle. If the vehicle needs to be lifted more frequently or for a prolonged period, using a garage jack or hoist is recommended. Always follow this device’s instructions for use. Spare tire The spare tire in your vehicle is called a "Temporary Spare". NOTE • The vehicle should never be driven faster than 50 mph (80 km/h) when the spare tire is being used. • The spare tire is only intended for temporary use. Replace it with a normal wheel as soon as possible. • The vehicle's handling may be altered by the use of the spare tire and ground clearance will be reduced. Do not wash the vehicle in an automatic car wash if the Temporary Spare is being used. • Recommended tire pressure (see the placard on the B-pillar) should be maintained irrespective of which position on the vehicle the temporary spare tire is used on. • In the event of damage to this tire, a new one can be purchased from your Volvo retailer. Models with leveling control* If the vehicle is equipped with the optional pneumatic suspension, this feature must be turned off before raising the vehicle with the jack. To do so, go to Settings Vehicle Disable Suspension & Leveling Control in the center display's Top view. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. WHEELS AND TIRES WARNING Current legislation prohibits the use of the "Temporary Spare" tire other than as a temporary replacement for a punctured tire. It must be replaced as soon as possible by a standard tire. Road holding and handling may be affected with the "Temporary Spare" in use. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). CAUTION The vehicle must not be driven with wheels of different dimensions or with a spare tire other than the one that came with the vehicle. The use of different size wheels can seriously damage your car's transmission. CAUTION The vehicle must never be driven with more than one temporary spare wheel. 4. Lift out the spare tire. Related information • • • • Wheel bolts The wheel bolts hold the wheel in place. Changing tires (p. 475) CAUTION Removing a wheel (p. 478) Wheel bolts should be tightened to 103 ft. lbs. (140 Nm). Over-tightening could damage the threads. Wheel bolts (p. 477) Checking tire inflation pressure (p. 473) Only use wheels/rims that have been tested and approved by Volvo and are included in Volvo's product range. Use a torque wrench to check that the wheel bolts are tightened correctly. Locking wheel bolts* A tool for removing locking wheel bolts can be found in the foam block under the cargo compartment floor. Related information • • Changing tires (p. 475) Installing a wheel (p. 479) The spare tire is located under the floor of the cargo compartment. A retaining bolt holds the spare tire and foam block containing tools in place. Accessing the spare tire 1. Lift the rear edge of the cargo compartment floor. 2. Unscrew the retaining bolt. 3. Lift out the foam block holding the tools. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 477 WHEELS AND TIRES Removing a wheel WARNING Wheel changes should always be carried out correctly. • The jack must correctly engage the jack attachment. 1. Turn on the hazard warning flashers if the wheel change has to be done near passing traffic. • Be sure the jack is on a firm, level, nonslippery surface. • 2. Apply the parking brake and put the gear selector in P. Never allow any part of your body to be extended under a vehicle supported by a jack. • Models with suspension and level control*: Use the jack intended for the vehicle when changing a tire. For any other job, use stands to support the vehicle. • Apply the parking brake and put the gear selector in the Park (P) position. Turn this function off before raising the vehicle. • Block the wheels standing on the ground, use rigid wooden blocks or large stones. To do so, go to Settings Vehicle Disable Suspension & Leveling Control in the center display's Top view. • The jack should be kept well-greased and clean, and should not be damaged. • No objects should be placed between the base of jack and the ground, or between the jack and the attachment bar on the vehicle. CAUTION NOTE The jack provided with your vehicle is intended to be used only in temporary situations such as changing wheels in the event of a flat tire. Only the jack that came with your particular model should be used to lift the vehicle. If the vehicle needs to be lifted more frequently or for a prolonged period, using a garage jack or hoist is recommended. Always follow this device’s instructions for use. 3. Take out the jack*, lug wrench*, the tool for removing the plastic covers on the wheel bolts and the towing eyelet stowed under the floor of the cargo compartment. Tool for removing the plastic covers on the wheel bolts Remove the plastic covers on the wheel bolts. 4. 478 Block the wheels that are on the ground with wooden blocks or large stones. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. WHEELS AND TIRES 5. 7. Lug wrench and towing eyelet When hoisting the vehicle, it is essential that the jack (or garage lift arms) are positioned correctly on the underside of the vehicle. There are two jack attachment points on each side of the vehicle and there is a groove in the plastic cover at each attachment point. Position the jack under the attachment point to be used on a level, firm, non-slippery surface and crank it up until it is correctly aligned and seated in the attachment point. The pin on the jack's head must be positioned in the hole in the attachment point. Installing a wheel It is important to install wheels properly. 1. Clean the contact surfaces on the wheel and hub. 2. Lift the wheel and place it on the hub. 3. Install the wheel bolts and tighten hand-tight. Using the lug wrench, tighten crosswise until all bolts are snug. 4. Lower the vehicle to the ground and alternately tighten the bolts crosswise to 103 ft. lbs. (140 Nm). 5. Press the plastic covers onto the wheel bolts. Screw the towing eyelet into the lug wrench as shown in the illustration. CAUTION The towing eyelet must be screwed into the lug wrench as far as possible. 6. With the vehicle still on the ground, use the lug wrench/towing eyelet to loosen the wheel bolts ½ – 1 turn by exerting downward (counterclockwise) pressure. 8. Raise the vehicle until the wheel to be changed is lifted off the ground. Remove the wheel bolts. Related information • • • Wheel bolts (p. 477) Installing a wheel (p. 479) Jack (p. 476) 479 WHEELS AND TIRES CAUTION • After inflating the tires, always reinstall the valve cap to help avoid damage to the valve from dirt, gravel, etc. • Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps could corrode and become difficult to remove. Related information • • Wheel bolts (p. 477) Jack (p. 476) Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) TPMS provides a warning if inflation pressure in one or more tires is too low. It also uses a symbol (called a telltale) that will flash for 60 seconds and then glow steadily if there is a system malfunction. TPMS uses sensors mounted in the tire valves to check inflation pressure levels. When the vehicle is moving at a speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) or faster, these sensors transmit inflation pressure data to a receiver located in the vehicle. If inflation pressure is too low, an indicator symbol will illuminate in the instrument panel and a text message will be displayed. Symbol Explanation The symbol illuminates to indicate low tire inflation pressure. If a malfunction occurs in the system, the tire pressure warning symbol will flash for approximately 1 minute and then remain illuminated. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires 480 of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle WHEELS AND TIRES start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. Messages in the instrument panel When the TPMS symbol illuminates, the following text messages may also be displayed: TPMS sensors can be installed on the valve hole area, on the factory-installed wheels as well as on optional ones. NOTE • After changing wheels, always check that the new wheels have TPMS sensors to avoid a system malfunction warning. If you change to tires with a different dimension than the factory-installed ones, the TPMS system must be reconfigured for these tires. This must be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. • TPMS does not replace the need for regular tire inspection and maintenance. If a tire is changed, or if the TPMS sensor is moved to another wheel, the rubber valve and valve core should be replaced. • When installing TPMS sensors, the vehicle must be parked for at least 15 minutes with the ignition off. If the vehicle is driven within 15 minutes, a TPMS error message will be displayed. If a spare wheel or other wheel without a TPMS sensor is used, a fault message will appear in the instrument panel after driving for a few minutes. Recommendations TPMS sensors should be mounted on all wheels used with the vehicle, including winter wheels. • Tire pressure low: the tire(s) affected will also be specified. • Tire needs air now: the tire(s) affected will also be specified. WARNING Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to tire failure, resulting in a loss of control of the vehicle. • Tire pressure system Service required. If TPMS cannot determine which tire(s) have low inflation pressure, general messages may be displayed, such as: Turning TPMS off4 • Tire pressure low Check tires • Tire needs air now Check tires 1. Park the vehicle and turn off the engine. 2. Activate ignition mode I. 4 Certain TPMS can be turned off in the center display's Top view. markets only. 481 WHEELS AND TIRES 3. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe Tire Pressure Monitor in the Top view and deselect (tap) the button. > The function will remain off until it is reactivated. Related information • • Checking inflation pressure (p. 482) Reinflating tires equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (p. 483) • Tire Pressure Monitoring System type approval (p. 484) • Ignition modes (p. 355) Checking inflation pressure Color indications: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System makes it possible to view the current inflation pressure of all four tires. • No color indicator: tire pressure is above the threshold for a low inflation pressure warning. • Yellow: low tire pressure. Stop and check/ reinflate the tire(s) as soon as possible. • Red: inflation pressure is very low. Stop immediately and check/reinflate the tire(s). • When no tire pressure values are shown then system has not learned the tire pressure values. It might be necessary to drive at a speed of at least 20 mph (30 km/h) for several minutes. • If the TPMS symbol (telltale) flashes for approx. 1 minute then glows steadily, and the message Tire pressure system Service required is displayed: this indicates that the system is not functioning correctly. Have it checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Checking inflation pressure Open the Car status app in the center display's Application view. Tap Status to see the current inflation pressure of all four tires. The on-screen graphic displays the inflation pressure. Please note that the sample tire pressures shown in the illustration are in bar. The unit of measure can be changed (e.g., to pound per scare inch (psi) in the center display's Settings menu, under System Units Tire Pressure. The illustration is generic and may vary from model to model or after a software update 482 Tire Pressure Monitoring System settings The unit of measure for tire inflation pressure can be changed in the center display's Top view by selecting Settings System Units Tire Pressure and tapping the desired unit. WHEELS AND TIRES Related information • Calibrating the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (p. 484) • Reinflating tires equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (p. 483) • Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (p. 480) Reinflating tires equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) When low tire pressure has been detected, a message will be displayed in the instrument panel and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System symbol will illuminate. Symbol Explanation Check and reinflate the tire(s) when the TPMS symbol illuminates and a message is displayed. 1. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the inflation pressure of the under-inflated tire(s). 2. Re-inflate the tire(s) to the correct pressure (consult the tire pressure placard located on the driver's side B-pillar (the structural member at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door opening). 3. In some cases, it may be necessary to drive the vehicle for several minutes at a speed of at least 20 mph (30 km/h) to erase the TPMS telltale warning and the text message. Please be aware that the TPMS telltale warning will not go out until the low tire pressure has been corrected. NOTE To help avoid incorrect tire inflation pressure, if possible only inflate the tires when they are cold. The tires are considered to be cold when they have the same temperature as the surrounding (ambient) air. This temperature is normally reached after the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours. After driving a distance of approximately 1 mile (1.6 km), the tires are considered to be warm. CAUTION When inflating tires with TPMS sensors, press the pump's mouthpiece straight onto the valve to help avoid bending or otherwise damaging the valve. CAUTION • After inflating the tires, always reinstall the valve cap to help avoid damage to the valve from dirt, gravel, etc. • Use plastic valve caps only. Metal caps could corrode and become difficult to remove. 483 WHEELS AND TIRES WARNING • • Incorrect inflation pressure could lead to tire failure, resulting in a loss of control of the vehicle. Tire monitoring systems cannot indicate sudden tire damage caused by external factors (e.g., a blowout) in advance. Related information • Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (p. 480) • Checking inflation pressure (p. 482) Calibrating the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)6 In certain situations, a text pertaining to calibration requirements may appear in the center display. This text is generic and does not apply to North American models. Tire Pressure Monitoring System type approval NOTE USA FCC ID: MRXVHSS4 Canada IC:2546A-VHSS4 M :VHSS4 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with licence exempt RSS standards of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 6 484 Certain markets only. WHEELS AND TIRES WARNING Changes or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. The term “IC:” before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. 485 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Volvo's service program Periodic maintenance and service performed at the intervals specified in your Warranty and Service Records Information booklet will help keep your vehicle running well. Introduction The maintenance services contain several checks that require special instruments and tools and therefore must be performed by a qualified technician. To keep your Volvo in top condition, specify time-tested and proven Genuine Volvo Parts and Accessories. The Federal Clean Air Act – U.S. The Federal Clean Air Act requires vehicle manufacturers to furnish written instructions to the ultimate purchaser to assure the proper servicing and function of the components that control emissions. These services, which are listed in the "Warranty and Service Records Information" booklet, are not covered by the warranty. You will be required to pay for labor and material used. Maintenance Your Volvo passed several major inspections before it was delivered to you, in accordance with Volvo specifications. The maintenance procedures outlined in the Warranty and Service Records Information booklet, many of which will positively affect your vehicle's emissions, should be performed as indicated. It is recommended that receipts for vehicle emission maintenance be retained in case questions arise concerning 488 maintenance. Inspection and maintenance should also be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected. Periodic maintenance helps minimize emissions Applicable warranties – U.S./Canada In accordance with applicable U.S. and Canadian regulations, the following list of warranties is provided. • • • • • • NOTE • Refer to your Warranty and Service Records Information booklet for a comprehensive service and maintenance schedule up to 150,000 miles (240,000 km). This program contains inspections and services necessary for the proper function of your vehicle and includes components that affect vehicle emissions. • The Warranty and Service Records Information booklet also contains detailed information concerning the warranties that apply to your vehicle. New Vehicle Limited Warranty Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty Corrosion Protection Limited Warranty Seat Belt and Supplemental Restraint Systems Limited Warranty Emission Design and Defect Warranty Emission Performance Warranty These are the federal warranties; other warranties are provided as required by state/provincial law. Refer to your separate Warranty and Service Records Information booklet for detailed information concerning each of the warranties. On-board Diagnostic System OBD II is part of your vehicle's computerized engine management system. It stores diagnostic information about your vehicle's emission controls. It can light the Check Engine light (MIL) if it detects an emission control "fault." A "fault" is a component or system that is not performing within an expected range. A fault may be permanent or temporary. OBD II will store a message about any fault. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING required disconnecting the battery, a period of driving is necessary to bring the OBD II system to "ready" for inspection. Two halfhour trips of mixed stop-and-go/highway driving are typically needed to allow OBD II to reach readiness. Your Volvo retailer can provide you with more information on planning a trip. Emission inspection readiness How do states use OBD II for emission inspections? Many states connect a computer directly to a vehicle's OBD II system. The inspector can then read "faults." In some states, this type of inspection has replaced the tailpipe emission test. How can my vehicle fail OBD II emission inspection? Your vehicle can fail OBD II emission inspection for any of the following reasons. • If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit, your vehicle may fail inspection. • If your vehicle's Check Engine light was lit, but went out without any action on your part, OBD II will still have a recorded fault. Your vehicle may pass or fail, depending on the inspection practices in your area. • If you had recent service that required disconnecting the battery, OBD II diagnostic information may be incomplete and "not ready" for inspection. A vehicle that is not ready may fail inspection. How can I prepare for my next OBD II emission inspection? • • If your Check Engine (MIL) light is lit – or was lit but went out without service, have your vehicle diagnosed and, if necessary, serviced by a qualified Volvo technician. If you recently had service for a lit Check Engine light, or if you had service that • Maintain your vehicle in accordance with your vehicle's maintenance schedule. Owner maintenance Periodic maintenance requirements and intervals are described in your vehicle's Warranty and Service Records Information booklet. • As needed: Wash the car, including the undercarriage, to reduce wear that can be caused by a buildup of dirt, and corrosion that can be caused by salt residues. Clean leaves and twigs from air intake vents at the base of the windshield, and from other places where they may collect. NOTE The following points can be carried out between the normally scheduled maintenance services. Complete service information for qualified technicians is available online for purchase or subscription at www.volvotechinfo.com. Each time the car is refueled: • • Check the engine oil level. Clean the windshield, windshield wipers, headlights, and taillights. Monthly: • Check cold tire pressure in all tires. Inspect the tires for wear. • Check that engine coolant and other fluid levels are between the indicated "min" and "max" markings. • Clean interior glass surfaces with a glass cleaner and soft paper towels. • Wipe driver information displays with a soft cloth. Visually inspect battery terminals for corrosion. Corrosion may indicate a loose terminal connector, or a battery near the end of its useful service life. Consult your Volvo retailer for additional information. Related information • Climate system service (p. 495) 489 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING System updates NOTE Updates are available for infotainment-related services and Internet connections. If system software updates are available, they can be to be downloaded all at once or separately. Downloading data may affect other system features that share the Internet connection. A download can be cancelled at any time or the other features can be temporarily turned off while the software download is underway. System (software) updates are handled through the Remote update service app in the center display's App view. Tap once to start a download app in Home view's lower sub-view. If no search for updates has been performed since the last time the infotainment system was started, a search will be initiated. No search will begin if a software download is underway. An icon in the System updates button indicates the number of updates that are currently available. Tap the button to display a list of updates that can be installed in the vehicle. 490 NOTE An update may be interrupted when the ignition is switched off. However, an update does not have to be completed when the ignition is switched off; it will resume automatically when the ignition is switched on again. Updating all system software – Select Install all at the bottom of the list. To avoid displaying a list, select Install all by the System updates button. For additional information and answers to commonly asked questions pertaining to the function and downloading system updates, go to support.volvocars.com. Updating individual programs – Select Install to choose the software to be Background searches for software updates is activated by default when the vehicle is delivered from the factory. – downloaded. Cancelling a download Tap the activity indicator that replaced the Install button on the screen when the download began. Keep in mind that a download can be cancelled but an installation that has already begun cannot be interrupted. Allowing background searches or software updates This function can be deactivated from the center display: 1. Go to the Settings in the center display's Top view and select Remote Update Service. 2. Tap System 3. Tap to deselect Auto Software Update. Remote Update Service. If an update is available, New software updates available will appear in the center display's status bar. Tap the message to start a download app in Home view's lower sub-view. As soon as the download app has started, an icon in the System updates button will indicate the number of downloads available. Related information • • Center display overview (p. 29) Navigating in the center display's views (p. 39) MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Remote updates Vehicle status Booking service and repairs With the vehicle connected to the Internet, updates for a number of the vehicle's systems can be downloaded from the center display. The vehicle's general status can be displayed in the center display along with the possibility to book service1 Connected Service Booking (CSB) makes it possible to use the vehicle's Internet connection to set up a time for service, maintenance and/or repairs. The Remote updates app is started from the center display's App view and makes it possible to: • • • search for and update system software update the Sensus Navigation maps download, update and uninstall apps Related information • Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps (p. 404) • • System updates (p. 490) 1 Map updates with MapCare (p. 456) The Car status app is started in the center display's App view and has three tabs: • Messages: stored messages • Status: tire pressure and engine oil level • Appointments: booking service or repairs1 Related information • • • • Using the center display (p. 46) Booking service and repairs (p. 491) Checking inflation pressure (p. 482) Checking and refilling engine oil (p. 521) The information is handled through the Car status app, which can be opened from the center display's App view. Information about your vehicle is sent to your retailer, who will contact you to make a workshop appointment. The system will also send a reminder as the appointment approaches and the Sensus Navigation system will provide directions to the workshop if necessary. This feature makes it convenient to book a workshop appointment directly from your vehicle. Vehicle-related information is sent to your retailer, who prepares your visit to the workshop. The retailer will send you an email with a link to the Volvo On-Line Service Scheduler where you can book a workshop appointment at a convenient time. Information about your retailer is also available in the vehicle so that you can contact the retailer/workshop at any time. Certain markets only. 491 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Before the service can be used Using the service 3. Volvo ID When it is time for service or in certain cases if repairs are necessary, a message will appear in the instrument panel and in the center display. This message is triggered by: Under Appointments, tap Request appointment. 4. Check that your Volvo ID is correct. 5. Check that the correct retailer is listed. If you prefer, simply tap the button to initiate a call to the retailer. 6. Tap Send appointment request. Your request and vehicle data will be sent to your retailer through the vehicle's Internet connection. > Volvo will send a booking invitation to your email address. 7. Open the email and click the link to the Volvo On-Line Service Scheduler for your retailer and book a workshop appointment at a convenient time with your preferred service advisor. Add any additional preferences and free text to your booking. At this point in the booking procedure, you can also change your preferred retailer by selecting the second link in the email, which leads you to the Volvo Retailer Locator where you can select another retailer. Click the "Service Appointment" link to start your booking. 8. When you have submitted your workshop booking in the Volvo On-Line Service Scheduler, your appointment will be confirmed online in an email and by a message in the center display after a short delay. • The owner (primary driver) must create or have a Volvo ID (see the article "Volvo ID"). • Register your Volvo ID in the vehicle as explained in the article "Volvo ID". If you have already registered a Volvo ID, use the same email address that you used to create the Volvo ID. Changing a Volvo ID email address If you would like to register a different email address, open the Volvo ID app and tap Change Volvo ID. Follow the instructions provided. See also the article "Volvo ID" for additional information. Selecting a Volvo retailer By default, the retailer where you purchased your vehicle will be your preferred retailer/Volvo authorized workshop who will perform service and repairs on your vehicle. To change the preferred retailer, go to Dealer Locator at volvocars.com and select a retailer, click "Service Scheduler" and book an appointment at the new preferred retailer. Prerequisites for booking service from the vehicle In order to book an appointment from the vehicle, it must be connected to the Internet (see the article "Internet connected vehicle"). 492 • the amount of time that has elapsed since the last service • the number of hours the engine has run since the last service • • mileage since the last service. Specific warnings or fault codes in the vehicle Booking service or repairs Submit a booking request whenever you need a workshop appointment or when a message regarding the need for service or repairs has been displayed in the instrument panel and in the center display. Sending an appointment request 1. Open the Car status app in the center display's App view. 2. Tap Appointments. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING 9. One day prior to your appointment, you will receive a reminder via email and a message will appear on the center display. 2. Tap Appointments. 3. Under Appointments, tap Send vehicle data. > A message confirming that vehicle information has been sent via the Internet connection will appear on the center display. Transmission of the vehicle information can be cancelled at any time by tapping the X in the activity indicator. 10. On the day of your appointment, a reminder will appear again on the center display. Viewing your appointments on the center display When the vehicle has received information about an appointment, a message will appear on the center display. – Viewing workshop information Tap the message to see the appointment details. • • Information about the vehicle can be sent at any time using its Internet connection. 1. Open the Car status app in the center display's App view. • • • • • • • • service requirements time since service was last performed function status fluid levels mileage (odometer reading) VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) The vehicle's software version Diagnostic information Related information Sending vehicle-related information Using this function does not sent a workshop appointment request to your retailer; only vehicle data will be transmitted to Volvo. This vehicle data can be accessed by any retailer if you call the retailer and provide your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). be sent using the Internet connection. Information about the vehicle includes: 1. Internet connected vehicle (p. 401) Volvo ID (p. 27) Open the Car status app in the center display's App view. 2. Tap Appointments. 3. Under Appointments, tap Retailer information. > A window with retailer information will appear. 4. If you prefer, call the retailer, or select an address or GPS coordinates to activate the navigation system. Booking and vehicle information When you make an appointment or send vehicle information from you vehicle, this information will 493 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Wi-Fi connection to a workshop The time a vehicle is in a workshop for service or repairs can be reduced by transmitting troubleshooting information as soon as the car reaches the workshop. This is done most conveniently by selecting Automatically connect when I arrive in the center display's Settings menu. Each time the vehicle slows down to a sufficiently low speed, it begins searching for a Wi-Fi network. If an authorized Volvo network (at a retailer or workshop) is found, a message will be displayed or a pop-up window will open in the center display (this applies to manual connections, see the section "Manually connecting to a workshop" below). Automatically connecting to a workshop Without driver confirmation This is the most convenient way to transmit trouble-shooting data. The driver does not need to confirm that the vehicle will establish a connection. If the vehicle stops at a workshop and the engine is switched off using the start knob, a message will appear above the status bar in the center display. The vehicle will be automatically connected when the driver's door is opened if the driver does not tap the Cancel button in the message. To help prevent the driver from being disturbed by unwanted requests to connect (e.g., if the 494 vehicle is often parked near a workshop with an authorized Volvo network), the vehicle will switch to manual connection if the driver cancels a connection request twice within 5 days. Changing the way a connection is made With driver confirmation 1. Pull down the center display's Top view and tap Settings. 2. Tap Communication Networks. 3. Select Automatically connect when I arrive, Ask before connecting or Never connect and never ask (manual connections). With this alternative, the driver must confirm a connection. If the vehicle stops at a workshop and the engine is switched off using the start knob, a pop-up window will open in the center display. The vehicle will be automatically connected when the driver's door is opened if the driver taps Connect in the pop-up window. If the driver does nothing or taps the pop-up window's Abort button, no attempt will be made to establish a connection. NOTE To help prevent the driver from being disturbed by unwanted requests to connect (e.g., if the vehicle is often parked near a workshop with an authorized Volvo network), the vehicle will switch to manual connection if the driver cancels a connection request twice within 5 days. Manually connecting to a workshop Manual connections are handled by the service technician. The type of connection (manual or automatic) can be changed in the center display's Settings menu. Volvo Service Related information • • Internet connected vehicle (p. 401) Settings view (p. 106) MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Climate system service Start battery Service and repairs on the air conditioning system should only be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. The start (main) battery is used to power the starter motor and other electrical components and systems. Troubleshooting and repairs The start battery should only be replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. The air conditioning system contains a flourescent tracer substance. Ultraviolet light is used to search for leaks in the system. Refrigerant R134a WARNING The air conditioning system contains the refrigerant R134a under pressure. Service and repairs on the system should only be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Related information • Climate control system (p. 176) The vehicle has an alternating current generator. The start battery is called an Absorbed Glass Mat (AGM) 12-volt battery that is dimensioned for use in vehicles with carbon dioxide-reducing functions such as Start/Stop and regenerative charging, and to support the vehicle's various electrical systems and functions. The service life of a battery is affected by factors such as driving conditions/style, the number of starts, climate, etc. Extreme cold may also further decrease the battery’s starting capacity. • Never disconnect the start battery while the engine is running. • Check that the start battery is correctly connected and that the clamps on its terminals are properly tightened. WARNING • Never expose the battery to open flame or electric spark. • • Do not smoke near the battery. Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. If contact occurs, flush the affected area immediately with water. Obtain medical help immediately if eyes are affected. WARNING PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. If the start battery is being charged, the support battery will also be charged. If an external auxiliary battery is used to start the vehicle, use the connection points in the engine compartment. The start battery's terminals should never be used. See the following illustration. 495 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING CAUTION • • The infotainment system's energy-saving feature may not function correctly or at all, and/or a message may be displayed if a battery charger or jumper cables are not connected properly. The negative terminal on the battery must never be used to connect a jumper cable or a battery charger. Only the ground point on the chassis may be used. NOTE • The service life of the start battery is shortened if it becomes discharged repeatedly. • The service life of the start battery is affected by factors such as driving conditions and climate. Extreme cold may also further decrease the battery's start capacity. • Because the battery’s starting capacity decreases with time, it may be necessary to recharge it if the vehicle is not driven for an extended period of time or if the vehicle is usually only driven short distances. • Driving for at least 15 minutes a week or connecting the battery to a charger with automatic maintenance charging will help keep it in good operating condition. • Keeping the start battery fully charged will help maximize its service life. Positive connection point Negative connection point Only modern battery chargers with controlled charging current should be used to charge the start and support batteries. Quick charge functions should not be used and could damage the battery. 496 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Battery The start battery is located in the cargo compartment H7 AGM H8 AGM Dimensions, L×W×H in. (mm) 12.4×6.9×7.5 (315×175×190) 13.9×6.9×7.5 (353×175×190) Capacity (Ah) 80 95 The H8 AGM is held in place by a strap. Ensure that this strap is pulled taut. There are two versions of the start battery, depending on the vehicle model. Battery Current (V) Cold start capacity (Cold Cranking Amperes - CCA) (A) H7 AGM H8 AGM 12 12 H7 AGM battery • When replacing the start battery or support battery in a vehicle with Start/Stop, an Absorbed Glass Mat (AGM) must be used. • When replacing the start battery, a new battery with the same specifications and dimensions must be used. The battery should only be replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Related information 800 850 H8 AGM battery with strap • • • Jump starting (p. 350) Support battery (p. 498) Battery symbols (p. 499) There is no strap for the H7 AGM battery. 497 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Support battery Vehicles equipped with Start/Stop are equipped with two 12-volt batteries. In addition to a heavy-duty start battery, models with Start/Stop also have a support battery that provides extra current during the Start/Stop function's start sequence. Dimensions, L×W×H in. (mm) Capacity (Ah) 5.9×3.5×5.1 (150×90×130) 10 • When replacing the start battery or support battery in a vehicle with Start/Stop, an Absorbed Glass Mat (AGM) must be used. • The greater the current consumption in the vehicle, the more the generator has to operate and the battery is charged. This increases fuel consumption. • When the start battery's charge is below the minimum permitted level, the Start/Stop function will be disabled. When the Start/Stop function is temporarily disabled due to high current consumption: • The support battery is located in a box next to the spring strut in the engine compartment The following table shows the specifications for the support battery: 498 Current (V) 12 Cold start capacity (Cold Cranking Amperes CCA) (A) 170 The engine will auto-start, even if the brake pedal is depressed. The support battery does not normally required more service than the start battery. If questions arise, consult a Volvo retailer or trained and qualified Volvo service technician. CAUTION When connecting an external start battery or a battery charger, the Start/Stop function may be temporarily disabled if the negative terminal on the vehicle's start battery is used to connect an external start battery or a battery charger. Only the negative connection point in the engine compartment may be used as a ground point. NOTE If the start battery is completely discharged and the vehicle has no normal electrical functions, and the engine is then started using an auxiliary battery or battery charger, the Start/Stop function will be activated. The engine can then be auto-stopped but may not auto-start again due to an insufficient charge level in the start battery. To help ensure auto-start, the start battery should be charged first. At a temperature of approx. 60 °F (15 °C), the battery should be charged for at least 1 hour, preferably using an external battery charger. At lower temperatures, the battery should be charged for 3–4 hours. If a charger is not available, it is advisable to disable the Start/Stop function until the battery is sufficiently recharged. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Related information • • • Start battery (p. 495) Start/Stop (p. 364) Conditions for Start/Stop (p. 365) Battery symbols Avoid smoking, open flames, and/or sparks. There are information and warning symbols on the battery. Wear protective goggles. Risk of explosion See the owner's manual for additional information. Recycle properly Keep batteries away from children. NOTE A used battery should be disposed of in an environmentally responsible manner. Consult your Volvo retailer or take the battery to a recycling station. Batteries contain corrosive acid. Related information • Start battery (p. 495) 499 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Fuses The fuses help protect the vehicle's electrical components from overloading or short circuits. WARNING Never use metal objects or fuses with higher amperage than those stated on the lists of fuses. Doing so could seriously damage or overload the vehicle's electrical system. If an electrical component fails to function, this may be due to a blown fuse. If the same fuse blows repeatedly, this indicates a problem with the component, which should be inspected by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Cargo compartment Related information • • • • Replacing fuses (p. 500) Fuses in the cargo compartment (p. 508) Fuses in the engine compartment (p. 501) Fuses in the passenger compartment (p. 505) Replacing fuses The fuses help protect the vehicle's electrical components from overloading or short circuits. Fuse replacement 1. See the list of fuse boxes for their locations. 2. Pull the fuse straight out and examine it from the side to see if the curved metal wire in the fuse is intact. 3. If the wire is broken, insert a new fuse of the same color and amperage (written on the fuse). WARNING Never use metal objects or fuses with higher amperage than those stated on the following pages. Doing so could seriously damage or overload the vehicle's electrical system. Location of the fuseboxes Related information • • • • Engine compartment Under the glove compartment 500 Fuses (p. 500) Fuses in the cargo compartment (p. 508) Fuses in the engine compartment (p. 501) Fuses in the passenger compartment (p. 505) MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Fuses in the engine compartment The fuses in the engine compartment help protect electrical components such as engine and brake functions. Fusebox, rear section: fuses 18–54 501 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Fusebox, front section: fuses 55–78 There is a fuse removal tool on the inside of the fuse box cover. Positions There is a decal on the inside of the cover with a list of fuses. 502 • Fuses 18–30, 35–37, 46–54 and 55–70 are called "Micro". • Fuses 31–34, 38–45 and 71–78 are called "MCase" and should only be replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Function A – – – – Function A Function A – – – – – – – – – – – – USB socket* 5 – – 12-volt socket in the cargo compartment 15 Heated windshield*, driver side Shunt 12-volt socket on the rear side of the tunnel console 15 Heated windshield*, driver side 40 Headlight washers* 25 12-volt socket in the front tunnel console 15 Windshield washer 25 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Function A Function A Function A – – – – Solenoids; Valves; Engine cooling system thermostat 10 Vacuum regulators; Coolant fan relay winding; Valve 7.5 Spoiler shutter control module; Radiator shutter control module; Fuel leakage detection 5 – – Horn 20 Passenger side headlight Alarm siren* 5 – – Brake system control module (valves, parking brake) 40 – – Windshield wipers 30 Battery connections control module 5 Tailgate window washer 25 5 Heated windshield*, passenger side 40 Air bags; Occupant Weight Sensor (OWS) – Brake system control module (ABS pump) – – 40 – Heated windshield*, passenger side Shunt Feed when ignition is switched on to: engine control module, transmission components, electrical power steering, central electrical module; 5 Brake system control module Driver side headlight 7.5 7.5 Accelerator pedal sensor 5 Transmission control module 15 Engine control module 5 – – – – – – – – Engine control module; Turbocharger valve 20 Heated oxygen sensors (front and rear) 15 Oil pump solenoid; A/C magnetic coupling; heated oxygen sensor (center) 15 Crankcase ventilation heater 7,5 Engine control module 20 Ignition coil; Spark plugs 15 - - – – - - - - - - * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 503 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Function A – – Starter motor Shunt Starter motor Shunt Related information • • 504 Fuses (p. 500) Replacing fuses (p. 500) MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Fuses in the passenger compartment The fuses in the passenger compartment help protect electrical components such as the 110volt socket, displays and door modules. Positions • Fuses 1, 3–21, 23–36, 39–53 and 55–59 are called "Micro". • Fuses 2, 22, 37–38 and 54 are called "MCase" and should only be replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Function A Function A – – Instrument panel 5 Center console buttons 5 110-volt socket 30 – – Sun sensor 5 Alarm system movement sensorA 5 – – Media player 5 – – 505 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Function A Function A Function A Steering wheel module 5 5 Multi-band antenna module 5 Module for start knob and parking brake 5 Control module for driver support functions Panorama roof and sun shade* 20 – – Heated steering wheel* module 15 Head-up display* 5 – – – – Courtesy lighting 5 – – – – – – 5 – – Ceiling console display (seat belt reminder, front passenger side airbag indicator) – – Climate system control module 15 Fuel pump control module 15 – – – – Driver side seat heating* 15 Passenger side seat heating* 15 Coolant pump 10 – – Humidity sensor 5 On-board diagnostics (OBDII) 5 Rear passenger-side door module 20 Center display 5 Fuses in the cargo compartment 10 Climate system blower module (front) 40 Internet connection control module; Volvo On Call control module 5 – Rear driver-side door module 20 – 7.5 Infotainment control module (amplifier) 40 Sensus control module Climate system blower module (rear) 40 – Instrument lighting; Courtesy lighting; Rearview mirror auto-dim function; Rain and light sensor; Rear tunnel console keypad*; Power front seats* 506 10 Tailgate window wiper – – Front driver-side door module 20 Active chassis* 20 – 10 – – – – * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Function A Front passenger-side door module 20 – – – – Circuit breaker for fuses 53 and 58 A 15 Certain markets only. Related information • • Fuses (p. 500) Replacing fuses (p. 500) 507 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Fuses in the cargo compartment The fuses in the cargo compartment help protect electrical components such as power seats*, airbags and seat belt tensioners. The fuse box is under the storage compartment on the right side Positions • • Fuses 13–17 and 21–36 are called "Micro". Fuses 1–12, 18–20 and 37 are called "MCase" and should only be replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. A Function A Pneumatic suspension* compressor 40 – – Heated rear seat (passenger side)* 30 Power tailgate* 25 Power passenger seat* module 20 Trailer hitch* control module 40 Seat belt tensioner module (passenger side) 40 Function A – Heated tailgate window 30 Heated rear seat (driver side)* – 508 Function – – – 30 – * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Function A Function A Internal relay windings 5 Heated rear seat (driver side)* 15 – – – – Foot movement detection module for opening the power tailgate* 5 BLIS* 5 – – – – Seat belt tensioner modules 5 Emission system actuator 5 – Folding third row seats backrest module* 20 Trailer hitch* control module 25 – Power driver seat* module 20 All Wheel Drive control module 15 Seat belt tensioner module (driver side) 40 Heated rear seat (passenger side)* 15 Parking camera* 5 – – Related information – – Fuses (p. 500) – – – – Airbag and seat belt tensioner modules 5 – – – • • – Replacing fuses (p. 500) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 509 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Replacing bulbs The halogen headlight bulbs can be replaced by the owner. Before the bulbs can be replaced, that plastic covering over the headlight housing has to be removed. Release the pins in the plastic covering's four clips by pressing them down with a screwdriver or similar object and remove the covering. NOTE • The turn signal, high/low beam, Daytime Running Light and parking light bulbs will be accessible when the plastic covering has been removed. For information regarding any bulbs not mentioned in this section, please contact your Volvo retailer or a trained and authorized Volvo service technician. • Always switch off the ignition before starting to replace a bulb. Put the covering back in place in the reverse order. • If an error message remains in the display after a faulty bulb has been replaced, contact an authorized Volvo workshop. • Condensation may form temporarily on the inside of the lenses of exterior lights such as headlights, fog lights, or taillights. This is normal and the lights are designed to withstand moisture. Normally, condensation will dissipate after the lights have been on for a short time. • The optional Active Bending Light bulbs contain trace amounts of mercury. These bulbs should always be disposed of by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. NOTE The pins in the clips have to be pressed back completely before the clips are placed in the plastic covering. When the covering is put back in place, the pins must be pressed so that their upper surface is flush with the surface of the clip. CAUTION To do so: Lift the rubber strip by pressing in toward the engine compartment. 510 Never touch the glass of bulbs with your fingers. Grease and oils from your fingers vaporize in the heat and will leave a deposit on the reflector, which will damage it. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING WARNING Turn signal • The ignition should be switched off completely (be in ignition mode 0) when replacing bulbs. Fog light with corner illumination (LED) • If the engine has been running just prior to replacing bulbs in the headlight housing, please keep in mind that components in the engine compartment will be hot. Taillight bulbs Front bulbs (vehicles with halogen headlights) Related information • • Bulb specifications (p. 515) Removing the rectangular headlight cover (p. 512) • • • Replacing parking light bulbs (p. 514) • Replacing low beam headlight bulbs (p. 512) Replacing front turn signal bulbs (p. 514) Replacing High Beam headlight bulbs (p. 513) Brake light (LED) Side marker light (LED) Backup light2 Taillight (LED) Side marker light Low beam High beam Turn signal (LED) Fog light (LED) High-mounted brake light (LED) Parking light/Daytime Running Light 2 Must be replaced by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. 511 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Removing the rectangular headlight cover Most of the bulbs in the headlight housing can be accessed when the rectangular cover has been removed. Before the rectangular cover can be removed, the plastic covering must be removed, see the article "Replacing bulbs" for information. 1. Loosen the cover's four screws with a T20 Torx screwdriver (1) but do not remove them completely (turning them 3–4 turns is enough). 2. Push the cover to the side. 3. Remove the cover. Put the cover back in place in the reverse order. 512 Related information • Replacing bulbs (p. 510) Replacing low beam headlight bulbs On models with halogen headlights, the low beam headlight bulb can be replaced by the owner. Before the bulb can be replaced, the plastic covering over the headlight housing has to be removed, see the article "Replacing bulbs." 1. Remove the round rubber cover from the headlight housing. 2. Remove the bulb by turning the bulb holder upward and then pulling it straight out. 3. Carefully pry the plastic sleeve by the connector's locking lug to release it. 4. Remove the connector from the bulb. 5. Insert a new bulb. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING 6. Insert the bulb in the socket and turn downward. It can only be inserted in one way. Replacing High Beam headlight bulbs 7. Put the rubber cover back into place. On models with halogen headlights, the High Beam headlight bulb can be replaced by the owner. Related information • • Replacing bulbs (p. 510) Bulb specifications (p. 515) Related information • Removing the rectangular headlight cover (p. 512) • Bulb specifications (p. 515) Before the bulb can be accessed, the headlight housing's rectangular cover must be removed, see the article "Removing the rectangular headlight cover." 1. Remove the bulb by turning the bulb holder upward and then pulling it straight out. 2. Carefully pry the plastic sleeve by the connector's locking lug to release it. 3. Remove the connector from the bulb. 4. Insert a new bulb. 5. Insert the bulb in the socket and turn downward. It can only be inserted in one way. 513 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Replacing parking light bulbs 5. On models with halogen headlights, the front parking light bulb can be replaced by the owner. Before the bulb can be accessed, the headlight housing's rectangular cover must be removed, see the article "Removing the rectangular headlight cover." If the high beam bulb was removed, insert the bulb in the socket and turn downward. It can only be inserted in one way. Related information • • Replacing bulbs (p. 510) Bulb specifications (p. 515) Replacing front turn signal bulbs On models with halogen headlights, the front turn signal bulb can be replaced by the owner. Before the bulb can be accessed, the headlight housing's rectangular cover must be removed, see the article "Removing the rectangular headlight cover". Remove the high beam bulb first by turning the bulb holder upward and then pulling it straight out. This makes it easier to access the parking light bulb. 514 1. Pull the bulb holder straight out. 2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out. 3. Insert a new bulb. 4. Insert the bulb holder in the socket and press it into place. 1. Press the retaining catches together and pull the bulb holder straight out. 2. The bulb holder and bulb must be replaced as one unit. 3. Press the new bulb holder into the socket. Related information • Removing the rectangular headlight cover (p. 512) • • Replacing bulbs (p. 510) Bulb specifications (p. 515) MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Bulb specifications The following specifications apply to models equipped with halogen headlights. If other bulbs need to be replaced, contact a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Function [W]A Type Low beam 55 H11 High Beam 65 H9 Turn signal 24 PY24W 21/5 W21/5W Daytime running light/ parking light A Watt Related information • Replacing bulbs (p. 510) 515 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Hoisting the vehicle When the vehicle is hoisted, the jack or garage lift must be positioned correctly under the vehicle. For vehicles equipped with leveling control*, if it is also equipped with the optional pneumatic suspension, this must be deactivated before the vehicle is hoisted. This is done from the center display: 516 1. Tap Settings in Top view. 2. Tap My Car 3. Select Disable Suspension & Leveling Control. Suspension . * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Location of the jack attachment points (triangles)/lifting points (red areas) NOTE The jack provided with your vehicle is intended to be used only in temporary situations such as changing wheels in the event of a flat tire. Only the jack that came with your particular model should be used to lift the vehicle. If the vehicle needs to be lifted more frequently or for a prolonged period, using a garage jack or hoist is recommended. Always follow this device’s instructions for use. WARNING • Ensure that the jack is positioned so that the vehicle cannot slide off it. • Always use axle stands or similar structures. Related information • • • Removing a wheel (p. 478) Installing a wheel (p. 479) Jack (p. 476) 517 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Opening and closing the hood Closing The hood is opened by releasing it from the passenger compartment and then by using the handle under the front edge of the hood. 1. Press down the hood until it begins to close due to its own weight. 2. When the handle under the front edge of the hood is in the lock, press down on the hood to close it completely. Opening WARNING Turn the handle under the front edge of the hood counterclockwise to release it from the lock and lift. Warning–hood not closed With the hood completely closed, pull the control (located to the left of the brake pedal). When the hood lock has been completely released, this symbol and a graphic will illuminate in the instrument panel and an audible signal will be given. If the vehicle begins to roll, the audible signal will be repeated several times. For additional information, see also the article "Door and seat belt reminders." NOTE If the warning symbol remains on or if the audible signal is given even if the hood is completely closed and locked, consult a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. 518 • Be sure the hood is completely unobstructed while it is being closed. • Check that the hood locks properly when closed. It must audibly lock on both sides. • Never drive if the hood is not completely closed and locked. • While driving, if there are any indications that the hood is not locked in the closed position, stop safely as soon as possible and close it completely. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Engine compartment overview The engine compartment overview shows some maintenance points. WARNING • The cooling fan (located at the front of the engine compartment, behind the radiator) may start or continue to operate (for up to 6 minutes) after the engine has been switched off. • Engine cleaning should only be done by a workshop. If engine cleaning agents are used when the engine has been running, there may a fire risk. • Before performing any operations in the engine compartment, the ignition should always be completely switched off (in mode 0) and there should be no remote keys in the passenger compartment. The gear selector should be in the P (park) position. If the engine has been running, wait until it has cooled before touching any components in the engine compartment. • The distributor ignition system operates at very high voltages. Special safety precautions must be followed to prevent injury. Always turn the ignition off when replacing distributor ignition components e.g. plugs, coil, etc. • Do not touch any part of the distributor ignition system while the engine is running. This may result in unintended movements and body injury. The layout of the engine compartment may differ slightly from model to model Coolant expansion tank Brake fluid reservoir Washer fluid reservoir Relay/fuse box Hood completely closed Air cleaner Related information Engine oil filler cap • • Engine compartment overview (p. 519) Door and seat belt reminders (p. 61) 519 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Related information • • • Ignition modes (p. 355) Opening and closing the hood (p. 518) Engine oil CAUTION The correct oil must be used for the stated oil change (service) intervals to apply. Refilling the windshield washer fluid reservoir (p. 524) • Not checking the oil level regularly can result in serious engine damage if the oil level becomes too low. • Oil that is lower than the specified quality can damage the engine. • Volvo does not recommend the use of oil additives. • Always add oil of the same type and viscosity as already used. • Oil changes should be carried out by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. • Using oil of higher than the specified quality is permitted and may be necessary for demanding driving. Volvo recommends: • Also, refer to the Warranty and Service Records information booklet for information on oil change intervals and oil specifications. Related information • 520 Checking and refilling engine oil (p. 521) MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Checking and refilling engine oil The oil level is checked electronically. Checking the oil level NOTE The oil level can be checked in the center display when the engine is not running. From the center display's Home view, swipe the screen from right to left to open App view. Tap Car status and then tap Status to show the oil level. Oil filler cap3 The system cannot detect changes in the oil level immediately. The vehicle must be driven approximately 20 miles (30 km) or have been parked on level ground with the engine off for 5 minutes before the oil level reading will be correct. • If the necessary conditions are not met for checking the oil level electronically (time interval after the engine was switched off, if the vehicle is parked on an incline, etc.), No values available will be displayed. This does not indicate a problem with the oil level sensor. Related information It may be necessary to top up engine oil between regularly scheduled services. • • No action is necessary until a message is displayed in the instrument panel. 3 • WARNING Oil level graphic in the center display • Do not allow oil to spill onto or come into contact with hot exhaust pipe surfaces. • If Engine oil level Service required is displayed, have the vehicle checked by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. The oil level may be too high. The oil level should be checked at regular intervals, particularly during the period up to the first scheduled maintenance service. Engine oil (p. 520) Ignition modes (p. 355) If the oil level sensor indicates that the level is too low, using the correct oil, top up with the amount of oil indicated as soon as possible. Models with an electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick. 521 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Windshield wipers in the service position The service position can be activated in two ways from the center display: The windshield wiper blades must be in the vertical (service) position for replacement, washing or to lift them away from the windshield when e.g., removing ice or snow. Via Function view Via Function view – – From Function view, tap the Wiper Service Position button. The indicator light in the button will illuminate when the service position is activated. > The windshield wipers will move to the vertical position. Via Settings 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. 2. Tap My Car 3. Tap the Wiper Service Position box. > The windshield wipers will move to the vertical position. Wipers in the service position CAUTION Be sure the wiper blades are not frozen in position before attempting to move them to the service position. Putting the windshield wipers in the service position The service position can be activated while the vehicle is stationary and the wipers are not activated. 522 Wipers Deactivating service position The service position can be deactivated in two ways from the center display: From Function view, tap the Wiper Service Position button. The indicator light in the button will go out when the service position is deactivated. Via Settings 1. Tap Settings in the center display's Top view. 2. My Car 3. Tap the Wiper Service Position to deselect the box. Wipers MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING The wipers will also leave the service position if: Replacing wiper blades • • The wipers are activated. The wiper blades should be replaced regularly for best effect. • The rain sensor is activated. The windshield/headlight washers are activated. CAUTION If the wiper arms have been folded out from the windshield while in the service position, fold them back against the windshield before returning the wipers to the normal position to help avoid scratching the paint on the hood. The windshield wiper blades must be in the vertical (service) position for replacement, washing or to lift them away from the windshield when e.g., removing ice or snow. Replacing the windshield wiper blades With the wipers in the service position, fold out the wiper arm from the windshield. Press the button on the wiper blade attachment and pull the wiper blade straight out, parallel with the wiper arm. Related information • • Slide in the new wiper blade until it clicks into place. Replacing wiper blades (p. 523) Using the windshield wipers (p. 154) Check that the blade is securely in place. 4. Press the wipers back against the windshield. 523 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Replacing the tailgate wiper blade Refilling the windshield washer fluid reservoir Washer fluid helps keep the windshield and headlights clean. The windshield wiper blades are different lengths NOTE The windshield wiper blades are different lengths. The blade on the driver’s side is longer than the one on the passenger side. 1. Fold the wiper arm outward. 2. Grasp the inner section of wiper blade (at the arrow). 3. Turn the wiper blade counterclockwise to use one end as a lever to help release it from the wiper arm. 4. Press the new wiper blade until it clicks into place and check that it seats securely. Cleaning Keeping the windshield/tailgate window and wiper blades clean helps improve visibility and prolongs the service life of the wiper blades. Clean the wiper blades with a stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soap solution or car washing detergent. 524 5. Fold the wiper arm back toward the tailgate window. Related information • Windshield wipers in the service position (p. 522) • Refilling the windshield washer fluid reservoir (p. 524) The windshield and headlight washers* share a common reservoir. Open the blue cap to refill washer fluid (see the illustration for the location of the reservoir). During cold weather, the reservoir should be filled with windshield washer solvent containing antifreeze. Use Volvo Original Washer Fluid or the equivalent with a recommended pH value between 6 and 8 in a 1:1 solution. When there is approx. 1 qt (1 liter) of washer fluid remaining in the reservoir, a text message and the symbol will be displayed in the instrument panel. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Related information • • Opening and closing the hood (p. 518) Engine compartment overview (p. 519) Cleaning the exterior The vehicle should be washed at regular intervals since dirt, dust, insects and tar spots adhere to the paint and may cause damage. To help prevent corrosion, it is particularly important to wash the car frequently in the wintertime. Hand washing • Wash off the dirt from the underside (wheel housings, fenders, etc). • In areas of high industrial fallout, more frequent washing is recommended. CAUTION • During high pressure washing, the spray mouthpiece must never be closer to the vehicle than 13" (30 cm). Do not spray into the locks. • Dirt, snow, etc., on the headlights can reduce lighting capacity considerably. Clean the headlights regularly, for example when refueling. The following points should be kept in mind when washing and cleaning the car: • Avoid washing your car in direct sunlight. Doing so may cause detergents and wax to dry out and become abrasive. To avoid scratching, use lukewarm water to soften the dirt before you wash with a soft sponge, and plenty of sudsy water. • Bird droppings: Remove from paintwork as soon as possible. Otherwise the finish may be permanently damaged. • A car washing detergent can be used to facilitate the softening of dirt and oil. • Dry the car with a clean chamois and remember to clean the drain holes in the doors and rocker panels. • Tar spots can be removed with tar remover after the car has been washed. • A stiff-bristle brush and lukewarm soapy water can be used to clean the wiper blades. Frequent cleaning of the windshield and wiper blades improves visibility considerably and also helps prolong the service life of the wiper blades. Special laminated panoramic roof cautions: • Always close the laminated panoramic roof and sun shade before washing your vehicle. • Never use abrasive cleaning agents on the laminated panoramic roof. • Never use wax on the rubber seals around the laminated panoramic roof. NOTE When washing the car, remember to remove dirt from the drain holes in the doors and sills. 525 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Automatic car washes • We do NOT recommend washing your car in an automatic wash during the first few months (because the paint will not have hardened sufficiently). • An automatic wash is a simple and quick way to clean your car, but it is worth remembering that it may not be as thorough as when you yourself go over the car with sponge and water. Keeping the underbody clean is most important, especially in the winter. Some automatic washers do not have facilities for washing the underbody. CAUTION • Before driving into an automatic car wash, turn off the optional rain sensor to avoid damaging the windshield wipers. • Make sure that side view mirrors, auxiliary lamps, etc, are secure, and that any antenna(s) are retracted or removed. Otherwise there is risk of the machine dislodging them. • NOTE Condensation may form temporarily on the inside of the lenses of exterior lights such as headlights, fog lights, or taillights. This is normal and the lights are designed to withstand moisture. Normally, condensation will dissipate after the lights have been on for a short time. Chromed wheels: Clean chrome-plated wheels using the same detergents used for the body of the vehicle. Aggressive wheel-cleaning agents can permanently stain chrome-plated wheels. WARNING • When the vehicle is driven immediately after being washed, apply the brakes, including the parking brake, several times in order to remove any moisture from the brake linings. • Engine cleaning agents should not be used when the engine is warm. This constitutes a fire risk. Exterior components Volvo recommends the use of special cleaning products, available at your Volvo retailer, for cleaning colored plastic, rubber, or ornamental components such as chromed strips on the exte- 526 rior of your vehicle. The instructions for using these products should be followed carefully. Solvents or stain removers should not be used. CAUTION • Avoid waxing or polishing plastic or rubber components • Polishing chromed strips can wear away or damage the surface • Polishes containing abrasive substances should not be used Related information • • • • Paint damage (p. 530) Corrosion protection (p. 529) Polishing and waxing (p. 531) Windshield wipers in the service position (p. 522) MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Cleaning the interior Leather* care Protecting leather upholstery Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and follow the instructions included with the car care product. Volvo's leather upholstery is manufactured with a protectant to repel soiling. Over time, sunlight, grease and dirt can break down the protection. Staining, cracking, scuffing, and fading can result. 1. Put a small amount of protectant cream on a cloth and apply a thin coating of cream to the upholstery with light circular movements. 2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes. Volvo offers an easy-to-use, non-greasy leather care kit formulated to clean and beautify your vehicle's leather, and to renew the protective qualities of its finish. The cleaner removes dirt and oil buildup. The light cream protectant restores a barrier against soil and sunlight. This will help the leather resist staining and protect against sunlight's harmful UV rays. • Remove soil, dust, etc., with a damp sponge and a neutral soap solution. Volvo also offers a special leather softener that should be applied after the cleaner and protectant. It leaves leather soft and smooth, and reduces friction between leather and other finishes in the vehicle. • Leather should be allowed to breath. Never cover the steering wheel with a plastic protector. • Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting and conditioning the steering wheel with Volvo's Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather Softener 943 7429. CAUTION • Under no circumstances should gasoline, naphtha or similar cleaning agents be used on the plastic or the leather since these can cause damage. • Take extra care when removing stains such as ink or lipstick since the coloring can spread. • Use solvents sparingly. Too much solvent can damage the seat padding. • Start from the outside of the stain and work toward the center. • Sharp objects (e.g. pencils or pens in a pocket) or Velcro fasteners on clothing may damage the textile upholstery. • Clothing that is not colorfast, such as new jeans or suede garments, may stain the upholstery. Volvo recommends cleaning, protecting and conditioning your vehicle's leather two to four times a year. Ask your Volvo retailer about Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather Softener 943 7429. If there are stains on the steering wheel: Cleaning leather upholstery – 1. Pour leather cleaner on a damp sponge and squeeze it until the cleaner foams. 2. Apply the foam to the stain by moving the sponge with circular movements. 3. Dampen the stain thoroughly with the sponge. Let the sponge absorb the stain, do not rub. Fabric upholstery and ceiling liner Clean with soapy water or a detergent. For more difficult spots caused by oil, ice cream, shoe polish, grease, etc., use a clothing/fabric stain remover. Consult your Volvo retailer. Cleaning a leather-covered steering wheel 4. Dry the stain with soft paper towels or a towel, and allow the leather to dry completely. Type 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat or blood) Use a soft cloth or sponge. Wipe the wheel with a solution with 5% ammonia. For blood stains, mix approx. 1 cup (2 dl) of water and one ounce (25g) of salt and wipe the stain. Type 2 (fat, oil, sauces, or chocolate) 1. Same procedure as for type I stains. 2. Finish by rubbing the wheel with absorbent paper or a towel. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 527 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Type 3 (dry soil or dust) 1. Remove the soil/dust with a soft brush. 2. Same procedure as for type I stains. CAUTION Sharp objects, such as rings, could damage the leather on the steering wheel. Leather panels* Leather should be allowed to breath. Never cover the upper side of the dashboard or door panels with a plastic protector. Ask your Volvo retailer about Leather Care Kit 951 0251 and Leather Softener 943 7429. Spots on interior plastic, metal, or wood surfaces Cleaning interior plastic components should be done with a cleaning agent specially designed for this purpose. Consult your Volvo retailer. 528 CAUTION • Do not use cleaning agents with high alcohol content such as washer fluid to clean instrument panel glass. • Never spray cleaning agents or water directly onto components with electrical buttons or controls. Clean components of this type by applying the cleaning agent/ water sparingly to a cloth and wiping the components so that no liquid penetrates into these components. WARNING Cleaning the seat belts Clean only with lukewarm water and a mild soap solution. Cleaning floor mats The floor mats should be vacuumed or brushed clean regularly, especially during winter when they should be taken out for drying. Spots on textile mats can be removed with a mild detergent. For best protection in winter, Volvo recommends the use of Volvo rubber floor mats. Consult your Volvo retailer. • Never use more than one floor mat at a time on the driver's floor. Before driving, remove the original mat from the driver's seat floor before using any other type of floor mat. Any mat used in this position should be securely and properly anchored in the attaching pins. An extra mat on the driver's floor can cause the accelerator and/or brake pedal to catch. Check that the movement of these pedals is not impeded. • Volvo's floor mats are specially manufactured for your car. They must be firmly secured in the clips on the floor so that they cannot slide and become trapped under the pedals on the driver's side. Related information • Cleaning the center display (p. 529) * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Cleaning the center display CAUTION Marks, stains, etc., on the center display may affect its performance and readability. Clean it regularly with a microfiber cloth. Center display's Home button To clean the center display: 1. Turn off the display by pressing and holding the Home button. 2. Wipe the screen clean with the microfiber cloth provided or use a similar one, using a small, circular motion. If necessary, moisten the cloth slightly. 3. Reactivate the display by pressing the Home button briefly. • The microfiber cloth used should be free of sand, dirt or anything abrasive that might scratch the screen. • Do not use rough cloths, paper towels or tissues that could scratch the screen. • When cleaning the center display, apply only light pressure on the screen. Pressing too hard could cause damage. • Do not spray any liquid or corrosive chemicals directly on the screen. Do not use window cleaning liquid, cleaning agents (particularly ones containing abrasives), sprays, solvents, alcohol or ammonia to clean the screen. Corrosion protection Your vehicle is constructed with effective protection against corrosion. Inspection and maintenance The corrosion protection does not normally require maintenance but keeping the vehicle clean helps prevent the onset of corrosion. The use of strong alkaline or acidic cleaning fluids should always be avoided on shiny body components. Any stone chips in the paint should be touched up as soon as possible. Related information • • Paint damage (p. 530) Touching up paint damage (p. 531) Related information • • Cleaning the interior (p. 527) Center display overview (p. 29) 529 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Paint damage NOTE Paint damage requires immediate attention to avoid rusting. Make it a habit to check the finish regularly, for instance washing the vehicle. Touch-up if necessary. When touching up the vehicle, it should be clean and dry. The surface temperature should be above 60 °F (15 °C). Paint repairs require special equipment and skill. Contact your Volvo retailer for any extensive damage. Related information • • Minor scratches can be repaired by using Volvo touch-up paint. Color code Sample color code (1): Canadian models Make sure you have the right color. See also the article "Label information" for the location of this label. Minor stone chips and scratches Material: Sample color code (1): US models • • • • • Primer – can Paint – touch-up pen Brush Masking tape Emery cloth If the stone chip has not gone down to the bare metal and an undamaged color coat remains, you can add paint immediately after removing dirt. 530 Label information (p. 534) Touching up paint damage (p. 531) MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING Touching up paint damage Stone chips or other minor paint damage can be repaired by the vehicle's owner. Repairing stone chips 1. Place a strip of masking tape over the damaged surface. Pull the tape off so that any loose flakes of paint adhere to it. 2. Thoroughly mix the primer and apply it with a small brush. 3. When the primer surface is dry, the paint can be applied using a brush. Mix the paint thoroughly; apply several thin paint coats and let dry after each application. 4. If there is a longer scratch, you may want to protect surrounding paint by masking it off 5. After a few days, polish the touched-up areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount of polish. Related information • • Paint damage (p. 530) Cleaning the exterior (p. 525) Polishing and waxing Normally, polishing is not required during the first year after delivery, however, waxing may be beneficial. • Before applying polish or wax the vehicle must be washed and dried. Tar spots can be removed with kerosene or tar remover. Difficult spots may require a fine rubbing compound. • • After polishing use liquid or paste wax. • Waxing alone does not substitute for polishing a dull surface. • A wide range of polymer-based waxes can be purchased today. These waxes are easy to use and produce a long-lasting, high-gloss finish that protects the bodywork against oxidation, road dirt and fading. • Do not polish or wax your vehicle in direct sunlight (the surface of the vehicle should not be warmer than 113 °F (45 °C). Several commercially available products contain both polish and wax. 531 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING CAUTION Volvo does not recommend the use of longlife or durable paint protection coatings, some of which may claim to prevent pitting, fading, oxidation, etc. These coatings have not been tested by Volvo for compatibility with your vehicle's clear coat. Some of them may cause the clear coat to soften, crack, or cloud. Damage caused by application of paint protection coatings may not be covered under your vehicle's paint warranty. Related information • • 532 Paint damage (p. 530) Touching up paint damage (p. 531) SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS Label information The labels in your vehicle provide information such as the chassis number, paint code, tire inflation pressure, etc. 534 SPECIFICATIONS Location of labels 535 SPECIFICATIONS List of labels Vehicle Emission Control Information. (A) US models, (B) Canadian models. Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable emission standards, as evidenced by the certification label on the underside of the hood. For further information regarding these regulations, please consult your Volvo retailer. Engine oil. This label contains the recommended engine oil specifications. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). The VIN plate is located on the top left surface of the dashboard. The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) should always be quoted in all correspondence concerning your vehicle with the retailer and when ordering parts. Tire inflation pressures. This label indicates the correct inflation pressures for the tires that were on the vehicle when it left the factory. 536 Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS) specifications (USA) and Ministry of Transport (CMVSS) standards (Canada). Your Volvo is designed to meet all applicable safety standards, as evidenced by the certification label on the driver's side Bpillar (the structural member at the side of the vehicle, at the rear of the driver's door opening). This label also includes codes for paint color, etc. For further information regarding these regulations, please consult your Volvo retailer. U.S. models have the upper decal; Canadian models have the lower one. SPECIFICATIONS Dimensions The following table lists your vehicle's most important dimensions. Dimension In. Dimension (mm) A Ground clearance (curb weight + 2 people)A 9 (228)B In. Dimension (mm) E Load length, floor 9.1 (232)C 48.0 (1220)B 21.8 ( 554)C B Wheelbase 117.5 (2984) F Height C Length 194.9 (4950) G Load height D Load length, floor, seatback down 80.3 (2040)B 69.9 (1776) 32.1 (816) In. (mm) H Track, front (models without pneumatic suspension) 65.9 (1673)E Track, front (models with pneumatic suspension) 66.0 (1677)E 65.6 (1665)F 65.7 (1669)F 49.6 (1260)D 537 SPECIFICATIONS Dimension In. (mm) I Track, rear (models without pneumatic suspension) 65.8 (1675)E Track, rear (models with pneumatic suspension) 66.1 (1679)E J Load width, floor K Width 66.1 (1667)F 65.8 (1671)F 46.9 (1192) 75.7 (1923)G 76.0 (1931)H 77.1 (1958)I A B C D E F G H I 538 L Width incl. door mirrors (folded out) 84.3 (2140) M Width incl. door mirrors (folded in) 79.1 (2008) Varies slightly depending on tire size, chassis options, etc. 5-seat models. 7-seat models*. From the second row of seats in 7-seat models*. Models with 20, 21 and 22 in. wheels. Models with 18 and 19 in. wheels. Chassis width. Width on models with 18 and 19 in. wheels. Width on models with 20, 21 and 22 in. wheels. SPECIFICATIONS Weights The following table lists important weight data for your vehicle. Category USA Canada 6,060 lbs 2,750 kg 1,210 lbs 550 kg 2,885 lbs 1,310 kg 3,280 lbs 1,490 kg Curb weight, 7-seat 4,550 - 4,740 lbs 2,070 -2,150 kg Max. roof load 220 lbs 100 kg Max. trailer weights Without brakes: 1,650 lbs Without brakes: 750 kg With brakes: 5,000 lbs With brakes: 2,250 kg 500 lbs 225 kg Gross vehicle weight 7-seat, 4-cyl. AWD (All Wheel Drive) Capacity weight 7-seat, 4-cyl. AWD Permissible axle weights, front 7-seat, 4-cyl. AWD Permissible axle weights, rear 7-seat, 4-cyl. AWD Max. tongue weight 539 SPECIFICATIONS CAUTION 540 • When loading the vehicle, the maximum gross vehicle weight and permissible axle weights may not be exceeded. • The maximum trailer weights listed are only applicable for altitudes up to 3280 ft (1,000 m) above sea level. With increasing altitude the engine power and therefore the car's climbing ability are impaired because of the reduced air density, so the maximum trailer weight has to be reduced accordingly. The weight of the car and trailer must be reduced by 10% for every further 3280 ft (1,000 m) (or part thereof). SPECIFICATIONS Air conditioning refrigerant Brake fluid specification and volume Compressor oil The air conditioning system in your car contains a CFC-free refrigerant. Volume 2.0 fl. oz. (60 ml) A/C decal 2.7 fl. oz. (80 ml) on models with A/C for the third row of seats* R134a decal Type PAG SPA2 Evaporator The A/C system' s evaporator may never be repaired or replaced with a previously used evaporator. A new evaporator must be certified and marked according to SAE J2842. Brake fluid transfers braking force when the brake pedal is depressed to the master cylinder and to the slave cylinders on each wheel. Topping up or replacing brake fluid should only be done by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. Specification: DOT 4 boiling point >536 °F (>280 °C) Related information • Engine compartment overview (p. 519) Related information • Climate system service (p. 495) Refrigerant Models with R134a Weight 1.65 lbs (750 g) Type R134a 2.2 lbs (1000 g) on models with A/C for the third row of seats* WARNING The air conditioning system contains R134a refrigerant under pressure. Service and repairs may only be carried out by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 541 SPECIFICATIONS Coolant specifications and volumes Coolant volumes and specifications. Engine: T6 AWD Specification: Coolant with corrosion inhibitor mixed with water (50/50 mix), see packaging. 542 SPECIFICATIONS Engine specifications The following table provides technical data for the respective engines. Engine specifications for Special Edition vehicles may vary. Specification T6 AWD Engine designation B4204T27 Output (kW/rps) 235/95 Output (hp/rpm) 316/5700 Torque (Nm/rps) 400/36.7–90 Torque (ft. lbs./rpm) 295/2,200–5,400 No. of cylinders 4 Related information • Engine oil specifications and volume (p. 544) • Coolant specifications and volumes (p. 542) 543 SPECIFICATIONS Engine oil specifications and volume Full synthetic engine oil meeting the minimum ACEA A5/B5 must be used. Lower quality oils may not offer the same fuel economy, engine performance, or engine protection. Oil viscosity Fuel tank volume Incorrect viscosity oil can shorten engine life under normal use. SAE 5W-30 will provide good fuel economy and engine protection. See the viscosity chart. The fuel tank's volume is shown below. Related information • • Volvo recommends: Viscosity chart Extreme engine operation Refer to the warranty and Service Records information booklet for information on oil change intervals and oil type requirements. NOTE This vehicle comes from the factory with synthetic oil. Oil additives must not be used. 544 The fuel tank's refillable volume is approx. 18.8 US gallons (71 liters). Volvo oil VCC RBS0-2AE/SAE 0W20 is recommended for extreme driving conditions. Oil volume The oil volume for the T6 AWD engine is: 5.7 US qts (5.4 liters). Related information • Checking and refilling engine oil (p. 521) Octane rating (p. 347) Opening/closing the fuel filler door (p. 348) SPECIFICATIONS Tire inflation pressure table The following tire pressures are recommended by Volvo for your vehicle. Refer to the tire inflaTire size tion placard for information specific to the tires installed on your vehicle at the factory. Cold tire pressure for up to five persons Front Rear psi (kPa) psi (kPa) 36 (250) 36 (250) 275/35 R22 38 (260) 38 (260) Temporary spare tire 61 (420) 61 (420) 235/60 R18 235/55 R19 275/45 R20 275/40 R21 T125/80 R18 Related information • Checking tire inflation pressure (p. 473) 545 SPECIFICATIONS Transmission fluid specification and volume Under normal driving conditions the transmission fluid does not need to be changed during its service life. However, it may be necessary under adverse driving conditions. Transmission: TG-81SC Specification: Transmission fluid AW-1 546 HOTSPOTS HOTSPOTS Centerdisplay – App view 548 Centerdisplay – Car functions view Instrument panel HOTSPOTS Driver's door panel Engine compartment Exterior 549 HOTSPOTS 550 HOTSPOTS Center display and tunnel consol 551 HOTSPOTS Interior rearview mirror 552 Interior HOTSPOTS 553 HOTSPOTS Remote key 554 Trunk INDEX A A/C (air conditioning) Accessory installation warning 190 22, 24 Air vents 194 Alarm automatically arming/disarming Deactivating 216 218 218 Active high beams 141 All Wheel Drive 372 Active yaw control 308 Ambient temperature sensor 116 Adaptive brake lights 334 Antennas passive entry system 220 Anti-freeze 342 Applications (apps) 403 App menu 129 Approach lighting 145 Adaptive cruise control 252, 254, 255, 257, 258, 259, 268, 269, 270, 272 passing assistance 270 radar sensor 269, 270 Adaptive Cruise Control fault tracing 271 Airbags disconnecting the front passenger’s side 78 front 83, 84 inflatable curtain 87 side impact 88 Air conditioning Air distribution Air distribution table Air filter 190 194, 195 196 179 Air quality 177 Air quality sensor 177 Apps changing settings Apps (applications) Audio system HD digital radio SiriusXM® Satellite radio sound settings voice control Auto-hold brakes Automatic locking retractor Automatic transmission Eco (driving function) gear shift indicator 45, 111 404 376 380, 381, 382 383, 384, 385 376, 398 120 332 65 362 370 general description oil shifting with steering wheel paddles shiftlock override Axle weight 367 546 370 369 471 B Battery avoiding drain remote key, replacing support battery warning symbols 356 222 498 499 Battery – replacing 495 Blind Spot Information 315, 317 Bluetooth connecting devices 389 Bluetooth® hands-free media microphone streaming audio Bluetooth cell phone connection Booster cushion, integrated Booster cushions 387 393, 398 390 398 390 75, 76, 77 71 555 Brake assist system Brake lights Brakes auto-hold Brake system Brake pad inspection fluid general information Bulbs replacing specifications 333 143, 334 332 331 541 330, 332, 333 514 510 515 C Camera driver support systems limitations Camera, Park Assist Capacity weight 556 240 241 296, 298, 300 471, 539 Car wash 525 Catalytic converter 349 CD, USB, iPod, AUX, Bluetooth, Recents, Library, Shuffle, Similar, Change device, Primary Audio Default Language, Subtitle, Primary Subtitle Default Language, Video, DivX® VOD 395 Child safety booster cushions child restraint systems convertible seats infant seats CD player 394 Child safety locks Cell phone hands-free Pairing 387 387 Cell phone voice control 121 Center display changing settings cleaning keyboard navigating in overview screen in the center console symbols in the status bar 31 529 32 39 29 46 44 Cargo area, steel grid 211 Chains 473 Cargo area cover 213 Changing a wheel 475 Cargo compartment fuses raising/lowering the level 508 207 Cargo net 209 Cargo space 200 ISOFIX/LATCH anchors top tether anchors Child restraints recalls and registration 65 Child restraint systems booster cushions convertible seats infant seats 65 71 69 67 Child seats lower attachment points City safety 72 74 63 71 65, 73 69 67 218 73 273, 278 City Safety crossing traffic detecting objects limitations rear collision warning symbols and messages troubleshooting 277 275 278 277 282 280 City Safety, On/Off 275 Cleaning exterior interior 525 527 Clean Zone Interior Package 178 Climate system air distribution air filter air vents auto mode 180 194, 195, 196 179 194 179 blower center display controls Electronic Climate Control introduction passenger compartment filter rear controls recirculation refrigerant service setting the temperature voice commands 183 180 180 176, 180 178 180, 182 186 541 495 184 122 Cruise control 248, 249, 250, 251 adaptive 252, 254, 255, 257, 258, 259, 268, 269, 270, 271, 272 Driver alert Lane Departure Warning Lane Keeping Aid Curb weight Driver distraction warning Driver profile editing D Daytime running lights Defroster rear window and mirrors Clock 116 Cold weather driving 342 Destination save Collision warning system 274 Detachable key blade Compass in rearview mirror calibrate 136 137 Digital owner's manual Connected service booking 491 Convertible seats Coolant 69 542 471, 539 Dimensions 138, 140 187 52, 53 537 342 Driving through water 340 E Eco (driving function) 362 362 Display head-up Electrical sockets 117 314, 315 Dome lighting 146 Courtesy lighting 146 Door mirrors defroster 100 187 Drive mode 359 Driver's seat easy access 167 318, 319, 320, 322 339 Driving in cold weather 339 Distance Alert Cross Traffic Alert Driving economically Economical driving 529 81, 82 240 Eco coast Corrosion protection Crash mode Driver support systems Disconnecting the front passenger’s airbag 78 462 26 22, 24 112, 115 114 441 227, 237 copyright Crash event data 312, 313 323, 327 323, 327 Electric parking brake 204 335, 336, 338 Electronic Climate Control (ECC) 180 Electronic stability control 308 Emergency brake parking brake Emergency brake lights Emergency locking retractor Emergency starting 335, 336, 338 334 65 350 557 Emergency towing 344 Emission inspection readiness 488 Engine overheating Start/Stop starting turning off 341 364, 365 356 359 Engine compartment fuses 501 Engine compartment overview 519 Engine oil checking Engine specifications Entering a destination POI 544 520, 521 543 440 Entering destination free-text search recent options tapping the map using an address 436 438 435 441 Enterining destination 435 Environment 15 Eyelet towing 343 Eyelets for anchoring loads 212 F Federal Clean Air Act 488 Floor mats placing correctly 356 Fluid specifications 541, 542, 546 Fog lights front rear 143 144 Front airbags 83, 84 disconnecting passenger’s side airbag 78 Front fog lights Front park assist 143 Garage door opener HomeLink® Wireless Control System Gasoline requirements 469 Glove compartment 201 Grocery bag holder 209 Gross vehicle weight 471 Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 539 H 191 163, 164, 165 161, 162, 167 Hand brake (parking brake) Hazard warning flashers 160 HD digital radio Fuel filler door, opening 348 Headlights Active Bending Lights active high beams daytime running lights high/low beams high beam flash removing cover Function view Fuses cargo compartment engine compartment passenger compartment 346, 347 Glossary of tire terminology Front seats, manual adjustment Fuel requirements 94, 95 292, 293, 294, 295 Front seats heated multifunctional power Fuses, replacing 558 G 346, 347 37 500 508 501 505 500, 501, 505, 508 335, 336, 338 144 380, 381, 382 142 141 138, 140 140 140 512 Headlight washers 156 Head restraint - center, rear 167 Head restraints, rear seat 167 Inflation pressure 473 Head-up display 117 Inflation pressure table 545 Heated front seats 191 Information lights 134 Heated oxygen sensors 349 Infotainment 412 Heated steering wheel 189 Infotainment (Infotainment system) 376 High beam bulb, replacing 513 High beams active 140 141 Hill Descent Control 334 Hill Start Assist (HSA) 335 Hoisting the vehicle 516 Infotainment system 380, 381, 382 CD player 394 cell phone 387 general sound settings 376 Gracenote 399 introduction 376 media player 393, 395 media player sound settings 398 media search 397 radio 377 searching for radio stations 378 sound settings 376, 398 type approval 408 video 399 voice control 120 HomeLink® Wireless Control System 94, 95 Home safe lighting 146 Hood, opening/closing 518 Horn, Keypad, Paddles, Signal 157 I Inspection readiness 488 27 Instrument lighting 139 Ignition modes 355 Instrument overview 98 Immobilizer (start inhibitor) 221 Intellisafe 16 Indicator lights 134 Interior Air Quality System 178 Interior lighting 146 ID, Volvo Infant seats 67 Inflatable Curtain 87 Internet connection applications (apps) bluetooth settings booking service establishing a connection troubleshooting ISOFIX/LATCH anchors Itinerary Guidance points 401 403 404 491 402 405 72 444 J Jack location of 476 476, 478 Jump starting 345, 350 K Key remote 110, 224 Key blade 227, 237 Keys 226 559 L Labels list of location of Laminated panoramic roof Lane Departure Warning settings Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Lane Keeping Aid settings LATCH anchors 536 535 101, 102 325 323, 327 323, 325, 327 325 72 Leather care 527 Licence copyright 460 Lighting panel 138 Load anchoring eyelets 212 Loading the vehicle Locking 200, 207, 471 231, 232 Locks and alarm 216 Low beam bulb, replacing 512 Low beams Low Speed Control 139, 140 371 Maintenance hoisting the vehicle performed by the owner 488 516 488 Malfunction indicator light 126 Manual front seat adjustment 160 Map buttons and information Information cards 428 446 Map updates computer with USB flash drive MapCare Remote 458 456 457 Media player compatible file formats 393 400 Media player (infotainment system) 395 Menus instrument panel Multifunctional front seats MY CAR 400 163, 164, 165 106 N Navigation instrument panel Quick guidance Sensus Navigation 448 432 432 Navigation displays controls 433 Navigation system features voice commands Net cargo 429 124, 433 209 149, 151, 152, 153 Mirrors defroster power door retractable 187 100 100 Mirrors, rearview mirror 105 Modem 407 Motor oil checking 560 MP3 files M 520, 521 O Occupant safety 56 Occupant weight sensor 78 Octane recommendations Odometer 347 92 Oil checking 520, 521 Oil quality 544 On-board diagnostics 488 On Call Roadside Assistance Opening the hood 14 518 Options 22 Passenger compartment fuses Passive Entry system location of antennas 220 Permissible axle weight 539 Outside temperature sensor 116 Overhead courtesy lighting 146 Phone receiving calls text messages Overheating, engine 341 Pilot Assist Owner's information mobile applications 21 Owner's manual 16 Ownership, changing 112 Oxygen sensors, heated 349 390 391, 392 259, 262, 263, 265, 266 Polishing 531 Power front seat memory function 162 Power mirrors defroster 100 187 Power steering adjustable P Paint, touching up Park assist 530, 531 292, 293, 294, 295 Park Assist Camera settings Park Assist Pilot 296, 298, 300 296, 300 301, 302, 305, 307 Parking brake electric, applying/releasing Parking light bulb, replacing 336, 338 514 R 505 Radar driver support systems 244 Radar sensor limitations 245, 269 Radio RBDS settings SiriusXM® Satellite radio 378 377 383, 384, 385 Radio functions HD digital radio 380, 381, 382 Rain sensor 155 Rear Collision Warning 277 Rear fog lights 144 308 Rear park assist Power tailgate 235 Rear seat head restraints Power windows 104 Rear seats accessing the third row adjusting backrest tilt center head restraint folding moving forward/rearward 166 172 169 167 170, 172 171 Rearview mirror compass 136, 137 Pregnancy, using seat belts during PROPOSITION 65 WARNING 62 350 Rear window defroster Recalls 292, 293, 294, 295 167 187 58 561 Recalls, child restraints 65 Recirculation (climate system) 186 Refrigerant (A/C system) 541 Refueling fuel filler door 346, 347 348 Registering child restraints Remote key immobilizer linking to a driver profile range replacing the battery restricted (red) key 65 224, 226, 229 221 110 224 222 226 Remote updates 491 Replacing bulbs 510 Replacing fuses 500, 501, 505, 508 Reporting safety defects 57 Roadside Assistance 14 Road sign information (RSI) Rollover Protection System (ROPS) 89 Roll Stability Control (RSC) 89 Rout Detour 562 290, 291 447 S Safety, occupant Safety defects, reporting Safety locks, child Safety mode 56 57 218 81 Seat adjusting the passenger's seat from the driver's seat 162 Seat belt reminder 61 Seat belts Automatic locking retractor/Emergency locking retractor 65 buckling 59 pretensioners 58, 59 reminder 61 securing child restraint systems 67, 69, 71 unbuckling 59 use during pregnancy 62 using 58 Seats rear 166 Sensus navigation 17 428 Service connected service booking 491 Settings guidance Map Route Sensus Navigation System Traffic information 455 450 452 449 456 454 Settings view categories resetting system settings 107 111 109 Shiftlock override 369 Side door mirrors 100 Side impact airbags SiriusXM® Satellite radio traffic information 88 383, 384, 385 Snow chains 473 Snow tires 473 Sound settings media ringtones 398 392 Sound settings, audio system Specifications bulbs Speed limiter automatic 376, 398 515 283, 285, 290 285, 287 deactivating/reactivating starting/activating 288 284 Sun visor 203 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Suspension 372 Spin control 308 System updates 490 Stability system sport mode 308 309 Tires 466 changing 475 changing from summer to winter 470 glossary of terms 469 improving economy 466 inflation pressure 473 inflation pressure table 545 installing (mounting) a wheel on the vehicle 479 rotation 467 snow 473 spare 476 specifications 467 storing 467 studded 473 tire pressure monitoring system 480, 483 tools in the cargo compartment 475 tread wear indicator 471 uniform tire quality grading 472 wheel bolts 477 Start/Stop (engine function) 364, 365 Start and lock system type designations 220 Starting and driving 330 Starting the engine 356 Starting the vehicle after a crash (crash mode) 81, 82 T Tailgate locking/unlocking operating with the foot movement sensor power operated wiper/washer 233 228 235 157 221 Tailgate wipers 211 Technician certification Steering wheel adjusting heated horn keypad 157 159 189 157 157 Temperature perceived 176 Temperature sensor ambient 116 Temporary spare tire 476 Steering wheel paddles 157 Tethering wi-fi sharing 406 Start inhibitor (immobilizer) Steel grid in cargo area Stone chips, touching up 530, 531 Storage compartments 200 Three-way catalytic converter Studded tires 473 Tire inflation pressure Sunroof laminated panoramic roof Sun shade 101, 102 104, 106 Tire Pressure Monitoring System calibrating type approval 523 54 349 545 480, 483 484 484 484 Top tether anchors (child restraint systems) 74 Touching up paint 530, 531 Towing a trailer trailer hitch 351, 354 353 Towing eyelet 343 Towing the vehicle 344 Traction control 308 563 Trailer towing trailer hitch 351, 354 353 Transmission gear shift indicator general description Hill Start Assist oil shifting with steering wheel paddles shiftlock override 370 367 335 546 370 369 Tread wear indicator 471 Trip computer reset Trip odometers Trips, long distance Trip statistics 92, 94 92 92 339 94 Troubleshooting Sensus Navigation 462 Turn signals changing bulbs 148 514 U 564 User profile V Vehicle Event Data 26 Vehicle information 14 Vehicle loading 472 Unlocking the tailgate 233 Unlocking the vehicle 231, 232 USB/AUX connection 393, 397 safety services security services using 424, 425 425 414 Volvo On Call Roadside Assistance 14 Volvo On Call with Sensus Connect 414, 415 Volvo programs 14 207, 471 Vehicle maintenance performed by the owner 488 488 W Vehicle status 491 Warning flashers, hazard 144 Vehicle weights 539 Warning lights 134 Warning system, collision 274 Warranties 488 Washer fluid 524 Washers headlight windshield 156 154 Water, driving through 340 Waxing 531 Weights trailer 351 Voice control cell phones giving commands introduction multimedia devices radio settings 121 121 120 122 122 125 Volvo and the environment 15 Volvo ID 27 Volvo maintenance Uniform Tire Quality Grading 112 Volvo On Call areas of availability convenience services personal information PIN code remote door unlock 488 422 416 420 418 426 Wheels changing storing Whiplash Protection System Wi-Fi 475, 478 467 89 406, 407 Windows laminated glass power sun shade 54 104 104 Windshield rain sensor washers wipers/washers 155 156 154 Windshield washer fluid reservoir 524 Windshield wiper blades 523 Windshield wipers service position 522 Wiper blades replacing replacing tailgate wiper 522, 523 523 WMA files 400 Workshop Wi-Fi connection 494 565 566 TP 18566 (USA & Canada), AT 1505, MY16, Printed in Sweden, Göteborg 2015, Copyright © 2000-2015 Volvo Car Corporation